Service_For_Consultants_198303 Service For Consultants 198303
Service_For_Consultants_198303 Service_For_Consultants_198303
User Manual: Service_For_Consultants_198303
Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 223
Download | |
Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
------- - - - ----:§~E: ISG Do not reproduce without written permission PP 5664-167.1 Mar83 .:. :-:a PROGRAM PRODUCTS VIRTUAL MACHINE/SYSTEM-PRODUCTVM/SP (5664-167) PURPOSE The VM/System Product provides usability and performance extensions to VM/370; it is recommended for users running DOS/VS, VSE, VS1, SVS and MVSunder VM/370 on processors supported by those SCPs, or users with high-speed paging devices, and eMS intensive users. The VM/System Product is designed to run on S/370 mdls 135, 135-3, 138, 145, 145-3, 155 II, 158, 158-3, 158AP, 158MP, 165 II, 168,168-3, 168AP, 168MP and on 4321, 4331,4331 Model Group 2, 4341, 4341 Model Group 2, 3031, 3031AP, 3032, 3033 Model Group N, 3033, 3033S, 3033AP, 3033AP-2, 3033MP, and the 2K storage protect key version of the 3081 016 Processor Complex in S/370 mode. Note: Information on the availability of the VM/SP High Performance Option Licensed Program (5664-173) for VM/SP Release 3 will be available"prior to the availability of VM/SP Release 3. less frequently but keeping them there for longer periods. This may lower the overall level of paging activity with accompanying reduction in supervisor overhead and some increased throughput. Systems that need more paging space than is available on preferred paging devices. The resource manager maintains active user pages on the high speed or primary paging devices using a page migration scheme. Page wait due to slow access times of secondary devices is reduced and improved processor utilization and throughput may result. Improved Response to Trivial Interactions: May be achieved in the following environments: Where terminal interactions occur for both single trivial commands . and nontrivial transactions during terminal I/O. SOL/OS on VM/SP Release 3 will.be supported on AP/MP, the 3081-016 Processor, and the VM/SP High Performance Option concurrent with the above stated availability. The resource manager distinguishes between the two types of transactions by tracking the resource consumption rate and giving higher priority to the smallest consumer. The VM/System Product Release 3 contains all the function previously available in the VM/370 Release 6 SCP, its priced extensions program products (VM/BSE and VM/SE), VM/SP Release 1. and VM/SP Release 2. Refer to the appropriate pages for an overview of the functions provided in each of these products. Where transactions are characterized by a wide range of resource requi rements. f DESCRIPTION Multiprocessor Support: The VM/System Product will offer to users of VM /370 the reliability and availability characteristics of a full multiprocessor environment. The VM/SP will support the 158MP, 168M P and 3033M P configurations with up to 16 channels per processor and a maximum of 32 channels per MP configuration. The fair share algorithms of the resource manager, which are effective in both compute-bound and paging-bound environments, distinguish between the different resource requirements of the users. Consequently, a better interactive/ non-interactive split is achieved with improved responsiveness to trivial transactions. Improved Installation Management: Over the services provided in the following environments: Where multiple users require a specific percentage of the processor. 3042 Attached Processor Model 2 Support: The VM/System Product. when generated in multiprocessor mode, will support I/O on both sides of a 3033 Attached Processor complex when the complex includes a 3042 Attached Processor mdl 2. The SET FAVOR command with percentage option may now be specified for more than one user. The 3042 mdl 2 offers a standard group of 6 channels, and an optional feature adds another group of 6, for configurations of 18, 22, 24 or 28 channels in a 3033 Attached Processor complex. Directory priority controls may now be utilized to make CMS batch facilities either fully non-interactive to minimize impact on the system, or fully interactive to encourage its use. 3081 Processor in MP Mode: When the 3081 is structured so that a channel set is available to each of the two integral central processors, the multiprocessor mode of VM/SP should be specified. This permits up to 16 channels per central processor and up to an aggregate capability of 24 channels. The 3081 Processor may be structured to limit a single channel set to one of the two central processors inherent in 3081 (AP mode). The storage management algorithm for returning free storage to the dynamic area was modified. A check is made every hour and also upon a user logging off, to determine if any dynamic area pages obtained for free storage purposes can be returned to the dynamic area. Note: VM/SP does not simulate multi-proceSSing for virtual machines other than under Single Processor Mode. A virtual machine will be dispatched by VM/SP on only one of the two processors in an MP configuration unless the Single Processor Mode of the VM/SP is in effect. Enhanced Attached Processor Support: Several significant enhancements to the VM/370 AP environment are available in the VM /System Product, notably: I Improved locking logic that may result in a reduction in contention on the global system lock. Extended channel error recovery. In addition, for both the AP and M P environments, several CP commands have been improved to extend the system status and processor activity data available to the system operator. Improvements in Resource Management Throughput Improvemonts: May be achieved in the following environment~: . Systems with roal storage bottlenecks. a When real storage bottleneck is indicated, the resource manager may reduce tho offect and increase tho lovol of multiprogramming. This is achievod through the use of improved scheduling and paging algorithms';';1;which give rise to smaller working set size estimates and hiOher page steal ratios. Tho net result is that a given re>al storago size appears more able to contain the given load with improved throughput. . The resource· 'manager also. migrates swap tables of interactive users and frees up real· storage. for other purposes. This may increase the level of multiprogramming and improve throughput. Storage bound systems with long running non-interactive users and high multiprogramming levels., .. Such systems devote a large part' of, their paging activity to swapping the long running users in and out of storage as each is given a timeslice. The resource manager reduces this paging overhead by swapping th~ longest running uS,ers· into real. storage Where CMS batch facilities run non-interactively. CP Performance Improvements The set favored command accepts a percentage specification of 100. This specification is handled as a special case by the scheduler where the designated user will be kept at the top of the run list. CMS disk I/O (Diagnose 18) takes advantage of ECPS:VM/370 for CCW translation. The improvement is available with the existing ECPS:VM/370 assist on the 3135-3, 3138, 3145-3 and 3148 Processors. The improvement is also available with the ECPS:VM/370 assist on the 4341 Processor. Addition to ECPS: ECPS for VM/370 on S/370 mdls 135-3, 138, 145-3 and 148, and on the 4321, 4331 and 4341 processors has been enhanced to accelerate the processing of the DIAGNOSE Interface between a virtual machine and CP. Because CMS is a heavy user of DIAGNOSE, the CMS user'may receive improved performance. Operation of VM/SP on a 4321 processor is recommended in a VM/CMS-onlyenvironment. Smatt CP Option: Small CP option reduces real memory requirements for CP which makes more· pageable storage available to virtual machines. Shadow Page and Segment Table Maintenance: VM/SP reduces overhead associated with maintaining shadow tables used to run virtual systems. Multiple shadow tables will be m·aintained to reduce the overhead associated with building shadow tables when a different address space . within a virtual machine is dispatched. Shadow table ent;ies will be selectively invalidated when VM/SP (extended by the VM / SP) steals a page from a virtual machine. Shadow tables can be eliminated for V=R users running a production system. Shadow table maintenance will be reduced for areas in a virtual system where the virtual address is equal to the real address. Extended Support: VM/SP will support operating systems that utilize the S/370 Extended Facility of the 3031, 3032. 3033 and 3081 Processors, and the S/370 Extended Feature of the S/370 mdls 158 and 168, provided the S/370 Extended Feature is installed on the hardware. Thus. MVS/Systems Extensions and MVS/System Product can be run undor tho VM/System Product on these processors. ------- - - - -----====';'= - --- ISG PP 5664-167.2 Do not reproduce without written permission Mar83 PROGRAM PRODUCTS VM/SP (cont'd) MVS Guest Environment: Release 1 of the MVS/System Product (JES2. program number 5740-XYS. and JES3. program number 5740-XYN) will be supported as guest operating systems under the VM /System Product. The cross-memory services of Release 2 of the MVS/System Product (JES2 and JES3) will be supported in the guest operating system environment under the level of VM/System Product which Is most current at the time of availability. or Release 2 of MVS/System Product. However. cross-memory services will use the hardware microcode implementation of the 3033 Extension Feature (Feature #6850) only when executing underVM/SP High Performance Option (5664-173). RELEASE 3 ENHANCEMENTS Sal/OS Support Sal/OS is a Relational data base Licensed Program (5748-XXJ). CP and CMS enhancements have been included to allow SOL/OS Release 2 to operate on VM/SP Release 3 without a guest VSE operating system and without VSE!VSAM. These extensions have been provided in a generalized fashion so that othe'r applications may take advantage of them. The CP/CMS Extensions for Application Programs sections below describe this support. System Product Interpreter The System Product Interpreter is a new command and macro processor. It can be used for interpreted applications, command processing and generation. for macros such as those used by the System Product Editor, as a desk calculator. mathematical problem solver. or for any other purpose for which an interpreted simpleto-use language is suitable. Syntax is in a high level form which is easy to learn. Highlights of the System Product Interpreter include: - Extended Control Structure: If-Then- Else Select-When - Otherwise- End Do-Interactive- End Iterate and Leave - Full set of arithmetic. character. and logical operators - Selection of Standard functions - Free Format. Mixed Case - Interactive Debug - In line Function and Subroutine calls - Decimal and Scientific arithmetic capability - Built-in string parsing instructions The System Product Interpreter will be the primary interpretive command and macro processor for VM/SP in the future. It is intended that all future enhancements will be applied to the System Product Interpreter. EXEC and EXEC2 will remain supported and will coexist with the more powerful System Product Interpreter. Programmable Operator Enhancements Several enhancements to the Programmable Operator Facility have been added. Among them are: - Message routing with nicknames - allow messages to be routed to other than the logical operator or to multiple operators via CMS "TELL". This enhances the ability to have SPOOL and/or TAPE operators at the remote site in addition to a system operator at the host. - Remote Node Availability - ability for periodic signaling between a host and remote system and alerting the host operator of the inability to communicate with a remote system. Improved availability is also provided with the capability to recover from Programmable Operator Facility ABENDs. .... Enhanced text comparison - allows multiple text comparison strings in a routing table entry with logical operations on the strings. - EXEC Action Routines - ability for action routines to be written in all EXEC languages. supported by CMS. including the new System Product Interpreter. - lOG recording and error handling enhancements. , Enhanced Serviceability - Symptom Records - A new record will be created that will assist in problem identification. Information from this record can be useful in communicating problems to the IBM support center. The VM Interactive Problem Control Program System Extension (VM IPCS/E 5748-SA1) Release 2 at the then current service level is required to implement this enhancement. - S/370 Program Event Recording (PER) support - This enhancement provides CP command support to facilitate debugging in a virtual machine. It uses the S/370 hardware program event recording (PER) feature to monitor successful branches. instructions fetched within an address range. alteration of storage within an address range. and alteration of a specific general purpose register. In addition. the support provides the ability to trace within multiple ranges. compare altered storage and registers to specific values and execute CP commands on specific events. CP Extensions for Application Programs Several extensions to CP have been made to support Application programs: - A DASD Block I/O System Service allowing a virtual machine fast. device independent asynchronous access to fixed size blocks on CMS formatted virtual DASD I/O devices. - Inter-User Communication Vehicle (lUCV) extensions to provide: 1. Fast communications through data specification parameter list and related protocol extensions. in the 2. Extended mask capability for individuallUCV control interrupts 3. Expanded trace capability 4. Support for the DASD Block I/O System Service - Diagnose Zero support of time zone differential from Greenwich Mean Time CMS Extensions for Application Programs A number of enhancements to CMS have been included to support applications written to run on CMS: - CMS File System Extensions - The CMS File System Extensions include: - 512-byte length physical DASD blocks - A new block size of 512 bytes is supported and is available through a new option on the CMS FORMAT command. - DASD Block I/O Support - New and extended CMS commands and functions are provided to initialize CMS disks for use with the CP DASD Block I/O system service. - CMS IUCV Support Support for IUCV communication has been introduced into CMS. This support will allow multiple programs within a virtual machine to use IUCV functions. Included is the ability to initialize a CMS machine for IUCV communication and to invoke IUCV functions via new CMS macros. These macros will also 'allow the user to specify path-specific exits for IUCV extemal interrupts. CMS IUCV support can be used to· access a CP;,: DASD Block I/O system service':;.,JJI~:' .;:~,,~ :); - CMS Wait on ECB - The ability to wait.0'lisn'tEC'B or a' list Of~ ECBs will be supported via a new CMS;macro.'l1'fhis macroV\,;iII provide the capability to wait on OS an'~'(s,E forma,~.CBs. - CMS ABEND Exit - A general CMS.abnormal exit ~ap'abmty will be provided so that user programs,;,Ji,ay specify thei,address of a routine to get control before CMS::'IABEND recoverY'begins. An exit is established and cleared thrplJgh a new eMS macro. ~l :I'~~'I . ;~~"' - RDTERM Direct, - A new' option! on the~RDTERM macro will allow a program to read an:inputline directly, from the console. Lines already stacked in. th,e;.program or cons'ole stack will not read. Thisfuriction will enable a program to prompt a terminal user for. a response without disturbing the contents of the program ·or. console stack. - Immediate' Command Extensions -. The immediate command capability of CI'y1S will be extended by allowing users to define ------- -------':'=:::::E~E: PP 5664-167.3 Do not reproduce without written pernlission ISG Mar 83 PROGRAM PRODUCTS VM/SP (cont'd) their own immediate commands. Enhanced VSAM Support Programs being written for execution on CMS will now have the following defined VSAM interface to use: - VSE/VSAM Release 3 Support - CMS will support VSE/VSAM Release 3 which includes significant enhancements designed to improve catalog reliability and integrity while providing additional serviceability and usability. VSE/VSAM Release 2 is not supported. - Assembler Language VSAM Support - An Assembler Language interface to VSAM will be provided and supported. Most OS/VSAM and VSE/VSAM macros are supported. OS/VSAM requests are mapped to VSE/VSAM requests and executed using VSE/VSAM code. - VSAM Macro Distribution Enhancements - OS/VSAM macros will be provided for use in a new CMS macro library. A utility will be provided to install VSE/VSAM macros to a CMS macro library. New and Improved System Product Editor (XEDIn Functions Enhancements to the System Product Editor (XEDIn to provide new or improved support in the following areas: - Prefix macro support Selective line editing Screen Control Additional SET RESERVED capabilities Extended data stream (color) Vertical screen split Several new functions intended to provide additional data manipulating capabilities - Modifications to miscellaneous existing XEDIT functions to improve flexibility and/or consistency between related subcom. mands XEDIT provides all of the major capabilities available in EDIT. It is IBM's intent to provide all future VM/SP editing enhancements to XED IT. XEDIT has attempted to provide the most useful capabilities available in various editors. A compatability function for Display Editing System 5796-PJP (EDGAR) was provided in VM/System Product Release 1 to assist EDGAR users in the transition to XEDIT. Its primary purpose was for migration only. A subset of the EDGAR functions was provided to aid in migration. Not all EDGAR commands or functions are supported in the same manner as in EDGAR. There will not be any changes or enhancements to this migration support. It is recommended that all those using this migration support should complete the migration to XEDIT when VM/SP Release 3 is installed. New XEDIT users should not use the· EDGAR migration functions. Publications Enhancements New publications to be added to the Library: - VM /SP Installation Guide - This manual provides procedural and reference information pertaining to the VM / SP install process. - VM / SP Release 3 Guide - Intended primarily for current users, this manual provides a summary of the Release 3 enhancements to VM/SP, including use-oriented examples and identification of changed modules. - VM/SP System Product Interpreter User's Guide - A step-bystep guide to using the System Product Interprotor for new users. ' - VM/SP System Product Interpreter Reference - A complete compilation of reference information for using tho System Product Interpreter. ::.. VM/SP System Product Interpreter Refarence Summary - This publication provides quick synoptic reference information about System Product Interpreter statemonts and their use. These publications will become available when the product becomes available .... Additionally, two pr~~ioJ~ly announced functions will be available in VM/SP Rel~ase 3. They are: . . The Ml'ssing Int~rrupt5~pport announced July 6, 1982. This function will monitor system I/O activity for interrupts not completing within a certain time .period and attempt to correct the See Programming Announcement 282-116 for condition. additional information. . Support for 'the Speed Matching. Buffer for the IBM 3375 announced July 30, 1982. This supporfprovides the capability to use the hardware when connected to a 1.5 megabyte channel. This includes paging, spooling, and/or mini disks. ' RELEASE 2 ENHANCEMENTS Programmable Operator Support The Programmable Operator facility can be used in a VM/SP system to reduce or eliminate system operator messages. This facility provides the capability to log messages, suppress messages, redirect messages, execute commands, and pre-program message responses, all under the control of an editable message routing table in a CMS file. The Programmable Operator facility can be used by a stand-alone VM/SP system or can allow the operation of a remote VM/SP system to be controlled by an operator at a host VM/SP system. Remote operation of a VM/SP system requires Release 2 or Release 3 of the RSCS Networking program product on both VM/SP systems. Installation of the RSCS Networking Release 3 program product will provide enhanced display utilization. New CMS End-user Functions Numerous end-user functions are being provided to assist the non-professional user as well as the professional user in utilizing the system. These functions are provided to enhance the system usability and to improve user productivity. These functions provide: - The new VM/SP SENDFILE and RECEIVE commands may be used in conjunction with the TSO/E Interactive Data Transmission Facility TRANSMIT and RECEIVE commands to exchange files between VM/SP Release 2 and MVS/TSO systems connected through an NJE/NJI network. - Enhanced full screen capability to display information about Reader Spool files. Allows the ability to review /browse through files, to discard files, or initiate other actions such as copy, or forward the file to other media / users. - A full screen capapility to display file information (information presented is similar to what L1STFILE provides today) and issue CMS commands that perform some. type(s) of action on ~he file(s) being displayed. Program function keys are also assigned to useful functions like EDIT, SORT or HELP. - Enhanced command capability such as: a. Header Option on Print. b. DISK LOAD extended to allow sequence identification and the ability to load a file and retain its original date/time. c. Ability to specify '=' for any file identifier in the fileid2 operand of the COMPARE command. d. L1STFILE enhanced to allow 'STACK', 'ARGS', 'BLOCK', 'TRACE', 'FIFO', 'LIFO' and extended pattern matching options. e. UPDATE extended to keep a record of missing PTF files. f. A new command to display environmental status such as userid, nodeid, date, time, zone. New CMS Productivity Aids for the DP Professional CMS has been enhanced to provide the DP professional user with several productivity enhancements to make their system implementation easier. These productivity enhancements provide: - A CMS facility to allow I/O between a device and an EXEC program. - The ability to dynamically extend the CMS nucleus. - A routine to display at the console or stack virtual reader file characteristics. - An enhanced CMS QUERY command to display CMSLEVEL information such as product name, release identification, service level and information regarding virtual disks that are accessed. In addition, QUERY command results can be stacked. - A GLOBALV command which allows a user to maintain a collection of named values whose lifetime is either within a single IPL, within a session or across sessions. - The ability to specify that portions of a line should be displayed, highlighted, protected, and/or masked using the VM/SP editor. - The ability to directly access EXEC 2 variables. Variables may . then be inspected and/or set from a program.· DIAL Command support for remote BSe 3270 users. This support provides the ability· for remote BSC 3270 users to issue the DIAL command. The remote 3270 will appear to be a locally attached terminal to the dialed virtual machine. In addition, this support removes the previous restriction of 16 remote communication lines. The maximum number of remote communication lines is now 256. ------- -------- PP 5664-167.4 Do nof reproduce without written permission MarB3 = ~:§~§: ISG PROGRAM PRODUCTS VM/SP (cont'd) CMS Nucleus Restructured. The CMS nucleus has been restructure to provide a CMS system which is more flexible and extendible for development, serviceability and maintenance purposes. volumes or mini disks and performs data analysis and recovery either stand-alone or in a virtual machine under VM/SP. , CMS Tokenization. The eight-byte tokenization restriction has been eliminated for parameter passing. Dynamic SCP Transition To and From Native Mode: An installation can have the ability to run another SCP in native mode on the same system used for running VM /SP with a minimum of disruption to the system's operation; it is possible to switch from VM/SP to anothe( SCP, run that SCP in native mode and then switch. back to VM/SP without IPUng the system. The guest SCP must run in a V=R area. It can be MVS, SVS or VSl in non-handshaking mode. Starter System Full Screen Support. The ability to operate the new CMS editor in full screen mode has been extended to the VM/SP Starter System running secondlevel. Previously, the new CMS editor would only run in single line mode. HELP Files. The HELP files can now be pl?ced on disks other than the S-DISK. CMS/DOS Upgrade. . CMS/DOS support has been upgraded to VSE/Advanced Functions Release 3 and VSE/VSAM Release 2 including support for the 3375 DASD . Command Retrieve Capability. The CP SET Program Function command is enhanced to include the option "RETR/EVE". When'specified, the system wiIJ save input lines. When the specified program function key is pressed, the saved input lines are redisplayed in the reverse sequence of entry. The number of saved lines depends upon buffer size and input line length. QUERY Command Enhanced. The QUERY command is enhanced to allow the user to specify the operands "USER/D" or "CPLEVEL" .. The Query USER/D command responds with the userid and with the system identifier of the system that the user is logged on to. The query CPLEVEL provides information relative to the software product's name (e.g., VM /SP), release number, service level number, Nucleus Creation Date and time, along with the IPL date and time. Enhanced ASCII Support. ASCII support has been enhanced to support the 3101 user with RELEASE 1 ENHANCEMENTS When the transition is made to native mode, the OS/VS SCP is operating without VM/SP. The performance of the OS/VS system will be equivalent to that OS/VS system running native with the same amount of storage and the same I/O configuration it was using in the VM/1SP V=R area. When the installation again requires VM/SP services, the operator returns control to VM / SP and the installation again has all the advantages that result from using VM/SP. This gives an installation operational flexibility that it did not have before. It is possible to run both VM/SP and OS/VS in native mode on the same system, without the disruption of an IPL when a switch is made between VM/SP and OS/VS. This capability is particularly valuable when running an application that cannot be shut down, such as DB/DC. Note: This function is not supported for MVS on the 4321,4331 or the 4341 processors. Single Processor Mode: It is possible to run VM/SP in Single Processor Mode (SPM). SPM will allow an installation to restrict VM/SP to a single processor of an AP or MP system, leaving the other processor for the exclusive use of a virtual machine running MVS. In SPM, MVS must be IPLed in a V=R area. MVS wiil then initialize the other processor and run in AP or MP mode. IPL Command Enhancement: This enhancement allows a user to activate an OS/VSl system without any operator intervention. It is similar to the capability provided by the DOS/VSE Automatic System Initialization (ASI) Facility. - Linesize Control option has been added. Virtual Machine Storage Preservation: In VM/SP, during a warm start or an abnormal termination by VM/SP, the virtual storage of specified virtual machines will be preserved. Specifically, virtual machine IPL was changed so that it no longer uses a page of the user's virtual storage, and the V=R area under VM/SP will be preserved during warm start. In addition, specific virtual machines can be identified such that at VM/SP abend, or when that virtual machine is abnormally terminated by VM/SP, the registers and main storage for that virtual machine will be saved. Enhanced 3800 Support. This enhancement allows the RSCS Networking Release 3 program product to pass to CP the 3800 attributes defined in an NJI header created by a system using the NJJ protocol. This will also allow files created in these systems to print properly on a 3BOO controlled by VM/SP Release 2. Copy group ::lnd bun;t attriuuies remain unsupported. . The improved integrity of virtual storage is particularly beneficial to IMS/VS users running in a virtual machine who need to have storage preserved so that they can run a stand-alone program to recover IMS/VS Log Buffers. In addition, stand-alone dumps that are IPL'd from an external storage device will now accuratelv reflec:t th"" ~!ser's virtual 5tlli"a9~. because VMiSp will no longer use a page of that storage. Support for IBM 3375 DASD. VM/SP Release 2 will support the 3375 Direct Access Storage Device with the 3BOO Storage Control Models 1 or 2. Single Console Image Facility: This support enables the operator of a virtual machine to control mUltiple virtual machines from one physical terminal. Availability is improved in cases where there is a console failure because control can be automatically passed to the virtual console of another user. This capability is available for use by any guest machine. the following: I - Screen Management - Contolled scrolling of output. - Prompting - Linefeed prompting can be selected to allow data to be entered starting in column 1. - Read operations can be command-chained to write operations. The new DASD will be supported as a paging, spooling, system residence, T -disk, mini-disk and as a dedicated device to a virtual machine operating system that supports the 3375 DASD. Support for the new Speed-Matching Buffer (Feature:#6550). The 3880 Speed-Matching Buffer Feature support allows attachment of the new high speed'33BO DASD to processors with channel speeds slower than those normally required by the new devices. Refer to Announcement letter 280-61 for details regarding the hardware support. VM/SP support for the Speed-Matching Buffer is provided for use of CMS, via Diagnose 1B, as well as by the CP component of the operating system. Trace Table Recording Facility. A new serviceability enhancement is provided to record a history of system operations on spool. This facility is controlled by a new Class C command. Selective recording of CP trace entries by type, VMBLOK address, interrupt code and device type is provided. In addition, user generated information from a virtual machine and CP information can be included. A utility program is alsb provided. This utility provides the user with the capability to print the collected information or display it on a terminal. As a customer convenience, the Class 2 SCP Stand-alone Device Support Facility is being shipped in conjunction with VM/System Product. Device Support Facility is a utility used to initialize DASD Functions that enhance the reliability, availability and serviceability characteristics of the VM/SP system include: - An enhancement that will detect missing I/O interrupts and notify a system operator of the problem. .,'/" - Enhancements to allow an installation to dynamically allocate. space for a dump after an IPL and to reserve sufficient contigu-:;,\ ous DASD space for one or more system dumps. ..'i . . .. curre~~ - Expansion of the checkpoint limit for spool fi/estfigB?the limit of 2,048 to a new limit of 9,900, thi''''aximum allowabre number of spool files in the system. ~;': :"):' New functions that enhance the integrity and security oLthe VM/SP system include: . . j,'i'(:~?"~~, /~$~f - A system option that will autorn'atlcallY clE!a;':fallocat~d T-Disk DASD space and prevent access to residual data. - A function to preven~lthesystem operator from being automatically logged on du(intran automatic system restart if the operator was not 10gged •. on'th.~lprim~ry·system console when the system . ABEND occurred, - An enhancement,to the SPTAPE comma'nd to support the DUMP and LOAD functions for CP DUMP reader files. ------- -------=- - :§~E: ISG Do not reproduce without written permission PP 5664-167.5 Mar83 PROGRAM PRODUCTS VM/SP (cont'd) Full Screen Console Support Via SIO Interface: Full screen console support will enable a guest machine (for example, VSE DOC or OS/VS DIDOCS) and CP to share a locally-attached display terminal controlled by CPo The guest machine can use a display terminal as a graphics device in full screen mode while CP shares the terminal and uses it as a line device. A Start I/O (SIO) instruction is the interface for this support. A guest machine can use either the existing DIAGNOSE interface or the SIO interface, but not both simultaneously. Systems Network Architecture (SNA) Support: Full VM/370 operator console capabilities are provided to the SNA terminal users. These console functions include full CP/CMS command processing capabilities, CMS editor processing mode and full screen support for 3270 display ,terminal devices. This support requires that the Virtual Machine/VTAM Communications Network Application (VM/VCNAI program product and its prerequisites be installed. Inter-User Communication Capability: The inter-user communication vehicle (IUCV) facilitates the transfer of messages among virtual machines and between a virtual machine and CPo CMS File System Enhancements: The file system enhancements will provide the user with a more efficient and flexible file system. Specifically, the enhancements are: Removal of the limitations on the size of CMS disks and the number of files per CMS disk. Support for physical block sizes of 800, 1024, 2048 and 4096 bytes. Efficent handling of variable length files. Selective directory updating. Fixed Block Mode (FBM) device type support. AIIIUCV interfaces are provided to the user at a macro level. Concurrent open for read and write of CMS files. A user can selectively establish and terminate communications paths. CMS access to one system disk and up to 25 minidisks concurrently. Two users can establish multiple paths between themselves. A virtual machine can receive messages and reply either synchronously without an interrupt or asynchronously via an external interrupt. An installation can restrict the number of messages outstanding on each communication path. I Spooling of Accounting Records: This support provides the installation with the ability to spool accounting data to a designated virtual machine with a designated class. The data can be spooled to provide punched output or spooled to a virtual machine's reader for additional processing. This eliminates the need to have a real card punch online at all times to get accounting records. A receiver can selectively reject messages. IUCV coexists with VMCF and provides extended inter-user communication capabilities. CP Spooling Enhancements Interactive Help Facility Under CMS: The help facility is an informational/ online display service available at the CMS terminal to guide the user in using' CP and CMS commands and reacting to CP and CMS messages. As a result, the user can, in most cases, avoid referencing manuals during CMS sessions. With the enhanced HELP Facility of VM /SP, the user will be able to issue CMS (including editor) and CP commands directly from the screen on which a HELP file is displayed. Because HELP files will be viewed via the new CMS editor, scrolling and locate facilities will be improved. The New CMS EXEC Interpreter: VM/SP CMS will provide the user with more advanced EXEC processing capabilities and improved performance. The new EXEC interpreter: Association of a form number with each spool file and spool device. Features of form number support are: Accepts words of up to 255 characters each. - An eight character alphameric form number. Allows commands to be issued either to CMS or to specified subcommand environments; for example, to an editor. - Optional automatic prompting of the spool operator for forms changes. Provides new string manipulation functions. - Optional "setup mode" to allow the spool operator to align forms. Provides arithmetic functions for multiplication and division. - Ability to order, change, purge, transfer, spool-to-tape and query spool files by form number. Supports user-defined functions and subroutines. - Default form numbers that are installation specified. - Optional installation specified translation numbers to operator form numbers. from user form Ability to transfer spool files between the reader and printer queues, or the reader and punch queues. Capturing of the Load FCB, Fold and Unfold CCWs in a virtual printer spool file, and their subsequent execution on the real printer. Ability to select spool files for the QUERY command based on their hold status. An enhanced header page and a new trailer page for printed output. A file sequence number helps the spool operator distribute output correctly. Additional spool operator information: :'-: A "waiting" message when a real spool device finishes work. - Ability to display the number of records left to print or punch in the,currently active spool file. - Display:"of the distribution code and, the new file sequence number for 6,f!ch file printed or punched. Ability for the(l~stallation to specify classification titles for selected spool file classes.;~Tho title will be printed on the separator page, and optlonallyoneach page of output. Abilityt~ spe~iptthe distribu~ion code on SPOOL command. Increase in the allowable copy cO~,nt to 255. Spool Files to Tape: This support provides Class 0 commands which enable the spooling operator to store to tape", or retrieve from tape, those unit record output files which he or"she wishes to schedule for real output at some later time on the VM /SP system. The restored files will retain the same characteristics as the original files, but will be assigned new spool-ids to avoid duplicate identification within the spooling system. The spooling operator can store or retrieve spool files selectively (by class or spool-id) or completely. An option is provided to allow the operator to scan the tape. ,:h Provides debugging facilities. Improves execution time. Coexists with the current CMS EXEC interpreter. The New CMS Editor: The new CMS editor provides: Full screen support for 3270 display stations, including: multiple views of the same file or of different files, selective column viewing and automatic wrapping of lines larger than the screen. Ability to extend and tailor editor commands with a powerful macro mechanism which uses the new eMS EXEC interpreter. Extended string search facilities to improve text processing. Enhanced functions to handle program development including automatic update generation. Ability to define the screen format according to individual preferences. Data import and export facilities. Coexistence with the CMS editor. 3278-5 and 3279 terminal support. CMS as Loader Capability: The CMS OS Loader will enable OS relocatable load modules to be used under CMS. The load modules may be loaded from an OS partitioned data set or a CMS load library. This support also provides a facility to list, copy or compress members of a eMS load library and to merge CMS load libraries. This support further allows use of the OS/VS Linkage Editor to create a eMS LOADLIB or a LOADLIB member. This is accomplished using the existing LKED command. The supported Linkage Editor options are defined in the CMS Command and Macro Reference (SC19-6209). CMS Use of CP Page Management Interfaces: CMS now takes advantage of the existing page control interfaces to better communicate the true working set of pages to CP, thus better utilizing the page frame resources ofZthe real machine. CMS Tape Command Performance Improvement: To decrease overhead, a large block-size (4K) is supported for tape dump. CMS Support of Labeled Tapes: CMS processes labelled tapes as follOWS: ------- - - - ----- PP 5664-167.6 Do not reproduce without written permission = - - :E':fE: ISG Mar83 PROGRAM PRODUCTS VM/SP (cont'd) VOL 1 Labels - Processed by DOS or OS OPEN simulation routines. - Processed by CMS TAPPDS of TAPEMAC commands. . - Displayed or written by CMS TAPE command. HDR Labels - Processed by DOS or OS OPEN simulation routines; exits are provided to allow access to user-written routines to process standard user (UHL) labels. - Processed by CMS TAPPDS or TAPEMAC commands. - Processed by a CMS macro designed for use in assembly language programs in conjunction with other CMS tape macros. EOF /EOV Labels - Processed by DOS or OS CLOSE simulation routines; exits are provided to allow access to user-written routines to process standard user (UTL) labels. - Processed by a CMS macro designed for use in assembly language programs in conjunction with other CMS tape macros. Non'·Standard Labels - US(lr f)xits are provided in DOS or as OPEN and CLOSE simulation routines and in TAPPDS or TAPEMAC commands to allow access to user-written routines to process non-standard labels. Note: The following are supported: • Label processing for tapes which are read backwards. • Multi-volume files. • ASCII labels. CMS Support of Unlabeled Tapes: CMS will process unlabeled tapes. Enhanced Support for the 3270 Information Display System Which Includes: APL Text Feature: The 3270 APL-TEXT feature provides the 3270 user with access to the full APL, TEXT and EBCDIC character sets. This makes it possible for the user to interact with the VS APL program product as well as text processing applications which run under CMS. This support extends the APL- TEXT function to users with 3274 Controllers/3278 Display Stations. VM/System Product takes advantage of the intensified display feature of the 3270 I nformation Display System as follows: Intensified Display: The "Current Line" of the CMS Editor will be intensified. All CMS Edit messages will be intensified. An application program may supply a 3270 Start Field ordor and an attribute byte in a DIAGNOSE 58, CCW Code 19 (Virtual Console Interface) data stream. This provides an application program with the ability to define a field as normal intensity, intensified or non-display. Messages from the system operator or other users will be intensified. Tho re-display of user input is intensified so that it may be distinguished from output. The SET command will activate or deactivate intensification of input re-display. Support for the Enhanced Display Terminals: The following terminals and associated printers are supported: 2250 mdl 3 Display Unit 2840 Display Control mdl 2 3250 Graphics Display System 3251 Display Station 3255 Display Control Unit 3258 Channel Control Unit 3262 Printer mdls 3 and 13 3274 Control Unit mdl 18, 21 B (3272 compatible) 3274 Control Unit mdl 1C, 21 C, 31 C, 51 C (TP - BSC only) 3274 Control Unit mdl 10,21 D, 31 D (3272 compatible) 3276 Control Unit/Display Station mdl 2 (1920 character screen) 3276 Control Unit/Display Station mdl 3 (2560 character screen) 3276 Control Unit/Display Station mdl4 (3440 character screen) 3278 Display Station mdl 2 (1920 character screen) 3278 Display Station mdl 3 (2560 character screen) 3278 Display Station mdl 4 (3440 character screen) 3278 Display Station mdl 5 (3564 character screen) 3279 Display Station (Multi-color display screen) 3268/3287/3289 Printer (Copy command support only) This includes support for the 96-charactor set (94 characters plus space and null). and PF keys 13 through 24. The VM/SP support for the 3279 provides a new data stream for communicating between the device and the host, multiple colors for data display, programmable symbol-set capability and extended highlighting attributes; extended highlight functions are character underscore, reverse video and blinking character. These attributes can be set and reset for the different areas of the display screen. VM/SP support for color enables the user to select colors for CP messages, virtual machine output, redisplay of user input, user input area and the CP status area. Support for the 3880 Storage Control Models 1, 2 and 3 Support for the 3800 Printing Subsystem as a Virtual Spooling Device: The VM/SP will allow extended use of the font, image and copy capabilities of the 3800 Printing Subsystem. A user is able· to print a file on a real 3800 or on any real spooling device supported by CP Spooling running in conjunction with the VM/SP. Dedication of Remote 32eX Printers: Remote bisynchronous 328X printers can now be dedicated to guest machines. This support further allows the Remote Spooling Communication Subsystem (RSCS) program product to spool and print VM/370 files on the 328X printers. (For further information, see the RSCS documentation.) Support for the 3289 Printer Model 4: The 3289 mdl 4 is a 400 line-per-minute printer, functionally compatible with the 3203 Printer mdl 4 except in the area of UCS buffer load. Support for the 3262 Printer Models 1 and 11: The 3262 mdls 1 and 11 are, respectively, 650 and 325 line-per minute printers. Support for the 3262 Printer Model 5: The 3262 mdl 5 is a channelattached 650 lines-per-minute printer functionally compatible with the 3262 mdll. Support for the 8809 Tape: The 8809 is a two-speed tape drive (12.5 ips and 100 ips). It is supported at 12.5 ips in VM /370. The standalone dump-restore utility (DDR) supports the device at 100 ips to provide high-speed backup capability when executing on a stand-alone processor and 3310/3370 DASD. Support for the 3310/3370 Direct Access Devices: The 3310/3370 are direct access devices that use Fixed Block Architecture. The Direct Access Storage Compatibility Feature (#7901) of the 4331 Processor for emulation of 2314, 3330 or 3340 format data on the 3310 or 3370 is supported. VM/SP supports 3310 or 3370 volumes containing emulated data which are dedicated to a guest operating system other than VM/SP or CMS. 3380 CASe Support: VM/SP supports the 3380 Direct Access Storage with the 3880 Storage Control mdls 2 and 3, using the Data Streaming Feature on the 3031, 3032 and 3033 Processors, or attached to a 3 MB channel on the 4341. The 3380 DASD is supported by VM/SP as a paging, spooling, SYSRES, T -disk or mini-disk device and as a device dedicated to a virtual machine operating system that supports the 3380 DASD. The 3380 DASD offers a new level of reliability and performance, with increased capacity for online data storage. Note: VM/SP does not support the dynamic path selection capability of the 3380 DASD mdls AAF and A4 . Missing Interrupt Handler: System I/O activity is monitored to detect interrupts not occuring within an installation specified period of time. An attempt at corrective action is made and a message is sent to the system operator to advise of the results. Note: Missing Interrupt Handler support for Release 2 of VM/System Product is available 4Q 1982. CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES Ordering and installing all of the required communications facilities.<; Generating the appropriate 3704/3705 Communications Controller, programs. 7 C'c C.~l· ': ,l"~ Allocating and formatting direct access storage~;sR~ce for ,t~e VM/SP control program, the CMS system resl~e9!?~r'area and user work areas. , ' .' .,''tiy1i'.k,·, Generating and updating user direct~;rt':~~'a~' virtual machine descriptions. .. '~,.\.,. . c , , '~~t, :1.1(, ,~.-~~~. , \':'~~1 Making the final evaluation as toiwhich programs sliould be run under VM/SP in his environment~~~l,·" Training personnel to operate;t~e VM/SP syst~m. Teaching users VM /SP cOITJ!Tlands and how toLoperate the remote terminals. ,;<:", ··w~'\,<':;:: Note: To run SVSunder the \1M/System Product,PTF UY77568 must have been applied to the SVS system. SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT , HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS ------- -------- PP 5664-167.7 Do not reproduce without written permission Mar83 = - - :§~E: ISG PROGRAM PRODUCTS VM/SP (coni'd) VM/System Product is designed to run on IBM S/370 models 135, 135-3,138, 145,145-3,148,155 11,158, 158-3, 158AP, 158MP, 165 II, 168, 168-3, 168AP, 168MP and on the 4321, 4331, 4331 Model Group 2, 4341, 4341 Model Group 2,3031, 3031AP, 3032, 3033 Model Group N, 3033, 3033S, 3033AP, 3033AP ...-2, 3033MP and the 2K storage protect version of the 3081 Model 016 Processor Complex. Note: Support of the VM/System Product High Performance Option Licensed Program (5664-173) for VM / System Product Release 3 will be available in first quarter 1984. VM/SP Release 3 support of AP/MP and the 3081-016 Processors will be available in first quarter 1984. Note: The VM/SP requires as a prerequisite the application of EC #274276 (shipped in June 1980) to the 3031 uniprocessor and 3031 attached processor. I Real Storage Requirement: The VM/System Product requires a minimum user accessible storage of 512K. Minimum machine requirements are listed for information only. Depending upon the number of terminals used, the total workload of the system, and the desired response time, all users should consider increasing real storage size as appropriate. Display Terminal Support: The IBM 3278 mdl 5 and 3279 display terminals are supported. Notes 1. 2. VM/System Product supports a cardless environment. By using the facility to spool accounting records and altering the system generation procedures to use tape devices, the requirement for a card reader/punch can be eliminated. Specific details are contained in the VM / SP Planning and System Generation Guide. Specific details relevant to the minimum configuration required for hardware maintenance should be directed to the Field Engineering Division. ECPS: VM/370 Support Model No. VM!370 Availability 135-3 138 145-3 148 3031 3131AP Level Level Level Level Level Level 4321 4331 MG1 4331 MG2 4341 MG1 4341MG2 L{we119 Level 19 Leve! 19 Level 19 Level 19 EC #149136 and later EC #149136 and later EC #356901 and later EC #147710 and later EC#274276 and later EC#274276/388860 and later At shipment of processor EC#364290 and later EC#3644'15 and later EC#154315 and later EC#856093 and later 18 18 18 18 19 19 Notes 1. The VM!System Product will execute on the 135-3, 138, 145-3 and 148 processors at earlier EC levels, but the hardware assist will not be used. 2. The 3031, 4321, 4331 and 3031AP Processors support only a subset of ECPS:VM/370 function. 3. If users running the VM/SP on S/370 mdls 135-3, 138, 145-3 or 148 with ECPS for VM!370 also choose to use the shadow table maintenance functions of the VM/SP, they will not realize the full benefit of ECPS. This is because the shadow table maintenance algorithms will be used in preference to some ECPS algorithms. 4. CMS disk I/O (Diagnose 18) has been modi"fied to take advantage of ECPS:VM/370 for CCW translation. The improvement is available with the existing ECPS:VM/370 assist on the S/370 .. 135-3, 138, 145- 3 and 148 Processors. The improvement is also ,; ~vailable with the ECPS:VM 1370 assist on the 4341 Processor. 5. 6. The ECPS:VM/370 and ECPS:MVS options on the 4341 Model Group ,1 are mutually exclusive. The 4341 Model Group 1 Processqr:J"WS users who have specific throughput or terminal response.reqlJir~me~ts an~ who plan to run the MVS/Sys~em Products 1n'~onJunctlon With the VM/SP should carefully review their configura~!or~,to ensure that executod performance needs are m1lt. '~~', ' The ECPS:VM/370 and ECPS:MVS options may be concurrently utilized on the 4341 Model Group 2 Processor, whenever ECPS:VM/370 and ECPS:MVS are both selected at IML time. With this joint soloction, functions· of the shadow table bypass assist defined in Virtual Machine Assist and Shadow Table Bypass Assist (GA22-7074) are included; These functions are designed to enhance· the performance of. o MVS running under VM/370 in a V=R enyironment with the VM/System Product. Shadow Table Bypass Support: On the 3031 a~d 3031 AP processors, an engineering change (EC #276271 and later) ,is available to improve the performance gains of the shadow table function of the VM/SP. Because system performance is dependent on a' number of variables, IBM will not warrant that improvement in performance will be realized in all cases where the VM /SP shadow table function is activated. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS VSE/VSAM Release 3 program product support and CMS/DOS services for VSE/ Advanced Function Release 3 are supported by VM / SP Release 3. I COMPATIBILITY Application programs that currently execute under the VM/Basic System Extensions program product or the VM/System Extensions program product or the VM/System Product Release 1 and are not dependent on internal CD or CMS structure and/or control blocks, should also run on the VM/System Product Release 2. For ease of migration, the existing CMS editor continues to be supported in the VM/SP. However, the existing CMS editor dan Migration macros. If he or she desires, the user can invoke the existing CMS editor. I The new VM/SP editor includes among its enhancements some of the functions contained in the Display Editing System (DES) IUP, order number 5796-PJP. Macros are provided to aid users in migrating from DES to the new editor by providing a DES display format for command input. The Macros provide a SYGSET of the EDGAR functions. Not all functions will work exactly as EDGAR native mode. CONVERSION SPOOL file information has been changed in Release 3. A conversion aid will be available via the SPTAPE function to allow those users who currently have VM/SP Release 1 or Release 2 installed and do not want to perform a COLD start the ability to migrate their SPOOL files to VM/SP Release 3. VM/SP Release 2 Programmable Operator Routing Tables must be converted to the VM/SP Release 3 routing table format. A CMS EXEC will be provided to aid in this conversion. Other than the optional compatibility macros announced in VM/SP Release 1, and the above items, no conversion aids are required to move from VM/Basic System Extensions Release 2, VM/System Extensions Release 2, or VM/SP Releases 1 or 2 to Release 3 of VM/SP. DOCUMENTATION (available from Mechanicsburg) Title Order Number Virtual Machine System Product: Introduction Glossary and Master Index Planning and System Generation Guide Operator's Guide System Programmer's Guide System Messages OLTSEP and ERROR Recording Guide Terminal User's Guide Remote Spooling Communications Subsystems (RSeS) User's Guide CMS Command and Macro Reference eMS User's Guide CP Command Reference for General User's Operating Systems in a Virtual Machine Interactive Problem Control System (lPCS) User's Guide VM/SP Quick Guide for General Users VM/SP Commands (General Users) Reference Summary VM/SP Commands (Other than General Users) Reference Summary EXEC 2 Reference System Product Editor User's Guide System Product Editor Command and Macro Reference RPQs ACCEPTED: No TERMS and CONDITIONS See PP Index ZONE * * * ZONE·* * * GC19-6200 GC19-6207 SC19-6201 SC19-6202 SC19-6203 SC19-6204 SC19-6205 GC19-6206 GC20-1816 SC19-6209 SC19-6210 SC19-6211 GC19-6212 GC20-1823 SX20-4400 SX20-4401 SX20-4402 SC24-5219 SC24-5220 SC24-5221 ------- -------.=. =:: :5~~ ISG PP 5702·RG1.1 Do not reproduce without written permission Mar 83 Maior Revision PROGRAM. PRODUCTS SYSTEM/3 DISK RPG II 5702·RG1 PURPOSE IBM System/3 Disk RPG II is a program product that operates under control of the System Control Programming. It is disk resident on the IBM 5444 Disk Storage Drive, and in addition to the functions provided by the Card RPG II, the Disk RPG II facilitates reading and writing disk records and updating existing disk files using card and disk input/output. A directly attached IBM 3741 Data Station is supported for input or output at compile or execution time. Disk RPG II can be used on IBM System/3 mdl 8. DESCRIPTION The 1442 is supported as an I/O device, and for reading RPG II source statements or data. Disk RPG II permits punching 256 characters (see GX20-1703) and packed decimal on the 1442. The recording techniques used by all disk file organizations permit mUltiple records to be read or written with a single I/O instruction. Unlike previous data management techniques, System/3 disk files can be written or read using different blocking factors in different programs. This facility allows the user to process single records when a program uses a large amount of storage or to use as much core as available in processing multiple records to increase throughput. Any of the disk data files created by System/3 object programs can be processed by any program on the System/3 which uses disk system management to access the files and has compatible disk storage. The access methods supported are as follows: 1. For source program compilation on a model 8 - an IBM 5408 Processing Unit mdl A14 (16K bytes), an IBM 5203 Printer, an IBM 5444 Disk Storage Drive mdl A1, and either an IBM 3741 Data Station/Programmable Workstation directly attached or an IBM 5471 Printer- Keyboard. The object program generated by the Disk RPG II Compiler on the mdl 8 supports, in addition, all the capabilities of the IBM 5203 Printer, 3741 Data Station/Programmable Work Station directly attached, 5444 Disk Storage Drives, 5448 Disk Storage (see "Disk RPG II 5445 Disk Storage Drive Feature"), 3410/3411 Magnetic Tape Subsystems (see "Disk RPG II Magnetic Tape Feature"), and 5408 Processing Unit of 16K bytes and above. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS 5702-SC1. required. For 3741 support, 5702-SC1 feature #6066/#6067 is DOCUMENTATION Indexed a) Random processing - by key. b) Consecutive processing - by key including file loading. Unlike previous indexed file organizations, the keys and data may be in a different physical sequence; i.e., the most active records may be placed in the front of the file with the index in sequence by item number. 3. The object program generated by the Disk RPG II Compiler supports, in addition, all capacities of the IBM 5203 and 1403 Printers, IBM 5424 MFCU, 1442 mdl 7, 3741 Data Station/Programmable Workstation directly attached, 5444 Disk Storage Drive, 5445/5448 Disk Storage (see Disk RPG II 5445 Disk Storage Drive feature), 3410/3411 Magnetic Tape Subsystem (see Disk RPG II Magnetic Tape Feature), and 5410 Processing Unit of 12K bytes and above. Sequential a) Consecutive processing - including updating in place. b) Random processing - by relative record number including updating but excluding file loading. 2. A13 (12K bytes), an IBM 5424 MFCU mdl A1 or an IBM 1442 Card Read Punch mdl 6, an IBM 5203 Printer mdl 1 or an IBM 1403 Printer mdl 2 and an IBM 5444 Disk Storage Drive mdl 1. Direct a) Random Processing - by relative record number, including updating and file loading. The open routine on the file load clears the data area on disk. b) Consecutive processing. Standard System/3 disk labels are mandatory on all disk files. Non-standard labels cannot be used except as data records within the file. In addition to the extensions to RPG implemented in the System/3 Card RPG II, Disk RPG II has the following language extensions: a) Chain Operation Code - User control of direct processing by key or relative record number through the calculation specifications. This facility can be used for chaining from one record to another record in the same file and user generation of the key or relative record number through program logic. b) Automatic Overlay - When a program generates too much object code for the stated machine size, the Disk RPG II Compiler will generate overlays to fit. Not all programs - even with overlays can fit into the stated machine size. In any event, programs cannot be compiled that would exceed 64K without overlays. c) AND/OR - Relationships on calculation specifications. d) ,Square root operation code in calculation specifications. e). ;.Display Operation Code - The ability to display messages on and • accept data from the 5471 Printer-Keyboard. f) Spread card procossing is provided for within RPG II. g) Output from tho Disk RPG II Compiler may be loaded into the object program library or punched into cords or written on diskette for subsequel)t loading. h) Support for nonstandard (RPQ and OEM) devices is included. The user must,. provide. a suitable I/O routine (object program) to support tile' nonstandard device. The remainder of the program written in RPG"II will be linked with the user's I/O routine during program compilation. i) MOVEA operation code"; provides the ability to move a field to an array or an array to a field. The move is left-justified and can begin at any element of the array~ This gives the user the ability to access a field on a byte-by-byte basis. j) SETLL operation code---allows the user to ,set limits during calculations for processing indexed files within limits. SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS Minimum System Requirement: For source program c~',:npilation - an IBM System/3 model 10 which includes an IBM 5410 Processing Unit mdl (available from Mechanicsburg) RPG /I Reference Manual (SC21-7504) ... RPG /I Additional Topics Programmer's Guide (GC21-7567) ... Disk Concepts and Planning Guide (GC21-7571) ... RPG " Disk File Processing Programmer's Guide (GC21-7566) ... Introduction to RPG " (GC21-7514) ... System/3 Bibliography (GC20-8080). DISK RPG II TELECOMMUNICATIONS FEATURE FEATURES #6000 and #8002 PURPOSE This feature is applicable to IBM System/3 mdl 8. The Disk RPG II Telecommunications feature provides the user with the capability of sending or receiving binary synchronous data over voice grade or high Ilpeed*** communications lines. This support is achieved through the use of an RPG II Telecommunications Specifications Sheet, and the addition of BSCA (Binary Synchronous Communications Adapter) as a device entry on the RPG 1\ File Description Specification. This RPG II support permits System/3 to function in one of the following communication modes: Receive only ... Receive with conversational reply*** ... Transmit only ... Transmit with conversational reply*** .. , Alternate transmit and receive file.**** DESCRIPTION The following RPG II language features are supported for communications: Input, Output and Combined Files ... Demand Files for Transmit and Receive ... Blocking and Deblocking of Records ." Dual I/O Areas. These BSCA features, options, and capabilities are supported by the feature: Manual call '" Manual answer ... Auto-call ... Auto-answer ... Medium speed ... High speed ... Station selection ... EBCDIC data transparency ... Intermediate block checking ... EBCDIC or ASCII data and data link control characters. File translation of ASCII data can .be accomplished by proper use of the file translate extension of RPG II. System/3 with a BSCA supported by the RPG II Telecommunications feature can communicate with the following systems: Another System/3 with BSCA, program supported by RPG II Telecommunications feature. A System/32 with BSCA, program-supported by RPG II. A System/34 equipped with a Communications Adapter, programsupported by RPG II and Assembler. A System/360 mdl 20 with BSCA, program-supported by BSCA 10CS. S/360 mdl 22 or larger, S/370 A 2770 Data Communication System. A 2780 Data Transmission Terminal. A 3741-2 Data Station/3741-4 Programmable Workstation. A 5110 Computer System supported as a 3741 mdl 2 or 4. A 5231 mdl 2 with BSCA (#2074). Receive mode only. Supported as a 3741 mdl 2 or 4. A 5280 Distributed Data System . A Series/1 - Refer to Series/1 pages for appropriate features. --- --- ---- :: - - :§~§: PP 5702-RG1.2 Do not reproduce without written permission ISG Mar 83 Major Revision PROGRAM PRODUCTS S/3 Disk RPG II (cont'd) A 6670 Information Distributor (as a 2770) A System/7 with BSCA (#2074) Note: For users of 5448 Disk Storage Drive, specify feature #6014 for 200-cylinder 5444 disk cartridge distribution. This program provides the support to use System/3 in the following telecommunications networks: Point-to-Point switched ... Point-to-Point Multipoint (as a tributary station). nonswitched System/3 with BSCA is a compatible member of the IBM BSC family of terminals. It can be intermixed with other BSC terminals (System/360 mdl 20, 1130, 1800, 5280, System/32, System/34, 2770, 2780, 3741-2, 3741-4, 3780 and 2715 mdl 2) on a multipoint line when operating as a tributary station with a central System/360 or System/370 computer* using DOS or OS BTAM. It can also share the same phone number at the central System/360 or System/370 computer* with other BSC terminals (System/360 or System/370 computers**, System/360 mdl 20, 1130, 1800, System/32, System/34, 2780, 2770, 3780, 3741-2,3741-4 and 6670 (as a 2770), 2715 Model 2). System/360 mdls 22,25 and 30 DOS, mdls 40, 50, 65, 67 (in 65 mode), and 75 with DOS and OS, and mdls 85, 91 and 195 with OS; System/370 mdls 135, 145 and 155 using DOS or OS, and mdl 165 using OS when operating in Basic Compatibility Mode. ** System/360 mdl 22 with DOS, mdls 25 and 30 with BOS/BPS or DOS/360, mdls 40, 50, 65, 67 (in 65 mode), and 75 with BOS/BPS, DOS or OS/360 and mdls 85, 91 and 195 with OS/360, System/370 mdl 135, 145 and 155 with DOS and OS, and mdl 165 with OS when operating in Basic Compatibility Mode. *** Not supported in communication with System/32, System/34, 5280, 2770, 2780, 3741-2 or 3741-4. **** Transmit interspersed with Receive is not supported in communication with 2770, 2780, 3741-2 or 3741-4. t DISK RPG II MAGNETIC TAPE FEATURE FEATURE #6016 or #6018 ... Operator Identification Card Reader feature (#5450) and the Expanded Communications/Multipoint Data Link Control feature (#1685) on 3741-2, -4 are not supported. PURPOSE This feature is applicable to IBM System/3 mdl 8. The Disk RPG II Magnetic Tape Feature provides the user with RPG II support to process data or record address files on magnetic tape. Records may be fixed or variable length and may be either blocked or unblocked. Minimum record or block length is 18 bytes; the maximum is 9,999 bytes. The File Description Specifications define the control information and device entry of Magnetic Tape to the RPG II compiler. The feature supports consecutive input and output files. The files may be recorded in either EBCDIC or ASCII code. SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS Minimum System Requirement: For source compilation: For both the mdl 8 and mdl 10 - the same requirements for compilation as Disk RPG II (5702-RG1). For object program execution: In addition to what is required for compilation, one or more units of the IBM 3410/3411 Magnetic Tape Subsystem are required. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS 5702-RG1; 5702-SC1; 5702-SC1 feature #6024/#6025. DOCUMENTATION (available from Mechanicsburg) IBM System/3 Magnetic Tape Planning Manual (GC21-5040) ... System/3 Bibliography (GC20-8080). Note: For users of 5448 Disk Storage Drive, specify feature #6014 for 200-cylinder 5440 disk cartridge distribution. SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT SYSTEM/3 MODEL 10 RPG II AUTO-REPORT FEATURE FEATURE #6028, #6029 HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS Minimum System Requirement: For source compilation: same as Disk RPG II (5702-RG1). For object program execution: Mdl 10 - an IBM 5410 Processing Unit with a BSCA (Feature #2074) ... Mdl 8 - an IBM 5408 Processing Unit with either the ICA (feature #4645) or the BSCA (feature #2074). SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS PURPOSE This feature is applicable to System/3 mdl 8. The RPG II Auto-Report feature enhances the RPG II language by providing functions which eliminate much of the preparation and coding work normally done by the user when producing an application program in RPG II. It is specifically designed to facilitate report preparation. DESCRIPTION 5702-SC1; 5702-RG1. DOCUMENTATION (available from Mechanicsburg) RPG /I Telecommunications Reference Manual (SC21-7507) System/3 Bibliography (GC20-8080). ... DISK RPG 115445 DISK STORAGE DRIVE FEATURE FEATURE #6012, #6014 Features: Coding of applications in RPG II is made easier by the following Auto- Report functions. PURPOSE This feature supports the 5448 on both the mdl 8 and mdl 10, but supports the 5445 on the mdl 10 only. The feature allows RPG II users to process data files on the 5445/5448 Disk Storage Drive. Page Headings - the user need supply only the report title. Auto-Report generates skipping, spacing, horizontal alignment and date and page number constants. Page overflow is considered and the heading conditioned to print on the top of each page. Simplified Output Specifications - A single output field specification can result in Auto Report generated statement to: DESCRIPTION The File Description Specifications define the control information and device entry of the 5445/5448 Disk Storage Drive to the RPG II compiler. This feature supports the 5445/5448 Disk Storage Drive for data files only. The same capability for data file storage and retrieval is provided for the 5445/5448 as is provided for the 5444.· The file organizations supported by Disk RPG II are: Sequential, Direct, and Indexed. SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS Minimum System Requirements: For compilation on the mdl 8, the same requirements as Disk RPG II (5702-RG1). For object program execution, an rBM 5448 Disk Storage Drive is required. For compilation on the mdl 10, the same requirements as Disk RPG II (5702-RG1). For object program execution, an IBM 5445 or 5448 Disk Storage Drive is required. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS 5702-RG1; 5702-SC1; 5702-SCl featuro #6022/#6023 Support) or 5702-SCl feature #6074 (5448 Support). The Auto-Report program executes as a preprocessor to the RPG II compiler which is a prerequisite for the feature. The input to the program is RPG II source statements and new Auto-Report statements. Auto-Report produces a diagnostic listing, replaces the Auto-Report statements with generated or copied RPG II source statements and calls the RPG " compiler for execution. (5445 - indicate printing with editing, place column heading over the data fields, control spacing, control horizontal alignment of data, define total fields and calculation specifications to accum~~e totals by control levels (total rolling) ,.¥f~{'. t'.;~~ - flag total lines with asterisk indication. ,.}.t,(1:.¢;!~:' ~~. :~,~:t<~.""'''~':;:','"" " t, COpy - The COPY statement providesthe;.a&ilitx,~to copy'RPG " source statements from a disk library ··lrnt9.;'~.IJ.~~R.PG II source program. Some values on the.c,:opled!Speclfl~tlolls may be modified for the resulting compilation;r,;:.· .", ·:.,.:'~/:,:.F· . '. ,·,./;t·:~\;~,"~{"i!f·· '!',\'.':.\~>,-,' Source Program - The A!:-ito-Report program,'~d)asses control directly to the RPG .11 :icompilerAq~cause~\coh;ipiiation of the expanded source,program.lm addition, userS! may elect to punch the source prog~am" so that~they 6a'ri~make modifications which tailor the program mar'e closely to their:",requirements. They can also elect tocatalog.,.to the Source Library a copy of the source • l:, program for late,t·compilation: The Auto,:,Report f~rictions may be spe~ified for one printer file in any RPG II program>;;.~Any RPG II. specifications not related to the selected printer file and:.'any ~PG II s,tC!!ements for the printer file but not ------- ----:: - - :§'=!§: ISG PP 5702-RG1.3 Do not reproduce without written permission Mar 83 Major Revision 8/3 Disk RPG II (cont'd) requesting Auto-Report functions, are passed to the RPG II compiler as a part of the source program. SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS Minimum System Requirements: Same as for RPG II. This feature is applicable for the mdl 8 and has the same requirements as Disk RPG II. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS 5702-RG1; 5702-SC1. DOCUMENTATION (available from Mechanicsburg) Disk System RPG /I Auto-Report Feature General Information Manual (GC21-7563) '" RPG /I Auto-Report Reference Manual (SC21-5057) System/3 Bibliography (GC20-8080). 3277 3284 3286 3288 Display Station (mdl 1 or 2) Printer (mdl 1 or 2) Printer (mdl 1 or 2) Printer (mdl 2) SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS Minimum System Requirements Model 8.~.The RPG II 3270 Display Control feature requires an IBM System/3 mdl 8 which includes an IBM 5408 Processing Unit mdl A16 (32K bytes) ... An IBM 5444 A02 Disk Storage Drive ... An IBM 5203 Printer... An IBM 5471 Printer-Keyboard or 3741 Data Station directly attached ... An Integrated Communications Adapter, Local Display Adapter, or Binary Synchronous Communications Adapter... and one of the devices listed under "Terminals Supported". PURPOSE Model 10...The RPG II 3270 Display Control feature requires an IBM System/3 mdl 10 which includes an IBM 5410 Processing Unit mdl A16 (32K bytes) ... An IBM 5444 mdl 2 Disk Storage Drive... An IBM 5203 or 1403 Printer... An IBM 5424 MFCU or 1442 Card Read Punch ... A Local Communications Adapter or Binary Synchronous Communications Adapter... and one of the devices listed under "Terminals Supported" . The RPG II 3270 Display Control feature provides telecommunications services for local or remote 3270 devices. This program is automatically linked into the RPG II application program via the SPECIAL file exit capability on the RPG II File Description Specification Sheet. Neither the Assembler nor the RPG II Telecommunications feature is required. Using SUBR13, approximately 10K-13.5K bytes is added to the size of the object program; using SUBR14, 4.25K-5.25K bytes is added. The actual amount of resident overhead is determined by the user options selected, and that size can be increased to approximately 15K if the trace options are additionally selected when using SUBR13. RPG II 3270 DISPLAY CONTROL FEATURE FEATURE #0070 DESCRIPTION SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS The following services are provided by the 3270 Display Control feature: 5702-SC1, 5702-SC1 feature #6021, 5702-SC1 feature #6031 and 5702-RG1. RPG II access to 3270 Display System terminals attached via the Local Communcations Adapter (mdl 10), the Local Display Adapter, or Integrated Communications Adapter (mdl 8) or BSCA (mdls 8 and 10). Automatic buffering and queuing of terminal data A display formatting interface which permits the support of 3270 devices with coding in RPG II. COMPATIBILITY The System/3 mdl 8/10 RPG II 3270 Display Control feature is functionally compatible with the System/3 mdl 12 and System/3 mdl 15 RPG II 3270 Display Control feature. DOCUMENTATION (available from Mechanicsburg) Complete line control procedures are provided. IBM RPG /I 3270 Display Control Feature Reference and Logic Manual (SC21-5161) ... System13 Bibliography (GC20-8080). Up to 18 terminals may be controlled (up to 12 can be attached via the Local Display Adapter on the mdl 8). TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index Two subroutines are provided. SUBR13 allows an RPG II program to support the 3270 Information Display System without using CCP. Using SUBR14, an existing program using the 3270 Display Control Feature may be converted to execute under control of CCP by replacing SUBR13 references with SUBR14 references in the RPG II source program. The user must then make any adjustments required by CCP and recompile the program. Provides the capability of coding one or more applications within one program. No task switching is provided. Terminals Supported: The following terminals and communications facilities are supported under the RPG II 3270 Display Control feature: With the Local Communications Adapter (mdI10) - One 3275 Display Station and Control - One 3271 Display Control Unit (mdl1 or 2) with: 3277 Display Station (mdl 1 or 2) 3284 Printer (mdl 1 or 2) 3286 Printer (mdl 1 or 2) 3288 Printer (mdl 2) With the Local Display Adapter (mdl 8) 3277 3284 3286 3288 Display Station (mdl 1 or 2) Printer (mdl 1 or 2) Printer,(rndl 1 or 2) Printer (rndl 2) ~'ote: A maximum ol'12.,terminals may be attached via tho Local Display Adapter.,!' '-\~f ' With the Inlegrated C~;ri~unic~tions Adapter (mdl B) - One 3275 Display Station and Control, or - One 327,1 Dispi~~'Contr~!,lJnit (mdf1,or 2), with: 3277 Display Station (mal 1 or 2) 3284 Printer (mdl 1 or 2) . "~ 3286 Printer (mdl 1or 2) 3288 Printer (mdl 2)': ' With the Binary Synchronou~ Communications Adapter (mdls 8,and 10) - 3275 Display Station and Control, or - 3271 Display Control Unit (mdl1 o~})~,;~th: '- --------- ----.... :: - - :§~E: ISG PP 5702-SM1.1 Do not reproduce without written permission Mar83 Major Revision PROGRAM PRODUCTS SYSTEM/3 DISK SORT PROGRAM 5702-SM1 PURPOSE The IBM System/3 model 10 Disk Sort Program will sort any disk file organization supported by System/3 in ascending or descending sequence. This includes Indexed, Direct, and Sequential files. DESCRIPTION The files must be located on a 5444 Disk Storage Drive. The sort program will also accept fixed length records from magnetic tape files created by tape sequential access methods supported by System/3 data management. Output of the sort program may be created on either magnetic tape or disk. The sort program can select desired records from the input file to be included or excluded from the sort. Recognition of individual records can be based on: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) Record code Relation of a field to a constant Relation of two fields in a record Any relationship in a series (ORing) All relationships in a series (ANDing) Multiples of the above test in any combinations. Control fields may be in a different location in records within the file. Output from the sort program will be in three formats: 1) 2) 3) Tags - A file of three-byte binary relative record nlimbers in the sequence specified by the user. Tagalong - A file of records containing the sort control fields and/or the data fields the user has specified. By using this option, the user can select only the data he needs from his input file to be included in the output. By specifying the entire input record as a tagalong field, the user can, in effect, accomplish a record sort. Summary Tagalong - Records containing identical control fields are combined by summarizing (totaling) specified fields into one record. Specification of record selection, sort parameters and tagalong data fields is accomplished by simple, RPG-like coding sheets that are similar to those used by the MFCU sort program. Sort control card diagnostics and messages are printed on either the 5203 or 1403 Printers or the 5471 Printer-Keyboard, depending on which has been assigned to the system's logging function via the operator control language. If the logging function has been 'turned off,' the sort printed output will be suppressed. SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS Minimum System Requireme",t: An IBM System/3 model 10 which includes an IBM 5410 Processing Unit model A13 (12K bytes), an IBM 5424 MFCU model A1 or an IBM 1442 Card Read Punch model 6, an IBM 5203 Printer model 1 or an IBM 1403 Printer model 2 and an IBM 5444 Disk Storage Drive model 1. For use on IBM System/3 model 8 = an IBM 5408 Processing Unit model A14 (16K bytes), an IBM 5203 Printer, an IBM 5444 Disk Storage Drive model A1, and either an IBM 3741 Data Station directly attached or an IBM 5471 Printer-Keyboard. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS 5702-SC1; for tape support, 5702-SC1 feature #6024/#6025 is also required. DOCUMENTATION (available from Mechanicsburg) Disk Sort Reference Manual (SC21-7522) ... System/3 Bibliography (GC20-8080). DISK SORT 5445 DISK STORAGE DRIVE FEATURE (Feature #6008/#6010) PURPOSE This feature enables the user to sort all disk file organizations supported for System/3 in either ascending or descending sequence. This feature supports the 5448 on both the System/3 model 8 and model 10, but supports the 5445 on the model 10 only. All functions available to the Disk System user through the Disk Sort Program (5702-SM1) are provided. SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS Minimum System Requirement: For the IBM Model 8 - the same requirements as the Disk Sort Program (5702-SM1) for the model 8, plus the IBM 5448 Disk Storage Drive (the 5448 requires a 5444 model A2 as a prerequisite). For the IBM Model 10 - the same requirements as the Disk Sort Program (5702-SM1) for the model 10, plus the IBM 5445 or 5448 Disk Storage Drive (the 5448 requires a 5444 model 2 or A2 as a prerequisite). SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS 5702-SM1; 5702-SC1; 5702-SC1 feature #6022/#6023 Support) or 5702-SC1 feature #6074 (5448 Support). (5445 Note: For users of 5448 Disk Storage Drive, specify feature #6010 for 200-cylinder 5440 disk cartridge distribution. TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index ------- -----:: - - :s"f~ ISG Do not reproduce without written permission PROGRAM J~RODUCTS SYSTEM/3 DISK RESIDENT MAGNETIC TAPE SORT 5702-SM2 PURPOSE The IBM System/3 Disk Resident Magnetic Tape Sort program sorts fixed length, blocked and unblocked files residing on Magnetic Tape. The sort requires a system with a minimum of 12K bytes of core and three magnetic tape drives. Up to four magnetic tape drives may be utilized by the sort program. The file may be recorded in either EBCDIC or ASCII code, and may reside on multiple tape reels. (This feature is applicable to System/3 model 8.1 DESCRIPTION The sort program can select desired records from the input file to be included or excluded from the sort. Recognition of individual records can be based on: Record code Relation of a field to a constant Relation of two fields in a record Any relationship in a series (ORing) All relationships in a series (AN Ding) Multiples of the above test in any combinations Control fields may be in a different location in records within the file. Output from the sort program is in the following format: A file of records containing the sort control fields and the data fields the user has specified. The user need select only the data he needs from his input to be included in the output. By specifying the entire input record as a tagalong field, the user can, in effect, accomplish a record sort. Specification of record selection, sort parameters and tagalong data fields is accomplished by simple, RPG-like coding sheets that are similar to those used by the Disk Sort program, 5702-SM1. The addrout and summary sort capabilities of the Disk Sort are not supported in the Magnetic Tape Sort programs. Sort control card diagnostics and messages are printed on the system output device. Checkpoint/Restart is supported but does not require the SCP feature (5702-SC1, feature #6026/#6027). The maximum block or record size for input or output is 9,999 bytes. Input and output files may be multi-volume, but work files for the sort can be single volume files only. To utilize all of the functions of this program, at least three 9-track work tapes must be available. If one or more of the work tapes is 7 -track, then only those sort functions that relate to the standard System/3 64-character set (EBCDIC) are supported. As a result, sorts of packed decimal data, of signed numeric data, or on zones are not allowed in these 7 -track configurations. SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS Minimum System Requirements: In addition to the minimum system requirements for 5702-SM1, an IBM System/3 model 8 or model 10 requires three magnetic tape drives. (When operating using DPF, a minimum program level of 8K is required). SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS 5702-SC1; 5702-SC1, feature #6024/#6025. DOCUMENTATION (available from Mechanicsburg) Tape Sort Program Reference Manual (SC21-7572). Bibliography (GC20-8080) . .; :!ERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index .., System/3 PP 5702-SM2.1 Mar 83 Major Revision -------- ----:: - - :§~§: ISG Do not reproduce without written permission PROGRAM PRODUCTS SYSTEM/3 DISK RESIDENT CARD UTILITIES 5102·UT1 PURPOSE The following IBM System/3 Card System Utilities may be ordered as disk resident on an IBM 5444 Disk Storage Drive. Their function is the same as their card system equivalents: MFCU Sort/Collate 96-Column List Reproduce II nterpret Data Recording Data Verifying BO-96 Conversion Program. (This feature not applicable to IBM System/3 model B.) DESCRIPTION The Model 10 Gangpunch program is available only for the disk system and provides the following capabilities: Interspersed master-card gangpunching: The master and detail cards are intermixed in the primary file. Count-controlled gangpunching: A fixed or variable counter may be used to punch a specified number of detail cards. The master card is in the secondary file and the detail cards are in the primary file. Match master cards and detail cards on a control field and punch into the detail card if a match occurs: The master card is in the secondary file and the detail card is in the primary file. The following functions may be performed with any of the major types of gang punching described above: Offset gangpunching ... gang punching consecutive numbers into detail cards .,. gangpunching a constant into detail cards... card interpretation (entire card or only what is punched) ... selection of a single type of master card from many master cards '" selection of a single type of detail card from many detail cards. For count-controlled and match fields processing, MFCU2 is used for input and MFCU1 is used for output. For interspersed processing, MFCU1 is used for both input and output. SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS Minimum System Requirement: An IBM System/3 model 10 which includes an IBM 5410 Processing Unit model A13 (12K bytes), an IBM 5424 MFCU model A1, an IBM 5203 Printer mode! 1 or 1403 Printer model 2 and an IBM 5444 Disk Storage Drive model 1. An IBM 5475 Data Entry Keyboard is required if the Data Recording and/or Data Verifying programs are utilized. An IBM 1442 Card Read Punch model 6 is required, in addition to the IBM 5424 MFCU, if the BO-96 Conversion program is utilized. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS: 5702-SC1. DOCUMENTATION (available from Mechanicsburg) Sort Collate and Card Utilities Reference Manual (SC21-7529) ... Systeml3 80-96 Conversion Program and RPG Support for the 1442 Card Read Punch (SC21-751B) ... System/3 Bibliography (GC20B080). TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index PP 5102·UT1.1 MarB3 Major Revision ------- ----:: - -~~~ ISG Do not reproduce without written permission PROGRAMPR()DUCTS SYSTEM/3 UTILITY PROGRAM FOR 1255 MAGNETIC CHARACTER READER 5702-UT2 PURPOSE This IBM System/3 utility· program provides the disk oriented IBM System/3 model 10 user control of document processing on the IBM 1255 Magnetic Character Reader. It provides a means of reading MICR-encoded documents from the 1255, accumulating document totals and amount field totals for each pocket, and placing the data from the documents on output disk and printer files. The program is designed to fulfill the basic requirements of the "ON-US" data capture run required for all Demand Deposit Application programming. (This program is applicable to the IBM System/3 modelS.) DESCRIPTION The program reads fields from the documents as specified by the user and then, based on decisions indicated by the user, it will stacker select these documents into user-specified pockets. If requested, Modulus 10 and 11 checking will be performed. Then, after each document has been read and stacker selected, the utility will print user-specified fields from that document. Fixed-length records will also be created and placed on disk file (5444 or 5445 or 5448) or a tape file (3410 or 3411, 9-track only). An additional facility provided by the program is the accumulation of document totals and amount field totals and then printing these at end of job. Subtotals may be printed at any time as indicated by the user during program execution. SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS Minimum System Configuration: Utility Program for the IBM 1255 Magnetic Character Reader will operate on a minimum configuration IBM System/3 model 10 which includes an IBM 5410 Processing Unit (12K bytes) with a Serial I/O Channel (#7081), an IBM 5424 MFCU (250 cpm read and 60 cpm punch and print), an IBM 5203 Printer (96 print positions and 100 Ipm), or an IBM 1403 Printer (132 print positions and 600 Ipm), an IBM 5444 Disk Storage Drive (2.45 million bytes) and an IBM 1255 Magnetic Character Reader. The minimum main storage required to support a system including an IBM 5445 or 5448 Disk Storage Drive or IBM 3410/3411 Magnetic Tape Subsystem is 16K bytes. For use on IBM System/3 model a - an IBM 5408 Processing Unit model A14 (16K bytes), an IBM 5203 Printer, an IBM 5444 Disk Storage Drive model A 1, and either an IBM 3741 Data Station directly attached or an IBM 5471 Printer-Keyboard. In addition, a Serial I/O Channel and an IBM 1255 Magnetic Character Reader is required. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS 5702-SC1. For IBM 5445 support. 5702-SC1 feature #6022/#6023 is also required (model 10 only). For IBM 5448 support, 5702-SC1 feature #6074 (model 10 only - IBM 5448 mutually exclusive with SIOC on model 8). For tape support, 5702-SC1 feature #6024/#6025. DOCUMENTATION (available from Mechanicsburg) Utility Program For IBM 1255 Magnetic Character Reader Reference Manual (SC21-7521) .. , System/3 Bibliography (GC20-8080). TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index PP 5702-UT2.1 Mara3 Major Revision --.-----:: -- --...- ::§~§: ISG PP 5702-XP1.1 Do not reproduce without written permission Mar83 Major Revision PROGRAM PRODUCTS JOB ANALYSIS SYSTEM/3 (JAS/3) 5702-XP1 DOCUMENTATION PURPOSE IBM Job Analysis System/3 (JAS/3) provides a powerful tool to aid management in fulfilling its responsibilities in the planning, supervising, and controlling of project-oriented work by the critical path method. It is designed to be a high performance system with features which make it easily usable by non-technical personnel. JAS/3 operates under the System/3 Disk System Control Programs 5702-SC1 or 5703-SC1, 5704-SC1, 5704-SC2, or 5705-SC1. Depending on core availability, JAS/3 has a processing capacity of from 180 to 736 activities or work items and relationships per subnet depending on core size. HIGHLIGHTS Front-to-back interfacing of up to 10 subnets to form a network with up to 7,000 activities ... multiple networks per master file ... multiple calendars (each subnet in a network can have its own calendar) ... every relationship can have a lag ... multiple starts and ends (explicit or implicit) ... reports easily modifiable via control cards .. , progress reporting specifying actual start date and / or remaining duration .. , three types of schedule dates ... nine levels of milestones ... Direct Access Master File... free-form data input. Use: To use JAS/3, the customer must describe the activities which constitute the project network. This data is punched into cards or diskettes, for entry into the System/3 or can be entered directly from the keyboard. Processing and report requ~sts can also be entered in either fashion. CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES All users should be familiar with the various features of this system before attempting to use it for actual project control. Users will need a knowledge of the fundamentals of the critical path technique before they can prepare input. SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS Minimum Configuration Storage System Unit Size Reader/Punch Disk Printer Control Unit 5415 A17 48K 5424 MFCU or 5444 Modl 2560 MFCM or 1442 or 3741 Dir. Attach Attach 1403 5421 5415 817 48K 5424 MFCU or 3340 2560 MFCM or 1442 or 3741 Dir. Attach 1403 5421 5415 019 96K 5424 MFCU or 3340 1442 or 2560 or 3741 Dir. Attach 1403 5421 5412 816 32K 5424 MFCU or 3340 Mod C2 1403 or 1442 Card Read Punch 5203 3741 Dir. Attach 5421 5410 A13 12K 5424 MFCU or 5444 Mod 1 1442 Mod 6 or 3741 Dir. Attach 1403 or 5203 5421 5408 A14 16K 3741 Oir. 5444 Mod 1 Attach Keyboard 5203 5406 83 12K 5444 Mod 1 or 5213 2222 Additional Supported Devices: and 2501 and 5444 5445s 3340,3344 5471 Printer/ 5475 Keyboard 2(54445) 5445 5415 5410 5408 2(5444s) 5406 2(5444s) 5496 3741 Dir. Attach Only Left Carriage on Dual 132 Chr. Mar. Note: JAS/3 Does Not Support Spooling. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS JAS/3 is written in System/3 Basic Assembler language and operates under the IBM System/3 Disk System Control Program. On a system with Dual Programming feature, JAS/3 must run in Program Level 1. (available from Mechanicsburg) General Information Manual (GH20-1 085) ... Program Description and Operations Manual (SH20-1176). TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index ------- _.. -- PP 5702-XX1.1 Do not reproduce without written permission =- -::§'f§: ISG Mar 83 Major Revision PROGRAM.PRODUCTS SYSTEM/3DATA/3 5702-XX1, 5704-XX1. 5704-XX3. and 5705-XX1 PURPOSE This program product provides users of IBM System/3 models 8, 10 Disk, 12 and 15 with a terminal-oriented data entry, inquiry, and file maintenance system. The specific functions it provides are data entry, data entry with master file input, inquiry, and inquiry with update. HIGHLIGHTS Uses a program definition and a data definition form. Both are designed for ease-of-use with forms already familiar to the user. Easy to install and use via RPG-like forms and fill-in-the-blanks type prompting. DATA/3 generated programs do not require a dedicated system; that is, another program - batch or CCP - can be executed in the other program level or partition. DATA/3 generated programs can be executed under control of CCP. Places control and responsibility for data integrity at the data source. Offers up to four separate program security checks. Two are available in the DATA/3 generated programs; two additional checks are available when running under .cCP. Requires no knowledge of programming languages by the terminal operator. Provides standard checking functions. DESCRIPTION Data Entry: Allows the operator to enter data on either a field or a record basis. It creates a single output file which can contain multiple record types depending on the application. Output files can be sequential,indexed, or direct. During data entry, the operator can page forward or backward through the entry screens. The definition of the output record format controls the program's flow by insuring that the proper input, edit, and output record display format operations are performed. If a field fails to pass a validity check, the field in error is intensified, indicating a correction must be made by the operator. Data Entry with Master File Input: Allows the operator to extract· information from up to eight existing master files and combine this information with data entered at the terminal. This combined data is displayed, verified or overridden by the operator, and incorporated into the output data file. Output files can be sequential or indexed, and, as above, the operator can page forward and backward through the entry screens during data entry. Inquiry: This function allows access to records in a disk file by using a record key. When there are several inquiry screen format displays used by the program, the operator can switch from display to display. The program may also specify 'ease-of~reading' editing for numeric fields. Inquiry with Update: This function provides file maintenance capability. When a record is accessed by key and displayed at the terminal, the operator can change the appropriate fields and direct the program to replace the record on disk with the new information. Data integrity is preserved by having user specify at program definition time which fields may be altered (unprotected) and which displayed fields may not be altered (protected). Records may also be added by the operator at the terminal. Use: DATA/3 can be used in a wide variety of applications where a need exists for online data entry, data inquiry and file maintenance. It is particularly suited for customer service '" order entry... inventory and production control ... stockholder records ... credit control. CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES Customizing DATA/3 to their specific needs. This will include the initial specification of the data files that DATA/3 generated programs will interface with. A data definition form is available. Program definit)o'ilforms are available for use when a program is to be generated usin~fttj~;OATA/3 facilities. These forms enable users to specify program n8nie, security, data file intorfaces, 3270 screen formats and field editlng'"requirements of their various programs. , SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS The minimum configuration for IBM,System/3 model 10 Disk System is IBM 5410 Processing Unit - 24K fofNon";'CCP or 32K for CCP ... IBM 5444 Disk Storage Drive model 2 ... IBM 5424 Multi-function Card Unit or 1442 Card Read Punch ... IBM 5203 Printer or 1403 Printer ... Local Communications Adapter (LCA) or Binary Synchronous. Communications Adapter (BSCA) ... IBM 3270 Information Display System . (minimum one display station)~ Programming Requirements include ... model 10 Disk System Control Programming (5702-SC1, Release 12 or later; or Release 13 if the Display Adapter is to be used) ... BSCA Multiline/Multipoint feature (5702-SC1, feature #6030/#6031), ... Macros feature (5702-SC1, feature #6020/#6021) ... Overlay Linkage and Checkpoint/Restart feature (5702-SC1 feature Editor #6026/#6027) ... RPG II Compiler (5702-RG1). The minimum configuration for the IBM System/3 model 8 is IBM 5408 Processing Unit model A16 (32K bytes) ... IBM 5444 Disk Storage Drive model A2 ... IBM 5203 Printer ... IBM 5471 Printer-Keyboard or 3741 Data Station/Programmable Workstation directly attached ... Integrated Communications Adapter (ICA) or Binary Synchronous Communications Adapter (BSCA) or the Local Display Adapter ... IBM 3270 Information Display System (minimum one display station). Programming Requirements same as IBM System/3 model 10. The minimum configuration for IBM System/3 model 12 is IBM 5412 Processing Unit B16 (32K) ... IBM 5424 MFCU or 1442 Card Read Punch or 3741 Data Station / Programmable Workstation directly attached ... IBM 5203 or 1403 Printer ... IBM 3340 DASF ... Integrated Communications Adapter (ICA) or Binary Synchronous Communications Adapter (BSCA) or Local Display Adapter ... IBM 3270 Information Display System (minimum. one display station). Programming requirements include .. , IBM model 12 System Control Programming . (5705-SC1) ... RPG II Compiler (5705-RG1). The minimum configuration for IBM System/3 model 15 is the same as for model 15 SCP, but in addition, the following are required: IBM 3270 Information Display System (minimum one I display station) ... Local Communications Adapter (LCA) or BSCA or Display Adapter (FC4601); or the model 150, the BSCC is supported by DATA/3, but only under CCP. Programming requirements for 5704-XX1include the SCP (5704-SC1 Release 3 or later; or Release 4 if the Display Adapter is to be used) and RPG II Compiler (5704-RG1). Programming requirements for 5704-XX3 include the SCP (5704-SC2) and RPG II Compiler (5704- RG2). Additional devices supported include additional 5444 or 5445 disks, 5448 disks, 3340 disks, 3344 disks, and multiple terminals (including printers) on the 3270 Information Display System. (Program Function Keys 1-5 are required on the 3270 terminals.) The Data Entry Keyboard is recommended on the 3270 terminals. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS DATA/3 generated programs are compiled and executed like any other RPG II program. The generated programs operate under control of the System/3 System Control Programming (SCP) as follows: SYSTEM/3 DATA/3 SCP Models 8 and 10 Model 12 Model 15 Model 15 5702-XX1 5705-XX1 5704-XX1 5704-XX3 5702-SC1 5705-SC1 5704-SC1 5704-SC2 DOCUMENTATION (available from Mechanicsburg) DATA/3 Reference Manual (SC21-5102) S/3 Bibliography (GC208080). TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index -------- ----=--:S~E: ISG PP5703·F01.1 Do not reproduce without written permission Mar 83 Major Revision PROGRAM PRODUCTS SYSTEM/3 DISK FORTRAN IV 5703·F01 PURPOSE COMPATIBILITY IBM System/3 Disk FORTRAN IV processes programs written in the IBM System/3 FORTRAN language, producing output suitable for execution with the IBM System/3 model 6 System Control Programming (5703-SC1). (This program is not used with the model 4). System/3 Disk FORTRAN IV source programs for System/3 model 6 are compatible with the System/3 Disk FORTRAN IV for System/3 model 10 except for changes required to accommodate differences in attached I/O. The System/3 Disk FORTRAN IV compiler accepts source programs written in the IBM System/360 Basic FORTRAN IV language, which encompasses American National Standard Basic FORTRAN as defined in X3.10.1966. The compiler also accepts source programs written in the IBM 1130, Basic FORTRAN language with minor modifications. HIGHLIGHTS The System/3 FORTRAN language contains those features defined in American National Standard Basic FORTRAN, X3.10.1966; language extensions supported by IBM 1130 Basic FORTRAN; and additional features and capabilities previously available only with certain IBM Full FORTRAN compilers. These features include: The DEBUG facility, which enables the user to locate errors in a FORTRAN source program. By use of four basic statements, the debug facility provides for tracing flow within a program and between programs, and for checking the validity of subscripts. The IMPLICIT statement, which enables the user to specify the type (including length) of all variables, arrays, and user-supplied functions whose name begins with a particular letter. Length specification for INTEGER and REAL type statements, which allows the explicit specification of the INTEGER*2, INTEGER*4, REAL*4, and REAL *8 (double precision) data types. The relational IF statement, which is used to direct the transfer of control after the evaluation of relational expressions. List-directed input/output, which permits reading and writing of formatted data without a FORMAT statement. The GENERIC statement, which enables the user to specify a single name for a FORTRAN built-in or library function having several names. Depending on argument type, the correct function is selected by the compiler with each appearance of the name. IBM FORTRAN language extensions INVOKE, PROGRAM and GLOBAL, which allow FORTRAN main programs to be loaded successively into main storage and executed, while permitting these programs to share a common data area. These language extensions provide function equivalent to 1130 FORTRAN CALL LINK. Names of up to six characters for variables, arrays, functions, and subroutines. DESCRIPTION PERFORMANCE The. System/3· Disk FORTRAN IV will compile and execute approximately 100 source statements on a12K system with increased capacity on a 16K system. The System/3 Disk FORTRAN will compile and execute in 9K of main storage, exclusive of control program requirements. Object time performance is dependent on program type, size, I/O functions performed and other factors pertinent to program execution speed. DOCUMENTATION (available from Mechanicsburg) FORTRAN Reference Manual (SC28-6874) ... FORTRAN Commercial Subroutines (SC28-6875) .... S/3 Bibliography (GC20-8080). Multiple Program Requests: Program Products and System Control Programming type 5703 (System/3 model 4 or 6) which are ordered from PID for shipment at the same time will be shipped to the user stacked on a 5440 disk cartridge (or equivalent)* under the following conditions: 1. The scheduled ship date, seven-digit customer number and CPU number must be the same for all programs ordered. 2. All of the program feature orders must specify the same cylinder size (100 cyl or 200 cy/). (Note: Model 4 uses only 200-cylinder disks). 3. The total storage requirements of the programs ordered must not exceed the number of available cylinders indicated by the specify number (100 or 200 cylinders).* 4. The announcement of availability must indicate that the program can be stacked. * More than one disk cartridge may be required. The System/3 Disk FORTRAN IV library contains mathematical and sEtrvice subprograms required during execution to perform arithmetic operations, input and output constant conversion and input/output control. Action Required: Sufficient lead time is necessary to facilitate the proper coordination of System Control Programming and program products shipped from PID, and the system installation date. The fol/owing , procedures must be followed: System/3 Disk FORTRAN IV is supplemented by a Commercial Subroutine Package which is equivalent in function to the 1130 Commercial Subroutine Package with the exception that I/O routines for the model 6 version are not provided. Therefore, FORTRAN I/O must be used for model 6 device support. System Control Programming and program products are shipped from PIO on 5440 Disk Cartridge. A cartridge may either be supplied by the user or it may be ordered from IBM. SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS Minimum System Configuration: For compilation and execution, a System/3 model 6 with a minimum of 12K bytes of main storage is required. Disk FORTRAN IV requires a minimum of 9K bytes of main storage for compilation - exclusive of control program requirements. 1 - IBM 5406 Central Processing Unit (model 803) 1 - IBM 5444 Disk Drive (model 1) 1 - IBM 5213 Printer (model 1) or 2222 Printer (model 1) Ad'ditlonol Device Support IBM 5406 Central Processing Unit (model 804) ... iBM 5213 Printer models 2 or 3 ... IBM 2222 Printer model 2 ... IBM 5444 Disk models 2 or 3 ... IBM 5496 Online Data Recorder with IBM System/3 model 6 attachment feature ... IBM 129 Online Data Recorder with card I/O attachment feature (supported as IBM 5496). FORTRAN supports the IBM 3741 directly attached as an input or output device for compilation only. Prerequisite: EC 571595 is required for all IBM System/3 model 6 CPUs on which System/3 FORTRAN will be run. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS 5703-SC1; 5703-SC1 feature #6010/#6011. Orders may be submitted directly to PID for 5440 disk cartridges to be used for program deliveries. Orders will be scheduled for shipment from PID the Friday of the second week following AAS order entry, unless a later scheduled ship date is requested. Customer disks must arrive at PID the Tuesday before the Friday scheduled date. The branch must verify that System Control Programming and program products are on order and scheduled for shipment from PIO to ensure their arrival concurrent with systems delivery. When rescheduling a system, the branch must also ensure that' associated System Control Programming, program products, and disks are also properly resch eduled. Failure to adhere to the above procedures can result in late shipmentot programs and late installations. System/3 Model 4 Program Products Minimum System ReqLlirements ::' '"',f5Sd~)~t Program Products 6404 6213 RPG" Disk Sort Program CCP/Oisk Sort Conversational Utilities X X X X X X X X t;':' >' "'".'' 644I:~~{!1p3·SC1' , X ~4~.,.;~~X X ,'1£,'" X ' X ": X X X'' :)~~~~~, '" ------- -------.:. =-= :§f~ ISG Do not reproduce without written permission PROGRAM PRODUCTS S/3 Disk FORTRAN IV (cont'd) System/3 Model 6 Program Products Minimum System Requirements 5213 5444 SCP 5703·SC1 Model 6 Sort X X X X X X X X Model 6 Conversational Utility Programs - Keyboard Data Entry -Keyboard Source Entry -Data Interchange Utility X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X Program Products Model 6 RPG II 6406 8K 1255 Magnetic Character Reader Utility (plus 1255) System/3 BASIC Disk FORTRAN IV 12K X X X Note: To support the 3741 directly attached or 2265, 5406 is required. TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index X X a minimum of 12K PP 5703-F01.2 Mar 83 Major Revision Do not reproduce without written permission ISG PROGRAM PRODUCTS SYSTEM/3 HEALTH, WELFARE AND PENSION FUND SYSTEM (5703-N11) PURPOSE The IBM System/3 Health, Welfare and Pension Fund System meets basic contribution accounting requirements for jointly administered Health, Welfare and Pension Funds. In addition, member, contribution, and claims information is maintained for improved management analysis and control. The program is designed for the System/3 model 6. The compact System/3 model 6 offers for the first time all the benefits of a stored program system to a large number of smaller funds, while avoiding significant facility problems. The Health, Welfare and Pension Fund System program product provides a comprehensive, easily installed package which assumes minimum tailoring and no permanent . user programming capability. HIGHLIGHTS Contribution accounting including prelisting for both hourly and flat rate contribution funds Notification of employer contribution shortage M ember contribution I history file Claim history file Historic employer contribution file Computer prepared claim and pension checks Inquiry facility for all primary files Full maintenance of all system files Data for typical eligibility determination Utilization of the low cost System/3 model 6 Control of all files, complete audit trail Use: The Health, Welfare and Pension Fund will use this system for contribution accounting, pension and claim check preparation, to provide data for eligibility determination and for analysis and control of its operation. CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES A thorough knowledge and understanding of both current contribution accounting procedures and controls and of the program product contribution accounting and controls ... any modification for unique requirements ." generation of system control program and program product ... coding and capture of required files and tables ... assignment of employer account numbers, claim codes, contract codes ... establishing individual audit requirements ... providing for manual supervision of controls and the integration of controls into the reporting framework used by the fund. SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS Minimum Machine Configuration Description Type M/SF Processing Unit (12K)' Printer Attachment 5406 B3 3902 Printer (132 positions) 5213 2 Disk Storage (2.45 M bytes) 5444 The file storage requirements will vary greatly from fund to fund based upon such factors as number of members, collection cycle, and claim rate characteristics. Additional information can be found In the General Information Manual. Please contact your Regional Insurance Industry Marketing representative or the Insurance System Center. Princeton. New Jersey, for further assistance. Reconstruction from machine-readable media will require the purchase of additional 5440 Disk Cartridges. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS The Health, Welfare and Pension Fund system is written in RPG " and operates under the control of the IBM System/3 model 6 System Control Program (5703-SC1). All files are indexed disk. Required Program Products· System/3 Model 6 RPG " (5703-RG1) Conversational Utilities (5703-UT1) Disk Sort (5703-SM1) DOCUMENTATION (available from Mechanicsburg) Genera/Information Manual (GH20-1189) . TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index PP 5703-N11.1 Mar 83 Major Revision ------- -------- PP 5703-RG1.1 Do not reproduce without written permission ..:.:=.: :§~§: ISG Mar"S3 Major Revision PROGRAM PRODUCTS SYSTEM/3 MODEL 6 RPG II 5703-RG1 PURPOSE IBM System/3 model 6 RPG II is a program product that operates under control of the System Control Programming. It is disk resident, and in addition to the functions provided by the S/3 Disk RPG II (5702-RG1), the S/3 model 6 RPG II supports operator keyboard console and other unique devices, as indicated below. DESCRIPTION The recording techniques used by all disk file organizations permit mUltiple records to be read or written with a single 1/0 instruction. Unlike previous data management techniques, System/3 disk files can be written or read using different blocking factors in different programs. This facility allows the user to process single records when a program uses a large amount of storage or to use as much core as available in processing multiple records to increase throughput. System/3 Model 6 RPG II supports three types of file organization Sequential, Indexed, and Direct. Direct files are addressed by relative record number; records may be loaded or retrieved by specifying the number of the record in the file. The access methods supported are as follows: 1. Sequential a) Consecutive processing - including updating in place. b) Random processing - by relative record number including updating but excluding file loading. 2. Indexed a) Random processing - by key. b) Sequential processing - by key including file loading. Unlike previous indexed file organizations, the keys and data may be in a different physical sequence; i.e., the most active records may be placed in the front of the file with the index in sequence by item number. 3. Direct a) Random processing - by relative record number, including updating and file loading. The open routine on the file load clears the data area on disk. b) Consecutive processing. Standard S/3 disk labels are mandatory on all disk files. Non-standard labels cannot be used except as data records within the file. When a program generates too much object code for the specified size, the compiler will generate overlays. Not all programs - even with overlays - can fit into the stated macnine size. In any event, programs cannot be compiled that would exceed 64K without overlays. SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS System Configuration: An IBM System/3 model 4 workstation system includes: IBM 5404 Processing Unit model A1S (64K bytes) ... IBM, 5447 Disk Storage and Control ... IBM 5213 Printer ... IBM 3277 Display Station model 1 ... at least one locally attached terminal. (Note: The 3277 is supported only by CCP; RPG II does not use the 3277.) A minimum IBM System/3 model 6 configuration includes: IBM 5406 Processing Unit model B2 (8K bytes) ... IBM 5444 Disk Storage Drive ... IBM 5213 or 2222 Printer. Disk data files created by disk system management are compatible across System/3 models. DOCUMENTATION (available from Mechanicsburg) 5ystem/3 Models 4 and 6 RPG /I Reference Manual (SC21-7517) ... Introduction to RPG /I (GC21-7514) ... RPG /I Additional Topics Programmer's Guide (GC21-7567) ... RPG /I Disk File Processing Programmer's Guide (GC21-7566) ... Disk Concepts and Planning Guide (GC21-7571) ... 5/3 Bibliography (GC20-S080). RPG II TELECOMMUNICATIONS FEATURE (Feature #6000 or #60(2) PURPOSE The RPG II Telecommunications feature provides the user with the capability of sending or receiving binary synchronous data over voice grade or high speed communications lines. This support is achieved through the use of an RPG II Telecommunications Specification Sheet, and the addition of BSCA (Binary Synchronous Communications Adapter) as a device entry on the RPG II File Description Specification. This RPG II support permits System/3 to function in one of the following communication modes: Receive only Receive with conversational reply··· Transmit only Transmit with conversational reply··· Alternate transmit and receive file···· DESCRIPTION The RPG II language features supported for communications are: Input, Output and Combined Files ... Demand Files for Transmit and Receive ... Blocking and Deblocking of Records ... Dual I/O Areas. These BSCA features, options, and capabilities are supported by the feature: Manual call ... Manual answer ... Auto-call ... Auto-answer ... Medium speed .. , High speed ... Station selection ... EBCDIC data transparency... Intermediate block checking ... EBCDIC or ASCII data and data link control characters. File translation of ASCII data can be accomplished by proper use of the file translate extension of RPG II. Sys,tem/3 with a BSCA supported by the RPG II Telecommunications feature can communicate with the following systems: Another System/3 with BSCA, program-supported by RPG II Telecommunications feature. A System/32 with BSCA (#2074), program-supported by RPG II. A System/34 equipped with a Communications Adapter, programsupported by RPG II and Assembler. A System/360 model 20 with BSCA, program-supported by BSCA 10CS. A System/360 (or System 1370 when operating in Basic Compatibility mode) program-supported by DOS BTAM, OS BTAM, or OS TCAM*. Devices Supported: The following devices and features are supported by RPG II object programs: A 2770 Data Communication System. Mdl 4 A 3741-2 Data Station.t Mdl 6 Description X X X X X 129 Card Data Recorder mdl 1, 2 or 3 2222 Printer mdl 1 or 2 (including Ledger Card Device and second tractor) X 2265 Display Station mdl2 (5406-B3 or B4 is required) X 3741 Data Station mdl 1 or 2 directly attached ~ 3741 Programmable Workstation mdl 3 or 4 directly attached X 5213 Printer mdl1, 2 or 3 .,i,5213:Printer mdl3 £~~;~~5404~P~ocess!ng Un!t mdl A18 X·::1! 5406 Processing Unit mdl B2, B3 or B4 ~\5444"Disk Storage Drive mdl 1, 2, 3 X l!i¥.'5447 Disk Storage and Control mdl A 1 or A2 X':·: 5496 Data Recorder mdl1 :\~$:/" SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS ·~!~!.:t't T\ 5703-SC1 for IBM 3741 support, 5703-SCl feature #6026/#6027 is '\ " ",,'; , required. . iii . ~ .... M~JJBILlTY';::if; . .'·:, :,.t,., System/3 model 6 RPG II IS s.ource language comp~tlbl9 with RPG II for other System/3 models,9xcept for.. differences),'due to different hardware. . , • . .."".,' '. A 2780 Data Transmission Terminal. A 3741-4 Programmable Work Station.t A 5110 Computer System supported as a 3741 model 2 or 4. A 5230 Data Collection System with BSCA (#2074). Receive mode only. Supported as a 3741 model 2 or 4. A 5280 Distributed Data System with Communications Adapter (#2500). A Series/l - Refer to Series/1 pages for appropriate features. A 6670 Information Distributor (as a 2770). A System/7 with (#2074) This program provides the support to use System/3 in the following telecommunications networks: . Point-to- Point switched ... Point-to- Point MultipOint (as a tributary station). nonswitched System/3 with BSCA is a compatible member of the IBM BSC family of terminals. It can be intermixed with other BSC terminals (System/360 model 20, 5280, System/32, System/34, 1130, 1800, 2770, 2780 and 2715 model 2, 3780, 3741-2) on a multipoint line when operating as a tributary station with a central System/360 or System/370 compute~· using DOS or OS BTAM. It can also share the --.--- ---:: - - :s"fE: ISG PP 5703-RG1.2 Do not reproduce without written permission Mar83 Major Revision PROGRAM PRODUCTS 5/3 Mdl6 RPG II (cont'd) same phone number at the central System/360 or System/370 computer* with other BSC terminals (System/360 or System/370 computers*·, System/360 model 20, System/32, System/34, 5280, 1130, 1800. 2780, 2770 and 2715 model 2, 6670 (as a 2770), 3780 , 3741-2. -4). • ** System/360 models 22,25 and 30 with 00S/360, models 40,50, 65, 67 (in 65 mode), and 75 with OOS/360and OS/360 and models 85, 91 and 195 with OS/360. System/370 models 135, 145 and 155 with DOS and OS and model 165 with OS when operating in Basic Compatibility mode. System/360 models 22, 25 and 30 with BOS/BPS or 00S/360. models 40.50.65,67 (in 65 mode), and 75 with BOS/BPS, DOS or OS/360 and models 85, 91 and 195 with OS/360. System/370 models 135. 145 and 155 with DOS and OS and model 165 with OS when operating in Basic Compatibility mode. .** Not supported in communications with System/32, System/34, 2770. 2780 and 3741-2, -4. ·***Transmit interspersed with Receive is not supported in communication with 2770. 2780 or 3741-2. -4. t Operator Identification Card Reader feature (#5450) and the Expanded Communications/Multipoint Data Link Control feature (#1685) on 3741- 2, 4 are not supported. The functions and specifications for the System/3 model 6 RPG II Telecommunications feature are identical to those of the System/3 model 10 Disk RPG II Telecommunications feature. of the source program so that he can make modifications which tailor the program more closely to his requirements. The Auto-Report functions may be specified for one printer file in any RPG II program. Any RPG " specifications not related to the selected printer file and any RPG II statements for the printer file but not requesting Auto-Report functions, are passed to the RPG " compiler as a part of the source program. SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS System Configuration: This program can be used on the IBM· System /3 model 4 or model 6. Minimum requirements are the same as for RPG II (5703-RG1). SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS 5703-RG1; 5703-SC1. DOCUMENTATION (available from Mechanicsburg) RPG 1/ Auto-Report Reference Manual (SC21-5057) ... System/3 Bibliography (GC20-8080) RPG 113270 DISPLAY CONTROL FEATURE (Feature #6030 - Model 4 only) PURPOSE This program can be used on the IBM System/3 model 4 or model 6. Minimum requirements are the same as for RPG " (5703-RG1). The RPG II 3270 Display Control feature provides telecommunications services on the IBM model 4 for local or remote IBM 3270 devices. This program is automatically linked into the RPG II application program via the SPECIAL file exit capability on the RPG II File Description Specification Sheet. The RPG II Telecommunications feature is not required. For object program execution - the Binary Synchronous Communications Adapter (#2074) is required. For System/3 model 6. an IBM 5406 model B3 or B4 is required to support communications with an IBM 2770 or 2780. The following services are provided by the RPG " 3270 Display Control feature: SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS RPG II access to 3270 Display System terminals attached to the CPU or the Binary Synchronous Communications Adapter. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS 5703-RG1;5703-SC1 Automatic buffering and queuing of terminal data. DOCUMENTATION (available from Mechanicsburg) RPG 1/ Telecommunications Programming Reference (GC21-7507). .., System /3 Bibliography (GC20-8080). DESCRIPTION Manual RPG II AUTO-REPORT FEATURES (Features #6008, #60(9) PURPOSE The RPG " Auto-Report feature enhances the RPG " language by providing functions which eliminate much of the preparation and coding work normally done by the user when producing an application program in RPG II. It is specifically designed to facilitate report preparation. The IBM System/3 Auto-Report program executes as a preprocessor to the RPG II compiler which is a prerequisite for this feature. The input to the program is RPG " source statements and Auto-Report statements. Auto-Report produces a diagnostic listing, replaces the Auto-Report statements with generated or copied RPG " source statements and calls the RPG " compiler for execution. DESCRIPTION Coding of applications in RPG " is made easier by the following Auto-Report functions. Page Headings - The user need supply only the report title. Auto-Report generates skipping, spacing, horizontal alignment and date and page number constants. Page overflow is considered and the heading conditioned to print on the top of each page. Simplified Output Specifications - A single output field specification can result in Auto-Report generated statements to: - Indicate printing with editing Place column heading over the data fields Control spacing Control horizontal alignment of data Define total fields and calculation specifications to. accumulate totals by control levels (total rolling), - Flag total lines with asterisk indication. COpy - The COPY statement provides the ability to copy RPG " source statements from a disk library into the RPG II source program. Some values on the copies specifications may be modified for the resulting compilation. Source Program - The Auto Report program passes control directly to the RPG " compiler to cause compilation of the expanded source program. In addition. the user may elect to catalog to disk a copy A display formatting interface which permits the support of 3270 devices with coding in RPG II. Complete line control procedures are provided. Up to 18 terminals may be controlled (up to 5 can be attached to the CPU). Two subroutines are provided. SUBR13 allows an RPG " program to support the 3270 Information Display System without using CCP. Using SUBR14, an existing program using the 3270 Display Control feature may be converted to execute under control of CCP by replacing SUBR13 references with SUBR14 references in the RPG " source program. The user must only then make any adjustments required by CCP and recompile the program. Provides the capability of coding one or more applicatons within one program. No task switching is provided. Terminals Supported: The following terminals and Communication facilities are supported by the RPG " 3270 Display Control feature: With the Binary Synchronous Communications Adapter 3275 Display Station and Control 3271 Display Control Unit (models 1 or 2) with: - 3277 Display Stations (models 1 or 2) - 3284 Printer (models 1 or 2) - 3286 Printer (models 1 or 2) - 3288 Printer (model 2) Directly to CPU 3277 3284 3286 3288 Display Stations (models 1 or 2) Printer (models 1 or 2) Printer (models 1 or 2) Printer (model 2) Note: A maximum of 5 terminals may be att~ched:to'theCPU. .,' ~;'~~'1.1~ ,:. )~"'" SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONME~t HARDWARE REQUIREME~TS 'if Mimimum System Requirements .. _ The RPG " IBM 3270 Display Contrj, feature requires an IBM System/3 model 4 which includes an IBM:l54Q4 Processing Unit model A18 (64K bytes) ... an IBM 5447 Disk Storage and Control ... an IBM 5213 model. 3Printer••. and one of the· devices listed under "Terminals Supported". .. . ... . , , Using SUBR13;' approximately 10.25K-13.75K bytes is added to the size of ,the object program; using .,:SUBR14, 4.25K-5.25K bytes is ------- ----:: - -:E~S: ISG Do not reproduce without written permission PROGRAM PRODUCTS 5/3 Mdl 6 RPG II (cont'd) added. The actual amount of resident overhead is determined by the user options selected. and that size can be increased to approximately 15K if the trace options are optionally selected when using SUBR13. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS 5703-SC1, 5703-RG1 DOCUMENTATION (available from Mechanicsburg) IBM RPG /I 3270 Display Control Feature Reference and Logic Manual (SC21-5161) ... System/3 Bibliography (GC20-8080). TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index PP 5703-RG1.3 Mar83 Major Revision - ----- -------====';'= - --- ISG Do not reproduce without written permission ---. PROGRAM PRODUCTS SYSTEM/3 MODEL 6 DISK SORT PROGRAM 5703·SM1 PURPOSE This IBM System/3 model 6 disk sort program sorts any disk file organization supported by IBM System/3 disk systems management in ascending or descending sequence. This includes Indexed, Direct, and Sequential files. The sort program can select desired records from the input file to be included or excluded from the sort. Recognition of individual records can be based on: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) Record code Relation of a field to a constant Relation of two fields in a record Any relationship in a series (ORing) All relationships in a series (ANDing) Multiples of the above tests in any combinations. DESCRIPTION Control fields can be In a different location in records within the file. Output from the sort program will be in one of three formats: 1) Tags· A file of 3-byte binary relative record numbers in the sequence specified by the user. 2) Tagalong - A file of records containing the sort control fields and/or the data fields the user has specified. By using this option, the user can select only the data he needs from his input file to be included in the output. By specifying the entire input record as a tagalong field, the user can, in effect, accomplish a record sort. 3) Summary Tagalong - Records containing identical control fields are combined by summarizing (totaling) specified fields into one record. Specification of record selection, sort parameters and tagalong data fields is accomplished by simple, RPG-like coding sheets. The functions and syntax of specification statements for the System/3 model 6 Disk Sort program are identical with those of the System/3 model 10 Disk Sort. An output data file created by the System/3 model 6 Disk Sort can be processed by any System/3 program which uses disk system management to access the file. SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS An IBM System/3 model 4 workstation system includes: IBM 5404 Processing Unit model A18 (64K bytes) ... IBM 5447 Disk Storage and Control ... IBM 5213 Printer ... IBM 3277 Display Station model 1 ... at least one locally attached terminal. (Note: The IBM 3277 is supported only by CCP; the Disk Sort Program does not use the 3277.) The minimum System/3 model 6 configuration includes: IBM 5406 Processing Unit model B2 (8K bytes) ... IBM 5444 Disk Storage Drive .. , IBM 5213 or 2222 Printer. Devices Supported The following devices are supported by the Disk Sort program: Model 4 Model 6 Description X X X 129 Card Data Recorder model 1, 2 or 3 2222 Printer model 1 or 2 2265 Display Station model 2 (5406 model B3 or B4 is required) X 3741 Data Station model 1 or 2 directly attached X 3741 Programmable Workstation model 3 or 4 directly attached X 5213 Printer model 1, 2 or 3 X 5213 Printer model 3 X 5404 Processing Unit model A18 X 5406 Processing Unit model B2, B3 or B4 X 5444 Disk Storage Drive model 1, 2 or 3 X 5447 Disk Storage and Control model A1 orA2 X 5496 Data Recorder model 1 For Sort Specification input: IBM 129, 3741, 5444, 5447, 5496, or operator keyboardconsole. For input, work and output files: IBM 5444, 5447 For diagnostics and messages: IBM 2222, 2265, 5213 SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS 5703-SC1. For IBM 3741 support, 5703-SC1 feature #6026/#6027 is required. DOCUMENTATION (available from Mechanicsburg) Disk Sort Reference Manual (SC21-7522) (GC20-8080). TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index S /3 Bibliography PP 5703·SM1.1 Mar 83 Major Revision ------- ----:: - -~~5: ISG Do not reproduce without written permission PROGRAM PRODUCTS CCP/DISK SORT PROGRAM (Model 4 Only) 5703-SM2 PURPOSE This program is functionally compatible with the IBM System/3 model 6 Disk Sort program (5703-SM1). With the CCP/Disk Sort program, however, the user can generate an object module which can be executed as a task under control of the Communications Control program (CCP) (5703-SC1 feature #6033), or as a program in batch (non-CCP) mode. This program requires 12K bytes of main storage (exclusive of control program requirements) for both generation and execution, and automatic allocation of sort work files is not supported. SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS An IBM System/3 model 4 workstation system includes: IBM 5404 Processing Unit model A 1B (64K bytes) ... IBM 5447 Disk Storage and Control model A1 or A2 '" IBM 5213 Printer model 3 '" IBM 3277 Display Station model 1 ... at least one locally attached terminal. (Note: The IBM 3277 is supported only by CCP). SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS 5703-SC1; 5703-SC1 feature #6011. 5703-SC1 feature #6033. For execution under CCP: DOCUMENTATION (available from Mechanicsburg) Disk 50rt Reference Manual (GC21-7522) (GC20-BOBO). TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index 5/3 Bibliography PP 5703-SM2.1 MarB3 Major Revision ---.... - --- ---- Do not reproduce without written permission :: -=-= :S~5: ISG PROGRAM PRODUCTS SYSTEM/3 MODEL 6 CONVERSATIONAL UTILITY PROGRAMS 5703-UT1 PURPOSE There are three IBM System/3 Conversational Utility programs that are disk resident and operate under control of the SCP: The Keyboard Data Entry program allows the user to key data directly onto the disk. It will format records according to user specifications and output an indexed disk file which can later be processed by a user RPG II program or the Sort program. Additional functions of the program include the ability to correct records and take hash or control totals. The Keyboard Source Entry program allows the user to key source statements (RPG II) or procedures directly from the keyboard to the source library on disk. The source statements may be in the form of RPG II source programs, format records for the Keyboard Data Entry program, Utility control statements, etc. The disk library is in a format which is acceptable to the system and to the RPG II compiler. Additional features include the ability to correct source statements. The Data Interchange Utility allows the user to convert disk data files created by disk system management (such as RPG II - produced data files) into BASIC data files, and vice versa. The files are not converted in place; Instead. a new fila is creCited. The user must specify the format of his RPG II records and the fields to be converted. The final output will be acceptable to the new system. (Note: The Data Interchange Utility is not used with the model 4). Data files created by the System/3 model 6 Conversational Utilities can be processed by any System/3 program which uses disk system management to access the files. The exception is that data files that are converted by the Data Interchange Utility (DIU) program to System/3 BASIC format are accessible only by System/3 BASIC and by DIU. SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS An IBM System/3 model 4 workstation system includes: IBM 5404 Processing Unit model A 18 (64K bytes) ... IBM 5447 Disk Storage and Control ... IBM 5213 Printer ... IBM 3277 Display Station model 1 ... at least one locally attached terminal. (Note: The IBM 3277 is supported only by CCP; the Conversational Utilities do not use the 3277.) A minimum IBM System/3 model 6 configuration includes: IBM 5406 Processing Unit model B2 (8K bytes) ... IBM 5444 Disk Storage Drive ... IBM 5213 or 2222 Printer. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS 5703-SC1. DOCUMENTATION (available from Mechanicsburg) 5ystem/3 Model 4 and 6 Conversational Utilities Reference Manual (SC21-7528) ... 5/3 Bibliography (GC20-8080). TERMS a"nd CONDITIONS: See PP Index PP 5703-UT1.1 Mar83 Major Revision ------- ----- Do not reproduce without written permission :: - - :§~E: ISG PROGRAM PRODUCTS SYSTEM/3 UTILITY PROGRAM FOR 1255 MAGNETIC CHARACTER READER 5703-UT2 PURPOSE This utility program allows the IBM System/3 model 6 user to control document processing on the IBM 1255 Magnetic Character Reader. It provides a means of reading MICR-encoded documents from the 1255, accumulating document totals and amount field totals for each stacker, and placing the data from the documents on output disk and printer files. The program is designed to fulfill the basic requirements of the "ON-US" data capture run required for all Demand Deposit Application programming. The program will read fields from the documents as specified by the user and then, based on decisions indicated by the user, it will stacker select these documents into user-specified stackers. If requested, Modulus 10 or 11 checking will be performed. Then after each document has been read and stacker selected, the utility will print user-specified fields from that document. Fixed-length disk records will also be created and placed on a disk file. An additional facility provided by the program is the printing of document totals and amount field totals at end of job. Subtotals may be printed during program execution at times selected by the user. The utility program is functionally compatible with System/3 model 10 Disk System Utility program for 1255 Magnetic Character Reader. (This program is not used with the model 4.) SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT HARDWARE REOUIREMENTS This program requires an IBM 5406 Processing Unit model B3 or B4 with a Serial I/O Channel (#7081) ... IBM 5444 Disk Storage Drive model 1. 2 or 3 ... IBM 5213 Printer model 1, 2 or 3 or IBM 2222 Printer model 1 or 2... and IBM 1255 Magnetic Character Reader modell, 2 or 3. SOFTWARE REOUIREMENTS: 5703-SC1. DOCUMENTATION (available from Mechanicsburg) 1255 Utility Reference Manual (SC21-7527) (GC20-8080). TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index 5/3 Bibliography PP 5703-UT2.1 Mar 83 Major Revision ------- -------ISG PP 5703-XA 1.1 Do not reproduce without written permission ..:..::::§~§: Mar83 Major Revision PROGRAM PRODUCTS STAT/BASIC FOR SYSTEM/3 MODEL 6 5703-XA1 PURPOSE HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS STAT / BASIC is an interactive program encompassing the most commonly used statistical techniques for the analysis of numerical data. The program operates on an IBM System/3 model 6. The size of the user area required to run the STAT /BASIC procedures is a function of the number of statements in an individual procedure and the amount of data processed in short and long precision. STAT /BASIC is designed to meet the needs of the statistician, engineer, researcher or business analyst. It helps in using the computer directly for statistical analyses. A statistically-oriented user should have no difficulty in quickly learning the capabilities of the program. The interactive mode of the package allows a non-data processing-oriented user to use the program with ease, with a minimum of training. All procedures, with the exception of the transformation procedure, can be executed in short precision in a user area of 40,000 bytes with a symbol table size of 9,000 bytes. Direct use on the System/3 model 6 provides the user with fast results. Because of the interactive nature of STAT/BASIC, the user can sit at the keyboard and see the results of his analyses as they are developed. Delays and some of the sources of error familiar in batch processing are eliminated with STAT /BAS!C. DESCRIPTION STAT /BASIC consists of 40 procedures, written in the BASIC language, providing a wide range of capabilities under the following categories: Data Generation - Read ... Print Edit ... Transformation. Elementary Statistics - Cross Tabulation ... Histogram .. , Tally ... Moments ... T -test ... Chi-square. Regression and Correlation Analysis - Correlation .. , Simple Regression ... Stepwise Regression .. , Multiple Regression ... Polynomial Regression. Multivariate Analysis - Discriminant Analysis .. , Canonical Correlation ... Factor Analysis Part 1 .. , Factor Analysis Part 2. Analysis of Variance - One-way Analysis of Variance ... Factorial Design. Nonparametric Statistics - Kendall Rank Correlation ... Sign Test .. . Wilcoxon's Matched-pairs Signed-ranks Test ... Cochran a Test .. . Friedman Two-way Analysis of Variance ... Mann-Whitney U Test .. , Kendall Coefficient of Concordance '" Biserial Corrolation ... Point-biserial Correlation ... Tetrachoric Correlation ... Phi Coefficient. Time Series Analysis - Moving Average ... Seasonal Analysis ... Cyclical Analysis ... Auto-covariance and Auto-correlation ... Cross-covariance and Cross-correlation ... Triple Exponential Smoothing. Biostatistics - Survival Rate... Probit Analysis. On a System/3 model 6, the maximum size of a data matrix that can be processed is 300 rows (observations) by 30 columns (variablos). Exceptions are: For the edit and transformation programs, this limitation of 300 rows and 30 columns applies, but the number of rows (N) times the number of columns (M) must not exceed 3500 (N x M s 3500). For the chi-square and Kendall coefficient of concordance programs, the maximum size of a data matrix is 100 rows by 30 columns. HIGHLIGHTS A comprehensive set of statistical procedures. A user with a knowledge of statistics can learn the program capabilities with a minimum of effort. Interactive mode simplifies usage. Calculations performed in short or long precision. Extensive error checking with correction facilities. Instructional messages clarify procedures or options available. Use: The user may utilize any of the STAT/BASIC programs through the console keyboard with System/3 model 6. The user first types a few systems commands and the name of the desired statistical program. Following a Ready indication, STAT/BASIC guides the user through his problem by typing out procedural instructions. Alternate courses of action or options are usually in the form of questions, which the user answers by typing the appropriate replies. CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES The STAT/BASIC programs are distributed in machine-readable form for loading into the user system. Once stored, it is available to any member of the organization authorized to use the system. if confidential information is to be stored in the library, the user must take appropriate steps to safeguard against unauthorized access. SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT All procedures, with the exception of the transformation procedure, can be executed in long precision in a user area of 50,000 bytes with a symbol table size of 16,300 bytes. The transformation procedure cannot be executed in long precision; it can be executed in short precision in a user area of 50,000 bytes with a symbol table size of 10,800 bytes. IBM System/3 Model S ... The minimum system is the same as that required for System/3 BASIC, specifically IBM 5406 Processing Unit model B2 (8K) ... one IBM 5444 Disk Storage Drive model 1 .. , one IBM 5213 Printer model 1. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS STAT /BASIC is written in BASIC. To run the program on an, IBM System/3 model 6 requires the System/3 BASIC (5703-XM1) program product. DOCUMENTATION (available from Mechanicsburg) General Information Manual (GH20-1027) . TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index ------- ----.:..---=-= :§~E: ISG Do not reproduce without written permission PROGRAM PRODUCTS SYSTEM/3 BASIC 5703-XM1 PURPOSE IBM System/3 BASIC is a stand-alone, total facility interactive programming system. BASIC enables the user to enter BASIC statements, commands, utilities, BASIC data, and Desk Calculator (DCAlC) instructions all in a completely interactive environment. DESCRIPTION System programs, source programs, and data files are stored on disk for direct accessibility. The system uses a virtual memory concept to allow the user to compile and execute large programs that otherwise would not fit into main storage. System/3 BASIC, besides having a complete interactive interface to the user through the operator keyboard console, also provides the ability for continuous execution of stacked jobs without operator intervention. Input to the System!3 BASIC is in the form of commands, data, or BASIC statements from either the keyboard console or from cards. Output is to the printer and/or to the 2265 model 2 Display Station. The disk is an input or output device as well as temporary and permanent storage for all forms of user data or programs. DCAlC (Desk Calculator) is a function of BASIC allowing the user to use the system as a large, highly sophisticated electronic desk calculator. No user knowledge of programming is necessary to put DCAlC to its full use. DCAlC will give the user the ability to add, subtract, multiply, divide, and compute powers, roots, trigonometric functions, etc. Special procedures can be defined and stored into DCAlC for future use. All of the functional routines (built-in functions) within BASIC are available to the DCAlC user, except for the DET function. The user has full control over his BASIC program with the command language. Commands are analyzed and result in the requested action being performed immediately upon the system. These commands allow the user intervention before, during, and after BASIC program execution. A set of utilities are included in System/3 BASIC to allow for system generation and disk pack usage. The utilities give disk copy, file allocation, configuration, analysis, initialization, and track assignment capabilities to the user. PERFORMANCE The BASIC compiler can compile a 500-statement BASIC source program in 30 to 35 seconds. The BASIC program can be listed at a rate of approximately 60 statements-per-minute on the 5213 model 1 Printer (assuming the average statement is 40 characters long). DCAlC will respond to any user input within two seconds. SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS Minimum System Requirements: The minimum system configuration for System/3 BASIC, DCAlC, and the utilities is: An IBM 5406 Processing Unit model B2 (8K bytes), an IBM 5213 Printer model 1 or an IBM 2222 Printer model 1 and anlBM 5444 Disk Storage Drive model 1. Additional units and features supported are: IBM 5406 Processing Unit models B3 (12K bytes) and B4 (16K bytes), IBM 5213 Printer models 2 and 3, IBM 2222 Printer model 2, IBM 5496 Data Recorder with System/3 model 6 Attachment feature, IBM 129 Card Data Recorder with System/3 model 6 Card Input/Output feature, additional capacities of the IBM 5444 Disk Storage Drive, and the IBM 2265 model 2 Display Station. (Support of the 2265 requires a minimum of 12K bytes of main storage and the eight additional command keys.) .Note: A co-resident system requires a minimum of 4.90 million bytes of 5444 disk storage for operation. System/3 BASIC is not supported on the model 4. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS: None. DOCUMENTATION (av~ilable from Mechanicsburg) BASIC Reference. Manual. (GC34-0001) ... BASIC Operator's Guide (GC34-00031.. ... ~S./3 Bibliography (GC20-8080). r TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index PP 5703-XM1 ..1 Mar 83 Major Revision ------- -------- Do not reproduce without written permission = ::-:. :§~§: ISG PROGRAM PRODUCTS MATH/BASIC for SYSTEM/3 MODEL 6 5703-XM2 PURPOSE IBM System/3 MATH/BASIC is a set of conversational routines for the solution of the most frequently encountered mathematical problems in science and industry. The library operates on an IBM System/3 model 6. MATH/BASIC is designed to meet the needs of the engineer and scientist. The conversational features of MATH / BASIC allow a non-data processing-oriented user to use the programs with a minimum of training. HIGHLIGHTS A comprehensive set of mathematical routines. Calculations in short and long precision. Control of operation in the case of ill-conditioned problems and error messages. Ease-of-use due to conversational mode. DESCRIPTION MATH/BASIC consists of 44 routines providing computing capabilities in the following areas: Linear equations, matrix eigenvalue problem. Zeros of polynomials, zeros and minima of functions. Quadrature/ differentation Interpolation, approximation and smoothing. Ordinary differential equations. Discrete Fourier transform. Special functions. Linear programming. Use: The user can utilize any of the MATH/BASIC routines through a System/3 model 6 console keyboard. The user first enters a few systems commands and the name of the desired MATH/BASIC routine. Following a READY indication, MATH/BASIC guides the user through his problem by printing procedural instructions. Alternate courses of action or options are described usually in the form of questions, which the user answers by entering the appropriate replies. CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES The MATH/BASIC program is distributed in machine-readable form for loading into the user's system. Once stored, it is available to any member of the organization authorized to use the system. If confidential information is to be stored in the library, the user must take appropriate steps to safeguard against unauthorized access. SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS The minimum configuration for the IBM System/3 model 6 is the same as that required for System/3 BASIC, that is. one IBM 5406 Processing Unit model B2 (8K) ... one IBM 5444 Disk Storage Drive model 1 ... one IBM 5213 Printer model 1. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS MATH/BASIC is written in the BASIC language. To run the program on an IBM System/3 model 6 requires the System/3 BASIC (5703XM1). DOCUMENTATION (available from Mechanicsburg) General Information Manual (GH20-1128). TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index PP 5703-XM2.1 Mar83 Major Revision ------- - - - ----==-= ~~§: ISG PP 5703-XM3.1 Do not reproduce without written permission Mar 83 Major Revision PROGRAM PRODUCTS BUSINESS ANALYSIS/BASIC FOR SYSTEM/3 MODEl6 5703-XM3 PURPOSE Business Analysis/BASIC is a comprehensive set of interactive routines for use on the IBM System/3 model 6. Business Analysis/BASIC program is distributed in machine-readable form for loading into the user's system. Once stored, it is available to any member of the organization authorized to use the system. It consists of 30 routines written in the BASIC language, providing the problem-solver professional with procedures for data generation and maintenance, spread sheet analysis, investment analysis, break-even or cost-volume-profit analysis, depreciation analysis, and time series analysis. The program is designed so that a detailed knowledge of programming is not required. If the user has confidential information to be stored in disk files, it will be his responsibility to take appropriate steps to safeguard against unauthorized access. DESCRIPTION The minimum configuration for the System/3 model 6 is the same as that required for IBM System/3 BASIC, that is, one IBM 5406 Processing Unit model B2 (8K), one IBM 5444 Storage Drive modell, and one IBM 5213 Printer model 1. Business Analysis/BASIC includes 30 interactive routines for assisting the problem-solver in exercising the following functions: Spread Sheet Analysis: Investment Analysis: (available from Mechanicsburg) General Information Manual (GH20-1175) ... Promotional Flyer (G520-2527). TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index - Break-even with definite assumptions - Break-even with probabilistic assumptions Depreciation Analysis: Straight line depreciation Sum-of-years digits depreciation Declining balance depreciation Equipment units depreciation Time Series Analysis: - Compound growth rate projection Moving average Seasonal analysis Cyclical analysis Autocovariance and Autocorrelation Crosscovariance and Crosscorrelation Exponential Smoothing Simple Regression Graphic Presentation: - Histograms - Exponential Smoothing Plots Routine and File Indexing: - Business Analysis/BASIC routine index - User-created data file log Data Generation and Maintenance: - Create and update data files - Select and rearrange records in data files and spread sheet data files - Resequence records in data files and spread sheet data files - Print data files HIGHLIGHTS Comprehensive set of analytical routines to assist the user in examining investment alternatives and in preparing financial plans . . Spread sheet analysis capability for report creation and update . .• Interactive features include instructional messages, flexible control of calculations, extensive error Checking, and data editing. Use: The p:rofessional analyst can utilize any of the Business routines through the System/3 model 6 console Analysis/~ASIC keyboard. The user first enters a'few systems commands (LOGON, EDIT, etc.) and the name of the, desired Business Analysis/BASIC routine. Following a READY indication, the Business,Analysis/BASIC routine guides the user through his problem by' typing out procedural instructions. Alternative courses of action' or options . are presented in the form of questions, which the user answers byente.ring the appropriate replies. CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES ',' Business Analysis/BASIC is written in the BASIC language. To run the program on an IBM System/3 model 6 requires System/3 BASIC (5703-XM1). DOCUMENTATION Return-on-Investment computation Discounted Cash Flow analysis Loan analysis (multiple and single) Lease vs Purchase analysis Make vs Buy analysis Break-Even Analysis: - HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS - Spread Sheet data file creation and update - Spread Sheet report formatting - SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT ~'J. ...... :?~ . < ' The user must have the necessary computer configuration as described below. The user will also need the aSsociated program product for his system as mentioned under "Programming Systems... ·t ---..:.::::: :S~~ ISG PP 5704-AS1.1 Do not reproduce without written permission -~--- ---- Mar 83 Major Revision PROGRAM PRODUCTS SYSTEM/3 MODEL 15 BASIC ASSEMBLER 5704-AS1; 5704-AS2 PURPOSE The IBM System/3 model 15 Basic Assembler program is a program product that processes source programs written in the Basic Assembler language, and produces executable object programs. The program is disk resident on an IBM 5444 Disk Storage Drive or 3340 Direct Access Storage Facility or 3344 Direct Access Storage (5704-AS2 only). 5704-AS1 is used with SCP 5704-SC1, and 5704-AS2 is used with SCP 5704-SC2. DESCRIPTION The Basic Assembler language is a symbolic programming language used to write programs. Some of the features provided by the program and its language are: Mnemonic Operation Codes Symbolic Referencing of Storage Addresses Automatic Storage Assignment Address Displacement Calculation Convenient Data Representation Operand Field Expressions Source Identification - Sequence Fields Assembler Instructions Source Program Listing Cross- Reference Listing Error Checking and Diagnostic Messages Source input to the Assembler can be from the system input device (card reader, 3741 directly attached, or 3277 keyboard), from a source library, or from a source file generated by the macro processor. Work files for the Assembler can be on either a 5444 or 5445 Disk Storage Drive, or a 3340 Direct Access Storage Facility or 3344 Direct Access Storage. The Overlay Linkage Editor may be used to generate executable object programs. Model 15 Basic Assembler Device Support * ** Source Assembly Object Execution Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes·· Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes 10-48K 10-48K up to 48K up to 56K· Object program size can be up to 56K, depending on the CCP, spool and configuration options selected during system generation. Assembler and system halts are logged on the 3277. Source statements may be entered from the keyboard. Stand-Alone Programs: The Basic Assembler can be used to create a stand-alone program. The object program is punched into cards. Program loading is performed with an initial program loader through the alternate IPL device (MFCU, MFCM, or 1442). Stand-alone programs are coded entirely by the user with no dependence on other programming support. SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS * Note: The IBM 1403 printer should be equipped with the Universal Character Set feature and a PN (50-character set) interchangeable train cartridge. A 48-character set (for example, HN or AN arrangement) can be used with the Assembler; however, the user must be willing to accept substitute characters. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS 5704-SC1 for 5704-AS1; 5704-SC2 for 5704-AS2. COMPATIBILITY System/3 model 15 Basic Assembler is functionally equivalent to the Basic Assembler programs on other System/3 models. Four mnemonics are unique to model 15: Load CPU (LCP), Store CPU (SCP), Command CPU (CCP), and Supervisor Call (SVC). When converting from another System!3 model, there may be changes required in macro statements. DOCUMENTATION (available from Mechanicsburg) Assembler Reference Manual (SC21-7509) ... Components Reference Manual (GA21-9236) ... 5/3 Bibliography (GC20-8080). The Basic Assembler may be used for assembly of relocatable subroutines for use with model 15 RPG II, COBOL, or FORTRAN. The subroutines, written in the Basic Assembler language, are coded by the user and separately assembled. The process of program linking is accomplished during compilation of the RPG II, COBOL, or FORTRAN source programs by means of the Overlay Linkage Editor. 5444 Disk Storage Drive (5704-ASl only) model A2 or A3 5445 Disk Storage (5704-ASl only) modell, 2 or 3 3340 Direct Access Storage Facility model A2, B1 or B2 3344 Direct Access Storage (5704-AS2 only) model B2 3410/3411 Magnetic Tape Unit modell, 2. or 3 1403 Printer model 2, 5, or N1 3277 Display Station model 1 5424 MFCU model A 1 or A2 2560 MFCM model A 1 or A2 1442 Card Read Punch model 6 or 7 2501 Card Reader model A 1 or A2 3284 Printer model 1 1255 MCR modell, 20r3 3881 OMR model 1 3741 (directly attached) modell, 2, 3 or 4 BSCA, 1 or 2 lines, LCA, or DA Main Storage Requirements 5704-ASl 5704-AS2 Minimum System Requirements: The same as for SCp* (5704-SC1 for 5704-AS1; 5704-SC2 for 5704-AS2). TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index ------- ----:: - -~"f~ ISG PP 5704-CB1.1 Mar 83 Do not reproduce without written permission Major Revision PROGRAM PRODUCTS SYSTEM/3 MODEL 15 SUBSET ANS COBOL COMPILER AND LIBRARY 5704-CB1; 5704-CB2 PURPOSE Model 15 COBOL is a program product that operates under control of the IBM System 13 model 15 System Control Programming. 5704-CB1 is used with SCP 5704-SC1, and 5704-CB2 is used with SCP 5704-SC2. The compiler and library are disk resident on the IBM 5444 Disk Storage Drive or 3340 Direct Access Storage Facility or 3344 Direct Access Storage (5704-CB2 only). The compiler requires as input a COBOL source language program and produces as output, by means of the system's Overlay Linkage Editor, a System/3 machine language object program, either cataloged in an object library, punched into 80or 96-column cards, or written onto a diskette. System/3 COBOL supports Grade 1 Braille for both compiler listings and object program printed output. Minimum requirements include a 132-print position printer with 8 lines linch spacing (1403 Printer); the compiler requires a 14K partition in order to produce Braille listings. A user-provided elastic strip is attached over the printer hammers to produce the Braille characters. Source input to the compiler can be from the system input device (card reader, 3741 directly attached, or 3277 keyboard) or from a source library. Work files for the compiler can be on any 5444 or 5445 Disk Storage Drive or on a 3340 Direct Access Storage Facility or 3344 Direct Access Storage (5704-CB2 only). The Overlay Linkage Editor is used to generate object programs. .American National Standard COBOL Considerations The U.S~ Industry standard for COBOL is American National Standard (ANS) COBOL. ANS COBOL, X3.23-1968, was approved by the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) on August 23, 1968. The following functional processing modules of the ANSI standard are included in the System/3 model 15 Compiler. 1 1 1 1 2 1 1, 2 Nucleus Sequential Access 1, 2 0, 2 Random Access Library 0, 2 Table Handling 1, 3 Segmentation 0, 2 The first digit above represents the level of the modules included in the compiler; the second digit represents the lowest level in the American National Standards Institute Standard (0 implies that the module may be completely missing from the standard compilers). The third digit 'represents the highest level in the ANSI standard. The international standard for COBOL is ISO Recommendation Number 1989, which was approved by ISO (International Organization for Standardization) in 1972. System 13 model 15 COBOL bears the same relation to the ISO standard as to the ANSI standard, inasmuch as the two standards are identical in technical content. Random Processing - by key. Sequential Processing - by key including file loading. Direct Organization Random Processing - by relative recording number, including updating and file loading. Consecutive Processing. Standard System/3 disk labels are mandatory for all disk files. Non-standard labels cannot be used except for data records within the file. Record size can range from 1 byte to 32K bytes, and records may be processed as blocked or unblocked. Logical records may span physical disk sectors, tracks or cylinders. Multi-volume indexed files are supported. Tape File Support: The access methods supported for the 3410/3411 Magnetic Tape Subsystem are the same as those supported by other System/3 COBOL compilers. COBOL object programs can process data on magnetic tape; highlights include: Consecutive input or output files 1 - 4 tape drives Fixed length records, blocked or unblocked Variable length records, blocked or unblocked Record size from 18 to 32,768 bytes Block size from 18 to 32,768 bytes IBM Standard Labels, ANSI labels, no labels Option for two 110 areas 9-track, 800/1600 bpi 7-track, 200/556/800 bpi Single volume or multi-volume files Single file or multi-file volumes Recording format: EBCDIC (7- or 9-track) or ASCII (9-track only) Printer Support: COBOL supports the 1403 as follows: Space 0, 1, 2, or 3 before or after printing a line; skip to line number before or after printing a line; overflow detection. COBOL supports the 3284 Printer the same way it does the 1403, except that space 0 after print is not allowed. Card I/O Support: Model 15 COBOL supports the MFCU, MFCM, 1442, and 2501 as follows: MFCU MFCM* 1442 2501 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No 64 256 256 256 Extensions to the modules of American National Standard COBOL listed above, comprising: Read Punch Card Print Stacker Select (punch only) Associated file Character set (EBCDIC) - Certain language elements which are defined in higher levels of the American National Standard COBOL than those listed. * MFCM support is similar to MFCU support; six lines of card printing is possible on the MFCM (optional feature on model A1 only). - Certain language elements defined by the CODASYL Programming Language Committee but not yet included by ANSI in American National Standard COBOL. Diskette Support: Data can be read from a diskette using ACCEPT verb. In addition, for 5704-CB2 only, a directly-attached 3741 can be specified as an input or output device in the ASSIGN clause of the SELECT statement. Additions: In addition to the standard language, the following additional features are provided: 1. Indexed Organization - IBM-developed extensions consistent with those supported by the System/360 and 370 OS and DOS ANS COBOL compilers and 1130 ANS COBOL compiler. 2. ROLLOUT IROLLIN support allows a COBOL object program to be ·interrupted during execution. This is provided by invocation of a supplied program via a CALL statement (CALL "CBROLL"). ROLLOUT/ROLLIN is not supported in 5704-CB2. 3. The interval timer is supported for time-of-day functions. This is provided by invocation of a supplied (SCP) subroutine via a CALL ..'CFTOD' statement. Support of 3277 Display Station: A model 15 COBOL object program supports the 3277. as a destination device for the DISPLAY and ACCEPT commands. Record. lengths of 1 to 120 characters may be processed by ACCEPT, and records of 1 to 107 characters may be processed by DISPLAY. The 78-key Operator Console Keyboard is used for data input.· . Disk File Support: The access· meth()d~~upported for 5444, 5445, 3340 and 3344 are the same as those'supported, by other System/3 COBOL compilers, and are as follows: .~;<:;(.:;;.. .. J..;.. , . . ';-.:-""_ Sequential Organization :" i Consecutive Processing - including updating in place. Random Processing - by relative record number including updating but excluding file loading. ------- -------::-:. ISG ~ Do not reproduce without written permission :§~5: PROGRAM PRODUCTS Subset ANS COBOL Compiler and Library (cont'd) Model 15 COBOL Device Support 5444 Disk Storage Drive (5704-C81 only) model A2 or A3 5445 Disk Storage (5704-CB1 only) model 1, 2 or 3 3340 Direct Access Storage Facility model A2, 81, or B2 3344 Direct Access Storage (5704-CB2 only) model B2 3410/3411 Magnetic Tape Unit model 1, 2, or 3 1403 Printer model 2, 5, or Nl 3277 Display Station model 1 5424 MFCU model A 1 or A2 2560 MFCM model A 1 or A2 1442 Card Read Punch model 6 or 7 2501 Card Reader model A 1 or A2 3284 Printer model 1 1255 MCR modell, 2 or 3 3881 OMR model 1 3741 (directly attached) model 1, 2, 3 or 4 8SCA, 1 or 2 lines, LCA. or DA Main Storage Requirements 5704-CB1 5704-CB2 *** Compilation Execution Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes* Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes No No Yes No Yes** No 12-48K 12-48K 8-48K 8-56K*** COBOL and system halts are logged on the 3277. Source statements may be entered from the keyboard. 5704-CB2 only. See" Diskette Support". Object program size can be up to 56K, depending on the CCP, spool and configuration options selected during system generation. SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS Minimum System Requirements: Same as for SCP (5704-SC1 for 5704-CB1; 5704-SC2 for 5704-CB2). For the IBM 1403 Printer, the HN print arrangement is recommended. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS 5704-SC1 for 5704-CB1; 5704-SC2 for 5704-CB2. COMPATIBILITY System/3 COBOL is upward compatible with the DOS and OS ANS COBOL compilers and is a superset of 1130 ANS COBOL providing growth from 1130 through System/3 to System/360 and 370. ROLLOUT support is unique to model 15 COBOL. Migration to and from System/3 COBOL requires little source program conversion to effect the transition. Certain 1130 library routines are not included in the System/3 COBOL library, i.e., CALLed subprograms. System/3 model 15 COBOL is source language compatible with COBOL on other System/3 models, except for differences due to different hardware. A COBOL source program can be recompiled by a model 15 COBOL compiler without changes to the source program (assuming the same I/O). The resulting object program can be executed under control of the appropriate model 15 SCP and will produce output identical to that on the previous system (assuming equivalent I/O devices and data). Any of the disk data files created by any System/3 program using disk system management (e.g., RPG II, Sort and COBOL) can be processed by any System/3 program which uses disk system management to access the file. Scratch files (RETAIN-S) created on other System/3 models are not accessible on the model 15. Files on magnetic tape are similarly compatible between the System/3 models, except only the model 15 supports multi-file tape volumes. The directly-attached 3741 Data Station or Programmable Workstation is supported only in 5704-CB2. DOCUMENTATION (available from Mechanicsburg) COBOL Reference Manual (GC28-6452) ... Disk Concepts and Planning Guide (GC21-7571). ... S /3 Bibliography (GC20-8080). TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index PP 5704-CB1.2 Mar 83 Major Revision ------- -------.:..=: :5fE: ISG PP 5704-F01.1 Do not reproduce without written permission Mar 83 Major Revision PROGRAM PRODUCTS SYSTEM/3 MODEL 15 DISK FORTRAN IV 5704-F01; 5704-F02 PURPOSE Model 15 FORTRAN IV is a program product that operates under control of the IBM System/3 model 15 SCPo 5704-F01 is used with SCP 5704-SC1; 5704-F02 is used with SCP 5704-SC2. The compiler and library are disk resident on the IBM 5444 Disk Storage Drive or the IBM 3340 Direct Access Storage Facility or IBM 3344 Direct Access Storage (5704-F02 only). The compiler requires as input a FORTRAN source language program and produces as output, by means of the system's Overlay Linkage Editor, a System/3 machine language object program, either cataloged in an object library or punched into 80- or 96-column cards or written onto a diskette. A source program listing, diagnostic messages and main storage map can be requested. Card I/O Support: The model 15 FORTRAN supports the MFCU, MFCM, 1442, and 2501 as follows: Read Punch Card Print Stacker Select·· Combined File··· Character set (EBCDIC) The model 15 FORTRAN IV language is identical to the FORTRAN IV language for other System/3 models. It contains those features defined in American National Standard Basic FORTRAN, X3.10-1966 and additional language features and capabilities previously available only with certain IBM Full FORTRAN IV Compilers. The model 15 FORTRAN IV Library contains mathematical and service subroutines required during execution to perform arithmetic operations, input and output conversion, and input and output control. The model 15 FORTRAN IV Library also includes a Commercial Subroutine Package which is equivalent in function to the 1130 Commercial Subroutine Package insofar as is meaningful in terms of System/3 model 15 devices and data management. The interval timer is supported for time-of-day functions. This is provided by a supplied SCP subroutine, CFTOD. Support of 3277 Display Stotlon: A model 15 FORTRAN object program can support the 3277 in oither a split-screen or full-screen mode. Using a split-screen, an input file (up to 125 bytes) and/or an output file (up to 125 bytes) can be specified. In full-screen mode, 279 bytes can be read or written. The Operator Console Keyboard is used for data input. Disk File Support: The access methods supported for 5444, 5445, 3340 and 3344 are the same as those supported by FORTRAN on other System/3 models, and are as follows: Sequential I/O Consecutive processing of formatted or unformatted records is supported. Record size of formatted records can range from 1 to 256 bytes. Record size of unformatted records can range from 1 to 32,767 bytes. Direct Access I/O Random processing is by relative record number; consecutive processing can also be performed. Record size can range from 1 to 32,767 bytes, formatted or unformatted. Standard System/3 disk labels are mandatory for all disk files. Non-standard labels cannot be used except as data records within the file. Indexed files are not supported. Tape File Support: The access methods supported for the 3410/3411 Magnetic Tape Subsystem are the same as those supported by FORTRAN for other System/3 models. FORTRAN object programs can process data on magnotic tape; highlights include: '~ Consecutive input or output files 1" - 4 tape drivos Formatted or unformatted records Record size from 18 to 32,767 bytes ...." Block size from 18 to 32,767 bytes , IBM Standard Labels, ANSI Labels, no labels 9-track;,800/1600 bpi 7-track;200/556/800 bpi Single volujn,e or multi-volume files Single ~ileilor:'!:'lulti-file volumes Recording format: EBCDIC (7- or 9-track) or ASCII (9-track only) Printer Support: The FORTRAN language supports the 1403 as follows: Space 0: 1.' or 2 ~eJ9,r,e"C?~i\!lIjter printing~ line ... skip to ~ine 1 before or after printing a Ilne/ ... ' overflow detection. Commercial Subroutines support the 1403 as follow's: 'Spa~immediately. 0,1, 2. or 3 lines ... skip immediately to a specifi~d lin~;h~niber., ' " , ," FORTRAN supports the 3284 Printer the same' way' it, does the 1403, " except that space 0 after print is not::allowed.· MFCM* 1442 2501 Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes No No No Yes No No No No 64 256 256 256 * MFCM support is similar to MFCU support; six lines of card printing is possible on the MFCM (optional feature on model A1 only). ** Commercial Subroutines support stacker selection of cards from the secondary hopper of the MFCU or MFCM. DESCRIPTION Source input to the compiler can be from the system input device (card reader, 3741 directly attached, or 3277 keyboard) or from the source library. Work files for the compiler can be on any 5444 or 5445 Disk Storage Drive or on 3340 Direct Access Storage Facility or on the 3344 Direct Access Storage. The Overlay Linkage Editor is used to generate object programs. MFCU Yes Yes Yes No No *** When using the Commercial Subroutines, the MFCU2, MFCM2, or 1442 may be defined as both input and output. Diskette Support: 5704- F01 supports the 3741 directly attached as an input or output device for compilation only. 5704-F02, in addition to compilation, supports the 3741 as an inputloutput devic e during object program execution. Model 15 FORTRAN Device Support Compilation Execution Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes· Yes Yes Yes 5444 Disk Storage Drive (5704-F01 only) model A2 or A3 5445 Disk Storage (5704-F01 only) model 1, 2 or 3 3340 Direct Access Storage Facility model A2, B1, or B2 3344 Direct Access Storage (5704- F02 only) model B2 3410/3411 Magnetic Tape Unit model 1, 2, or 3 1403 Printer model 2, 5, or N1 3277 Display Station model 1 5424 MFCU model A1 or A2 2560 MFCM model A1 or A2 1442 Card Read Punch model 6 or 7 2501 Card Reader model A1 or A2 3284 Printer model 1 1255 MCR model 1, 2 or 3 3881 OMR model 1 3741 (directly attached) model 1, 2, 3, or 4 BSCA, 1 or 2 lines, LCA or DA Main Storage Requirements 5704-F01 5704-F02 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes No No Yes No Yes··· No 10-48K 10-48K 8-48K 8-56K·* * FORTRAN and system halts are logged on the 3277. Source statements may be entered from the keyboard. ** Object program size can be up to 56K, depending on the CCP, spool and configuration options selected during system generation. *** 5704-F02 only; see "Diskette Support". SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS Minimum System Requirements: Same as for SCP (5704-SC1 for 5704-F01; 5704-SC2 for 5704-F02). SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS 5704-SCl for 5704-F01; 5704-SC2 for 5704-F02. COMPATIBILITY System/3 Model 15 FORTRAN IV is sourco language compatible with FORTRAN IV on other Systom/3 modols. A FORTRAN IV source program can be recompiled by a modol 15 FORTRAN IV compiler without changes to the source program (assuming the same I/O). The resulting object program can be executed under control of the appropriate model 15 SCP and will produce output identical to that on the previous system (assuming equivalent I/O devices and data). The FORTRAN IV compiler accepts source programs written in the IBM System/360 Basic FORTRAN IV language, which encompasses American National Standard Basic FORTRAN as defined in X3.101966. The compiler also accepts source programs written in the IBM 1130 Basic FORTRAN IV language with minor modifications. --.--- ---:: - - :§"f5: ISG Do not reproduce without written permission PROGRAM PRODUCTS System/3 Mdl15 Disk FORTRAN IV (cont'd) DOCUMENTATION (available from Mechanicsburg) FORTRAN IV Reference Manual (SC28-6874) ... FORTRAN IV Commercial Subroutines (SC28-6875) ... Disk Concepts and Planning Guide (GC21-7671) ... S/3 Bibliography (GC20-8080). TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index PP 5704-F01.2 Mar 83 Major Revision ----- ------":':=::::5f§: ISG PP 5704-RG1.1 Do not reproduce without written permission -~- Mar83 Major Revision PROGRAM PRODUCTS SVSTEM/3 MODEL 15 RPG II 5704-RG1; 5704-RG2 PURPOSE but excluding file loading. Model 15 RPG II is a program product that operates under control of the System/3 model 15 System Control Programming. 5704-RG1 is used with SCP 5704-SC1, and 5704-RG2 is used with SCP 5704-SC2. RPG II is disk resident on the 5444 Disk Storage Drive or 3340 Direct Access Storage Facility or 3344 Direct Access Storage (5704-RG2 only). It requires as input an RPG II source language program and produces as output a System/3 model 15 machine language object program, either cataloged in an object library or punched into 80- or 96-column cards, or written onto a diskette. A source program listing, diagnostic messages, and a main storage map can be requested. DESCRIPTION To use the RPG II compiler, the user supplies information about the job to be processed. The job can be described on specification sheets prior to entering the source statements into the. system. The specification sheets are: Auto-Report, Control Card and File Description, Extension and Line Counter, Telecommunications, Input, Calculation and Output- Format. Source Input to the compiler can be from the system input device (card reader, 3741 directly attached, or 3277 keyboard) or from a source library. Work files for the compiler can be on either a 5444 or 5445 Disk Storage Drive, or on a 3340 Direct Access Storage Facility or 3344 Direct Access Storage (6704-RG2 only). The Overlay Linkage Editor, invoked by the compiler, is used to generate overlays, executable object programs, etc. (On other System/3 models, RPG II uses its own linkage editor rather than the system's Overlay Linkage Editor.) The user can request non-link-edited output from the model 15 RPG II compiler, allowing modification of the control statements prior to the execution of the Overlay Linkage Editor. In addition to the functions provided by S/3 model 10 Disk RPG II, model 15 RPG II provides the following capabilities: Model 15 RPG II includes the following support that is available as separate features in some of the other System/3 models: Telecommunications, Auto-Report, 5445 and Tape support. Indexed Organization Random processing - by key. Sequential processing - by key including file loading. Direct Organization Random Processing - by relative record number. including updating and file loading. Consecutive Processing Standard System/3 disk labels are mandatory for all disk files. Non-standard labels cannot be used except as data records within the file. Record size can range from 1 to 9,999 bytes, and records can be processed as blocked or unblocked. Logical records may span physical disk sectors, tracks or cylinders. Tape File Support: The access methods supported for the 3410/3411 Magnetic Tape Subsystem are the same as those supported by other System/3 RPG II compilers. RPG II object programs can process data or record address files on magnetic tape. Highlights of tape support include: Consecutive input or output files 1 - 4 tape drives Fixed length records, blocked or unblocked Variable length records. blocked or unblocked Record size from 18 to 9,999 bytes Block size from 18 to 9,999 bytes IBM Standard Labels. ANSI labels. no labels Option for two I/O areas 9-track, 800/1600 bpi 7-track, 200/556/800 bpi Single volume or multi-volume files Single file or multi-file volumes Recording format: EBCDIC or ASCII Program options to Rewind or Rewind/Unload at end of job. Support of 3340 Direct Access Storage Facility, 2560 MFCM, 2501 Card Reader, 3284 Printer, 1255 Magnetic Character Reader, and 3277 Display Station (with operator console keyboard). Printer Support: RPG 1\ supports the 1403 Printer as follows: Space 0, 1, 2. or 3 before or after printing a line; skip to line number before or after printing a line; overflow detection; first page forms alignment. Support of 3344 Direct Access Storage (5704-RG2 only). RPG II supports the 3284 Printer the same way it does the 1403, except that space 0 after print is not allowed. Support of interval timer for time-of-day function. Device Independent Data Management - a sequential file is defined whose assignment to a device can be specified by an OCl FILE statement when the object program is executed. The sequential file can be input (2501, 1442, MFCU, MFCM, 3741 directly attached, 5444, 5445, 3340, 3344 or '3410/3411) or output (1403, 3284, 1442, MFCU, 3741 directly attached, MFCM, 5444, 5445, 3340, 3344 or 3410/3411) but not update, add or combined. Specifications unique to a particular device, such as space, skip, and stacker select are not allowed for this kind of file. Additional index space - for 5444, 5445, 3340 or 3344 indexed files, an optional File Description Specification entry, INDEX, permits additional main storage to be used to accommodate more sectors of file index. This is advantageous when sequentially processing indexed files. Card I/O Support: RPG II supports the M FCU, M FCM, 1442, and 2501 as follows: Read Punch Card Print Stacker Select Combined File Character set (EBCDIC) MFCU MFCM 1442 2501 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes No No No No 64 256 256 256 RPG II support of the MFCM is identical to the System/360 model 20 RPG support, except for certain situations involving stacker selection and combined files. Note: 5704-RG2 supports an 'external buffers' option and does not support B-type inquiry programs. Card input or output files for which stacker selection is not specified may be double buffered. Auto-Report: RPG II Auto-Report enhances the RPG II language by providing functions which eliminate much of the preparation and coding work normally done by the user. It is specifically designed to facilitate report preparation. Diskette Support: RPG II supports the 3741 directly attached as an input or output device through device independent data management or standard data management. Auto- Report executes as a preprocessor to input is RPG II source statements and Auto-Report produces a diagnostic listing, statements with generated or copied RPG ,calls the RPG II compiler for execution. the RPG II Compiler. The Auto-Report statements. replaces the Auto-Report II source statements and Telecommunications Support: The first and/or second Binary Synchronous Communications Adapter (BSCA) and the Local Communications Adapter are supported through the use of the RPG II Telecommunications Specifications and the addition of BSCA as a device entry on the RPG II File Description Specification. (The Display Adapter and the BSCC are not supported by the RPG II Telecommunications support.) The support is identical to that provided by other system/3 Telecommunications features, and it includes: Support of 3277 Display Station: The 3277 is an integral part of the system and is used as the system console. A model 15 RPG II object ... program can access the 3277 as an input file (up to 120 bytes), as an output file (up to 120 bytes). as an update file (up to 279 bytes), or as a display file (up to 35 bytes). The 78-key Operator Console Keyboard is used for data input. The program function keys 1-9 can be tested by mear,s of a supplied subroutine,SUB,R89. Modes: Receive only ... Receive with conversational reply··· ... Transmit only ... Transmit with conversational reply·** ... Alternate transmit and receive file.·** ••• Not supported in communication with 2770 and 2780. 6670 (as a 2770). Disk File Support: The aCcess methods supported for 5444, 5445, 3340 and 3344 are the same as those supported by other system/3 RPG II compilers. and are as follows: '. RPG II language features supported: Input, Output and Combined files ... demand files for Transmit and Receive ", Blocking and deblocking of records ... Dual I/O areas. Sequential Organization BSCA features, options, and capabilities supported: Manual call ... manual answer ... Auto-call ... Auto-answer '" Medium Speed '" High Speed ... Station Selection... EBCDIC data transparency ... intermediate block checking ... EBCDIC or ASCII data and data link control characters. File translation of ASCII data can be accomplished by proper use of the file translation facility of RPG II . Consecutive Processing - including.updating in place. Random Processing - by relative record number including updating ...... ------- ----=- - :§~E: ISG PP 5704-RG1.2 Do not reproduce without written permission Mar 83 Major Revision PROGRAM PRODUCTS System/3 Model 15 RPG II (cont'd) For additional information, see the description of the model 10 Disk RPG II Telecommunications feature (5702-RG1, feature #6000/#6002). DOCUMENTATION (available from Mechanicsburg) Communication with the 5231 model 2 is in Receive mode only. The 5231 model 2 is supported as a 3741 model 2 or4. Yes Yes Introduction to RPG 1/ (GC21-7514) ... RPG 1/ Reference Manual (SC21-7504) ... RPG 1/ Additional Topics Programmer's Guide (GC21-7567) ... RPG 1/ Disk File Processing Programmer's Guide (GC21-7566) ... RPG 1/ Auto-Report General Information (GC21-7563) ... Auto-Report Reference Manual (SC21-5057) ... RPG 1/ Telecommunications Programming Reference Manual (SC21-7507) ... Disk Concepts and Planning Guide (GC21-7571). ... 5/3 Bibliography (GC20-8080). Yes Yes TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes PURPOSE Yes Yes Yes* Yes Yes Yes The RPG II 3270 Display Control feature provides telecommunications services for local or remote 3270 devices. The program can be automatically linked into the RPG II application program via the SPECIAL file exit capability on the RPG II File Description Specification Sheet. Neither the Assembler nor the RPG II Telecommunications feature is required. Yes Yes DESCRIPTION Yes Yes The following services are provided by the 3270 Display Control Feature: Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes**** Yes**** System/3 Model 15 RPG II Device Support 5444 Disk Storage Drive (5704- RG 1 only) model A2 or A3 5445 Disk Storage (5704- RG 1 only) model 1, 2 or 3 3340 Direct Access Storage Facility model A2, B1, or B2 3344 Direct Access Storage (5704-RG2 only) model B2 3410/3411 Magnetic Tape Unit model 1, 2, or 3 Compilation Execution RPG 113270 DISPLAY CONTROL FEATURE Feature #16005/#6006 1403 Printer model 2, 5, or N 1 3277 Display Station model 1 5424 MFCU model A1 or A2 2560 MFCM model A1 or A2 1442 Card Read Punch model 6 or 7 2501 Card Reader model A1 or A2 3284 Printer model 1 1255 MCR model 1, 2 or 3 3881 OMR model 1 3741 (directly attached) model 1, 2, 30r4 BSCA, 1 or 2 lines. LCA. or DA Main Storage Requirements 5704-RG1 5704-RG2 No No RPG II access to 3270 Display System Terminals attached via the Display Adapter (DA), the Local Communications Adapter (LCA), or the Binary Synchronous Communications Adapter (BSCA). Automatic buffering and queuing of terminal data Yes No Yes Yes** 10-48K 10-48K 8-48K*** 8-56K***** A display formatting interface which permits the support of 3270 devices with coding in RPG II * RPG II and system halts are logged on the 3277. statements may be entered from the keyboard. Source ** For a list of terminals supported, see the model 5 SCP pages. *** When a program generates object code that exceeds the partition size as specified, overlays will be generated to fit. Not all programs - even with overlays - can fit into the stated partition size. **** Requires SCP subroutine; RPG II SPECIAL exit is used. ***** The discussion of overlays above (***) also applies to 5704-RG2. In addition, object program size can be up to 56K, depending on the CCP, spool and configuration options selected during system generation. SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS Minimum System Requirements: Same as for model 15 SCP (5704-SC1 for 5704-RG1; 5704-SC2 for 5704-RG2). SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS 5704-SC1 for 5704-RG1; 5704-SC2 for 5704-RG2. COMPATIBILITY Programs: System/3 model 15 RPG II is source language compatible with RPG II on other System/3 models, except for differences due to different hardware. An RPG II source program can be recompiled by a model 15 RPG II compiler, without changes to the source program (assuming the same I/O). The resulting object program can be executed under control of the appropriate model 15 SCP and will produce output identical to that on the previous system (assuming equivalent I/O devices and data). The System/3 inline inquiry subroutine (SUBR95) is not supported by model 15 RPG II. but the program function keys 1-9 can be tested by using a different subroutine, SUBR89. Data: Any of the disk data files created by any System/3 program using disk system management (e.g., RPG II, Sort, and COBOL) can be processed by any System/3 program which uses disk system management to access the file. Scratch fiies (RETAiN-S) created on other System/3 models are not accessible on the model 15. Files on magnetic tape are similarly compatible between System 3 models, except only the model 15 supports multifile tape volumes. Complete line control procedures are provided Up to 18 terminals may be supported Provides the capability of coding one or more applications within one program. No task switching is provided. Two subroutines are provided. SUBR13 allows an RPG II program to support 3270s without using CCP. SUBR14 provides upward compatibility with CCP, requiring only program recompilation, assuming the RPG II program meets the CCP requirements. Terminals Supported The following terminals and. communications facilities are supported under the RPG II 3270 Display Control Feature: With the Display Adapter 3277 3284 3286 3288 Display Station (model 1 or 2) Printer (model 1 or 2) Printer (model 1 or 2) Line Printer (model 2) With the Local Communications Adapter (LCA) or Binary Synchronous Communications Adapter (BSCA) 3275 Display Station and Control, or 3271 Display Control Unit (model 1 or 2), with: 3277 3284 3286 3288 Display Station (model 1 or 2) Printer (model 1 or 2) Printer (model 1 or 2) Line Printer (model 2) SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS Note: The RPG II 3270 Disr.lay Control feature is not supporte.d und.er SCP 6704-SC2 (model 150 . . ... ' '; Mlni':'lum System Requirements: In addition to the mini.mtirft~SYS,tem reqUirements of the SCP (5704-SC1), the RPG II 3270 Dlsplay:Control feature requires one of the following: Display Adaptf,tr,(DA), the Local Communications Adapter (LCA), or the Binary Synchronous Communi'.~. er'~Terminals cations Ad~pter (BSCA), plus one of the devices liste~.• ~,u~. Supported . ..;I.;,ii: ~~'Ii.jIII, • Using SUBR13, approximately 10K-12~bytes are a~,ded to the size of the object program. Using SUBR14, :',approximately 4.3K bytes are added to the size of the object program.· .- SOFTW~RE·REQUIREM~NTS " S704-SC1; 5704-RG1 .' ,'~. ... ' ""I' . ------- ----- Do not reproduce without written permission :: - -~'=?'E: ISG .PROGRAM. PRODUCTS System/3 Model 15 RPG II (cont'd) COMPATIBILITY The RPG II 3270 Display Control Feature is functionally compatible with the System/3 model 8/10 and System/3 model 12 RPG II 3270 Display Control feature. DOCUMENTATION (available from Mechanicsburg) , System/3 RPG /I 3270 Display Control Feature Reference and Logic Manual (SC21-5161) ... System/3 Bibliography (GC20-8080). PP 5704-RG1.3 Mar 83 Major. Revision ------- - - - -- Do not reproduce without written permission :: - - :§'f§: ISG PROGRAM PRODUCTS SYSTEM/3 MODEL 15 DISK SORT 5704-SM1; 5704-SM9 PURPOSE The IBM System/3 model 15 Disk Sort program is a program product that sorts a file into ascending or descending sequence. It is resident on an IBM 5444 Disk Storage Drive or an IBM 3340 Direct Access Storage Facility or IBM 3344 Direct Access Storage (5704-SM9 only). 5704-SM1 is used with SCP 5704-SC1, and 5704-SM9 is used with SCP 5704-SC2. DESCRIPTION Input file: From 1 to 8 files may be input to the Disk Sort Program. These files may be on 5444 or 5445 Disk Storage drives, 3340 Direct Access Storage Facility, 3344 Direct Access Storage, 3410/3411 Magnetic Tape Subsystem, card reader, or 3741 directly attached. A disk input file can have sequential, indexed or direct organization. For a disk file, the input record size can be from 1 to 9,999 bytes. A tape input file can have fixed length records, either blocked or unblocked; variable length tape records are not supported. The maximum input tape record or block size is 9,999 bytes, and the minimum is 18 bytes. Input tape files can be 9-track 800/1600 bpi or 7-track 200/556/800 bpi. The tape file can be recorded in either EBCDIC or ASCII code. Input can be either a single volume file or a multi-volume file. For a diskette input file, the record size can be only 96 bytes. Work file: A work file can be resident on a 5444 or 5445 Disk Storage Drive, or on a 3340 Direct Access Storage Facility or 3344 Direct Access Storage. Work space can be specified by the user or can be automatically allocated by the program. Directed auto-allocate references to units 03 or 04 on the 3344 Direct Access Storage is interpreted to mean any of the four logical volumes on the drive. Output file: The output file can be resident on a 5444 or 5445 Disk Storage Drive, or on a 3340 Direct Access Storage Facility or on 3344 Direct Access Storage, or on a unit of the 3410/3411 Magnetic Tape Subsystem. A disk output file can have sequential organization only. Characteristics of tape output files are the same as for tape input files, described above. The maximum output record size for disk or tape is 4,096 bytes. Output of the program will be in one of three formats: Tag (ADDROUT), tag-along, or summary tag-along. Features Records can be selected or omitted, and reformatted. Specified records may be forced ahead of others. An alternate collating sequence can be specified. Control fields can be in different locations in the records. The total length of the control fields can be from 1 to 256 bytes; there is no other limit on the number of control fields. Control fields can be sorted in ascending or descending sequence, or mixed (some ascending and some descending). Control fields can be sorted using only the digit or zone portion of the character. The fields can be packed or unpacked decimal, or character formats. Records containing identical control fields can be combined by summarizing specified fields into one record. Use: Specifications are described on a simple, RPG-like coding sheet. These specifications are entered into the system using the system input device (card reader, 3741 directly attached, or 3277 keyboard), or they can be stored in the source library on disk. Sort control card diagnostics and messages may be displayed on the system logging device (CRT, 1403 or 3284). The program can be executed in a multiprogramming environment and requires from 8K to 48K bytes of main storage, exclusive of SCP requirements. SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS Minimum System Requirements: Same as for SCP (5704-SC1 for 5704-SM1; 5704-SC2 for 5704-SM9). SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS 5704-SC1 for 5704-SM1; 5704-SC2 for 5704-SM9. COMPATIBILITY The System /3 model 15 Disk Sort program is compatible with the Disk Sort programs used on other System/3 models. DOCUMENTATION (available from Mechanicsburg) Disk Sort Reference Manual (SC21-7522). ... System/3 Bibliography (GC20-8080). TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index PP 5704-SM1.1 Mar 83 Major Revision ------- ----=--~'fs: ISG Do not reproduce without written permission j)ROGRAM PRODUCTS SYSTEM/3 MODEL 15 MAGNETIC TAPE SORT 5704-SM2; 5704-SMS PURPOSE The IBM System/3 model 15 Magnetic Tape Sort Program is a program product that sorts a tape file into ascending or descending sequence. It is resident on an IBM 5444 Disk Storage Drive or an IBM 3340 Direct Access Storage Facility or IBM 3344 Direct Access Storage (5704-SM8 only). 5704-SM2 is used with SCP 5704-SC1, and 5704-SM8 is used with SCP 5704-SC2. A configuration that includes three or four tape units is required. Input file: The input file resides on any unit of the 3410/3411 Magnetic Tape Subsystem. The input file can have fixed length records, either blocked or unblocked. (Variable length records are not supported). The maximum input record or block size is 9,999 bytes. The minimum input record or block size is 18 bytes. Input tape files can be 9-track 800/1600 bpi or 7-track 200/556/800 bpi. The file can be recorded in either EBCDIC (7- or 9-track) or ASCII (9-track only) code. Input can be either a single volume file or a multi-volume file. Work files: Three work tapes are required: A fourth can be utilized, if available. Work tapes can be either 7 - or 9-track (see restrictions below). Work tapes must be single volume only (not multi-volume). Output file: The output file resides on ~ny unit of the 3410/3411 Magnetic Tape Subsystem. Characteristics of tape output files are the same as for tape input files, described above. Output is a file of records containing the sort control fields and / or the data fields the user has specified. (The tag (ADDROUT) and summary tag-along sort capabilities of the Disk Sort are not supported in the Tape Sort.) Restrictions: To utilize all of the functions of this program, at least three 9-track work tapes must be available. If one or more of the work tapes is 7 -track, then only those sort functions that relate to the standard System/3 64-character set (EBCDIC) are supported. As a result, sorts of binary data, packed or unpacked decimal data or sorts on zones are not allowed in these 7-track configurations. Features Records can be selected or omitted, and reformatted. Specified records may be forced ahead of others. An alternate collating sequence can be specified. A checkpoint/ restart facility is supported. Control fields can be in different locations in the records. The total length of the control fields can be from 1 to 256 bytes; there is no other limit on the number of control fields. Control fields can be sorted using only the digit or zone portion of the character. The fields can be packed or unpacked decimal, or character formats. • Control fields can be sorted in ascending or descending sequence, or mixed (some ascending and some descending). Use: Specifications are described on a simple, RPG-like coding sheet. These specifications are entered into the system using the system input device (card reader, 3741 directly attached, or 3277 keyboard), or they can be stored in the source library on disk. Sort control card diagnostics and messages may be displayed on the system logging device (CRT, 1403 or 32S4). The program can be executed in a multiprogramming environment and requires SK to 4SK bytes of main storage, exclusive of SCP requirements. SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS Minimum System Requirements: Same as for SCP (5704-SC1 for 5704-SM2; 5704-SC2 for 5704-SMS). In addition, at least three tape drives of the 3410/3411 Magnetic Tape Subsystem are required. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS 5704-SC1 for 5704-SM2; 5704-SC2 for 5704-SMS. COMPATIBILITY The model 15 MaQnotic Tape Sort Program is functionally compatible with the Disk ReSident Magnetic Sort Programs for other System/3 models. DOC:UMENTATION . (available from Mechanicsburg) Tape Sort Reference Manual (SC21-7572). (GC20-S0S0). TERMS and CONDITIONS: ,See PP Index S/3 Bibliography PP 5704-SM2.1 Mar 83 Major Revision ------- -------.:. ::-::. ISG Do not reproduce without written permission :§~§: PROGRAM PRODUCTS SYSTEM/3 MODEL 15 CCP/DISK SORT 5704-SM7 PURPOSE The IBM System/3 model 15 CCP/Disk Sort program is a program product that is used to sort a file into ascending or descending sequence. It is resident on an IBM 3340 Direct Access Storage Facility or IBM 3344 Direct Access Storage. 5704-SM7 is used with SCP 5704-SC2. With the CCP/Disk Sort program, the user can generate an object module which can be executed as a task under control of the Communications Control Program (CCP) (5704-SC2, feature #6011/#6012), or as a program under control of the SCP in a non-CCP partition. All Disk Sort functions are available in the CCP/Disk Sort program, including tag, tag-along and summary tag-along sorts, with the following exceptions or requirements: For generation, only 12K bytes of main storage is used. For the size of the generated program, 12K to 48K can be However, CCP does not allow a program greater than 32K. Only disk input files can be specified. (From 1 to 8 input files may be used.) Deferred mount of the output file is not supported, and the output file cannot be written over the input file. Automatic work file allocation is not supported. Work record lengths cannot be less than 3 bytes. Use: To use this program, two steps are necessary: Generation: Using information from OCl FILE statements (for input, work and output files) and sort specifications, this program generates an object module which is cataloged into the object library. Generation is done in a non-CCP partition. Execution: The CCP system or terminal operator calls the generated object program by entering the name of the program, similar to calling any other program under CCP control. A generated program can be loaded in a batch partition by the system operator. SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS Minimum System Requirements: Same as for SCP (5704-SC2). SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS 5704-SC2. DOCUMENTATION (available from Mechanicsburg) Disk Sort Reference Manual (SC21-7522) (GC20-8080). TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index S /3 Bibliography PP 5704-SM7.1 Mar 83 Major Revision ------- - - - -- PP 5704-UT1.1 Do not reproduco without written permission :: - - :§'f~ ISG MarS3 Major Revision PROGRAM PRODUCTS SYSTEM/3 MODEL 15 DISK RESIDENT CARD UTILITIES 5704-UT1; 5704-UT3 PURPOSE This IBM System/3 program product is resident on an IBM 5444 Disk Storage Drive or an IBM 3340 Direct Access Storage Facility or IBM 3344 Direct Access Storage (5704-UT3 only). 5704-UT1 is used with SCP 5704-SC1 and 5704-UT3 is used with SCP 5704-SC2. It provides the following programs that support SO- or 96-column card files: Sort/Collate, List, Reproduce/Interpret, and Gangpunch. (The following programs are not provided in 5704-UT1 or 5704-UT3 but are available in the model 10 Utilities, 5701-UT1 and 5702-UT1: Data Recording, Data Verifying and SO-96 Conversion Program.) DESCRIPTION Sort/Collate Program - Functionally identical to the model 10 Sort/Collate Program (see 5701-UT1), the model 15 program also supports the 2560 MFCM. List Program - Functionally identical to the model 10 96-column List Program (see 5701- UT1), the model 15 program supports input from 5424 MFCU, 2560 MFCM, 1442 Card Read Punch, or 2501 Card Reader. Printed output is directed to the 1403 or 32S4 Printer. Reproduce/Interpret Program - Functionally identical to the model 10 Reproduce/Interpret Program (see 5701-UT1), the model 15 program supports: MFCU-1 input and MFCU-2 output, or MFCM-1 input and MFCM-2 output, or 2501 input and 1442 output. Gangpunch Program - The model 15 Gangpunch Program provides the following capabilities: Interspersed master-card gangpunching: The master and detail cards are intermixed in the primary file. Count-controlled gangpunching: A fixed or variable counter may be used to punch a specified number of detail cards. The master card is in the secondary file and the detail cards are in the primary file. Match master cards and detail cards on a control field and punch into the detail card if a match occurs: The master card is in the secondary file and the detail card is in the primary file. The following functions may be performed with any of the major types of gangpunching described above: Offset gangpunching ... gangpunching consecutive numbers into detail cards ... 9angpunching a constant into detail cards ... card interpretation (entire card or only what is punched) •.. selection of a single type of master card from many master cards ... selection of a single type of detail card from many detail cards. The Gangpunch Program supports the following devices: For count-controlled and match fields processing - MFCU2 input and MFCU1 output, or - MFCM2 input and MFCM1 output, or - 2501 input and 1442 output. For interspersed processing - MFCUl input and output, or - MFCM1 input and output, or - 1442 input and output. Use: The programs described above can be executed in a multiprogramming environment and require main storage, exclusive of SCP requirements, as follows: (Note: The minimum partition size is SK.) Sort/Collate ,List Program SK* 3K 6K 6K .Reprod~ce/lnterprot ;Gangp~nch Additional main storage is used, if available. SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT t:t,AR DW,f\R E, REQUIREMENTS ,l MinimumSy~tem Roqulrome~ts: Same as for SCP (5704-SCl for 5704-UT1; 5704~SC2 for 5704,:,UT3), The devices required for the particular program (c:iescribedabove) must be available. v:' , '" "i , SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS ,~:;,c l;,/<,~; ~1r> I . !,. , 5704-SC1 for 5704";,UT1; 5?p4-'S~2for 5704~~T3. ",;(COMPAlIBILITY. ", The model 15 Disk Re~ident C~id"tutilities,. that" have, model 10 equival,ents are functionally c~"1RIl~ible, ,to,~the 'm?~tel' 10 versions. Operation of the programsls.'dlfferent,~due o.tol.ji>, the model 15 system / operator interface. ,,",I,,',, .•:"". . , DOCUMENTATION (available from Mechanicsburg) Sort/Col/ate and Card Utilities Reference Manual (SC21-7529) ... 5/3 Bibliography (GC20-S0aO). TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index --------------- PP 5705-AS1.1 Do not reproduce without written permission = - - :§~§: ISG Mar 83 Major Revision PROGRAM·PRODUCTS SYSTEM/3 MODEL 12 BASIC ASSEMBLER 5705-AS1 PURPOSE The IBM System/3 model 12 Basic Assembler program is a program product that processes source programs written in the Basic Assembler language and produces executable object programs. The program is disk resident in a simulation area on the 3340 Direct Access Storage Facility (DASF) and operates under control of the model 12 SCPo The Basic Assembler language is a symbolic programming language used to write programs. Some of the features provided by the program and its language are: Mnemonic Operation Codes Symbolic Referencing of Storage Addresses Automatic Storage Assignment Address Displacement Calculation Convenient Data Representation Operand Field Expressions Source Identification--Sequence Fields Assembler Instructions Source Program Listing Cross- Reference Listing Error Checking and Diagnostic Messages The Basic Assembler can be used to create a stand-alone program. The object program is punched into cards. Program loading is performed with an initial program loader through the 5424 MFCU or the 1442 Card Read Punch. Stand-alone programs are coded entirely by the user with no dependence on other programming support. The Basic Assembler may also be used for assembly of relocatable subroutines for use with model 12 RPG II, COBOL, or FORTRAN. The subroutines, written in the Basic Assembler language, are coded by the user and separately assembled. The process of program linking is accomplished during compilation of the RPG " source program or by means of the Overlay Linkage Editor, in the case of COBOL or FORTRAN. Source input into the Assembler can be from the system input device (card reader, 3741 directly attached, or 5471 keyboard). from a source library, or from a source file generated by the Macro Processor. Work files for the Assembler are on the simulation area of a 3340. The Overlay Linkage Editor is used to generate executable object programs. Model 12 Basic Assembler Device Support 3340 Direct Access Storage Facility model C2 3410/3411 Magnetic Tape Unit, modell, 2 or 3 5203 Printer, modell, 2 or 3 1403 Printer, model 2, 5 or N 1 5424 MFCU, model A1 or A2 1442 Card Read Punch, model 6 or 7 5471 Printer-Keyboard, model 1 1255 MCR, model 1, 2 or 3 3881 OMR, model 1 3741 Data Station / Programmable Workstation, modell, 2, 3 or 4 (directly attached) BSCA, 1 or 2 lines, ICA, or Local Display Adapter Main Storage Requirements Program Level Size) Source Assembly Object Execution Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes 10-56K* Up to 64K* * The maximum program level is 64K less supervisor requirements. SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS Minimum System Requirements: An IBM System/3 model 12 which includes an IBM 5412 Processing Unit model B16 (32K) ... and an IBM 5424 MFCU or an IBM 1442 Card Read Punch or an IBM directlyattached 3741 Data Station/Programmable Workstation ... and an IBM 5203 or 1403 Printer* ... and an IBM 3340 DASF. * Note: The 5203 or 1403 printer should be equipped with the Universal Character Set feature and a PN (60-character set) print chain/train arrangement. A 48-character set (for example, HN or LC arrangement) can be used with the Assembler; however, the user must be willing to accept substitute characters. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS 5705-SC1. COMPATIBILITY The model 12 Basic Assembler program is source language compatible with the model 10 Basic Assembler program. Macro instructions used in model 10 programs (model 10 Macros feature of the SCP) may have to be changed before re-assembling with the model 12 Assembler. DOCUMENTATION (available from Mechanicsburg) System/3 Basic Assembler Reference Manual (SC21-7509) ... System/3 Basic Assembler Program Product Specifications (GC215079) ... System/3 Bibliography (GC20-8080). TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index ------- - - - ----=;:: ~~§: ISG PP 5705-CB1.1 Do not reproduce without written permission Mar 83 Major Revision PROGRAM PRODUCTS SYSTEM/3 MODEL 12 SUBSET ANS COBOL COMPILER AND LIBRARY 5705-CB1) PURPOSE IBM System/3 model 12 COBOL is a program product that operates under control of the System/3 model 12 System Control Programming. The compiler and library are disk resident in a simulation area on the 3340 Direct Access Storage Facility (DASF). The compiler requires as input a COBOL source language program and produces as output, by means of the System/3 Overlay Linkage Editor, a System/3 machine language object program, either cataloged in an object library, punched into 80- or 96-column cards, or written onto a diskette. A source program listing, diagnostic messages and a main storage map can be requested. DESCRIPTION Record size can range from 1 to 32K bytes, and records may be processed as blocked or unblocked. Logical records may span physical disk sectors, tracks or cylinders. Multi-volume sequential files are supported on the 3340 main data area. Offline multi-volume files are only supported on Drive 2 of the 3340. Neither multi-volume nor indexed files are supported on the simulation areas of the 3340. Tape File Support: The access methods supported for the 3410/3411 Magnetic Tape Subsystem are the same as those supported by System/3 model 10 COBOL. COBOL object programs can process data on magnetic tape; highlights include: Consecutive input or output files 1 -4 tape drives Fixed length records, blocked or unblocked Variable length records, blocked or unblocked Record size from 18 to 32,768 bytes Block size from 18 to 32,768 bytes IBM Standard Labels, ANSI labels, no labels Option for two I/O areas 9-track, 800/1600 bpi 7-track, 200/556/800 bpi Single volume or multivolume files Recording format: EBCDIC (7- or 9-track) or ASCII (9-track only) System/3 COBOL supports Grade 1 Braille for both compiler listings and object program printed output. Minimum requirements include a 132-position printer (5203 or 1403) with 8 lines/inch spacing. A user-provided elastic strip is attached over the printer hammers to produce the Braille characters. The compiler requires a 14K program level in order to produce Braille listings. Source input to the compiler can be from the system input device (card reader, 3741 directly attached, or 5471 keyboard) or from a source library. Work files for the compiler are in a simulation area of a 3340 Direct Access Storage Facility. The Overlay Linkage Editor is used to generate object programs. American National Standard COBOL Considerations: The U.S. Industry standard for COBOL is American National Standard COBOL, X3.231968, which was approved by the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) on August 23, 1968. The following functional processing modules of the ANSI standard are included in the System/3 model 12 compiler. Printer Support: COBOL supports the 5203 and 1403 as follows: Space 0, 1, 2, or 3 before or after printing a line; skip to line number before or after printing a line; overflow detection. Card I/O Support: Model 12 COBOL supports the MFCU and 1442 as follows: 1 Nucleus 1, 2 1 Sequential Access 1, 2 1 Random Access 0, 2 1 Library 0, 2 1,3 2Table Handling 1 Segmentation 0, 2 The first digit above represents the level of the modules included in the compiler; the second digit represents the lowest level in the American National Standards Institute Standard (0 implies that the module may be completely missing from the standard compilers). The third digit represents the highest level in the ANSI standard. The international standard for COBOL is ISO Recommendation Number 1989, which was approved by ISO (International Organization for Standardization) in 1972. System/3 model 12 COBOL bears the same relation to the ISO standard as to the ANSI standard, inasmuch as the two standards are identical in technical content. Additions: In addition to the standard language, tho following additional features are provided: Extensions to the modules of American Notional Standard COBOL listed above, comprising - Certain language elements which oro dofined in higher levels of the American National Standard COBOL than those listed. - Certain language elements defined by tho CODASYL Programming Langua~e Committee but not yot included by ANSI in American National Standard COBOL. - IBM-developed extensions consistent with those supported by the System/360 and 370 OS and DOS ANS COBOL compilers and 1130 ANS COBOL compiler. Disk File Support: The access methods supportod for the 3340 are the same as those supported by System/3 model 10 COBOL and are as follows: Indexed (mai'n data are~- o'nly)~'" Random Processing - by ,key!,;, sequential~roc~S~ing~Yk~y including file loading. Direct' ~ ,' ,, . Rand~m pro.cesSing-~yirelativ'8'f;ecord number!,i"ccluding updating and file loading. _,:1 Consecutive Processing. I '; ,;", " '::',,' :. _ , Standard System/3 disk labels are mandatory,f6'r':;i:'all disk files. ~~~-standard labels cannot be used excep~l.,c:?~r!!~l~,records within the 1442 Yes Yes No Yes No 256 Model 12 COBOL Device Support 3340 Direct Access Storage Facility model C2 3410/3411 Magnetic Tape Unit model 1, 2 or 3 5203 Printer, model 1. 2 or 3 1403 Printer, model 2, 5 or N 1 5424 MFCU, model A1 or A2 1442 Card Read Punch model60r 7 5471 Printer-Keyboard, model 1 1255 MCR, model 1, 2 or 3 ' 3881 OMR, model 1 3741 Data Station/Programmable Workstation model 1, 2, 3 or 4 (directly attached) BSCA, 1 or 2 lines, ICA, or Local Display Adapter Main Storage Requirements (Program Level Size) Compilation Execution Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes· No No Yes Yes· No No 12-56K 8-56K • This device is supported only by using the DISPLAY or ACCEPT statement. The maximum program level is 64K less supervisor requirements. SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT . Consecutive Processing - including updating in place. Random Processing - by relative record number including updating but e~cluding file loading. MFCU Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 64 Diskette Support: COBOL supports the 3741 directly attached as an input or output device for compilation. For object programs, the 3741 is supported only by using the ACCEPT statement. •• ,Sequential , (\ .~ Read Punch Card Print Stacker Select (punch only) Associated File Character Set (EBCDIC) HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS Minimum System Requirements: For source compilation - An IBM System/3 model 12 which includos on IBM 6412 Processing Unit model B16 (32K) ... and an IBM 6424 MFCU or an IBM 1442 Card IBM 3741 Data Read Punch or a diroctly-attached Station/Programmable Workstation ... and an IBM 5203 or 1403 Printer (the HN print arrangement is recommended) ... and a 3340 DASF. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS 5705-SC1. ----:: - -~~§: ISG -- - ---- Do not reproduce without written permission PROGRAM PRODUCTS System/3 Mdl12 Subset ANS COBOL Compiler and Library (cont'd) COMPATIBILITY System/3 COBOL is upward compatible with the DOS and as ANS COBOL compilers and is a superset of 1130 ANS COBOL providing growth from 1130 through System/3 to System/360 and 370. Migration to and from System/3 COBOL requires little source program conversion to effect the transition. Certain 1130 library routines are not included in the System/3 COBOL library, e.g., CALLed subprograms. System/3 model 12 COBOL is source language compatible with System/3 model 10 COBOL, with language differences due to differences in I/O. A System/3 model 10 COBOL source program can be re-compiled on System/3 model 12, without changes to the source, and be executed under control of System/3 model 12 SCP - assuming the same I/O. (Note: A 5444 is equivalent to a simulation area on the 3340; indexed and multi-volume files are supported in the main data areas only; split cylinder files are not supported.) DOCUMENTATION (available from Mechanicsburg) System/3 Subset ANS COBOL Reference Manual (GC28-6452) ... System/3 Subset ANS COBOL Program Product Specification (GC28-6462) ... System/3 Bibliography (GC20-8080). TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index PP 5705-CB1.2 Mar 83 Major Revision ------- ----:: - -~~S: ISG PP 5705·F01.1 Do not reproduce without written permission Mar 83 Major Revision PROGRAM PRODUCTS SYSTEM/3 MODEL 12 DISK FORTRAN IV 5705·F01 PURPOSE ** System/3 model 12 FORTRAN IV is a program product that operates under control of the System/3 model 12 SCPo The compiler and library are disk resident in a simulation area on the 3340 Direct Access Storage Facility (DASF). The compiler requires as input a FORTRAN source language program and produces as output, by means of the system's Overlay Linkage Editor, a System/3 machine language object program, either cataloged in an object library, punched into 80- or 96-column cards, or written onto a diskette. A source program listing, diagnostic messages and a main storage map may be requested. DESCRIPTION Source input to the compiler can be from the system input device (card reader, 3741 directly attached, or 5471 keyboard) or from a source library. Work files for the compiler are in a simulation area of the 3340 Direct Access Storage Facility. The Overlay Linkage Editor is used to generate object programs. The model 12 FORTRAN IV language is identical to the System/3 model 6 or 10 FORTRAN IV language. It contains those features defined in American National Standard Basic FORTRAN, X3.10-1966 and additional language features and capabilities previously available only with certain Full FORTRAN IV Compilers. The model 12 FORTRAN IV Library contains mathematical and service subroutines required during execution to perform arithmetic operations, input and output conversion, and input and output control. The model 12 FORTRAN IV Library also includes a Commercial Subroutine Package which is equivalent in function to the 1130 Commercial Subroutine Package insofar as is meaningful in terms of System/3 model 12 devices and data management. Disk File Support: The access methods supported for the 3340 are the same as those supported by System/3 model 10 FORTRAN, and are as follows: Sequential I/O Consecutive processing of formattod or unformatted records is supported. Record size of formatted records can range from 1 to 256 bytes. Record size of unformatted records can range from 1 to 32,767 bytes. Direct Access I/O Random processing is by relative record number; consecutive processing can also be performed. Record size can range from 1 to 32,767 bytes, formatted or unformatted. Standard System/3 disk labels are mandatory for all disk files. Non-standard labels cannot be used except as data records within the file. Indexed files are not supported. Tape File Support: The access methods supported for the 3410/3411 Magnetic Tape Subsystem are the same as those supported by System/3 model 10 FORTRAN. FORTRAN object programs can process data on magnetic tape; highlights of tape support include: .' Consecutive input or output files 1-4 tape drives Formatted or unformatted records Record size from 18 to 32,767 bytes Block size from 18 to 32,767 bytes IBM Standard Labels, ANSI Labels, no labels 9-track, 800/1600 bpi 7-track, 200/556/800 bpi Single volume files Multivolume files Recording format: EBCDIC (7- or 9-track) or ASCII (9-track only) Printer Support: The FORTRAN language supports the 5203 and 1403 as folloyvs: Space 0, 1, or 2 before or after printing a line ... skip to line 1 before or after printing a line ... overflow detection. Commercial Subroutines support the 5203 and 1403 as follows: Space immediately 0, 1, 2 or 3 lines ... skip Immodiately to a specified line number. Card I/O Support: The Model 12' FORTRAN supports the MFCU and 1442 as f o l l o w s : ' , '. 'Read Punch Card Print Stacker Select· Combined File·· Character set (EBCDIC) * MFCU Yes Yes Yes No No 64 1442 "Yes " Yes No No No 256 Commercial Subroutines support stacker selection of cards from the 1442 and from the secondary ~opperof the MFCU. Through use of the Commercial Subroutines, the MFCU or 1442 can support a combined file. Diskette Support: FORTRAN supports the 3741 directly attached as an input or output device for compilation only. Model 12 FORTRAN Device Support 3340 Direct Access Storage Facility model C2 3410/3411 Magnetic Tape Unit modell, 2 or 3 5203 Printer, model 1, 2 or 3 1403 Printer, model 2, 5 or N 1 5424 MFCU, model Al or A2 1442 Card Read Punch, model 6 or7 5471 Printer-Keyboard, model 1 1255 MCR, modell, 2 or 3 3881 OMR, model 1 3741 Data Station/Programmable Workstation model 1, 2, 3 or 4 (directly attached) BSCA, 1 or 2 lines, ICA, or Local Display Adapter Main Storage Requirements Program Level Size) • Compilation Execution Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes No No Yes No No No 9-56K* 8-56K* The maximum program level is 64K less supervisor requirements SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS Minimum System Requirements: For source compilation - A System/3 model 12 which includes an IBM 5412 Processing Unit model B16 (32K) ... and an IBM 5424 MFCU or an IBM 1442 Card Read Punch or a directly-attached IBM 3741 Data Station/Programmable Workstation ... and an IBM 5203 or 1403 Printer ... and an IBM 3340 DASF. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS 5705-SC1. COMPATIBILITY System/3 model 12 Disk FORTRAN IV source programs are compatible with System/3 Disk FORTRAN IV for System 3 model 6, 8 or 10 except for changes required to accommodate differences in attached I/O. The model 12 FORTRAN compiler accepts source programs written in the IBM System/360 Basic FORTRAN IV language, which encompasses American National Standard Basic FORTRAN as defined in X3.101966. The compiler also accepts source programs written in the IBM 1130 Basic FORTRAN IV language with minor modifications. DOCUMENTATION (available from Mechanicsburg) System/3 FORTRAN IV Reference Manual (SC28-6874) ... System/3 FORTRAN IV Commercial Subroutines (SC28-6875) .. , System/3 FORTRAN IV Program Product Specifications (GC28-6880) .. , System/3 Bibliography (GC20-B080). TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index ------- -------- PP 5705-M31.1 Do not reproduce without written permission .::. =-= :§':fE: ISG Mar83 Major Revision PROGRAM PRODUCTS DATA COLLECTION SYSTEM SUPPORT FOR SYSTEM/3 5705-M31 PURPOSE The IBM 5230 Data Collection System Support for System/3 program product provides the manufacturer with a convenient, practical means of preparing shop floor data for processing by a user-provided management accounting system. Data collected by the IBM 5230 Data Collection System is edited, consolidated, and formatted on the System/3 for such applications as payroll accounting, inventory management, and production control. By the customer making simple changes in the output formats of both program products, IBM 5230 Data Collections System Support for System/3 can provide input to and use turnaround documents from the System/3 Shop Loading and Control program product (5702-M51). DESCRIPTION The 5230 Data Collection System. Support for System/3 program product provides two phases of operations: A 5230 personalization phase and a data conversion phase. The 5230 personalization phase provides a menu of actions from which the user selects those that best fit the operation. Using the menu selections and loop definitions for up to three 5231 controllers with up to four loop each, this phase creates the personalization records required to personalize the 5230 Data Collection System. The data conversion phase prepares the data received from the 5230 Data Collection System for processing by the user-provided applications. The data can be accepted through the data communications facilities, the 96-column cards, the 80-column cards, or the diskette offered as output options by the 5230 Data Collection System. (Input from 80-column cards or diskette requires minor changes to source). Both material transactions and labor transactions are prepared by the program product. The material transactions are edited, listed, formatted and stored for later processing by the user-provided inventory management and production control applications. Labor transactions are expanded, edited, checked for accuracy and adjusted for break and lunch times and lunch and shift start-stop time variances. Time and attendance totals are checked against job time totals with warning messages printed for differences that exceed user-prescribed limits. The elapsed time for time and attendance and job time is calculated. Job time applied to overlapping jobs is apportioned to the jobs. A correction procedure is included to allow for changing incorrect labor records. The results of the labor transaction processing are stored for later processing by the user-provided payroll and production control applications. Reports are printed, at the user's option, for material transactions and for labor transactions. The material transactions report is a single listing. Labor transactions reports provide labor-related information suitable for management review and checking by foremen for correctness. A Program Reference Manual provides installation and planning information such as input and output formats, a description of the processing, control and audit information, and a discussion of the sample problem. An Operations Guide specifies the procedures that must be followed to make any necessary modifications, to compile and include the program in the system library, and to prepare data for the program. A discussion of operating procedures and messages is also included. HIGHLIGHTS Provides needed input to user-provided applications - Elapsed time calculation for payroll - Material receipt and issue data for inventory management - Job elapsed time and location data for production control Management reports generated as a byproduct of data entry - Jobs started checked against time and attendance record - Transaction records checked for complete and accurate entry Provides for automatic generation of machine-readable data - Uses punched-card turnaround documents from user-supplied applications - Reduces transcription errors - Eliminates timekeeper calculation of elapsed time CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES IBM will provide assistance in many areas pertaining to the installation of IBM program products. However, the responsibility for providing accurate ordering information, personnel selection and training, installation, and continued day to day operation lies solely with the customer. Activities, within these areas of customer responsibility, are defined to include, but not be limited to, the following: Personnel selection and training ... the customer is responsible for selectinp at least one person who will be responsible for supervising the installation and at least one person to assume the duties of an operator. The customer is also responsible for the coordination and education of the various user departments affected by the installation. Installation ... the customer is responsible for installation of the product. Installation activities include: Establishing an installation plan and schedule consistent with the requirements and availability of customer personnel Entering control data and compiling the program Copying the delivered disk cartridges for backup purposes Creation of the badge file and verification of the data Modification of existing programs to interface to the program product Day-to-day system operation ... the customer is responsible for the day to day operation of the system and the results derived from its operation. The customer is also responsible for maintaining controls and audit trails consistent with good business practices and for the security and safekeeping of all machine-readable material and documents which are related to, and/or resulting from, the operation of the system. SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS The IBM 5230 Data Collection System Support will execute on any model of the System/3 meeting the following minimum configuration: System/3 Model 8 IBM 5408 with 16K of primary storage IBM 3741 Data Station directly attached IBM 5444 model A 1 Disk Storage Drive IBM 5203 Printer with 132 print positions and PN or GN print character arrangement System/3 Model 10 IBM 5410 with 16K of primary storage IBM 5444 model 1 or A 1 Disk Storage Drive IBM 5424 Multifunction Card Unit IBM 5203 Printer with 132 print positions and PN or GN print character arrangement System/3 Model 12 IBM 5412 with 32K of primary storage IBM 3340 model C2 Direct Access Storage Facility IBM 5424 Multifunction Card Unit or IBM 3741 Data Station directly attached IBM 5203 Printer with 132 print positions and PN or GN print character arrangement System/3 Model 15 IBM 5415 with 48K of primary storage IBM 5444 model A2 Disk Storage drive IBM 5424 Multifunction Card Unit or IBM 3741 Data Station directly attached IBM 3277 Systems Console IBM 5421 Printer Control Unit IBM 1403 Printer with 132 print positions and PN or GN print character arrangement If the data communications features of 5230 Data Collection System Support for the System/3 are to be used, tho Binary Synchronous Communications Adapter, the Local Communications Adapter, or the Integrated Communications Adapter must be added to the minimum configuration. The processing unit must contain the appropriate expansion and attachments features if required. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS The IBM 5230 System Support for System/3 is written in RPG.Ii' programming language and executes under control of the System/3 System Control Program. The System/3 Disk Sort program is also,. required for execution of the program. The System/3 RPG " compiler):' is required for tailoring and compiling the Data Collection System Support for System/3. The program numbers applicable to the different system models are given below. For System/3 Models 8 and 10 System Control Program Disk Sort Program RPG" Compiler 5702-SC1 '5702-SM1 5702-RG,Jl If data communications is ,used, the RPG " C0rllpiler.must have , either feature #6000 or feature #6002 installeq:,i For System/3 Model',12 System Contro!, Program .Disk Sort ProgrClrTl RPG "Compiler 5705-:SC1 5705-SM1 5705-RG1 ------- ----- Do not reproduce without written permission :: - - :§'f§: ISG PROGRAM PRODUCTS Data Collection System Support for System/3 (cont'd) For System/3 Model 15 System Control Program Disk Sort Program RPG II Compiler 5704-SC1 5704-SM1 5704-RG1 DOCUMENTATION (available from Mechanicsburg) IBM 5230 Data Collection System Support for System/3 General Information Manual (GH30-0204) ... Facts Flyer (G580-0073) ... Data Collection Application Workbook (GH20-0203) ... Executive Guide (G580-0072) ... IBM 5230 Data Collection User's Guide (GA34-0040). TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index PP 5705-M31.2 Mar 83 Major Revision ------------.=.===~= - ---ISG PP 5705-RG1.1 Do not reproduce without written permission Mar 83 Major Revision PROGRAM PRODUCTS SYSTEM/3 MODEL 12 RPG II 5705-RG1 PURPOSE IBM Systom/3 model 12 RPG II is a program product that operates under control of the System/3 model 12 System Control Programming. RPG II is disk resident in a simulation area on the 3340 Direct Access Storage Facility (DASF). It requires as input an RPG II source language program and produces as output a System/3 model 12 machine language object program, either cataloged in an object library or punched into 80- or 96-column cards, or written onto a diskette. A source program listing, diagnostic messages, and a main storage map can be requested. To use the RPG II compiler, the user supplies information about the job to be processed. The job can be described on specification sheets prior to entering the source statements into the system. The specification sheets are: Auto Report, Control Card and File Description, Extension and Line Counter, Telecommunications, Input, Calculation and Output- Format. Source Input to the compiler can be from the system input device (card reader, 3741 directly attached, or 5471 keyboard) or from a source library. Work files for the compiler are on a simulation area of a 3340 data module. In addition to the functions provided by System/3 model 10 Disk RPG II, model 12 RPG II provides the following capabilities: Support of 3340 Direct Access Storage Facility. Included as standard functions of the model 12 RPG II, the following support that is available as separately priced features in model 6 and/or 10 RPG II: Telecommunications, Auto Report, and Magnetic Tape support. Disk File Support: The access methods supported for the 3340 are the same as those supported by System/3 model 10 Disk RPG II and are as follows: Sequential Consecutive Processing - including updating in place. Random Processing - by relative record number including updating but excluding file loading. Indexed (main data area only) Random processing - by key. Sequential processing - by key including file loading. Direct Random Processing - by relative record number, including updating and file loading. Consecutive Processing. Card I/O Support: RPG II supports the MFCU and 1442 as follows: Read Punch Card Print Stacker Select Combined File Character set (EBCDIC) MFCU 1442 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes 64 256 Diskette Support: A directly-attached 3741 is supported as a unit record input/output device for RPG II object programs. Model 12 RPG II Device Support Compilation 3340 Direct Access Storage Facility, model C2 3410/3411 Magnetic Tape Unit, models 1, 2 or 3 5203 Printer, model 1, 2 or 3 1403 Printer, model 2,5, or N1 5424 MFCU, model A1 or A2 1442 Card Read Punch, model 6 or 7 5471 Printer-Keyboard, model 1 1255 MCR, model 1, 2 or 3 3881 OMR, model 1 3741 Data Station/Programmable Workstation model 1, 2, 3 or 4 (directly attached) BSCA, 1 or 2 lines, ICA, or Local Display Adapter Main Stora~e Requirements (Program Level Size Execution Yes Yes No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes·· Yes·· Yes Yes No Yes 8-56K· 8-56K· • The maximum program levol is 64K less supervisor requirements. •• Requires SCP subroutine; RPG II SPECIAL exit is used. Auto Report: Model 12 RPG II Auto Report is functionally identical to the S/3 model 10 Disk RPG II Auto Report feature. Auto Report enhances the RPG II language by providing functions which eliminate much of the preparation and coding work normally done by the user. It is specifically designed to facilitate report preparation. Auto Report executes as a preprocessor to the RPG II Compiler. The input is RPG II source statements and Auto Report statements. Auto Report produces a diagnostic listing, replaces the Auto Report statements with generated or copied RPG II source statements and calls the RPG II Compiler for execution. Record size can range from 1 to 9,999 bytes, and records can be processed as blocked or unblocked. Logical records may span physical disk sectors, tracks or cylinders. Telecommunications Support: Support of the Binary Synchronous Communications Adapter (BSCA), and the Integrated Communications Adapter (lCA) is achieved through use of the RPG II Telecommunications Specifications Sheet and the addition of BSCA as a device entry on the RPG II File Description Specification. The support is identical to that provided by System/3 model 6 and 10 RPG II Telecommunications features, and includes: Tape File Support: The access methods supported for the 3410/3411 Magnetic Tape Subsystem are the same as those supported by System/3 model 10 Disk RPG II. RPG II object programs can process data or record address files on magnetic tape. Highlights of tape support include: Communication modes: Receive only... Receive with conversational reply· ... Transmit only... Transmit with conversational reply· .,. Alternate transmit and receive file. (·Not supported in communication with System 32, System/34, 2770, 2780, 3741-2, and 3741-4 or a 5110 Computer System supported as a 3741 model 2 or 4.) Standard System/3 disk labels are mandatory for all disk files. Non-standard labels cannot be used (except as data records within the file). Consecutive input or output files 1 -4 tape drives Fixed length records, blocked or unblocked Variable length records, blocked or unblocked Record size from 18 to 9,999 bytes Block size from 18 to 9,999 bytes IBM Standard Labels, ANSI Labels, no labels Option for two I/O areas 9-track, 800/1600 bpi 7-track, 200/556/800 bpi Single volume or multi-volume files Recording format: EBCDIC (7-or 9-track) or ASCII (9-track only) Program options to Rewind or Rewind/Unload at end of job Printer Support: RPG II supports the 5203 and 1403 Printer as follows: Space 0, 1, 2 or 3 before or after printing a line; skip to line number before or after printing a line; overflow detection; first page forms alignment. The 5203 dual feed carriage is supported. Communication with the 5231 model 2 is in Receive mode only. The 5231 model 2 is supported as a 3741 model 2 or 4. RPG II language features supported: Input, Output, and Combined files ... Demand files for Transmit and Receive ... Blocking and deblocking of records ... Dual I/O areas. BSCA and ICA features, options and capabilities supported: Manual Call ... Manual answer ... Auto-call (BSCA only) .,. Auto-Answer ... Medium speed ... High speed (BSCA only) ... Station selection ... EBCDIC data transparency ... intermediate block checking '" EBCDIC or ASCII data and data link control characters. File translation of ASCII data can be accomplished by proper use of the file translation facility of RPG II. For additional information, see the description. of the mo~e!' 10 Disk RPG II Telecommunications feature (5702-RG~i feature #6000/#6002). COMPATI~IL.~Tv . System/3 model 12 RPG II is,sourc~I~~guage 'co'iilpatible with the System/3 model 10 Disk RPGII (5702-RG1) and System/3 model 6 RPG II (5703- RG 1) except'Jor differences due to different hardware. A System/3 model 6 or 10" Disk RPG II source program can be recompiled on System/3 model 1~, without:,~hanges to the sour~e, and be executed under control of System/3 mddel12 SCP - assuming the same I/O. (Note:. 5444 is equivalent to a 5444 simulation area on the 3340; indexed and. multi-volume ,files are supported in the main data areas only; split cylin,der~iles are not supported; shared I/O areas are not supported.) . ------- ----:: - -~~§: ISG PP 5705-RG1.2 Do not reproduce without written permission Mar 83 Major Revision PROGR~MJ~RODUCTS System/3 Model 12 RPG II (cont'd) SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS Minimum System Requirements: For source program compilation - An IBM System/3 model 12 which includes an IBM 5412 Processing Unit model B16 (32K) .. , and an IBM 5424 MFCU or an IBM 1442 Card Read Punch or directly-attached IBM 3741 Data Station/Programmable Workstation ... and an IBM 5203 or 1403 Printer ... and an IBM 3340 DASF. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS 5705-SC1. DOCUMENTATION (available from Mechanicsburg) Introduction to RPG /I (GC21-7514) ... System/3 RPG Reference Manual (SC21-7504) ... System/3 RPG /I Auto Report General Information (GC21-7563) ... System/3 PRG /I Auto Report Reference Manual (SC21-5057) ... System/3 RPG " Telecommunications Reference Manual (SC21-7507) ... System/3 RPG" Program Product Specifications (GC21-5081) ... System/3 RPG " Additional Topics Programmer's Guide (GC21-7577) ... System/3 RPG " Disk File Processing Programmer's Guide (GC21-7566) System/3 Bibliography (GC20-8080). RPG II 3270 DISPLAY CONTROL FEATURE Feature #6003/#6004 PURPOSE The RPG II 3270 Display Control feature provides telecommunications services for local or remote 3270 devices. The program is automatically linked into the RPG II application program via the SPECIAL file exit capability on the RPG II File Description Specification Sheet. Neither the Assembler nor the RPG II Telecommunications feature is required. DESCRIPTION The following services are provided by the Display Control feature: RPG II access to 3270 Display System Terminals attached via the , Local Display Adapter, the Integrated Communications Adapter (ICA), or the Binary Synchronous Communications Adapter (BSCA). Automatic buffering and queuing of terminal data A display formatting interface which permits the support of 3270 devices with coding in RPG II Complete line control procedures are provided Up to 18 terminals may be controlled (up to 12 can be attached via the Local Display Adapter) Provides the capability of coding one or more applications within one program. No task switching is provided. Two subroutines are provided. SUBR13 allows an RPG II program to support 3270s without using CCP. SUBR14 provides upward compatibility with CCp, requiring only program recompilation, assuming the RPG II program meets the CCP requirements. Terminals Supported: The following terminals and communications facilities are supported under the RPG II 3270 Display Control feature: With the Local Display Adapter 3277 3284 3286 3288 Display Station (model 1 or 2) Printer (model 1 or 2) Printer (model 1 or 2) Printer (model 2) ~Note: A maximum of 12 terminals may be attached via the Local ,:7Display Adapter. With the Integrated Communications Adapter (ICA) or the Binary Synchronous Communications Adapter (BSCA). 3275 Display Station and Control, or 3271 Display Control Unit (model 1 or 2), with: - 3271, Display Station (model 1 or 2) - 3284!,Printer (model ,1 or 2) - 3286 Printer (model 1 or 2) - 3288 Printer (model 2) ,,\:' ',. SPECIFI~D OPERATING,ENVIRONMENT HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS Minimum System Requirements: The RPG 11.3270 Display Control feature requires an IBM System/3 model 12whichincludes, as a minimum, an IBM 5412 Processing Unif:model B16(32K bytes) ... an IBM 3340 model C2 DASF ... an IBM 5203 or 1403 Printer ... an IBM 5424 MFCU or an IBM 1442 Card Read Punch:or a directly-attached 3741 Data Station/Programmable Workstation ... a Local Display Adapter or an Integrated Communications Adapter Or", a Binary Synchronous Communications Adapter and one of the devices listed under '"Terminals Supported". Using SUBR13, approximately 10K-12K bytes are added to the size of the object program. Using SUB14, approximately 4.3K bytes are added to the size of the object program. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS 5705-SC1,5705-RG1. COMPATIBILITY The System/3 model 12 RPG II 3270 Display Control feature is functionally compatible with the System/3 model 8/10 and System/3 model 15 RPG II 3270 Display Control feature. DOCUMENTATION (available from Mechanicsburg) IBM RPG 113270 Display Control Feature Reference and Logic Manual (SC21-5161) ... System/3 Bibliography (GC20-8080). Programming Service Classification: A. TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index ------- ---- Do not reproduce without written permission :: - - :§~E: ISG PROGRAM PRODUCTS SYSTEM/3 MODEL 12 DISK SORT 5705-SM1 PURPOSE The IBM System/3 model 12 Disk Sort program is a program product that sorts a file into ascending or descending sequence. The program is resident in a simulation area on the 3340 Direct Access Storage Facility (DASF) and operates under control of the model 12 SCPo DESCRIPTION Input files - Multiple input files are supported - up to eight input files from disk and/or tape. An input file can be resident on a 3340 DASF or on a unit of the 3410/3411 Magnetic Tape subsystem. A disk file can have sequential, indexed or direct organization. For a disk file, the input record size can be from 1 to 9,999 bytes. A tape input file can have fixed length records, either blocked or unblocked; variable length tape records are not supported. The maximum input tape record or block size is 9,999 bytes, and the minimum is 18 bytes. Input tape files can be 9-track 800/1600 bpi or 7-track 200/556/800 bpi. The tape file can be recorded in either EBCDIC or ASCII code. Input can be either a single volume file or a multi-volume file. Work file - A work file can be resident on a simulation area or main data area of a 3340 DASF. Work space can be specified by the user or can be automatically allocated by the program. Output file - The output file can be resident on a 3340 DASF or on a unit of the 3410/3411 Magnetic Tape Subsystem. A disk output file can have sequential organization only. Characteristics of tape output files are the same as for tape input files, described above. The maximum output record size for disk or tape is 4,096 bytes. Output of the program will be one of three formats: Tag (ADDROUT), tag-along, or summary tag-along. Features Records can be selected or omitted, and reformatted. Specified records may be forced ahead of others. An alternate collating sequence can be specified. Control fields can be in different locations in the records. The total length of the control fields can be from 1 to 256 bytes; there is no other limit on the number of control fields. Control fields can be sorted in ascending or descending sequence, or mixed (some ascending and some descending), Control fields can be sorted using only the digit or zone portion of the character. The fields can be packed or unpacked decimal, or character formats. Records containing identical control fields can be combined by summarizing specified fields into one record. Use: Specifications are described on a simple, RPG-like coding sheet. These specifications are entered into the system using the system input device, or they can be stored in the source library on disk. Sort control statement diagnostics and messages may be displayed on the system logging device. The program can be executed in a dual programming environment and uses from 8K to 56K bytes of main storage, exclusive of SCP requirements. SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS Minimum System Requirements: An IBM System/3 model 12 which includes an IBM 5412 Processing Unit model B16 (32Kl. and an IBM 5424 MFCU or an IBM 1442 Card Read Punch or a directly-attached IBM 3741 Data Station/Programmable Workstation, and an IBM 5203 or 1403 Printer and an IBM 3340 DASF. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS 5705-SC1. (See SCP pages.) COMPATIBILITY The model 12 Disk Sort program is source language compatible with the Disk Sort programs for the System/3 models 6,8 and 10. DOCUMENTATION (available from Mechanicsburg) System/3 Disk Sort Reference Manual (SC21-7522) ... System/3 Disk Sort Program Product Specifications (GC21-5083) ... System/3 Bibliography (GC20-8080). TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index PP 5705-SM1.1 Mar83 Major Revision ------- -------- Do not reproduce without written permission ==:: ~~E: ISG PROGRAM PRODUCTS SYSTEM/3 MODEL 12 MAGNETIC TAPE SORT 5705-SM2 PURPOSE The IBM System/3 model 12 Magnetic Tape Sort program is a program product that sorts a tape file into ascending or descending sequence. It is resident in a simulation area on the 3340 Direct Access Storage Facility (DASF) and operates under control of the model 12 SCPo A configuration that includes three or four tape units is required. The program is functionally identical to the System/3 model 10 Disk Resident Magnetic Tape Sort program (5702-SM2). Input files - The input file resides on any unit of the 3410/3411 Magnetic Tape Subsystem. The input file can have fixed length records, either blocked or unblocked. (Variable length records are not supported.) The maximum input record or block size is 9,999 bytes. The minimum input record or block size is 18 bytes. Input tape files can be 9-track 800/1600 bpi or 7-track 200/556/800 bpi. The file can be recorded in either EBCDIC (7- or 9-track) or ASCII (9-track only) code. Input can be either a single volume file or a multivolume file. Work files - Three work tapes are required; a fourth can be utilized, if available. Work tapes can be either 7- or 9-track (see restrictions below). Work tapes must be single volume only (not multivolume). Output file - The output file resides on any unit of the 3410/3411 Magnetic Tape Subsystem. Characteristics of tape output files are the same as for tape input files, described above. Output is a file of records containing the sort control fields and/or the data fields the user has specified. (The tag rADDROUT] and .summary tag-along sort capabilities of the Disk Sort are not supported in the Tape Sort.) Restrictions: To utilize all of the functions of this program, at least three 9-track work tapes must be available. If one or more of the work tapes is 7 -track, then only those sort functions that relate to the standard System/3 64-character set (EBCDIC) are supported. As a result, sorts of binary data, packed or unpacked decimal data or sorts on zones are not allowed in these 7-track configurations. Features Records can be selected or omitted, and reformatted. Specified records may be forced ahead of others An alternate collating sequence can be specified. A checkpoint/restart facility is supported. Control fields can be in different locations in the records. The total length of the control fiolds can be from 1 to 256 bytes; there is no other limit on the number of control fields. Control fields can be sortod using only the digit or zone portion of the character. The fields can be packed or unpacked decimal, or character formats. Control fields can be sortod in ascending or descending sequence or mixed (some ascending and some descending). Use: Specifications are describod on a simple, RPG-like coding sheet. These specifications are entorod into the system using the system input device, or they can be stored in the source library on disk. Sort control statement diagnostics and mossages may be displayed on the system logging device. The program can be executed in a dual programming environment and requires 8K to 55K bytes of main storage, exclusive of SCP requirements. SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS Minimum System Requirements: An IBM System/3 model 12 which includes an IBM 5412 Processing Unit model B16 (32K), and an IBM ,5424 MFCU or an IBM 1442 Card Read Punch or a directly-attached ~.IBM 3741 Data Station/Programmable Workstation, and an IBM 5203 or 1403 Printer, and an IBM 3340 DASF. At least three tape drives of the IBM 3410/3411 Magnetic Tape Subsystem are required. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS 5705-SC1,.t:.(Se~~CP pages.) COMPATIBILITY The moden 2;...MagneticTape Sort program is functionally compatible with tho Disk';.,~e.sident Magnetic Tape Sort program for System/3 model 8 and Sys\~rn/3 niodeIJO.,' , DOCUMENTATION '(available from Mecha~icsburg) System/3 Tape Sort Reference Manual (SC21-7572) ... System/3 Magnetic Tape Program Planning Manual (GC21-5040) ... System/3 Tape Sort Program Products Specificat.ic/ns (GC21-5138) ... System/3 Bibliography (GC20-8080). ':> " ,'" TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index PP 5705-SM2.1 Mar 83 Major Revision ------- - - - -- Do not reproduce without written permission :: - - :§~§: ISG PROGRAM PRODUCTS SYSTEM/3 MODEL 12 DISK RESIDENT CARD UTILITIES 5705-UT1 PURPOSE This IBM System/3 program product is resident in a simulation area on the 3340 Direct Access Storage Facility (DASF) and operates under control of the model 12 SCPo The following programs are provided: Sort/Collate, list, Reproduce/Interpret, and Gangpunch. (The following programs, included in the model 10 Utilities, 5701-UT1 and 5702-UT1, are not available for the model 12: Data Recording, Data Verifying, and 80-96 Conversion program.) DESCRIPTION Functionally compatible with the model 10 Sort/ Collate program (see 5701- UT1). The model 12 program supports the 5424 MFCU only. Sort/Collate Program - list Program - Functionally compatible with the model 10 96-column List program (see 5701- UT1). The model 12 program supports input from 5424 MFCU, 1442 Card Read Punch, or the directly-attached 3741. Reproduce/Interpret Program - Functionally compatible with the model 10 Reproduce/lnterpret program (see 5701-UT1). The model 12 program supports the 5424 MFCU only. Functionally compatible with the· model 10 Gangpunch program (see 5702-UT1). The model 12 program supports the 5424 MFCU. Gangpunch Program - Use: Each program described above can be executed in an 8K program level in a dual program environment. SPECIFIED OPEATING ENVIRONMENT HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS Minimum System Requirements: An IBM System/3 model 12 which includes an IBM 5412 Processing Unit model B16 (32K), and an IBM 5203 or 1403 Printer, and an IBM 3340 DASF, and the device required for the particular program described above (IBM 5424 MFCU, 1442 Card Read Punch, or a directly-attached IBM 3741 Data Station / Programmable Workstation). SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS 5705-SC1. (See SCP pages.) COMPATIBILITY The model 12 Disk Resident Card Utilities that have model 10 equivalents are functionally compatible to the modol 10 versions. DOCUMENTATION (available from Mechanicsburg) System/3 Sort/Col/ate and Card Utilities Roforence Manual SC217529) ... System/3 Disk Resident Card Utilities Program Product Specifications (GC21-7535) ... System/3 Bibliography (GC20-8080). TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index PP 5705-UT1.1 Mar 83 Major Revision ------- ----:: - -~~§: ISG Do not reproduce without written permission PROGRAM PRODUCTS SYSTEM/3 UTILITY PROGRAM FOR 1255 MAGNETIC CHARACTER READER 5705-UT2 PURPOSE This utility program provides the System/3 model 12 user control of document processing on the IBM 1255 Magnetic Character Reader. It provides a means of reading MICR encoded documents from the 1255, accumulating document totals and amount field totals for each pocket, and placing the data from the documents on output disk or tape and printer files. The program is designed to fulfill the basic requirements of the"ON-US" data capture run required for all Demand Deposit Application Programming. DESCRIPTION The program reads fields from the documents as specified by the user and then, based on decisions indicated by the user, it will stacker select these documents into user-specified pockets. If requested, Modulus 10 or 11 checking will be performed. Then after each document has been read and stacker selected, the utility will print user-specified fields from that document. Fixed-length disk records will also be created and placed on a disk file or a tape file (3410 or 3411 9-track only). An additional facility provided by the program is the accumulation of document totals and amount field totals and then printing these at end of job. Subtotals may be printed at any time as indicated by the user during program execution. Use: The utility requires at least 10K bytes of main storage when disk output is requested and 12K bytes of main storage when tape output is requested (exclusive of SCP requirements). The program will operate in a dual program environment. SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS Minimum System Requirements: An IBM System/3 model 12 which includes an IBM 5412 Processing Unit model B16 (32K) with a Serial I/O Channel (#7081), and an IBM 5424 MFCU or a directly-attached IBM 3741 Data Station/Programmable Workstation, and an IBM 5203 or 1403 Printer, and an IBM 3340 DASF, and an IBM 1255 Magnetic Character Reader, model 1, 2 or 3. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS 5705-SC1. (See SCP pages.) COMPATIBILITY The model 12 Utility Program for the 1255 MCR is functionally compatible to the model 10 version. DOCUMENTATION (available from Mechanicsburg) System/3 Models 10 and 12 Utility Programs for the 1255 MeR Reference Manual (SC21-7521) ... System /3 1255 Utility Program System/3 Bibliography Product Specifications (GC21-5030). (GC20-8080). TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index PP 5705-UT2.1 Mar 83 Major Revision ------- -------==::: ISG PP 5707-F01.1 Do not reproduce without written permission :§~§: Mar 83 Major Revision PROGRAM PRODUCTS SYSTEM/7FORTRANIV STAND-ALONE COMPILER and LIBRARY 5707-F01 PURPOSE Provides high-level FORTRAN language support for the System/7 user by offering the ease and speed of coding in the FORTRAN language. The Compiler and Library program product is installed on the System/7 and executes as a component under the System/7 Program Preparation Facilities, thereby significantly enhancing stand-alone program preparation capability on the System /7. The System/7 FORTRAN IV program product is designed to provide users with convenient access to a powerful, easy-to-use higher-level language with which they may write scientific, sensor-based and other applications. Minimum Hardware for execution under control of the 8·12K version of DSS/1: IBM System/7 (5010 mdl A, B, or E) with at least 12K words of main storage IBM 5022 Disk Storage Module (mdl 1 or 2), with or without cycle steal feature IBM 5028 Operator Station With this configuration, only the 5028 can be used for I/O. Service programs for 5707-AA1 are provided on a separate 8-channel paper tape when #9056 is ordered. DESCRIPTION SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS Users will compile their programs with the System/7 FORTRAN IV compiler. The System/7 Linkage Editor under the S/7 Program Preparation Facilities will combine these programs with the FORTRAN library routines, sensor-based routines, and lor other MSP /7 routines to form an executable real-time application program. The FORTRAN programs which are connected to an interrupt on a priority level via MSP /7 facilities gain control whenever the appropriate device or software interrupt occurs. IBM System/7 FORTRAN IV runs under the control of the IBM System/7 Program Preparation Facilities. The object modules produced by FORTRAN must be link-edited and formatted prior to execution in the IBM System/7. Both the stand-alone Macro Assembler and the Macro Library/Relocatable are required for preparing the real-time nucleus (in lieu of using DSS/7 for non-real time applications) for those user applications utilizing sensor-based subprograms. The user also may utilize the batch DSS/7 nucleus provided as part of the System/7 Program Preparation Facilities. Thus, users need not build their own MSP /7 nucleus, thereby enhancing the installability and usability of FORTRAN. In this environment the user is offered batch compile-and-go facilities and sequential DP I/O device support for the 5028 Operator Station, 5022 Disk Storage Module, 129 Data Recorder and the 7431 Serial Printer. Thecompiler accepts source programs written in System/7 FORTRAN, which is an extension of ANS Basic FO RTRAN, X3.10-1966 and produces object modules that are acceptable to LlNK/7 for link-editing. The System/7 FORTRAN IV compiler will also accept source programs written in ANS Basic FORTRAN. The language level is similar with the host FORTRAN program product. COMPATIBILITY Some of the features that FORTRAN offers include: ANS Basic FORTRAN with major extension Syntax checking mode, at substantial compile time savings Optimization during compilation for time, space and execution performance Sequential Access Method support of the 5028 Operator Station, 5022 Disk Storage Module, 129 Data Recorder, 7431 Serial Printer Direct support of the Binary Synchronous Communications Adapter through the Communications Access Method Extensive library containing mathematical subprograms, implicitlycalled subprograms, service subprograms, and sensor-based subroutines. New sensor-based subroutines havo been included conforming to the Instrument Society of America Standard S61.1 providing such functions as: - initiation, suspension and termination of user programs based upon time parameters - reading analog input points in random or sequential order - setting and resetting digital output at specified times - reading and writing input and output registers - bit manipulation through logical shift complement and inclusive and exclusive OR, AN 0 functions. Compatibility with host FORTRAN IV Library and host FORTRAN IV source and object code. MSP /7 functions including sensor I/O available through CALL statements CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES Understand the application they wish to perform and provide the appropriate hardware and software design Install the System/7 Program Preparation Facilities Utilize the batch DSS/7 (8-12K) nucleus or generate the supporting system nucleus for servicing sensor-based devices Provide the required user-written programs and link-edit these programs with the MSP /7 nucleus Test the resulting object programs SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS Minimum Hardware for Compilation: IBM System/7 (5010 mdl A, B, or E) with at least 12K words of main storage IBM 5022 Disk Storage Module (mdl 1 or 2), with or without cycle steal feature IBM 5028 Operator Station Minimum Hardware for Execution: For stand-alone execution, the minimum requirements are: An IBM System/7 (5010 mdl A, B, or E) with at least 6K words of main storage IBM 5028 Operator Station DOCUMENTATION (available from Mechanicsburg) Program Product Specifications: IBM System/7 FORTRAN IV (System/7 Compiler and Library) (GC34-0034) ... An Introduction to System/7 FORTRAN IV (GC28-6869). RPQs ACCEPTED: No TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index ------- -----:: - -:s~a: ISG PP 5707-F12.1 Do not reproduce without written permission Mar 83 Major Revision PROG RAM PRODUCTS TREND ANALYSIS/370 - (5740-F12) Color Graphics Support Feature (5707-F12) DESCRIPTION Trend Analysis/370 is an easy-to-use, interactive, IMS/VS-based computer application designed to allow presentation of time series data in tabular report form on a 3270 Information Display System. Using the System/7 Color Graphics Support Feature, presentation can be done graphically on a color television monitor. Time series numerical data, either from an organization's internal systems or from the external environment, can be formatted and stored for use by the system. Information stored for use by Trend Analysis/370 is logically organized by time period (daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semi-annually and annually), by organization (such as companies, divisions, departments, subsidiaries, competitors or part numbers) and by data element (such as assets, expenses, net/gross sales or unit price). It is the customer's responsibility to provide the source information, either by writing a simple format conversion program for machine-readable information, or by entering it manually through online data entry terminal facilities provided by Trend Analysis/370. The Trend Analysis/370 program provides a framework within which time series information can be stored, retrieved, manipulated and presented as required during the process of executive or management decision-making. Users may customize their use of the system by stipUlating, interactively, the information content and format of the reports they are creating, or by pre-defining the reports. In either case, they interact with the system through the use of 'menus'. These are simply terminal displays (3277) of a list of options for users to select from in creating their reports. For a pre-defined report, a single menu suffices (i.e., 'give me standard' report number 6') while for an interactively-created report, a series of menus would be required (i.e., to select from lists of available data, manipulation facilities, report formats, time periods of interest, etc.). Data selection menus are created by users themselves; report option menus are provided along with the program. Trend Analysis/370 also provides for the presentation of decisionsupporting information in whatever format the user decides is best suited to the information to be displayed. For example, a report of 'today's closing balances' could be shown in tabular form on a terminal display screen (and a printed copy may be requested). On the other hand, using the System/7 Color Graphics Support Feature, an analysis of the expenses incurred by six departments by month over the past 24 months could be displayed on a standard color television monitor as six lines, each line in a different color against a black background, with white axes and scales. In tabular form, this report might have required several pages from which trends or patterns would be more difficult to discover. entry facility can be used to enter non-machine readable data values and subsequently modify them. • Design' menus to reflect the most logical sequencing of the source data and the Trend Analysis/370 facilities that will be used. For the Color Graphics Support Feature they include: • The customer must purchase, install and maintain all data interfaces, cabling and equipment not specifically provided and maintained by IBM, in accordance with published System/7 Physical Planning Specifications (see "System Requirements"). • The customer must write the System/7 code to interface with the video display generator or submit a PRPQ to IBM for System/7 interface code for the selected device. SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS Trend Analysis/370 operates under IMS/VS Version 1 Release 1.0 or later versions, using any version of OS/VSl or OS/VS2 which supports IMS/VS. This requirement means that the minimum IBM S/370 which can be used, (and also process other transactions) is a mdl 145 with 1,024K bytes of main storage. The product uses 173K in main storage (real or virtual depending upon the customer's installation requirements) and requires a 260K Message Processing Region (real or virtual). Each of the, two batch support programs requires 256K in main storage. (real or virtual). The IBM 3270 Information Display System is used to communicate with Trend Analysis/370 and can be attached locally or remotely. The system and terminal requirements are the IMS/VS requirements (please refer to the IMS/VS pages). However, Trend Analysis/370 requires the large (1,920 characters) Display Station such as the IBM 3277 mdl 2. A Printer such as the IBM 3286 mdl 2 is optional. The Color Graphics Support Feature operates under the Disk Support System/7 on an IBM System/7. It can operate in a local or a remote environment. In a remote environment, the required IBM System/7 components are: Feature Type Code Quantity per Machine #1610 Asynchronous Communication Control #2165 Common Carrier Adapter HIGHLIGHTS Communication Asynchronous 1200 Adapter D08001 Digital I/O Module 5013 Digital Input Control #3284 • The Color Graphics Support Feature enables the compression of a large tabular report (hundreds of numbers over several pages) into a single color graphical display on a standard television monitor. Time series data is particularly suited to analysis when viewed in graphical form. 2 #3289 2 #3422 For Trend'Analysis/370 they include: D08147 Common Attachment 129/5496/7431 D08150 Data Recorder 129 Attachment • Ident,ifythe Source of required information. • Assi~n'''uflique numbors to each organization and data element. ., Assign,upto:eight-character acronyms and up to twenty-character descriptors to:'each data element and organization. '~, Load' the uriiq~e numbe'r~:': acr~nyms and descriptors into the description database using a batch program supplied by Trend ,',c", Analysis/370. .' • Assign a general password, ,data' access, password and a data modification pa~wordto limit access to this sequence of menus, to limit the infor~~'tion 'that may b~.' seen by personnel holding the general passw~, anp to limit,:data modification capability to only "; authorized people!' • Write, conversion': pr~ram~!o reforrnatexisting. machine-readable data ,to :rneet forma~ rec{Ulrements'..of the Trend Analysis/370 interface program fof"the!'time series data base. The online data .,' '.'?~ ~ " Digital Output Medium Power Group Process Interrupt #5710 CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES Digital Input Group Digital Output Control #3296 • An easy-to-use 'menu' approach permits users, with minimal training, to customize the information content and format of a desired report. Description Processor Module mdl E28 Minimum 5010 Trend Analysis/370, then, is a major support tool for executive management, providing for the storage, retrieval, manipulation and presentation of time series information to assist and augment the decision-making process. • Trend Analysis/370 provides time series data in tabular report form for comparison of mUltiple organizations and data elements at a point in time, for comparing the performance of mUltiple organizations over time and for analysis of the performance of a single organization over time. RPQ Reference Number 5022 Disk Storage Module 5026 Enclosure - 3 Position Minimum 5028 5029 Operator Station Feature Attachment to System/7 #3283 2 Digital Input Voltage Sense #3410 3 Digital Output Connector ------- ----:: - - :§~§: Do not reproduce without written permission ISG PROGRAM PRODUCTS PP 5707-F12.2 Mar 83 Major Revision Trend Analysis/370 (cont'd) 129 Card Data Recorder Expansion Feature #3610 I/O Attachment for System/7 8T0065 For all machine types other than the IBM 5010, the model for that machine type may be any that the customer desires. In a remote environment, an IBM 2701 Data Adapter Unit, 2702 Transmission Control, a 2703 Transmission Control, 3704 Communications Controller in 2701/2702/2703 Emulation Mode, or 3705 Communications Controller in 2701/2702/2703 Emulation Mode is required. Appropriate modems, such as the IBM 3872 Modem, are also required. For a local attachment to a channel, the specifications for the IBM 5013, 5022, 5026, 5028, 5029 and 129 remain the same as that for a remote environment. The specifications for the IBM 5010 and a 2701 Data Adapter Unit are: Feature Type Code RPQ Reference Number Quantity per Machine Description Processor Module mdl E28 Minimum 5010 Asynchronous Communication Control #1610 Communication Asynchronous 50KB Adapter 008000 Data Adapter Unit 2701 Asynchronous Communication Adapter 858450 The following are not required but recommended to increase the performance of the respective machine types: Feature Type Code RPQ Reference Number Quantity per Machine 5010 #2662 Cycle Steal Basic Disk Cycle Steal 5022 #2664 129 Description Z04771 Skip/Read Double SPD Additionally, two Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) devices are required: Video Display Generator. Red/Green/Blue (RGB) Television Monitor. The video display generator is a device whose function is to provide a 30-times-per-second refresh (signal regeneration) to an RGB television monitor or any other device which requires a similar signal regeneration. The OEM RGB television monitor, to meet United States standards, should have 525 scan lines of two interlaced fields, with a 30-timesper-second refresh rate. Of the 525 scan lines on the TV monitor, 480 are usable for display. With a display aperture ratio of four horizontal to three vertical, 640 bits of information can be displayed on each of the 480 lines. The Color Graphics Support Feature is based upon this coordinate display of 480 vertical elements by 640 horizontal elements. The Color Graphics Support Feature has been testod with one of the commercially available video display generators and two of the commerically available television monitors. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS The IBM Trend Analysis/370 program product is written in Programming Language/l (PL/l) and operates under the control of the Information Management System/Virtual Storage (lMS/VS) Version 1 Release 0 or later versions. The prerequisite program products aro: Information Management System/VS 5740-XX2 IMS/VS Data Communication Feature 5740-XX2 PL/l OS Resident Library 5734-LM4 PL/l OS Transient Library 5734-LM5 If user exit code is written, then the PL/1 OS Optimizing Compiler (5734-PLl) is required. The Color Graphics Support Feature is written in MSP /7 and operates under the control of the Disk Support System/7 (5707-AG1) and should only be used in conjunction with the Trend Analysis/370 program product (5740- F12). The program logic manual for the feature contains the interface specifications and guidelines necessary to program the System/7 to utilize a video display generator. It is recommended that the System/7 Host PreJlaration Program Facility for OS/VS (5744-AF1) be used on the S/370 to compile the code. Alternatively, the S/7 Program Preparation Facilities (5707-AA1) can be used to do the compilations on the System/7. DOCUMENTATION (available from Mechanicsburg) Design Objectives ... Promotional Brochure (G520-3064)... Slide Set (GV20-0610) .. , General Information Manual RPQs ACCEPTED: Yes TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index ------- ----.=.---=-= ::5~5: ISG PP 5707·M33.1 Do not reproduce without written permission Mar 83 Major Revision PROGRAM PRODUCTS MANUFACTURING MONITORING SYSTEM VERSION 2 5707·M33 (OS/VS) 5707·M34 (DOS/VS) PURPOSE The IBM Manufacturing Monitoring System (abbreviated to MMS) is a program product designed for realtime monitoring of plant floor activities and resources. DESCRIPTION MMS S/370 Data Feature is written in IBM OS/VS and DOS/VS Assembler language and operates on a host IBM S/370 Virtual Storage system under control of the IBM Operating System (OS/VS1 or OS/VS2) or the IBM Disk Operating System (DOS/VS). For data access and data management it uses QSAM, BSAM, BDAM, and BTAM (under OS/VS) or SAM, DAM; and BTAM (under DOS/VS). MMS consists of a base program, the Basic System/7 Code, which resides in a System/7, and a feature, the S/370 Data Feature, which resides in a S/370 and is required for MMS data set generation and teleprocessing capabilities. The System/7 communicates with the plant floor via 2790 terminals operated by plant personnel. Userprovided sensors, attached to System/7 digital input and output points, sense status and production count of machines (optional). Generation of the Basic System/7 code and compilation and execution of the S/370 Data Feature can also be performed on a S/370 operating under OS/VS1, OS/VS2 or DOS/VS running under the control of VM/370. MMS accepts, edits, and processes transactions entered by workers, foremen, dispatchers, stock-keepers, and other personnel who report via terminal on setup, operation start and completion, interruptions, delivery to stock, and so on. For execution of the MMS Basic System/7 Code, the minimum machine requirements are as follows: Signals received from machine sensors - indicating machine status, failure conditions, and quantities produced - are used to calculate utilization data, report failure conditions, monitor idle times, and check consistency of machine status against job status reported via terminal. 1 Based on this data, MMS monitors the execution of shop orders, their correct sequence, and timely completion, and the utilization of machines. It also calls for immediate action whenever exceptional conditions are detected. The data collected on System/7 disk files can be transmitted periodically, for additional evaluation, to a S/370 via binary synchronous or asynchronous communication linkages, using the MMS S/370 Data Feature, or to an IBM System/3 via physical disk transfer. When using the binary synchronous communication linkage (BSC), MMS data logging and sensor input processing can be performed in parallel with the transmission of System/7 disk file data to a S/370 host. This function is important for plants with 3-shift operations. HIGHLIGHTS SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS IBM System /7 with: IBM 5010 A16 or E16 Processor Module with 16,384 words of storage (for MMS with machine monitoring function but without BSCA) or IBM 5010 E20 Processor Module with 20,480 words of storage (for MMS without machine monitoring function but with BSCA) or IBM 5010 E20 Processor Module with 20,480 words of storage (for MMS with machine monitoring function and BSCA). Users of the MMS Version 1 who change to Version 2 will experience a storage increase of approximately 1 K words due to increased storage requirements of MSP/7 Release 7 even if no functional extensions are installed. Data transmission between IBM System/7 and an IBM S/370 host can be performed either by the MMS assists the user in the following functions: Collection of plant activity data, such as reporting on job status and machine status changes, work and operator assignments, maintenance. IBM 5010 A14 Processor Module with 14,336 words of storage (for MMS without machine monitoring function and without Binary Synchronous Communications Control - BSCA) or Binary Synchronous Communications Control (#2074) with 1,200 to 40,800 bps. or the Machine monitoring, by sensing machine status, failure conditions, and quantities produced. Asynchronous Communications Control (#1610) with 600 bits/sec. Realtime information, on workstations, job queues, shop orders, and machine operators. IBM 5013 A01 Digital I/O Module Plant communication, with message generation and distribution according to order progress and exceptional conditions detected. Feedback for planning and accounting, e.g., for scheduling systems, cost and payroll accounting, quality assurance, material planning. CUSTOMER RESPONSIBiliTIES IBM 5012 A01 Multifunction Module, or One or more digital input (01) and output (DO) groups are required if the user installs direct machine monitoring and/or digital output-driven devices, such as lamp indicator boxes. The number of 01 and DO groups depends on the hardware attached and the addressing technique applied. 1 To tailor MMS according to the user's environment, the customer must provide specifications and parameters that describe the plant environment and select the MMS functions required. If users install sensor hardware for machine monitoring and piece counting, a user-written System/7 interface program is required to connect the particular hardware equipment to MMS. An MMS sample problem will be provided as a guide for the user programming effort. i,,:Prerequisite to successful implementation of MMS is an intensive education of the plant personnel operating torminals and using M MS functions. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS MMS Basic System/7 Code is written in IBM System/7 Assembler language, >' . . ' The IBM System17 "MSP/7 Host Program Preparation Facilities II, Release (ASM/7,'UNK/7, FORMAT /7, MACLIB/R: Group Order Numbor 5744~~F1:for OS/VS, 5747-AF1 for DOS/VS) are required to generate the MMS System/7. , ';' ';~~~'~~, ,( , ~ System generatioo, must be performed on an IBM S/370 processor operating under control of the IBM ,Operating System (OS/VS or OS/VS2) or the IBM Disk Operating System' (DOS/VS). The MMS System/7 batch' pr~grams use the direct-access method of MSP/7 Symbolic File Sup~ortfor access to disk'data sets. The MMS System/7 realtime programs L!~e the Basic Access Support for disk file ,,""iP; access. For initialization of System/7 disks, for definition and deletion of data sets, and for program loading onto System /7 disk, the MSP /7 Disk Support System (5707-SC2 or 5707-AGHis., re,guired. IBM 5022 Disk Storage Module mdl 1 or 2, with one removable disk recommended for fast exchange of full disks. Up to three IBM 5022 modules can be supported with or without Cycle Steal features (#2662, #2664). IBM 5026 C03 Enclosure or up with Storage Power Addition (#7401). IBM 5028001 Operator Station. IBM 2790 Data Communication System with: 1 IBM 2791 and/or 2793 Area Station. The following devices can be attached to area stations: IBM 2796/2797 Data Entry Unit, IBM 1053 Remote Printer, and IBM 1035 Badge Reader. The number and type of devices depend on the user's plant organization, transaction load, and plant layout. Refer to the System/7 and IBM 2790 documentation for restrictions regarding the number of terminals attachable to the 2790 loop of System/7. Additional input/output devices, such as the IBM 129 Card Data Recorder and tho IBM 7431 Serial Printer, can be supported by MMS if appropriate usor'supplied interface programs are attached to MMS user exits. For generation of the MMS Basic System/7 Code, and for compilation and execution of the S/370 Data Feature, the minimum machine requirements are as follows (in addition to those stated above): An IBM S/370 Central Processing Unit supported by OS/VS1, OS/VS2, or DOS/VS. Address space requirements for the virtual region or partition are as follows: ------- ---:: - - :5~§: ISG Do not reproduce without written permission PROGRAM PRODUCTS MMS V2 (cont'd) For generation of the Basic System /7 Code: 128K bytes for the System/7 Host Macro Assembler, ASM/7. For compilation of the S/370 Data Feature: 256K bytes for the OS/VS Assembler 128K bytes for the DOS/VS Assembler For execution of the S/370 Data Feature: 48K bytes for data set generation and for data transmission. Any IBM Direct-Access Storage Facility supported by the operating system, Assembler, and access methods used. If the IBM System/7 is to be connected to the host system via a teleprocessing linkage, an IBM 2701 Data Adapter or equivalent transmission control unit and PIT (Post - Telephone - Telegraph: common carrier) or IBM modems are required. MMS system generation can also be performed at an IBM Center. Licensing 5707-M33, MMSwith OS/VS Host System: MMS consists of System/7 code required for plant monitoring and communication and of S/370 code required for MMS data set generation and teleprocessing capabilities. The basic System/7 code offered as MMS Basic Material is assembled on ~,host S/370,and used on a System/7. The S/370 code offered as MMS S/370 Data Feature is assembled, and used on a S/370. The Basic Material (System/7 code) and the S/370 Data Feature (S/370 code) each must be licensed on a designated central processing unit (Designated CPU). The Basic Material must be licensed on a System/7. The S/370 Data Feature must be licensed on a S/370. TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index PP 5707-M33.2 Mar 83 Major Revision ------- -------.:. =-= ~~§: ISG PP 5707-XN3.1 Do not reproduce without written permission Mar 83 Major Revision PROGRAM PRODUCTS SYSTEM/7 PROCESS CONTROL PROGRAM (PCP /7) 5707-XN3 (using HPPF-II/0S Systems) 5707-XN4 (using HPPF-II/DOS Systems) 5707-XN5 (using System/7 Program Preparation) PURPOSE System/7 Process Control Program (PCP/7) is designed to provide process monitoring, supervisory control, and direct digital control of continuous industrial processes. The program executes in a System/7 and is prepared on a S/360 or S/370 using the MSP/7 Host Program Preparation Facility-II (HPPF-II) or on a System/7 using the System/7 Program Preparation Facilities (System/7 PPF). Process operator communication with the program is supported through the RPQ 7414 Interactive Console or 5028 Operator Station used as a Process Operator Console (PaC) attached to the System/7. In addition, support is provided for communications to a S/360, S/370, 1800, or 1130 System operating with the appropriate Distributed System Program (DSP). The program is tailored to specific monitoring or control applications by means of user-specified information, which is stored in tabular form in the program. All of the information required to describe each process variable is specified in this table along with the program steps which must be executed to achieve the required control action. The table (Process Variable Record [PVR] Table) is scanned on a periodic basis and each variable is then processed in accordance with the information in the table. The table is generated by specifying the pertinent parameters of each process variable through a fill-in-the-blanks procedure. The parameters specified include the symbolic variable name, such as T100 to FOO5; type of measurement, analog or digital; range and units of measurement; and frequency of processing. In addition, the macro permits the user to specify digital control processing steps for a variable and also the parameters for each step. Control processing options include: Two types of Digital Filtering Control algorithm selection Limits and limit violation action Selection of output type and disposition HIGHLIGHTS Measurement Processing - Scanning of process variables, measurement conditioning, limit checking, and alarm annunciation. Measured variables are converted to engineering units for display and calculation. Direct Digital Control Procosslng - Several control algorithm options, includinQ a five-mode controller and a ratio controller. The five-mode algOrithm provides standard three-term (proportional, integral, derivative) control with two additional non-linear modes. The absolute form of the al~orithm is used to produce absolute or incremental output on an individual PVR basis. Supervisory Control - PCP /7 solves a difference equation that computes the appropriate change in the target of a controlled variable based both on the deviation of the current value of a primary variable from its target and on the changes in other related variables. The change to the target of the controlled variable can be staged over a period of time. Setpoint Adjustment - The ability to adjust the setpoint of an external analog controller. Operator Communication - Support for up to two RPQ 7414 Interactive Consoles or one 5028 Operator Station when used as a Process Operator Console (PaC). Two console-selectable modes of information access are provided. In the operator mode, the process operator is restricted to accessing only that information with which he must be concerned. In the engineer mode, nearly unlimited information access is possible. Error Analysis and Control - The ability to detect and take control ,on system errors. If the System/7 configuration includes the optional 5022 disk, the PCP /7 program and data can be stored on , disk and used for restart purposes. ~. M~i*iple UtilitiJJS - The ability to load and dump System/7 .r:', proc'E$S data, in the form of the PVR table via the 5028 Operator ~' Statio[l. " ., p·~ce~s.:'O'tapreparation - Users specify tho characteristics of the.,k Jlro~e$sdata to, the system through fill~in-the-blanks forms. ApG/7, If :fnstalled. on the host preparation system, not only pr.ovides forms.~tor specifying' process data, but also for specifying system charac~eristics~ i~stall . ';CUST.OMER RESPONSIBILITIES si~;~mJ:Z' To PCP/7 i a the user must perform the following: • . Define the Applicaifon.,'::Users must first determine the scope of the applicatiolT and tile control strategy to be useCl.~'~lso, they must identify' . instru~entation and cabling, including' sensors and computer output stations.: that will interface the process with the System/7. c, ." Determine System/7 Configuration - The computer system equipment necessary to satisfy the application scope must be identified. Specify PCP/7 System Generation Options - Depending on the specific System/7 configuration and scope of application, PCP /7 will require different modules and / or will take different action within the modules. Users tailor PCP /7 to meet the needs of their specific application by a user-oriented specification procedure that identifies the equipment they have and the program options they require. This requires extensive knowledge of the application but minimal knowledge of MSP /7 and programming. Prepare Any User Additions - Any processing routines added to PCP /7 must be prepared by the user. These routines may require MSP /7 specification macros in addition to those generated by PCP/7 as a result of the specification procedure. APG/7, if used, includes a high-level procedural language facility for coding user routines. PCP /7, in turn, provides an interface that allows APG /7 or System/7 FORTRAN IV to access and modify the PVR Table. User routines that cO.mpete with PCP /7 for such System /7 resources as the disk and the host communication adapter, require special consideration. In order to ensure maximum PCP /7 performance, users should be aware of the way in which PCP/7 uses these resources and organize their additions in the complementary manner. A good knowledge of programming and MSP /7 is required for any additions. Generato PCP/7 Storage Load - This may be done using either the MSP/7 Host Program Preparation Facility II on any 5/37,0 that meets the minimum machine requirements, or the System/7 Program Preparation Facilities on a System/7 that meets the minimum machine requirements. Generate Process Variable Record Table - The user generates the PVR Table by using fill-in-the-blanks facilities to define each measured or controlled variable. The table, once loaded into System/7 storage, can be modified online using the pac in either operator or engineer mode. Load Storage Module and PVR Table - If PCP /7 is generated on a S/370 host and the System/7 is not host-connected, both the PCP /7 program and the PVR Table must be punched onto paper tape and loaded to System /7 using the 5028 Operator Station. If the System/7 is host-connected, the storage load and PVR Table can be loaded directly from the host system. In the case of a host 1800 or 1130 System, the appropriate DSP or Disk Monitor facility is used to load System/7 object code, generated on a S/360 or S/370, to 1800 or 1130 disk storage. DSP is subsequently used to transmit a storage load to the System /7. SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS The minimum IBM System/7 configuration for PCP/7 program execution is: One IBM 5010 Processor, mdl A14 or B14 (14K words of storage). One 5012 Multifunction Module with sufficient sensor-based features to measure the variables and output control signals. One 5026 Enclosure One 5028 Operator Station. The 5012 Muitifunction ModLie provides the following: As many as 32 analog input points As many as 128 digital input points As many as 64 digital output points One or two analog output points This system supports a useable group' of digital control functions, including five-mode control of 50 process variables. (Storage requirements increase by approximately 25 words for each control variable added.) The complete sot of Input proceSSing, control processing, and console functions, requlros additional storage. Selection of certain user program options, disk support, or host communication support (DSP) also incroases the storage requirement. PCP/7 provides more user-selectable processing options than are likely to be used in a sin~le process control system. The inclusion of the full range of these options, within anyone application of PCP/7, together with the disk support and host communication functions, would result in a program exceeding 22K of System/7 storage. The detailed storage requirements for system options are available in the appendix of the IBM Process Control Program (PCP/7) Operations Guide. The following components allow implementation of additional PCP /7 functions: ------- - - - ----= - - :§'=fE: ISG PP 6707·XN3.2 Do not reproduce without written permission Mar 83 Major Revision PROGRAM PRODUCTS System/7 PCP/7 (cant'd) 5014 Analog Input Module, which handles up to 128 analog inputs. RPQ 7414 Interactive Consoles (without buffer of character set expansion), each of which includes a TV monitor (black and white display), alphameric keyboard (block style), function keyboard and 1053 Console Printer (optional). (7414 can be located up to 2,000 feet from the System/7). Asynchronous Communications Control Attachment (ACCA) for host communication (except for 1130 host). 1130 Host Attachment for 1130 host communication. DOCUMENTATION (available from Mechanicsburg) General Information Manual (GH19-7007) ... Program Product Specifications (GH19-7008). .., System/370 Distributed System Program General Information Manual (GH20-1171) ... System/370 Distributed System Program - Program Reference Manual (GH209500)... 1130 Distributed System Program - Program Reference Manual (GH20-1144) ... 1800 Distributed System Program - Program Reference Manual (GH20-1143) ... Application Program Generator General Information Manual (GH20-1162) ... Application Program Generator Program Reference Manual (SH20-9502) 5022 Disk for checkpoint and restart. RPQ Bipolar Analog Output in a 5012 Multifunction Module. 5013 Digital I/O Module which provides up to 128 digital input and 64 digital output points. (PCP/7 does not support RPQ's housed in the 5013 Module). . See IBM System/7 Functional Characteristics (GA34-0003) and IBM 7414 Model 1 Control Unit Custom Feature Description and Physical Planning Information (GA27-2743) for details on these components. The minimum configuration (S/360, S/370, or System/7) needed to assemble, format, and link-edit PCP/7 is satisfied by the configuration specified for MSP /7 Host Preparation Facilities II or System/7 Program Preparation Facilities, except that PCP /7 under DOS and DOS/VS requires an address space of 40K. The user requires enough direct access storage to support three work files, an MSP/7 library, and a PCP/7 library. 65 cylinders of 2314 space, or its equivalent will suffice. For the minimum configuration specified for stand-alone System/7 program preparation, the MSP /7 Source Library Editor must be used to minimize program listing requirements. The system configuration requirements for both host and stand-alone program preparation are specified in IBM System/7 Macro Assemblers (GC34-0018). For use with the System/7 Program Preparation Facilities, an additional 5022 Disk Storage Module (mdl 1, 2, 3, or 4) is recommended if the complete MSP /7, PCP /7, and FORTRAN IV Libraries are required to remain online at all times for the user's stand-alone System/7. In this case, the additional disk storage module will provide substantial additional storage for user source and object modules and application program data files. Since support for the 129 Data Recorder and the 7431 Matrix Printer , (see RPQ 008147) is included under the System/7 Program Preparation Facilities, it is strong I)' recommended that these devices be used for faster and easier PCP!7 preparation. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS The modules that comprise PCP /7 are written using MSP /7 system macros and ASM /7 Assembler Language instructions. PCP /7 can be prepared on an IBM S/360 or an IBM S/370 using the MSP/7 Host Program Preparation Facility II (HPPF II) operating under OS, OS/VS1, OS/VS2, DOS, or DOS/VS, or on an IBM System/7 using the System/7 Program Preparation Facilities (System/7 PPF). Users tailor their PCP /7 system according to the IBM System/7 configuration and the PCP features desired by selecting the appropriate PCP /7 specification macro parameters. The application program preparation facility uses this information to prepare an object module. This nucleus module is then combined with other. PCP /7 object modules and user-written modules in object form as input to LlNK/7, to produce a link-edited load module. The load module will be processed by FORMAT /7 or $UDFMT into final executable form. n Tho PCP/7 load module may be loaded intothe IBM System/7 using tho facilities of DSS/7 if prepared using the System/7 PPF. If prepared using HPPF-II, the module may be transmitted over a teleprocessing lino 10 tho IBM System/7, or it may be punched into 8-track paper tape for input through the operator station's paper tape reader. IBM programs that can be used in support of PCP/7 are: Host Program Preparation Facilities" (HPPF II) OS 360A-TX-020,360A-TX-026 OS/VSl 5744-AF1 DOS 360A-TX-Ol0, 360A-TX-016 DOS/VS 5745-AF1 System/7 Program Preparation Facilities (S/7 PPF) 5707-AA1 System/7 FORTRAN IV OS 5734-F04 DOS 5736-F01 S/7 PPF5707-FOl System/7 Application Program Generator (APG/7) as 5734-XC3 DOS 5736-XC3 Distributed System Program (DSP) OS 360A-TX-032 1130 1130-SV-002 1800 1800-SV-003 TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index ------- -------=- =-= :§~§: ISG PP 6707-XR1.1 Do not reproduce without writton permission Mar 83 Major Revision PROGRAM PRODUCTS SYSTEM TRANSACTION GENERATOR SYSTEM (TGS/7) 5707·X~1 • Stand-Alone 5740-XR3· Host Preparation (OS, OS/VS1, OS/VS2) PURPOSE SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS TGS/7 is a System/7 - 2790 program designed to increase the user's efficiency and productivity. It provides pre-coded transaction processing modules common to most data collection applications, and will support the 2790. disk and teleprocessing facilities available to the System/7. The data collection transaction modules provided include input checking. basic calculations, disk processing. message processing. and inquiry processing. For TGS/7 Stand-alone, the following program system is a prerequisite: . Users interface to TGS/7 through forms. The users fill in these forms to specify the particular data collection modules they want to employ and to provide parameters for tailoring them to their application environment. The actual selecting and tailoring of these application modules is performed by facilities provided by APG/7. a prerequisite to TGS/7. TGS/7 first edits the TGS/7 forms data for correctness. The APG/7 program generation facilities then select and tailor the specified application modules and combine them with supervisory nucleus modules to produce an entire application system of System/7 programs. For the last step. the generated programs are assembled. linked. and formatted. and the object programs are ready for loading and execution. HIGHLIGHTS TGS/7 can be a significant productivity aid in installing. supporting. and modifying System/7 - 2790 data collection applications. Stand-alone APG/7 - 5707-XCl For TGS/7 Host Preparation (OS, OS/VS1, OS/VS2), the following programming system is a prerequisite: Application Program Generator (APG /7) - 5734- XC3 Refer to APG/7 and Stand-alone APG/7 in the program product pages for subsequent prerequisite programming systems. When using the System/7 BSCA feature to transmit to a remote computing system. the remote system must use the following teleprocessing access methods: For System/370: DOS /VS - BTAM OS/VSl - BTAM or TCAM OS/VS2 - BTAM or TCAM For System/3: System/3 MLMP For System/7: M5P /7 Communications Access Method The TGS/7 application prototype file provides pre-coded and tested data collection transaction processing modules. When using the System/7 ACCA feature to transmit to a remote system (5/360 or S/370 only) the remote system must use teleprocessing access methods as specified in the programming section (see System/7 Macro Ubrary/Relocatable). TGS/7 forms enable the users to select and tailor the particular modules required for their specific data collection application. (available from Mechanicsburg) The user need not be an MSP /7 or APG /7 programmer to install a System/7 - 2790 data collection system using TGS/7. General Information Manual (GH20-9510) ... Program Product Specifications (GH20-9530) The User's Guide provides an easy to follow sequence of steps for APG /7 and MSP /7 use. TGS/7 edit facilities check the forms data for correctness and guide the user in correcting form data errors when they occur. APG/7 is a prerequisite to TGS/7 and provides program generation. compiler, and operating system facilities. TGS/7 supports the APG/7 Statement of Direction in emphasizing APG/7 as the major IBM application tool for the development and installation of System/7 programs. TGS/7 provides the user with a growth vehicle which is compatible with APG/7. Use: The users fill in TGS/7 forms to specify the particular TGS/7 data collection processing modules they want to employ and to provide parameters for tailoring them to their application environment. TGS/7 edits the forms data for correctness and. when errors occur. generates messages to guide the users in correcting their forms input. The APG /7 program generation facilities then select and tailor the specified TGS/7 application procedures and combine them with supervisory nucleus modules to produce an entire application system of System/7 programs. When using the TGS /7 BSCA and ACCA support to transmit to a remote computer system, receiving and processing transmitted data on the remote system is the user's responsibility. SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS An IBM 5010 processor with 20K words of storage ... one IBM 5022 Disk Storage Module mdl 1 or 2 ... IBM 5028 Operator Station ... one IBM 5026 Enclosure mdl C3 ... one IBM 5013 Digital Input/Output Module (with one 2790 Control #8195). , '", Notes:j~ .• " 1. For host preparation, an IBM S/370 is also required which will support System/7 HPPF.and APG/7. 2. For stand~alone preparation, an IBM 129 and 7431 are recommended for entering specification forms input data and for printing ,: intermediate output listings. 3. For generated program execution,' at least one IBM 2790 Control feature and at least one 2790 data entry device are required. 4. To determine 'overall device. feature. and storage requirements for specific system configurations, see the IBM System/7 Transaction Generator System (TGS/7) User's Guide (SH?0'i;,,9511). 5. For the inclusion of online batch program preparation, add an additional 12K words of storage for the batch partition and one more 5022 Mdl 1 or 2 disk storage module. (Also. the 5026 Enclosure mdl C3 will have to be changed to a Mdl C6.) '7fJ.:.: DOCUMENTATION Specification Forms Pad (50 forms per pad) as follows: Configuration Definition (GX26-3702) ... Transaction Definition (GX26-3703) ... Data Definition (GX26-3704) ... Procedures Control (GX26-3705) ... Update Disk Files (GX26-3706) ... Output to All Devices (GX26-3707). TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index --- 1-====== ISG < .::. : - : . Do not reproduce without written permission :§~§: PROGRAM PRODUCTS 5280 ASSEMBLER LANGUAGE 5708-AS1 PURPOSE The 5280 Assembler Language is a licensed program which provides a symbolic programming language used to write programs for the 5280 system. This licensed program consists of an assembler and the 3740 ACL Conversion Aid program. DESCRIPTION Source programs written in Assembler language are processed into 5280 machine language. Input to the assembler is a source program data set. If desired, this data set may be created by entering source stfltements through a user-written DE/RPG or Assembler language program. or the Key Entry Utility program [included in 5280 Utilities (5708- UT1) ]. Output of the assembler is an object program written to a diskette data set. Some of the features provided by the 5280 Assembler Language are: Mnemonic Operation Codes S~mbolic Referencing of Storage Addresses Automatic Storage Assignment Address Displacement Calculation Symbolic Data Representation Binary and Decimal Arithmetic Operand Expressions Source Program Listing Cross- Reference Listing Error Checking a~d Diagnostic Messages 3740 ACl Conversion ~id Prog/'am: Assists the user in converting existing 3740 ACL (Application Control Language) programs into 5280 Assembler language. The program will not convert CRDR, CROP, EXEC A, COMM, IF CRD or CKPT instructions. Some converted instructions may not function as on the 3740*. * For details, see IBM 5280 Assembler Language Reference Manual (SC21-7790). Input to this program is a diskette data set with ACl source code. Output is a data set containing 5280 Assembler Language source code. Assembler source code requires the 5280 Assembler Language licensed program for assembly. CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES IBM may provide marketing assistance in the installation of IBM licensed programs. However, the responsibility for providing accurate ordering information, personnel selection and training, installation, and continued day-to-day operation lies solely with the customer. Installation of IBM licensed programs is a customer responsibility. , Program Use During Customer Pre-installation Testing: 5280 Assembler : Language (570B-AS1) will be available to customers for pre-installation testing on IBM Test Center Systems in accordance with IBM's Program Testing Policy. ,; SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT Support will be provided for this licensed program when it is operated in the following specified operating environment: HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS The IBM 5280 Assembler will run on any IBM 5280 system which has, as a minimum, either 2 diskotte 1 drives, or 1 diskette 20 drive. The IBM 3740 ACL Conversion Aid Progrom will run on any IBM 5280 system. Minimum main storage partition size requirements are as follows: for the 5280 Assembler - 9K; for the 3740 ACl Conversion Aid Program - 16K. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS . The Assembler, Assembler object programs, and the IBM 3740 ACl . Conversion Aid Program require the IBM 5280 System Control Programming (5708-SC 1). DOCUMENTATION (available from Mechanicsburg) IBM 5280 Assembler Language Licensed Program Specifications (GC21-7801) .. , IBM 5280 Assembler Language Reference Manual (SC21-7790) ... IBM 5280 Functions Reference Manual (GA21-9353). TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index PP 5708-AS1.1 Mar 83 Major Revision ------------==-: --ISG PP 5708-CB1.1 Do not reproduce without written permission :§~E: Mar83 Major Revision PROGRAM PRODUCTS 5280 COBOL-OS/VS HOST COMPILER AND LIBRARY 5708-CB1 PURPOSE 5280 COBOL-OS/VS Host Compiler and Library is a licensed program that compiles on a 5/370, 30XX or 4300 under VM/SP, OS/VS1 or OS/VS2 (MVS). Output of the compiler is a 5280 machine-language object program that will execute on a 5285, 5286 or 5288. This object program may be copied to diskette (except for VM/SP) for transfer to a 5280 system or transmitted via communications directly to a 5280 system. 5280 COBOL provides customers with a powerful, comprehensive, easy-to-use language for use in preparation and execution of commercial application programs. The language offers a wide range of commercial features, plus facilities for handling input and output, structuring the source programs and debugging COBOL programs. 5280 COBOL allows the development of interactive applications by supporting functions that enable users to accept data from and display data on a 5280 keyboard/ display. 5280 COBOL is designed for an interactive commercial environment where users can perform transaction processing applications such as order entry, as well as applications that run in a background batch environment. HIGHLIGHTS Language Support of American National Standard (ANS) COBOL X3.231974. Support of 1975 Federal Information Processing Standard for COBOL. Extensive User Options - Source listings Cross-reference Storage map of variables Statement offset listing Object listing Object program record size of 80 or 128 bytes Program Development and Productivity Aids - Symbolic debug Flow trace Extensive error checking FIPS Flagger Generalized CALL A job-to-job facility DESCRIPTION I/O Capabilities 5280 COBOL programs can work with SEQUENTIAL, RELATIVE and INDEXED I/O files. The access methods supported are as follows: Sequential Organization - Sequential processing Relative Organization - Sequential processing - Random processing by relative record number Indexed Organization - Sequential processing - Random processing by record key using index file or in-memory index The new COBOL Transaction I/O extension by IBM provides a set of verbs and syntax for controlling a keyboard/display. Users can write interactive programs which allow an operator to perform functions such as entering data, performing inquiries and updating files. The capability is pr<;>vided for defining display formats and operator-entered fields. Field editing functions, which are a subset of the DE/RPG 'functions, Bre also available. Formats are stored within members of a partitioned data set and copied into the source program as needed. Table Handling Define and process fixed lenoth tables of up to three dimensions. Segmentation The Segmentation feature permits: Dividing the Procedure Division of a COBOL. program into a series of segments. I: . /"''0'4·.L' Specifying ttlat;some segments (fixed segmen~~)must be resident in main storage while the program is runriing, and cannot be overlaid, while others (independent segments)' are loaded into an overlay area when needed. Reducing main storage requirements during program execution. Interprogram Communication This facility allows transferring of control from one COBOL program to another within a partition. Programs can access the same data. Data Communications Data communications support for COBOL is via a CALL interface to the 5280 Communications Utilities licensed program (5708-DC1) access methods. Industry Standards 5280 COBOL is designed in accordance with the following industry standards as understood and interpreted by IBM as of January 1980. American National Standard (ANS) COBOL, X3.23-1974. ANS COBOL is identical to ISO 1989-COBOL, approved February 1978 by the International Organization for Standardization. The following processing modules are supported: 1 NUC 1.2 1 TBL 1,2 1 SEQ 1,2* 1 REL 0,2* 1 INX 0,2* 1 SEG 0,2 1 LIB 0,2 1 DEB 0,2 1 IPC 0,2 * RERUN clause is checked for syntactic co~~ectness only. The first digit above represents the level of the modules included in the compiler; the second digit represents the lowest level specified for American National Standard COBOL (0 implies that the module may be completely missing from a standard compiler); the third digit represents the highest level specified in the Standard. In addition to the above, the following Level 2 features are also supported: COMPUTE statement Qualification Arithmetic operators Complex conditions CORRESPONDING phrase ACCEPT and DISPLAY verbs Multiple operand support for arithmetic statements Nested IFs Nested REDEFINEs PERFORM UNTIL 01 through 49 and 88 level numbers LINAGE START verb December, 1975 Federal Information Processing Standard (FIPS Pub 21-1), Low-Intermediate Level. The RERUN clause is checked for syntactic correctness only. Additional support is provided for many features of higher FIPS levels. CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES IBM may provide marketing assistance in the installation of IBM licensed programs. However, the responsibility for providing accurate ordering information, personnel selection and training, installation' and continued day-to-day operation lies solely with the customer. Installation of IBM licensed programs is a customer responsibility. SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT Support will be provided for this licensed program when it is operated in the following specified operating environment: HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS Compilation: The IBM 5280 COBOL-OS/VS Host Compiler and Library (5708-CB1) executes on an IBM 5/370, 30XX or 4300 with at least 192K bytes of virtual storage as well as a configuration sufficient to run the selected operating system. Object Program Execution: COBOL object programs will run on any IBM 5280 system with a minimum of 48K bytes of main storage capacity. COBOL object programs require a minimum partition size of 16K bytes. Actual partition size requirements are a function of the COBOL source program. If data communications is used, a minimum of 64K bytes of main storage capacity is required. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS' IBM 5280 System Control Programming (5708-SC1) is required. The IBM 5280 Communications Utilities licensed program (5708-DC1) is required when using data communications via COBOL and will require a communications partition. ----- ----:: - - :S~E: ISG Do not reproduce without written permission -~- PROGRAM PRODUCTS 6280 COBOL-OS/VS Host Compiler and Library (cont'd) CONVERSION/COMPATIBILITY A high degree of upward compatibility does exist between the 5280 COBOL compiler and the OS/VS COBOL Compiler and Library (5740-CB1). However, differences do exist and some conversion will be necessary. These differences include transaction I/O support and communications support. Also, computational data will be incompatible with System/370. DOCUMENTATION (available from Mechanicsburg) IBM 5280 COBOL-OS/VS Host Compiler and Library Licensed Program Specifications (GL23-0033) ... IBM 5280 COBOL Language Reference (GL23-0031) ... IBM 5280 COBOL Programmer's Guide (SL23-0032) ... IBM 5280 COBOL Host Compilers Problem Determination Manual (SL23-0043). TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index PP 5708-CB1.2 Mar 83 Major Revision ------- ----:: - - :E'fE: ISG PP 6708-CB2.1 Do not reproduce without written permission Mar 83 Major Revision PROGRAM PRODUCTS 5280 COBOL-DOS/VSE HOST COMPILER AND LIBRARY 6708-CB2 PURPOSE 5280 COBOL-DOS/VSE Host Compiler and Library is a licensed program that compiles on a System/370, 30XX or 4300 under DOS/VSE. Output of the compiler is a 5280 machine language object program that will execute on a 5285, 5286 or 5288. This object program may be copied to diskette for transfer to a 5280 system or transmitted via communications directly to a 5280 system. 5280 COBOL provides customers with a powerful, comprehensive, easy-to-use language for use in preparation and execution of commercial application programs. The language offers a wide range of commercial features, plus facilities for handling input and output, structuring the source programs, and debugging COBOL programs. 5280 COBOL allows the development of interactive applications by supporting functions that enable users to accept data from and display data on a 5280 keyboard/display. 5280 COBOL is designed for an interactive commercial environment where users can perform transaction processing applications such as order entry, as well as applications that run in a background batch environment. HIGHLIGHTS Language - Support of American National Standard (ANS) COBOL X3.231974. - Support of 1975 Federal Information Processing Standard for COBOL. Source listings Cross-reference Storage map of variables Statement offset listing Object listing Object program record size of 80 or 128 bytes Program Development and Productivity Aids - Symbolic debug Flow trace Extensive error checking FIPS Flagger Generalized CALL A job-to-job facility DESCRIPTION I/O Capabilities 5280 COBOL programs can work with SEQUENTIAL, RELATIVE and INDEXED I/O files. The access methods supported are as follows: Sequential Organization - Sequential processing Relative Organization - Sequential processing - Random processing by relative record number using index file or in-memory index Indexed Organization - Sequential processing - Random processing by record key using index file or in-memory . index The COBOL Transaction I/O extension by IBM provides a set of verbs and syntax for controlling a keyboard/display. Users can write interactive programs which allow an operator to perform functions such as entering data, performing inquiries, and updating files. The capability is provided for defining display formats and operator-entered fields. Field editing functions, which are a subset of the DE/RPG functions, are also available. Formats are stored within books of the source statement.Jibrary and are copied into the source program as needed. Table Handling, Define and process fixed length tables of up to three dimensions. Segmentation . ',: ~,#,~. The Segmentation feature permits:.' Dividing the Procedure Division of a' COBOL program into a series of segments.,~ ,:_ ' , ~pecifying that some;segments (fixed:~egme~~) must be resident main storage while the program IS fl.lnmrig,",and cannot be overlaid, while others (independent. segments)fi are;' loaded into an overlay area when needed. In This facility allows transferring of control from one COBOL program to another within a partition. Programs can access the same data. Data Communications Data communications support for COBOL is via a CALL interface to the 5280 Communications Utilities licensed program (5708-DC1) access methods. Industry Standards IBM 5280 COBOL is designed in accordance with the following industry standards a s understood and interpreted by IBM as of January 1980. American National Standard (ANS) COBOL, X3.23-1974. ANS COBOL is identical to ISO 1989-COBOL approved February 1978 by the International Organization for Standardization. The following processing modules are supported: 1 NUC 1,2 1 TBL 1,2 1 SEa 1,2* 1 REL 0,2* 1 INX 0,2* 1 SEG 0,2 1 LIB 0,2 1 DEB 0,2 11PC 0,2 * RERUN clause is checked for syntactic correctness only. Extensive User Options - Reducing main storage requirements during program execution. Interprogram Communication The first digit above represents the level of the modules included in the compiler; the second digit represents the lowest level specified for American National Standard COBOL (0 implies that the module may be completely missing from a standard compiler); the third digit represents the highest level specified in the Standard. In addition to the above, the following Level 2 features are also supported: COMPUTE statement Qualification Arithmetic operators Complex conditions CORRESPONDING phrase ACCEPT and DISPLAY verbs Multiple operand support for arithmetic statements Nested IFs Nested REDEFINEs PERFORM UNTIL 01 through 49 and 88 level numbers LINAGE START verb December 1975 Federal Information Processing Standard (FIPS Pub21-1), Low-Intermediate Level. The RERUN clause is checked for syntactic correctness only. Additional support is provided for many features of higher FIPS levels. CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES IBM may provide marketing assistance in the installation of IBM licensed programs. However, the responsibility for providing accurate ordering information, .personnel selection and training, installation and continued day-to-day operation lies solely with the customer. Installation of IBM licensed programs is a customer responsibility. SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS Support will be provided for this licensed program when it is operated in the following specified operating environment: Compilation: The IBM 5280 COBOL-DOS/VSE Host Compiler and Library (5708-CB2) executes on an IBM S/370, 30XX or 4300 with at least a 168K byte partition plus the GETVIS space as well as a configuration sufficient to run the selected operating system. Object Program Execution: COBOL object programs will run on any IBM 5280 system with a minimum of 48K bytes of main storage capacity. COBOL object programs require a minimum partition size of 16K bytes. Actual partition size requirements are a function of the COBOL source program. If data communications is used, a minimum of 64K bytes of main storage capacity is required. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS IBM 5280 System Control Programming (5708-SC1) is required. The 5280 Communications Utilities Licensed Program (5708- DC 1) Is required when using data communications via COBOL and will require a communications partition. -------- ----.=. :-:. :E~E: ISG Do not reproduce without written permission PROGRAM PRODUCTS 5280 COBOL-DOS/VSE Host Compiler & Library (cont'd) CONVERSION/COMPATIBILITY Some compatibility does exist between the 5280 COBOL compiler and DOS/VS COBOL Compiler and Library (5746-CB1). Both compilers are designed in accordance with American National Standard COBOL. The 5280 COBOL supports the 1974 standard (X3.23-1974). while the DOS/VS COBOL supports the 1968 standard (X3.23-1968). Therefore. differences do exist and some conversion will be necessary. DOCUMENTATION (available from Mechanicsburg) IBM 5280 COBOL--DOS/VSE Host Compiler and 'Library Licensed Program Specifications (GL23-0034) ... IBM 5280 COBOL Language Reference (GL23-0031) ... IBM 5280 COBOL Programmer's Guide (SL23-0032) ... IBM 5280 COBOL Host Compilers Problem Determination Manual (SL23-0043). TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index PP 5708-CB2.2 Mar 83 Major Revision ------- - - - ----= - - :§~§: ISG PP 570B-CL1.1 Do not reproduco without written permission Mar 83 Major Revision PROGRAM PRODUCTS 52BO PROCEDURE CONTROll.ANGUAGE 5708-Cl1 PURPOSE The 5280 Procedure Control language is a licensed program which provides 5280 usera with job stream capability and the ability to execute a program with little or no operator intervention. The licensed program consists of a control program and supporting programs. Use of this licensed program is optional for 5280 users. HIGHLIGHTS Control language: The control language consists of a set of statements which are used to identify a job and its processing requirements to the system. The language provides a method of describing a job stream, together with all associated prompts and program specifications. A series of related control language statements is referred to as a 'procedure'. A procedure is used to provide control for a job or series of jobs. Control language facilities include: Specification of the name of the program(s) to be compiled and/or executed. Specification of the device from which a program is to be loaded. Specification of the data sets to be processed and the location of the data sets. Control language statement and error logging. Control language statements can be logged in order to provide a history or to provide a diagnostic aid in the event of abnormal procedure termination. A logical IF statement, which provides for intelligence within procedures. It is possible to execute different jobs based on tests performed within a procedure. Specification of default responses with optional operator override capability. Responses can be made to specific user program generated prompts or to prompts from IBM-supplied programs, such as a utility or a sort. Ability to provide default responses or operator-keyed responses to error messages. Internal subroutines and variables. DESCRIPTION Procedure Data Sots: Control language statements required to control a specific job or sequence of jobs are stored on a source procedure data set. The source procedure data set can be created in two ways: 1. During standard (not controlled) execution of a job, the source procedure data set can be automatically created through use of the Procedure Build Initator Program. The data set will contain all the information required to repeat that job sequence, including all program load specifications and prompt responses. 2. The data sot can be created by directly entering each control language statoment via a data entry program. The data entry program can be a usor-written program or an IBM-supplied program such as the Key Entry utility (part of the 5280 Utilities licensed program). The source procedure data set must be translated into object form in order to be utilized in a 'controlled' environment. The Procedure Preprocessor program converts the source data set into an object procedure data set. The object procedure data set is used by the Controller program to control execution of a specific program or series of programs. Controlled Program L:xecution: Programs running in a controlled environment execute under control of the Controller program. The Controller program provides the link between controlled programs and object procedure data sets. It detects and services requests from controlled programs. An interface to the operator is available via a set of ()perlltor commands. In a controlled environment, the Controller program supplies program load parameters and keyboard responses. A sequence of program prompts can be answered without operator intervention. The only time an operator is required to enter input to a controlled program is when an operlltor respon~e. is. specifically requested by a control language statement,. an error occurs that is not handled by the object procedure data set, or keyboard entry is requlrod by a data entry program such as DE/RPG: The Controller program resides in a background partition and must remain in main storage during execution of controllod programs, Standard, 'not cOl.1trolled' 5280 programs can be concurrently oxecuted in other partitions; These programs are functionally unaffected by and do not interfElce with the Controller Program. Operator Command$: The keyboard operator can communicate with the Controller Program via a set: of commands. The commands allow the operator to restart or terminate procedure· exe.cutian and to update system parameters such as the system· dal~to~5;d~fault Controller program prompt responses. Program Support: The following IBM programs can operate under control of the Controller Program: 5280 System Control Programming (5708-SC1) 5280 COBOL Host Compilers and Libraries (5708-CB1, 5708-CB2, 5708-CB3, 5708-CB4) (object programs) 5280 Communications Utilities (5708-DC1) 5280 DE/RPG (5708-DE1) (compiler and obje~t programs) 5280-3270 Emulation (5708-EM1) 5280 Sort/Merge (5708-SM1) 5280 Utilities (5708- UT1 ) 5280 Assembler Language (5708-AS1) (Assembler and object programs-) - Keyboard accesses in Assembler language programs will not be controlled. SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT Support will be provided for this licensed program when it is operated in the following specified operating environment: HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS The IBM 5280 Procedure Control Language will run on any 5280 system which has, as a minimum, 48K bytes of main storage capacity and one diskette drive. Minimum main storage partition size requirements are as follows: 6K for the Procedure Build Initiator program; 12K- for the Controller Program; 14K for the Procedure Preprocessor program. The common functions area SYSJJCFA requires 22K. 12K will control one partition, with the Controller program and object procedure data sets both residing on a diskette with formats 1, 2, 4, 5, or 7. The Controller program partition size will vary between 12K and 23K depending up on the number of partitions controlled and the diskette format used. The Controller program diskette must remain resident while the Controller Program is running. See the IBM 5280 Procedure Control Language Reference Manual for specific requirements for the Controller program partition size. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS IBM 5280 System Control Programming (5708-SC1) is required. A customer-created IPL diskette containing the SYSJJCFA data set is alsCi required. SYSJJCFA is included in this licensed program. DOCUMENTATION (available from Mechanicsburg) IBM 5280 Procedure Control Language Licensed Program Specifications (GC23-0753) ... IBM 5280 Procedure Control Language Reference Manual (SC23-0706). RPQs ACCEPTED: No TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index ------ ---- PP 5708-DC1.1 Do not reproduce without written permission :: - - :§~5: ISG Mar 83 Major Revision PROGRAM PRODUCTS 5280 COMMUNICATIONS UTILITIES 5708-DC1 PURPOSE SAJE has the following functions available to the host system: The 5280 Communications Utilities licensed program, used with the Communications Adapter feature (#2500) consists of Communications Access Method (CAM) support, a set of communications utility programs, and an interface to the access method for communications application programs written in 5280 COBOL, 5280 DE/RPG, or 5280 Assembler language. HIGHLIGHTS One Console (Input and Output) One Reader One Printer One Punch Highlights of the SRJE workstation support are: MULTI-LEAVING Remote Job Entry (MRJE) .• Job streams can originate at either the 5280 diskette or keyboard. SNA Remote Job Entry (SRJE) Card I/O operation is simulated by diskette. Batch Data Transfer and Inquiry Communications Configuration and Job Description Job output from the host is sent to the 5280 as a print or punch data stream. General support includes: Punch data streams are written to diskette. - Communications Access Methods (CAM) - Systems Network Architecture/Synchronous Data Link Control (SNA/SDLC) - Binary Synchronous Communications (BSC) - Application program interface to DE/RPG, COBOL and Assembler Language - BSC Multipoint Monitor - Direct Device Support - Diskette Data Management - Concurrent Program Operation - Diagnostics (BSC Online Test, Trace Capability, Communications Job Statistics) DESCRIPTION MULTI·LEAVING Remote Job Entry (MRJE): The 5280 Communications Utilities permit a 5280 system to function as a Remote Job Entry (RJE) workstation for submission of jobs to a S/370 under OS/VS1 RES, OS/VS2 JES2, OS/VS2 JES3 or VM/370 RSCS. The MRJE Utility communicates with the host system over a point-to-point (switched or nonswitched) communication line via the Binary Synchronous mode of the communications adapter. Host system RJE programming support should be generated specifying System/3 as the supported terminal with: One Console (input and output) One Reader One Printer One Punch Highlights of the MRJE workstation are: MULTI-LEAVING support permits taking advantage of concurrent 5280 device operation. Card I/O operation is simulated by diskette storage. Expansion of blanks and duplicate characters may be performed to increase host output line utilization. Job streams can originate at either the 5280 diskette or keyboard. Punch data streams are written to diskette. Print data streams can go to either the diskette or printer. Special printer forms are supported. Console data streams are used for sending and receiving commands and operator messages between the 5280 and the host system. SRJE Utility Control Statements can be entered from the keyboard or from a diskette data set. Job statistics for each session are maintained which are displayed at the end of the session. Batch/Inquiry Data Transfer: The capability to perform batch data transfer and interactive inquiries with various host systems using either BSC or SNA/SDLC protocol is supplied as part of the communications utilities. These batch data transfer and inquiry utilities use the information created/maintained by the preparation utilities for program execution. The utilities permit the user to easily transfer information over the communications line with minimum operator involvement. Binary Synchronous Communications (SSC) These utilities provide the interface to support data communications with S/370 models 115 to 168 and 30XX, 4331 and 4341 processors operating under DOS/VSE, VSE/ Advanced Function, OS/VS1 and OS/VS2 (MVS) accordingly. Attachment is through 3704/3705 with Emulation Program (EP) or the Partition Emulation Program (PEP) extension to 3704/3705 ACF/NCP/VS or the Integrated Communications Adapter for S/370, 115, 125 and 138 or the Communications Adapter of the 4331. Using the 5280 Communications Utilities, the 5280 system appears as a: 3741 to CICS/VS and IMS/VS 3780 to VSE/POWER The preferred 5280 support to CICS/VS and IMS/V5 is 5NA LU1. The 3741 line protocol of the esc Data Communications Utility (SYSBDCU) would normally be used when replacing a 3741. Print data streams can be directed to either diskette or printer. SYSBDCU is also used to interface the 5280 to DOS/VSE/POWER using 3780 line protocol. Supports special printer forms SYSBDCU should not be considered as providing 3741 or 3780 emulation capabilities. Operates with detached keyboard/display. The 5280 system also appears as a 3741 to: Supports transmission of multivolume data sets. Console data streams are used for sending and receIVIng commands and operator messages between the 5280 and the host. MRJE utility control statements can be entered from the keyboard or4from a diskette data set. Job statistics are maintained which are displayed at the end of the session. SNA Remote Job Entry (SRJE): The 5280 Communications Utilities enable the 5280 system to submit RJE jobs to a host S/370 using SNA/SDLC link protocol. The utility supports a single LU-LU session with the following host subsystems using ACF/VTAM and ACF./NCP/VS: OS/VS1 Remote Entry Service (RES) OS/VS2 Job Entry Subsystem 2 (JES2) OS/VS2 Job Entry Subsystem 3 (JES3) DOS/VSE/POWER System/3 with CCP or RPG II System/32 with RPG II System/34 with RPG II or SSP-ICF System/38 with RPG III or COBOL Series/1 RPS Version 3/4 3741 models 2 and 4 3747 6265 5280 The 5280 communications configuration utility· allows the u!Jer t.~ describe certain communication characteristics, prior to pl',pgram execution, such as terminal type, terminal add~ess and timeouts.,~ : 5280 as a Terminal (I..U. TYPEV to S/370 CIC~/Vffand IMS/VS'ili sing SNA/SDLC Protocols· • . " '. \ The 5280 communicates .with ·IMS/VS appliclations under 05/V~ or OS/VS2 (MVS) or CICS/VS applications exEicuting under DOSmSE, VSE/ Advanced Function, OS/VS1 or OS/VS2JMVS) in 5/370 models 145 to 168 for IMS/VS, and models 138 to·:168 for CICS/VS. The "~ 4~ . ------- -------= =:: a'f5: ISG PP S708-0C1.2 Do not reproduce without written permission Mar83 Major Revision PROGRAM PRODUCTS 5280 Communications Utilities (cont'd) 5280 communicates with IMS/VS or CICS/VS applications in 30XX, 4331 and 4341 processors. Multiple (up to 4) LU- LU sessions with ACF/VTAM are supported by IMS/VS or CICS/VS. The 5280 communications configuration utility allows the user to describe certain communication characteristics, prior to program execution, such as station address, pacing counts and Logon. Communications Configuration and Job Description: The primary functions of the communications configuration 'and job description utilities are to: Describe the communications environment. Describe the transmit, receive and/or inquiry functions that make up a job. Users of the 5280 system describe the communications jobs for execution by running easy-to-use keyboard/display prompt/response preparation utilities. The responses to the prompts a,e savod on diskette and identified by name. The information is then supplied to the appropriate utilities at execution time to control the communication session with the remote host or terminal system. Multiple job records may be maintained to provide communications flexibility within the 5280 system. Diskette Support: Diskette support is an integral part of the 5280 Communications Utilities. It permits users to maintain and control a diskette data set(s) in a variety of ways. Included in the support is the capability to transmit and receive Single and multiple data sets from/to one or more physical diskette drives; to support data sets spanning one or more diskettes; to allocate and write received data to a new data set, add received data to the end of an existing data set and replace received data in an existing data set. Direct Device Support: The 5280 Communications Utilities provide direct device support as to the origin and destination of the data transferred over the communications line. To the Line From the Line Data Set(s) Magnetic Stripe Reader (for BSC support only) Keyboard Data Set(s) Printer Display In addition, certain combinations of multiple 5280 output devices are allowed. Application Program User Interface: The 5280 Communications Utilities provide an interface to the Communication Access Methods (CAM) for a user to write DE/RPG, COBOL or 5280 Assembler language programs. As an example, this could provide 5280 users additional communications capabilities for those applications requiring random inquiries to remote host master files with the response data processed by the 5280 application. BSC Multipoint Monitor: The BSC Multipoint Monitor provides, for the communicating 5285 Programmable Data Station and the 5288 Programmable Control Unit residing on a BSC multipoint network, the ability to respond to host polling and selection without the requirement to have a Communications Access Method (CAM) loaded into main storage. The Multipoint Monitor resides in the common functions area. Use of the Multipoint Monitor prevents the host from removing the 5280 from polling lists, which would thereby require reactivation at the host when communications are desired. Concurrent Program Operation: The 5280 Communications Utilities require a minimum of two partitions: one for a Communications Access Method «(CAM) and one for an IBM-supplied 5280 Communications . Utility or a user communications application program. For concurrent program operation, the system may be running other application programs concurrent with a Communications Utility. The limitation is the amount of main storage available, number of partitions and possible performance considerations. Diagnostics (BSC Online Test, Trace Capability, Communications Job Statistics): The Communications Utilities maintain information and provide statistics on the job just executed, such as the number of input/ output records processed. Additional communications information such as status indicators, counters, error logs and communications trace table is available. CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES leM !)'lay provide marketing assistance in the installation of IBM licensqd programs. However, the responsibility for providing accurate orderiflg Information, personnel selection and training, installation, and contir«Jed day-to-d~y operation lies solely with the customer. Instfation of IBM IicenS~d programs'is a customer responsibility. Program Use During Customer Pre-installation Testing: The IBM 5280 Communications~Utilities (5708-DC1) will be available to cuStomers for pre-installation testing on IBM Test Center Systems in accordance with IBM's Program Testing Policy. SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT Support will be provided for this licensed program when it' is operated in the following specified operating environment: HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS The minimum system configuration required to support communications in a BSC network is: AN IBM 5285 with 32K bytes of main storage capacity, the Communications Adapter (#2500) and a display size(s) of 960 characters. Because the SNA support requires either the Elapsed Time Counter (#3610) or the Magnetic Stripe Reader Adapter/Elapsed Time Counter (#4960), the customer should carefully evaluate his future requirements when installing a BSC system. OR: An IBM 5288 with 32K bytes of main storage capacity, the Communications Adapter (#2500), anci an auxiliary data station (5281 or 5282) with a display size(s) of 960 characters. Because the SNA support requires either the Elapsed Time Counter (#3610) or the Magnetic Stripe Reader Adapter/Elapsed Time Counter (#4955), the customer should carefully evaluate his future requirements when installing a BSC system. The MRJE has the same requirements as above except that it requires 48K bytes of main storage capacity on the 5285 and 64K bytes of main storage on the 5288. The minimum system configuration required to support communications in an SNA network, including the SRJE utility. is: An IBM 5285 with 64K bytes of main storage capacity, the Communications Adapter (#2500), a disp'lay size(s) of 960 characters, and either the Elapsed Time Counter (#3610) or the Magnetic Stripe Reader Adapter / Elapsed Time Counter (#4960). OR: An IBM 5288 with 64K bytes of main storage capacity, the Communications Adapter (#2500), an auxiliary data station (5281 or 5282) with a display size(s) of 960 characters, and either the Elapsed Time Counter (#3610) or the Magnetic Stripe Reader Adapter/Elapsed Time Counter. (#4955). One communications line can be connected (via the appropriate line interface) to the adapter. Optional hardware that is available for use with the Communications Utilities is: IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM IBM 5222 Printer 5224 Printer 5225 Printer 5256 Printer 3270 Emulation Communications Adapter Magnetic Stripe Reader SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS 5280 System Control Programming (5708-SC1). DOCUMENTATION (available from Mechanicsburg) IBM 5280 Communications Utilities Licensed Program Specifications (GC34-0387) ... IBM 5280 Communications Reference Manual (SC34-0247). TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index ----------- ---- --- PP 5708-0E1.1 Do not reproduce without written permission =.:::';"= ISG Mar 83 Major Revision PROGRAM PRODUCTS 5280DE/RPG 5708-DE1 PURPOSE DE/RPG is a licensed program that provides advanced data entry and associated processing cepability for the 5280 system. DE/RPG uses the Data DescriRtion Specifications (DDS) form, which is also supported on the System/38. An RPG subroutine capability is included which is a subset of RPG III calculation operation codes. The DE/RPG licensed program consists of a Compiler and a Source Entry Program. A broad range of capability is provided to allow the user to perform jobs ranging from simple, transcriptive kay entry, to high-function data entry requiring extensive editing, data set access and user-defined processing. User-defined formats, presented on the display, constitute the framework for entering data, creating a record and writing that record to a diskette data set. Extensive data editing is available to maximize productivity of the data entry process and reduce the need for expensive error correction procedures. Using General Utility Specification forms and Data Description Specification forms, the user can define a data entry program by simply specifying which edits and checks are required. DE/RPG uses DDS forms for specification of data entry formats. A format or series of formats provide the framework for a data entry job. Sequence of execution of formats is determined by job definition, operator selection, or dynamically, based on analysis of current data. Basic function is expanded through use of the RPG Calculation Specifications. This provides the user with the capability of defining specialized routines, such as complex arithmetic calculations, array handling, device I/O operations or initiate/terminate and read/write to communications. This RPG subroutine capability can also be used to create a stand-alone batch DE/RPG program. HIGHLIGHTS direct interface to the 5280 Communications Utilities licensed program (5708-DC1) and the 3270 Emulation licensed program (5708-EM1). Sequence of instruction execution is user-defined the RPG •cycle' does not apply. The following operation codes are available: Arithmetic and data manipulation - ADD, Z-ADD, SUB, Z-SUB, MULT, DIV, MVR, LOKUP, MOVE, MOVEA, MOVEL, COMP Branching - CABxx, GOTO, TAG Indicator testing - SETON, SETOF, BITON, BITOF, TESTB Subroutine operations - EXSR, BEGSR, ENDSR Special I/O operations: - Diskette - OPEN, CLOSE, READ, READP, WRITE, CHAIN, SETLL,UPDAT,DELET - Printer - OPEN, CLOSE, WRITE - Keyboard/display - EXFMT, WRITE - Communications - OPEN, CLOSE, READ, WRITE - Assembler subroutine exit - CALL Diskette Data Set Support The 5280 system supports the sequential data set organization. The access methods available are: sequential, direct by relative record number and key indexed. Data sets can be shared by multiple programs on a read or write/update basis. Concurrent update of a record by multiple programs is prevented. Modes of Operation The four basic modes of operation of a DE/RPG program are: - Prompts and data fields can be positioned anywhere on the screen below the status line (Line 1 of the display). - Multiple formats can be displayed on a sin~le screen. - Display attributes for prompts and data fields include highlight, blink, reverse image, underline, non display and column separators. - Enter: Initial data entry. The record created is written to a diskette data set. - Update: Review and modification of selected records in an existing data set. - Verify: Verify data in an existing data set for accuracy. - Rerun: Sequential processing of an existing data set performing all field edits and checks without operator intervention (that is, normal key input is bypassed). High-Function Editing Special Functions Provides the capability of checking and performing operations on data as it is entered. Edits can be performed on a character, field, or record basis, and include: During operation of a DE/RPG proQram, the operator can select from a number of available special functions. These special functions include: - Character check - alpha, alpha only, numeric, numeric only, signed numeric, digits only, hexadecimal - Mandatory enter - Mandatory fill - Data required - Exit key required - Duplication - from previous record or named field - Right adjust with blank or zero fill - Self check/generate - Modulus 10/11 or user-defined - Counter arithmetic - Automatic field insert - constant, named field or results of an arithmetic expression - Comparison test - compare to constant, named field or arithmetic expression - Substitute table data for keyed data - Table lookup - test for matching table entry - Range test - compare to cons:ants, named fields or table entries - Reformat field position - resequence fields for output record - Set indicators on/off - Exit to user subroutine - User-written error messages - Crosscheck - compare values of two fields against a table to ensure valid combination - Sequence check - compare current value of field with previous value - Picture check - multiple keyboard shifts in a single data field - Search Data Set - locate and retrieve a record in a data set by its position within the data set, or by record content. - Manual Format Selection - operator selection of a format within the current job. - Record Insert/Delete - insert a record into or delete a record from a data set. - Copy - transfer a record from a data set to the current transaction data set. - Print - an unformatted printing of the current record. - Mark Field - mark a field in error to facilitate later correction. - Edit Release - suspend editing of a field. Display Screen Design Production Statistics All DE/RPG programs will maintain production statistics on a job basis and on a station basis. Statistics that can be maintained include: Keystrokes, records, elapsed time, marked records, verify correction keystrokes, number of jobs (on a station basis). User-Written Subroutines Through use of the RPG Calculation Specifications, capabili~ is provided to create subroutines for DE/RPG programs. In addition, this capability allows the user to write a non-interactive, standalone DE/RPG program that can run in any partition. The operation codes available are a subset of System/38 RPG III Calculation Specification operation codes. This capability can be used for such functions as complex edit routines, extensive arithmetic calculations, "!laster data set access and report printing. Simple read/Write statements provide access to communications via a Device Support All devices available on the 5280 system are supported by DE/RPG: - Keyboard/display Diskette 1 drive Diskette 20 drive Magnetic Stripe Reader (#4950) 5222 Printer 5224 Printer 5225 Printer 5256 Printer DE/RPG Source Entry Program '<' The DE/RPG Source Entry program is used to create a DE/RPG~' source statement data set, which becomes input to the DE/RPG-, compiler. Operating through the keyboard/display, the user seleclj: the required statement type and is prompted to enter the parame;;r: ters requ!red to complete the statement., The par!imeters 'ie~ entered via the keyboard, the program automat,ioall,Y .,formats e~ statement into the form required by the DE/,RPG'compiler.cand ~ record is written to ,diSkette. Three' mo~es", ~f ~peratl~n Ce': '. ..:;. ;:;i\11.:, ,;, '.' !t normally used: - Enter Mode - for the'origir:'al - fJ;3!~:Mode enterin~;.of siit~m~nts for l/~ouie ma~i~gCOrrectio~,~f,',or ~~, itiO,~S ~istirg' ;';;folto an DE/RPG source statement.data set.., .. ·C" . . . . . - Verify Mode - for~erifying''tIata in artexistil')g source sta~ment ", ~'.1. ' ~ :.' f· ; data set for accuracy. Progra,m Use ------- ------ Do not reproduce without written permission :: - - ~'f§: ISG PROGRAM PRODUCTS 5280 DE/RPG (cont'd) Input to the compiler is a DE/RPG source statement data set. This data set may be created by the DE/RPG Source Entry Program, a DE/RPG user-defined data entry program or the 5280 Key Entry Utility program (part of the 5280 Utilities licensed program 5708-UT1). During compilation, a source listing is optional, and if requested, can be directed to a printer or diskette. Output of the compiler is an object program data set written to diskette. For object program execution, when the requirement exists for mUltiple operators to perform the same job, each operator must have an individual copy of the program, executing in a separate partition. CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES IBM may provide marketing assistance in the installation of IBM licensed programs. However, the responsibility for providing accurate ordering information, personnel selection and training, installation and continued day-to-day operation lies solely with the customer. Installation of IBM licensed programs is a customer responsibility. Program Use During Customer Pre-installation Testing: 5280 DE/RPG (5708-DE1) will be available to customers for pre-installation testing on IBM Test Center Systems in accordance with IBM's Program Testing Policy. SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT Support will be provided for this licensed program when it is operated in the following specified operating environment: HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS The DE/RPG compiler will run on any IBM 5280 system which has, as a minimum, either two diskette 1 drives or one diskette 20 drive. The DE/RPG Source Entry Program will run on any IBM 5280 system. Minimum main storage partition size requirements are as follows: 9K for the DE/RPG compiler; 13K for the DE/RPG Source Entry program. The compiler will take advantage of additional main storage capacity if it is available. If the user desires to maintain the elapsed time production statistic, the Elapsed Time Counter or the Magnetic Stripe Reader Adapter/Elapsed Time Counter (special features) is required as follows: For the IBM 5285 - #3610, #4955 or #4960; for the IBM 5286 - #3610 or #4955; for the IBM 5288 - #3610 or #4955. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS The DE/RPG compiler, DE/RPG object programs and the DE/RPG Source Entry Program require the IBM 5280 System Control Programming (5708-SC1). In addition, DE/RPG object programs and the DEI RPG Source Entry program have, as a prerequisite, the IBM 5280 Utilities licensed program (5708-UT1). DE/RPG object programs and the DE/RPG Source Entry program require a customer-created IPL diskette containing the SYSCFA or SYSHELP data set (part of the 5280 Utilities). DOCUMENTATION (available from Mechanicsburg) IBM 5280 DE/RPG Licensed Program Specifications (GC21-7798) ... IBM 5280 DE / RPG Reference Manual (SC21-7787) ... IBM 5280 DE / RPG User's Guide (SC21-7804) ... IBM 5280 Introduction to DE / RPG (SC21-7803) ... IBM 5280 DE / RPG Problem Determination Procedures for the Programmar (SC21-7852). TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index PP 5708-DE1.2 Mar 83 Major Revision --..----- -------.:..:=:: :§~E: ISG Do not reproduce without written permission PROGRAM PRODUCTS PP 5708-EM1.1 Mar 83 Major Revision 5280 - 3270 EMULATION 5708-EM1 PURPOSE 5280 - 3270 Emulation allows the 5280 Distributed Data System to appear as selected 3270 control units and devices. The operating environments supported are: 3270 Device Emulation under System Network Architecture/ Synchronous Data Link Control (SNA/SDLC) and Binary Synchronous Communications (BSC). The 3270 Device Emulation Utility allows the 5280 to appear as selected 3270 control units and devices to existing host applications. 3270 Batch Transfer - BSC. Using this utility program, the 5280 user can transmit and receive batch data over a 3270 BSC network using 3270 line protocols. An appropriate user-written program is required at the host. Only graphic data (hex characters '4Q'-'FF') can be transmitted. 3270 Program Interface - BSC. This provides an interface for a user-written program in the 5280, written in DE/RPG or COBOL, to exchange records with a user-written program in a host system using 3270 BSC protocols. Only graphic data can be transmitted. HIGHLIGHTS 3270 Device Emulation Control Unit: The 5280 appears to the host as a 3274 model 1C Control Unit under SNA/SDLC or as a 3271 model 2 Control Unit under BSC. Display/Keyboard: The 1,920-character 5281 Data Station (attached to a 5288 Programmable Control Unit) and the 1,920-character 5285 Programmable Data Station appear to a host system as a 3277 model 2 Display Station with selected features. Typewriter, data entry, and data entry with proof arrangement keyboards are supported. 3270 Program Function keys are supported. The Local Print Key function is supported in SNA/SDLC and BSC. Printer: The 3270 Printer Emulation Utility allows the 5222, 5224, 5225, and 5256 Printers to appear as the 3284 model 2, 3286 model 2, or 3288 model 2 Printer in BSC, or the 3287 model 1 and 2 Printer in SNA/SDLC. 3270 BSe Batch Transfer Utility Program Data on a 5280 diskette can be sent to (or received from) an appropriately written host application program. Only graphic data can be transmitted. This utility is designed for batch transfer and limits the interference to other interactive sessions on the line. As a result, transfer of a data set can take more time than a normal batch transfer operation. The transmission and reception of multivolume diskette data sets is supported. Unsolicited host operator messages are handled by the 5280 display while the utility program is in operation. Logon to an interactive host is allowed prior to starting Batch Transfer. The use of a user-provided record identifying character in the data stream permits distinguishing user data from system messages. Fixed length, blocked or unblocked records up to 1,918 bytes are supported. 3270 BSe Program Interfaca Read/write level of interface on a logical record basis is available in an interactive mode using DE/RPG and COBOL. The DE/RPG or COBOL application program provides a 1,920character Device (Image) Buffer and 4,096-character, or less,' Data Stream Buffer. User-written programs must be provided at both ends of the communications link with careful consideration given to the application design and the characteristics of the communications subsystem. DESCRIPTION The 5280 - 3270 Emulation licensed program consists of the following six basic parts: 3270 Device Emulation Program - BSC and SNA/SDLC '3270 Batch Transfer Utility - BSC 3270 Program Interface - SSC Communications Access Method - BSC Communications Access Method - SNA/SDLC Communications Access Method - 3270/SRJE 3270 Device Emulation Program - BSe and SNA/SDLe Host system communication subsystems that are supported are: S/370 IMS/VS, CICS/VS, TSO, and System/3 model 150 CCP. Control Unit: The 3270 Device Emulation Program allows the 5280 to appear to a host system as a 3274 model 1C (SNA/SDLC) or a 3271 model 2 (BSC) Control Unit. Device emulation of the 3270 allows the 5280 to reside on the same communications link that supports a 3274 model 1C or 3271 model 2 Control Unit. Since this program provides data stream translation, host application programs will generally require little or no changes to support the 5280 as a 3270. Performance, however, may be degraded. Display/Keyboard: The 1,920-character 5281 Data Station (attached to a 5288 Programmable Control Unit) and the 1,920-character 5285 Programmable Data Station appear to a host system as a 3277 model 2 Display Station with selected features. Features not supported include: ASCII, Magnetic Stripe Reader, Light- Pen, and the Copy Command (from the host). Certain keys are in different locations on the 5280 keyboards. The EBCDIC typewriter, data entry, and data entry with proof arrangement keyboards and the EBCDIC transmission codes are supported. Function keys on the 3277 will be mapped onto the 5280 keyboard to provide for equivalent function: that is, Field Mark, Erase Input, PA, and PF keys. Up to 24 PF keys are supported. The host initiated local copy (print) is supported for SNA/SDLC. The local print key function is supported for SNA/SDLC and BSC. The magnetic stripe reader and the light.,.pen are not supported. Printer: The 3270 Printer Emulation utility provides to the 5280 user a method of using a 5280 printer as if it were a 3270 printer. The data to be printed is transmitted from the host system. The 3270 printers emulated are 3284 model 2, 3286 model 2, and 3288 model 2 in BSC. The 3287 Printer (models 1 and 2) is supported in SNA/SDLC. Special features available on these printers are not supported. The 5280 printers supported are the 5222, 5224, 5225, and 5256. They will print characters that match 3270 printer characters where it is physically possible. Characters that do not match will print a standard default character. Users that must print all characters exactly as on a 3270 printer can do so by using a printer with the multinational character set. Upper and lower case printing is supported on all printers and vertical forms control is supported as on the 3287 and 3288 Printers. The Printer Emulation Utility operates in either a foreground or background partition, and a maximum of five printer emulations may be active at one time. The printers may operate in local mode, systems mode (entirely under host control) or shared mode. 3270 Batch Transfer - BSe The 3270 Batch Transfer Emulation Utility will enable the user to transmit and receive batch data when communicating with a host system via 3270 BSC. Record lengths can be a maximum of 1,918 bytes. Transaction IDs and how they are to be used during transmission may be specified. It is possible to transmit and receive single or multiple volume data sets containing graphic text (hex characters '4Q'-'FF') only. Unsolicited messages and interactive logon/logoff can, also be handled. The utility executes in a foreground partition. A user program is required at the host to send or receive batch data. 3270 Program Interface - BSe This function provides the 5280 user with a program-to-program interface that uses 3270 BSC protocols. The 5280 application program that uses this function appears to the host system as a 3271 model 2 device. Up to seven concurrent sessions are supported. E,ach session ,~ll represonts a different 3270 device address.. The user application interface for this function is through DE/ RPG and COBOL. The DE/RPG support for the ,3270 program~~interface will provide a new parameter on the DEVICE keyword. Th~ user will specify 'COMM3270' as the device ,type. A file defined with this device code may be accessed from the "calculation specifications using READ, WRITE, OPEN, and CLOSE operations. ,;;, The COBOL support'is imp)~rii~nted by use of the COBOL CALL routines. A, COBOL program ir;lterfaces.to the 3270 CAM through library routines.' Communications~'are initiated by activating the CALL verbs that open and close data sets and read or write records. ------- - - - -:: - - :§~§: PP 5708-EM1.2 Do not reproduce without written permission ISG Mar 83 Major Revision PROGRAM PRODUCTS 5280 - 3270 Emulation (cont'd) BSC Considerations: Primary operation is on nonswitched multipoint communications facilities. Switched network backup (SNBU) may be utilized if the associated modems and application programs support this capability. The following BSC host system support is provided for 5280 - 3270 Device Emulation: IMS/VS with BTAM under OS/VSl or OS/VS2 (MVS) IMS/VS with ACF/VTAM under OS/VSl or OS/VS2 (MVS) IMS/VS with ACF/TCAM under OS/VSl or OS/VS2 (MVS) CICS/VS with BTAM under OS/VS1 or OS/VS2 (MVS) CICS/VS with ACF/TCAM under OS/VS1 or OS/VS2 (MVS) CICS/VS with BTAM-ES or ACF/VTAM or ACF/VTAME under DOS/VSE CICS/VS with ACF/VTAM under OS/VSl or OS/VS2 (MVS) TSO with ACF/VTAM under OS/VS2 (MVS)* TSO with ACF/TCAM under OS/VS2 (MVS)* RSCS with VM/370 (printer emulation) CMS with VM/370 (display emulation) SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS The current release of IBM 5280 System Control Programming (5708-SC1) and the current release of IBM 5280 Communications Utilities (5708- DC 1) * 96K bytes if a keyboard / display printer is used in conjunction with the 96K bytes may be required depending upon the host system network parameters effect on the SNA CAM buffer size. Refer to the IBM 5280 - 3270 Emulation Reference Manual (SC34-0384). 160K bytes is required if the 3270/SRJE CAM is to be run with two utilities, (96K with one utility). such as the IBM 3270 SNA Display Emulation program and the SNA Remote Job Entry Utility (part of the 5280 Communications Utilities licensed program), executing concurrently. COMPATIBILITY 5280 Communications Support Compatibility: The 5280 - 3270 Emulation licensed program can co-exist on a 5280 system with other noncommunicating programs. Running a 3270 Emulation program concurrently with Transcriptive (that is. high keying rate) Key Entry (TKE) may degrade TKE performance. No other 5280 communications programs can run concurrently. DOCUMENTATION System/3 model 150 under CCP (available from Mechanicsburg) * TSO does not support printers. IBM 5280 - 3270 Emulation Licensed Program Specifications (GC34-0382) .. , IBM 5280 - 3270 Emulation Reference Manual (SC34-0384). Notes: 1. All of the above systems (except System/3) are also supported when under control of VM/370. 2. The 3270 Batch Transfer - BSC and the 3270 Program Interface BSC functions are not supported by IMS or CICS/VS. Support for these functions is limited to those specific interfaces described in the IBM 5280 - 3270 Emulation Reference Manual (SC34-0384). SNA/SDLC Considerations: Operation is on point-to-point switched as well as nonswitched point-to-point or multipoint communications facilities. The point-to-point switched capability is a function of the 5280 - 3270 Emulation licensed program (not a function of the 3274). The following SNA/SDLC host system support is provided for 5280 3270 Device Emulation: IMS/VS with ACF/VTAM under OS/VS1 or OS/VS2 (MVS) IMS/VS with ACF/TCAM under OS/VS1 or OS/VS2 (MVS) CICS/VS with ACF/VTAM under OS/VS1 or OS/VS2 (MVS) CICS/VS with ACF/TCAM under OS/VS1 or )S/VS2 (MVS) CICS/VS with ACF/VTAM or ACF/VTAME under DOS/VSE TSO with ACF/VTAM under OS/VS2 (MVS)* TSO with ACF/TCAM under OS/VS2 (MVS)* VSPC (Version 2 of later) with ACF/VTAM under OS/VS2 (MVS) * TSO does not support printers. Note: All of the above systems are also supported when under control of VM/370. SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT Support will be provided for this licensed program when it is operated in the following specified operating environment: HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS :rhe minimum 5280 system configuration required to support the 5280 - 3270 Device Emulation capabilities is: An IBM 6285 with 64K* bytes of main storage capacity, the 3270 . Emulation Communications Adapter (#3270), and Optional 1,920Character Display Size (#3505). SNA support requires, in addition, eithor the Elapsed Time Counter (#3610) or the Magnetic Stripe Reader Adapter / Elaps~d Time Counter (#4960). OR An IBM 5288 with 64K*· bytes of main storage capacity, the IBM 3270 ~mulation Communications Adapter (#3270), and an IBM 5281 Data Station with a~isplay size of 1,920 characters. SNA support requires, in addition. either the Elapsed Time Counter (#3610) or the Magnetic Stripe Reader Adapter/Elapsed Time Counter (#4955). Refer to the IBM 5280 - 3270 Emulation Reference Manual (SC340384) for required main storage requirements of o~her functions. TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index ------- -------.=.::.: :§~~ ISG Do not reproduce without written permission PROGRAM PRODUCTS 5280 SORT/MERGE 5708·SM1 PURPOSE The 5280 Sort/Merge licensed program consists of a Sort Program and a Merge Program. The Sort and Merge programs support any diskette data set organization supported by the 5280 system. The Merge Program supports multivolume data sets. Sort Program: The 5280 Sort program sorts a single diskette data set into ascending or descending sequence. HIGHLIGHTS Sort parameters are entered at the keyboard or read from a 'Command' data set which contains previously recorded parameters. Use of the 'Command' data set allows easier execution of most frequently desired sort functions. Records are sorted by a control field which can consist of from one to six subfields from different locations of the record. Control fields can be sorted in ascending or descending sequence or mixed (some ascending and some descending). Records can be selected, omitted, or reformatted. An alternate collating sequence can be specified. Records can be in EBCDIC or ASCII code. Work space and data sets are automatically allocated by the program. The order of records with identical control fields is preserved. Output from the sort program will be 1 of 4 formats: 1. Full record 2. Address Out - A data set of 4-byte relative record numbers.· 3. Record Subset - A data set containing user-specified data fields. 4. Index/Key - A data set with records consisting of a key and a relative record number.· The key is a user-specified input record data field. • The relative record number corresponds to the position of the input record in the input data set. DESCRIPTION Merge Program: The 5280 Merge program will combine records from two sequentially-ordered diskette data sets into another diskette data set. The records can be in ascending or descending order. An alternate collating sequence can be specified. Multivolume data sets are supported for both input and output. Merge parameters are entered at the keyboard or read from a 'Command' data set which contains previously recorded parameters. Use of the 'Command' data set allows easier execution of most frequently desired merge functions. CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES IBM may provide marketing assistance in the installation of IBM licensed programs. However, the responsibility for providing accurate ordering information, personnel selection and training, installation, and continued day-to-day operation lies solely with the customer. Installation of IBM licensed programs is a customer responsibility. Program Use During Customer Pre-installation Testing: The 5280 Sort/Merge (5708-SM1) will be available to customers for preinstallation testing on IBM Test Center Systems in accordance with IBM's Program Testing Policy. SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT Support will be provided for this licensed program when it is operated in the following specified operating environment: HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS The Sort/Merge will run on any IBM 5280 system. Minimum main storage partition size requirements for the Sort and Merge Programs is 16K. The Sort and Merge ProQrams will take advantage of additional main storage capacity if it is available. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS IBM 5280 System Control Programming (5708-SC1). DOCUMENTATION (available from Mechanicsburg) IBM 5280 Sort/Merge Licensed Program Specifications (GC21-7800) ... IBM 5280 Sort / Merge Reference / Operation Manual (SC21-7789). TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index PP 5708·SM1.1 Mar 83 Major Revision ------- ----- PP 570S-UT1.1 Do not reproduce without written permission :: - -~~~ ISG Mar 83 Major Revision PROGRAM PRODUCTS 5280 UTI UTI ES 5708-UT1 PURPOSE The 5280 Utilities licensed program provides the following utilities for the 5280 user. DESCRIPTION Diskette Initialization Utility Formats the diskette according to user requirements. The program will initialize diskettes 1 and 2 with sector sizes of 128, 256 or 512 bytes, and diskette 20 with sector sizes of 256,512 or 1,024 bytes. Diskette/Data Set Clear Utility: Performs the following functions: DROP: Clears the data set(s) in preparation for the recording of new data. FREE: Deletes the data set(s) and its header label from the diskette so that space is no longer assigned to that data set. Diskette Label Maintenance Utility: Provides the user with the capability to allocate new data sets, delete old data sets, and to modify volume and data set labels. The following capabilities are provided: ALLOCATE: Used to establish space for a new data set on a diskette. DELETE: Offers capability to either drop or free a header label. MODIFY VOLUME LABEL: Can be used to alter the Volume 10, Owner 10 and accessibility field. MODIFY DATA SET LABEL: Provides the user with the capability to modify header label fields. Diskette Label List Utility: Provides the user with the capability to display, print, or write to diskette: Diskette volume labels, data set labels, data set names, and data set directories. Printer format information for SCS processing may be supplied from the keyboard or from a printer format record on diskette. Printer forms alignment option. The first line of output may be reprinted multiple times. Print restart capability. For SCS data sets, the operator can halt printing and restart at any point in the data set. Multivolume input. Resource Allocation Utility: Allows the user to display, alter, or delete the logical device identifier and physical address of an existing entry, or add an entry to the resource allocation table. The resource allocation table contains physical device addresses with corresponding logical identifiers, and is originally built using the System Configuration Program [part of 5280 System Control Programming (5708-SC1)]. 3740 Format Conversion Utility: Allows the user to convert 3740 key entry program levels into source DE/RPG jobs. This utility converts basic field definitions such as right adjust, skip, dup, bypass, self check, field totals and their associated prompts. 3740 functions that are not converted by this utility can be implemented by adding appropriate DE/RPG statements to the DE/RPG program. Input to this utility is 3740 key entry string language from a diskette data set. Diskette Compress Utility: Permits the user to rearrange data sets to make one contiguous space out of the unused space between data, sets. Deleted data sets are removed from the diskette. Key Entry Utility: Provides the capability to create formats for basic key entry functions using the 3740 key entry string language. The key entry functions are functionally and operationally similar to the 3740 for enter, update, and verify operations. Diskette Copy Utility: Allows the user to copy all or a portion of a diskette onto the same or another diskette. Multivolume data sets are supported. The following functions are provided: This program takes advantage of 5280 ease-of-use characteristics to provide improvements in data set allocation, searches, and production statistics. Basic 3740 key entry functions are provided, except for self check, auxdup, 'numbers only' switch, online field totals, and non-key entry functions, such as printing and offline field totals. IMAGE COPY: Copies the entire contents of an input diskette onto an output diskette. Input and output diskettes must be the same type and format. The 3740 string language is entered at the keyboard and the reSUlting formats are immediately available or may be saved on diskette for later use. VOLUME COPY: Copies a group of data sets or the entire contents of an input diskette onto an output diskette. Input and output diskettes can be different types and have different formats. Deleted data sets are not copied. This utility is intended for simple key entry with little editing. It is not a 3740 emulator. DATA SET COPY: Copies the contents of up to four input data sets to an output data set. SPECIFY RECORD COPY: Copies the contents of a data set between 'from-to' relative record numbers to an output data set. SPECIFY KEY COPY: Allows the user to specify by key(s) which records are to be copied. SINGLE DRIVE DATA SET COPY: Copies a data set from one diskette to another using only one diskette drive. Diskette Print Utility: Allows the user to print all or selected records on a diskette. The program provides the following options: Print all records in a data set. Print all records from a group of data sets or all data sets. Print all records in a data set between user-specified relative record numbers. Print all records in a data set matching a user-specified key(s). "R'e~ords are printed exactly as recorded on diskette without reformat- ting or editing. " The, program also provides the capability to print a data set conSisting . of printer output previously directed to diskette. The datl!J set must have been croated from printer output (such as a DE/RPll compiler output listing) directed to a diskette or from data transmitted over a communications line, and must be a valid Standard Character String (SCS) data sot with appropriate printer format control. SCS/BSC,~37411 Print Utility: Provides the following print functions: Print BSC (3741 protocol) data sets that havo not undergone the Standard Character String (SCS) .mapping process. The utility will perform th\)' SCS processing and provide a halt whon an invalid oscape sequol)ce is encountered. .... Print a singlEi: ~CS dl;lta set whict);'6'ontains'valid printer format ~:. control ch~ract~~s. Print a group ,bf SCS da~a' $ets, having a common forms type identified. Thi, capability supports data sets transmitted to a 5280 in the form 'PRINTsss' or 'Asssxxxx'. #).: , , , Other features of ~his utility include:: ; ,. The Key Entry Utility requires an IPL diskette containing the SYSCFA or SYSHELP data set (part of this licensed program). System Status Utility: Provides the user with the capability to retrieve certain system status information. Current system status can be displayed, providing information on each main storage partition. This information includes partition number, name of program currently being executed (if any), partition size, and partition type (foreground or ' background). System configuration parameters, stored on an IPL diskette, can be retrieved and displayed or printed. These parameters define the configuration of the system for which the IPL diskette was generated, and include: System size (main storage), common function area size, printer type(s) and address(es), partition definitions (number, type and size) and type and number of keyboards. Menu Configuration Utility: Provides the programmer with the means to create and maintain a menu for a set of programs or procedures. A menu provides a displayed list of items (for example, job descriptions) from which an operator makes a selection. Menu selection allows the operator to start a job (or procedure) by simply selecting a menu item number. This utility creates a data set which contains the menu(s) and all information necessary to access, load, and initiate execution of the associated programs and/or procedures. The data set is stored on the diskette which contains the programs and/or procedures associated with the menu(s). Menu Utility: Provides the operator with the means to display and use menus. Initial execution of this utility provides a menu containing an entry for each online diskette which contains a menu data set. The operator can then select a menu for a specific set of programs and choose a specific job to be executed. The program will automatically be loaded and executed in a pre-selected background partition, the smallest available background partition, or the partition in which the Menu Utility is executing. Data Set Display Utility: Provides the user with an easy way to review the contents of a data set. The unformatted records are presented on the display, one line per record. For records with more than 80 characters, the user can move the display right or left to view the entire record. Up to 22 lines of records (depending on display size) are displayed on each screen. The user can scroll forward and backward through the data set. Each successive display will index through the data set a user-specified number of records. CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES ------- - - - ----- Do not reproduce without written permission =- --:§~5: ISG PROGRAM PRODUCTS 5280 Utilities (cont'd) IBM may provide marketing assistance in the installation of IBM licensed programs. However, the responsibility for providing accurate ordering information, personnel selection and training, installation, and continued day-to-day operation lies solely with the customer. Installation of IBM licensed programs is a customer responsibility. Program Use During Customer Pre-installation Testing: The 5280 Utilities (5708-UT1) will be available to customers for pre-installation testing on IBM Test Center Systems in accordance with IBM's Program Testing Policy. SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT Support will be provided for this licensed program when it is operated in the following specified operating environment: HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS The IBM 5280 Utilities (except Volume Copy, the write..,to-diskette option of the Label List Utility, and the Menu Utility) will run on any IBM 5280 System. Volume Copy and the write-to-diskette option of the Label List Utility will run on any IBM 5280 System which has, at a minimum, two diskette drives. The Menu Utility will run on any IBM 5280 system which has a display size of 960 or 1,920 characters. Minimum main storage partition size requirements are as follows: 8K for the Key Entry Utility; 9K for the Diskette/Data Set Clear, Diskette Label Maintenance, Diskette Label List, System Status*, Diskette Initialization, Diskette Copy, Diskette Print, Resource Allocation, Diskette Compress and 3740 Format Conversion Utilities; 12K for the Data Set Display Utility; 16K for the Menu Utility; 20K for the Menu Configuration Utility; and 22K for the SCS/BSC (3741) Print Utility. Each of the Utilities (except Diskette Initialization, Resource Allocation, Menu Configuration, and Menu) will take advantage of additional main storage capacity if it is available. *16K for the IPL diskette option For the Key Entry Utility, if the user desires to maintain the elapsed time production statistic, the Elapsed Time Counter or the Magnetic Stripe Reader Adapter / Elapsed Time. Counter (special features) is required as follows: For the 5285 - #3610, #4955, or #4960; for the 5286 - #3610 or #4955; for the 5288---#3610 or #4955. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS 5280 System Control Programming (5708-SC1). DOCUMENTATION (available from Mechanicsburg) IBM 5280 Utilities Licensed Program Specifications (GC21-7799) ... IBM 5280 Utilities Reference/Operation Manual (SC21-7788). RPQs ACCEPTED: No TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index PP 5708-UT1.2 Mar83 Major Revision ------- -------=- -~~~ ISG PP 5714-RG1.2 Do not reproduce without written permission Mar 83 PROGRAM PRODUCTS S/38 RPG III (cont'd) one or more KFLD operation codes to designate those fields comprising the composite key. Documentation Aids: Documentation enhancements include a cross-reference allowing easy access to determine where fields, files, and indicators are used. DDS text descriptions are available to source documentation. The SEU (or source file) sequence number is used as the default number method for statements and diagnostics and is carried into the object code to assist in execution time debugging. In addition, for any statement found in error, Position 1 of the compiler listing will show an asterisk. Asterisks will also appear under each field in error in the listing of the source. Nested level indication shows each statement level in a nest of DO loops and IF/ELSE processing. RELEASE 5.0 ENHANCEMENTS System/38 RPG III is being enhanced in Release 5.0 to include support for CPF commitment control, local data area, and for multiple devices in a display or mixed file. CPF commitment control is a mechanism for the user to code restart into interactive programs to assure the integrity of changes made to one or more files. Multiple device and local data area support provides functions similar to System/34. . HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS IBM System/38 RPG III runs on all models of IBM System/38. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS IBM System/38 RPG III and/or System/38 COBOL is designed to operate with the IBM System/38 CPF (5714-SS1). DOCUMENTATION (available from Mechanicsburg) IBM 5ystem/38 RPG 1/1 Licensed Program Design (GC21-7760). HIGHLIGHTS New operation codes and file specification continuation options have been added to provide multiple device support of display and mixed files. Access to the CPF Local Data Area provides function similar to that provided for the System/34. DESCRIPTION Definition of files under CPF commitment control and operation codes to cause commitment or return to the prior commitment boundary are being added to RPG III. This support provides the programmer with greater flexibility in designing interactive sessions and greater ease in backing out undesired transactions. The operation codes (ACO, REL, POST and NEXT) and file specification continuation options (NUM, IND, SAVDS and 10) are being added for display and mixed file support of multiple devices. These additions will provide functions similar to those provided by the System/34. The CPF Local Data Area can be read in at the start of an RPG III program and written back at program termination. In addition, the IN and OUT operation codes can be used with other data areas. This support will provide a function similar to that provided by System/34. CUSTOMER EDUCATION System/38 RPG III Education is available as follows: Title Course Fundamentals of RPG II Programming RPG II Programming Workshop RPG III Structurod Programming Workshop 02005* 01005* A2004 Code * Not required for the experienced RPG II Programmer COMPATIBILITY Usually with minor source changes, batch System/32, System/34, and System/3 RPG II programs can be compiled and executed on System/38. The changes principally involve the Header (H) specifica.;tion and File Description (F) specification. CONVERSION REQUIREMENTS Conversion requirements appear in tho 5/38 Installation Manual Conversio.n Planning (GC21-7732) . . ;.' P~NNING INFORMATION us'~r~:' Release 4.1 must be installed prior to installing Program Use DuringCustomor Preinstallation Testing: The System/38 RPG III licensed program (5714-RG1) is available to customers for preinstallation testing on IBM Test Center Systems in accordance with IBM's Program Testing Policy. CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES -Installation of System/38 licensed programs is a customer responsibility. IBM may provide' marketing assistance,·in accordance with Marketing and Service Guidelines in the GI Section, in the installation of IBM licensed programs. However, the responsibility for providing accurate ordering information, personnel selection' and training, installation, and continued day-to-day. operation. lies solely with the customer. Objectives The following documents are scheduled to be updated and available in June 1983: 5/38 Guide to Publications, Glossary and Master Index (GC21-7726) ... 5/38 RPG 1/1 Reference Manual and Programmer's Guide (SC217725). RPQs ACCEPTED: No TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index New operation codes and commitment file designation are being added to support CPFcommitment control. For existing Release 5.0. SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT Support will be provided for this licensed program when it is operated in the following specified operating environment: ------- -------==-==";' - ---= ISG Do not reproduce without written permission PP 5714-5S1.1 Mar 83 PROGRAM PRODUCTS SYSTEM/38 CONTROL PROGRAM FACILITY (CPF) 5714-SS1 PURPOSE The IBM System/38 Control Program Facility (CPF) licensed program, used with IBM System/38 machine functions, provides these major capabilities: Work Management Data Management - Data Base Data Management (DB OM) - Device Support (OS) - Data Description Specifications (DDS) Control Language (eu Data Base Data Management: Data Base Data Management support is integrated within the System/38. The relationship between physical data files is independent. Each file, may be created, modified, or deleted without effect on other physical files. The primary features of Data Base Data Management (DB OM) are: Data Independence Journal Facility - Control Language Programming - Single Consistent Interface Security Data Security Data Maintenance Data Sharing Message Facilities SpOOling Communications - System/38 as a terminal to System/370 IMS/VS or CICS/VS (SNA/SDLC) - System/3S as a host for remote 5250 Information Display , System devices - System/38 Binary Synchronous Communications (BSC) facilities - Point-to-point - Multipoint tributary System/38 as a Peer to CICS OS/VS and CICS/OOS/VS Version 1 Release 6 and another System/38 using New SNA (LU6.2 and PU2.1). Installation (System Specialization) System Services - - Data Base Data Management - Device Support - Data Description Specifications (DDS) Test and Debug Facilities Library Facility Journal Facility Save/Restore Facility Service Facilities File Reference Facility Copy Facility Power Warning Feature System/38 Data Base Data Management is designed to simplify operations and increase user productivity. The user need only describe, create, and store the data once in a physical data file. System/38 Data Base Data Management provides the capability for multiple users to concurrently access that data logically in various organizations, sequences, and formats (logical file), regardless of the actual physical structure of that data. This provides a high degree of data independence to individual programs and users. Options are available to specify the type of maintenance to be performed to the sequencing of data including immediate, delayed, and rebuild. A journal facility exists to allow for forward or backout recovery. Once a file is specified to be journaled, all changes are implicitly captured by the system. The journal may also be of benefit for such functions as faster daily backup, security, audit trail, activity reporting, and debugging. Commands are provided for recovery, display, and management of the journal objects. Data security is provided by controlling ownership, authorization to use the data, and is actually a function of System/38 Security. (See "Security" for more information on Security features.) With physical data only residing in one place and in one physical structure, it is easier to maintain. When data is altered in the physical file, the same program or any other proQram which subsequently retrieves that data, receives the updated version. Records added to the files are available to users when they are written to the file. Work Management: The primary functions of the System/38 CPF Work Management are to: Data Base Data Management permits multiple users to access data. For updates, it will lock the record being updated until the update is done, to assure that all update requests are serially handled. It also provides the capability to lock data files for exclusive use until relinquished. Accept and process, concurrently, work from multiple users of the system. Device Support: System/38 Device Support will support the following devices: DESCRIPTION Support batch, interactive, and spooling functions. System Console Allocate and control the usage of system resources in a multitasking environment. 5250 Information Display System devices including local and remote displays and printers (5256/5224/5225) Users from any 5250 System display device (or the system console) may initiate work, either interactive or batch. Work Management processes the job requests, acquires the system resources required for the jobs, executes, and terminates the jobs. Work Management supports transaction processing functions. Work Management handles the contention resulting from multiple jobs competing concurrently for system resources. In order to accomplish this, it manages the scheduling and queuing necessary to share the system resources among all jobs. The user may control the job processing requirements and priorities through the Control Language. All work is managed concurrently in subsystems (a defined operating environment such as batch, interactive, and spool), and jobs may be allocated to pools (a logical division of main storage) within a subsystem. These features permit the user to establish special operating environments, and control the execution of high priority jobs. Data Management Data Management access methods support sequential, indexed, and direct (relative record number) file organization, and permit multiple user-defined indices per file. Data Management provides the support for disk data file handling such as create, add, delete, and traditional data I/O operations like read and write. Data Management provides the I/O management for all I/O devices. (Note that disk storage is not considered I/O on System/38.) Data Management provides support enabling the user to describe data and device files external to the application programs. Data Management includes support for: Diskette Magazine Drive 5424 MFCU 5211 model 2 Printer 5219, 5224, 5225 Printers 3262 Printer 3203 model 5 Printer 3370 Direct Access Storage Device 3410/3411 Magnetic Tape System/38 Device Support is similar to data management and I/O supervisor routines for devices on other IBM systems, but with enhanced capability. System/38 provides device independence by permitting the user to define device files (via DDS) external to the program. The user then has increased flexibility to direct and controL device I/O through Control Language overrides independent of program instruction. For example, a program may have output coded for a workstation printer but selection of a specific printer could be made upon program execution. Also, devices may be dynamically allocated, or deallocated, to active processes. System/38 Device Support will support device file definitions whether coded in'the program or defined to the device data management, and relieve the programmer of device attachment l11ethod (local or remote). ,," , , .' , , • Subfile capability is provided for •display device~. This reduces the programming effort for the user to, group records of like format, for concurrent display, modification,· or input: For example, a display device operator may, enter, an entire screen, of order entry line items ------- -------=-:=:: :§~E: ISG PP 5714-SS1.2 Do not reproduce without written permission Mar 83 PROGRAM PRODUCTS System/38 Control Program Facility (CPF) (cont'd) before submitting them to the system for processing by the program one record at a time. Also extensive data manipulating functions such as screen formatting, editing, and validity checking are supported for display devices. Data Description Specification: The Data Description support in System/38 Data Management is the user's means to describe files for the data base and devices independent of application programs. The files may be described once external to the application program. The external description is automatically added to the program at compile time. This reduces redundant I/O coding for programs using the same data. It also gives a consistent view of the structure of the data to each using program, thus reducing transcription, and associated errors in repetitious I/O coding. Display device formats for display I/O are entered via DDS. During format description, data base field definitions can be used, and editing and validity checking features are available. These capabilities greatly simplify the application programming. The user enters source description information on a Data Description Specification Form, similar in approach to RPG coding. For syntax checking while entering the source description, the user may optionally use the Source Entry Utility on the System/38 .• Data records are stored in online auxiliarY disk devices ih the order they are received by the system. These physical files may be accessed in arrival sequence or by field(s) defined to produce a composite key. All records in a physical file have the same format. . A logical file is the vehicle to allow the user to change the presentation of the data in a physical file. For example, with logical files the user may: Specify a different format than the physical file. These formats can specify field reordering, omission, concatenation, and different field attributes. Select or omit records from the physical file. Specify a different ordering (key) than the physical file. Specify records from multiple physical files sequenced together by a composite key (similar to RPG matching record logic). DDS supports SNA/SDlC LU-1, SNA/SDLC LU6.2 and BSC communications device file record formats similar to the method used for data base files. Functional control of communication operation is managed through use of communications-specific DDS keywords. Control language: To request system function, the user enters Cl commands, which are abbreviations of words for each command. Parameters are also entered to tailor the functions performed by the co;mmand. The System/38 Control Program Facility through the Control Language (Cl) provides: entry by the system. Commands may be selected from a menu and then displayed, along with the parameter options, from which the user can enter, select, or default. ! ,I The experienced user may learn and enter the commands to execute a job. There is ease-of-use for the experienced user also. Command statement structure is free form, no fixed position requirements for parameters. Parameters may be positional or keyWord form, and most of the parameters have default values. Special menus are provided for the system operator and the programmer. These menus are designed to simplify the typical requests and also allow the entry of any command. Workstation users without data processing experience can work from application menu displays (user-coded). This means reduced need for them to have detailed knowledge of the Control Language or the system, and their access to the system can be easily limited and controlled. Another aid permits the user to get additional description of an error message by depressing the 'HELP' key on the keyboard. Control Language Programs: A CL program is a group of CL commands converted to an executable program by the CL compiler. CL programs allow the user to group CL commands and application programs together. CL programs permit the definition of data as variables (fields), and can pass data (parameters) to other programs. The 'IF' command allows conditional execution of commands based on the result of logical expressions. Branching is also supported. The user can define screens (menus and prompts) and display them under control of a Cl program. Values for parameters for commands in CL programs can be supplied at execution time via a prompt to the user. Most commands are valid within CL programs. The system's program debug support is available for Cl programs. User-Created Commands: The System/38 users can define their own commands to invoke system function or a user program. Associated parameters can be defined and validity checked during execution. This feature is useful for those users who need a specialized operating environment, or those who wish to reduce or restrict the parameter entry choices for users of the system. The character set used for the Control Language is EBCDIC (Extended Binary Coded Decimal Interchange Code). All 256 EBCDIC characters can be used within comments and quoted character strings (literals), but only the following subset of EBCDIC characters can be used to code CL commands: 26 letters (A through Z) 10 numbers (0 through 9) 3 alphabetic ext~nders ($, #, @) Special characters An easy-to-Iearn and use, consistent interface for the user to request and control system and application function. (For the special characters and their function, see the IBM System/38 CPF Reference Manual - Control Language, SC21-7731.) Commands executable from console, workstation, or batch job stream. Message Facilities: Message facilities can be used to exchange information among users of the system or among programs (system and application) and users. CL programs callable by RPG III, COBOL, or other CL programs. A tailorable interface, with user-created commands to meet varying requirements. Information Compilable control language capability. Control Language for the System/38 is described in three sections: Message Handling provides support for establishing a message, providing a path for it to travel, controlling traffic on the path, and getting it to its destination. Messages can be displayed immediately or queued for display when requested. - User command selection from menus - Prompting by the system for parameters - Free form syntax Control LanguaQe Programs Compiled co~~~~ds. ' Manipulation of variables Call command with parameter capability User-defined logic flow, '. ' " Access to DDS (for display formats) System program testing ,support Interprogram communication (via message queues and data areas) User-Cre~ted Commands ..... To fulfill special needs - To control, parameter sele'?tion Ease-of-Use Fa.cili~ies: System/38 supports both and the experienced Control language user. inexperienced user in the learn-as-you-go mode. unfamiliar with the Control Language can be guided • ' Broadcast Reply . Ease-of-Use Facilities - Message Handling on System/38 provides for creation, storage, queuing, routing, and authorizing messages for: the' inexperienced Cl supports the Authorized users through command Specific system level messages are placed in the system history file. All entries are logged with date and time, identify the source of the message, and have an identification number. The usor may process the system history file. ' Users of message facilitios can croato impromptu or predefined messages. Impromptu mossagos will usually be simple text strings created to handle specific situations, such as messages between workstation usors. Predefined messages are created as' message descriptions, with a unique identification number,' and stored in a message file for subsequent retrieval. They will usually be error messages sent by programs encountering certain defined conditions . ------- - - - -.=.---- -:5~E: ISG . Do not reproduce without written permission PP 5714-SS1.3 Mar 83 PROGRAM PRODUCTS System/3S Control Program Facility (CPF) (cont'd) SNA-ALERT Facility: The System/38 alert function notifies an SNA remote S/370, 30XX, or 43XX host network operator of conditions detected by the System/38. The alert support provides significant function to be used for centralized remote host problem determination. The following support includes: Alert generation by the System/38 upon certain failing conditions. The alert and associated information are sent via SNA/SDLC to the remote host system. The companion host programs support processing of the alert data to enable the user to centralize network problem determination. The required host programs that support the System/38 alert consist of the Network Communications Control Facility (NCCF) and Network Problem Determination Application (NPDA). Also required is one SNA communications line to the host system. Spooling: Spooling enhances device I/O by controlling device contention, decreasing process execution time, and increasing user control of jobs in the system. Since programs get their input from, and direct their output to, spool queues (instead of directly interacting with the I/O device), multiple concurrently executing programs can appear to be using the same device. This also means that program execution time is not restricted to the speed of the I/O device. The significant features of System/38 Spooling are: Multiple input/output queues Multiple output copies One program can output to multiple files Workstation control of queues Display of spooled output Output spool queues can be directed to any device Input job streams from external devices (card, diskette) or from the data base can be processed by spool readers or entered directly onto an input queue. Output to printers, punches, and diskettes is processed by spool writers. Multiple spool queues can be established, and spooling provides the capability for the system or workstation operators to display or modify their spool queue attributes. Spool support permits interleaving of output from multiple jobs to a spool queue, and from a single job to multiple spool files. Communications SNA/SDLC as a 'terminal: System/38 communicates as a terminal to System/370 CICS/VS and IMS/VS using Synchronous Data Link Control (SDLC) as a part of Systems Network Architecture (SNA). System/38 communicates to IMS/VS applications executing under OS/VS1 or OS/VS2 (MVS), or CICS/VS applications executing under DOS/VSE, OS/VS1, or OS/VS2 (MVS) in System/370 models 145 to 168 for IMS/VS, and models 135 to 168 for CICS/VS, and 3031, 3032, 3033, 4331 and 4341 processors. Communication to any of these operating systems when running under VM/370 is also supported. Communication is via the levels of VTAM, ACF/VTAM, ACF/VTAME, TCAM or ACF/TCAM supported by IMS/VS or CICS/VS at the time of shipment. NCP/VS or ACF/NCP/VS will be required as appropriate. Binary Synchronous Communications (BSC): System/38 Release 4 CPF Binary Synchronous Communications (BSC) support provides the facilities which allow the user to write application programs to communicate with other systems and devices which are compatible with 3780 BSC implementation. For all devices listed below, it is the user's responsibility to provide the application program which uses the System/38 BSC support, and to ensure compatibility with supported protocols and/or unique data formats required by the attached devices. System/3S Binary Synchronous Communications (BSC) program-toprogram over polnt-to-point switched or polnt-to-point nonswitched facilities Communications to the following systems and devices are supported: f' System/3 System/32 System/34 System/38 Series / 1 System/370, 30XX, 43XX DOS/VSE OS/VS1 OS/VS2 CICS/VS (Version 1.5.0) 3741 5110/5120 5230 5260 5280 BTAM-ES BTAM/TCAM BTAM /TCAM OS/VS or DOS/VSE BTAM System/3S Binary Synchronous Communications (BSC) As A Multipoint Tributary are: Multipoint Tributary - The System/38 will act as one, or several, terminals (or tributaries) on a nonswitched multipoint BSC line. The BSC line is scheduled by a BSC control station or host. The host may be a System/3 with CCP, a Series/1, or a System/370, 30XX, or 43XX. The System/38 can recognize up to 32 poll and selection addresses for each line. Multiple Session Support - The System/38 will support up to 32 sessions per line when attached as a multipoint tributary station. This is accomplished by assigning one of, the 32 polling and selection addresses to each session. The support will provide for multiple logical sessions to occur concurrently over a single link. A maximum of 256 logical sessions per system is allowed. Additional Systems/Devices Supported - The System/38 acting as a multipoint tributary supports BSC attachment of the following systems and devices: - 3776/3777 Batch Terminals 5520 Administrative System 6240 Communicating Mag Card Typewriter 6580 Displaywriter System 6640 Document Printer 6670 Information Distributor OS /6 Office System CMCII Communicating Mag Card Typewriter II Other BSC Features Component Selection - Some BSC terminals have several attached I/O devices or components. System/38 provides support through DDS and Function Management for the user to select the device or component to which the data is to be transmitted. This function is accomplished by inserting the component selection characters inside of the outbound text. The component selection function is a program-to-terminal protocol which operates only on point-topoint lines and only on WRITE operations. Compression/Decompression - This constitutes a technique for utilizing line time more efficiently. - Compression: Sequence of three or more blanks, X'4O', are replaced by a two-character sequence for transmission. - Decompression: Data that has been received from the BSC line is scanned for controls in the data stream that define how to reconstruct the original data. Note: Compression and Decompression are mutually exclusive' with transparent data, user-blocked data, and ASCII. Trailing Blank Truncation - This permits the System/38 to utilize communications line time more efficiently. In some applications, the fixed length record has a variable amount of data at the beginning of each record and the end is filled with blanks. The trailing blank truncation facility removes the trailing blanks when creating a transmission block. The trailing blanks are replaced with a blocking character such as IRS or ITB or a BSC ending character, ETX or ETB, as appropriate. Note: Trailing blank truncation is mutually exclusive with transparency, user-blocked data, and blocked data with *NOSEP. , System/38 Release 5.0 CPF Binary Synchronous Communications (BSC) support provides additional function which allows the System/38 to appear as a 3270 Information Display System to a remote host computer. System/38 3270 Device Emulation consists of two offerings: The System/38 5250, 5291 and 5292 displays and printers will emulate the functions of a 3270. No System!38 user program~ ming is required. , A 3270 program interface is provided which allows a System/38 application program to communicate with application programs operating on a remote host system. ' System/3S as a Host for Romote 5250 Information Display System Devices: The System/38 CPF also provides remote communication support for the 5250 System family of terminals. ,(As described in the M5381 pages, the 5250 system is supported locally by th~,;workstation controller.) ," ,');: The 5250 System is supported as an SNA,device. Although the remote communication attachment of the 5250 System devices may be by switched or leased line, the devices have the same capabilities 85 local ' '\' ' directly-attached d~vices. " When featured for nonswitched multipoint communications facilities, the System/38 Communications Attachment feature provides ha,rdware Autopoll for up ,to eight (8) control units (5251 mdls 2 and 12) per TP line. Anytime a.TP line has more than eight (8) control units varied online, polling is automatically tra.nsferred ~o s},stem microc~de. 1he system microcode supports a maximum of fifty (50) control Units vaned online (being polled) per line. ------- -----------_.-------- ISG Do not reproduce without written permission PP 5714-551.4 Mar 83 PROGRAM PRODUCTS 5ystem/3S Control Program Facility (CPF) (cont'd) System/3S as a Peer to CICS/OS/VS and CICS/DOS/VS Version 1 Release 6 and to another System/3S. The System/38 Peer support is based on new SNA definitions (SNA LU6.2 and PU2.1). Attachment to a S/370 is as an SDLC secondary. Attachment to another System/38 requires SDLC primary on one System/38 and SDLC secondary on the other System/38(s). The link configuration can be either point-to-point nonswitched, point-to-point switched, or multipoint nonswitched. The link speeds supported are all of the standard speeds, up to 57.6K bps. These SNA extensions are designed to provide common session protocols for both document interchange and distributed data processing. This provides the base by which users can establish a single network definition for distributed processing. These new SNA extensions now allow System/38 to participate in a transaction processing environment as well as in. the batch and interactive environment. Within a network, the System/38 can serve as either the front-end processor or the back-end processor. Communications Error Recovery Procedure (ERP): The enhanced ERP will enable users to recover from many communication errors with little or no operator intervention. When the recovery process begins after an error is encountered, jobs will not need to be canceled, nor will the communications objects need to be varied off. The application will need to either release the device or close the file. If communications are to be resumed, the applications will acquire the device (if it was released) or open the file (if it was closed). All communications (BSC and SDLC) devices, local workstations, and multidropping of 5250 and Advanced Program-to-Program Communications (APPC) devices on the same line will be supported. Installation (System Specialization): The Installation facility of System/38 CPF provides the means for the user to install the Control Program Facility. This substitutes for the traditional system generation which is not required on the System/38. To install, the user loads CPF through the diskette device or a tape device attached to the system. This establishes default libraries, user profile definitions, basic I/O definitions, etc. The system is ready to use, but the user may want to do some additional system specialization such as: Describe additional I/O devices. Define additional subsystems. Define additional user profiles. Modification of the supplied definitions. library Facility: Library support on the System/38 provides the user the means to operationally grQup related objects. Objects are programs, file definitions, data files, etc. Libraries are used to logically (not physically) group objects in any division meaningful to the user, such as by application or by ownership. An object is an item of a library and no two objects of the same name and type may be a member of the same library. Although a system library is installed with the system, mult!ple user-defined libraries are permitted. The user controls object maintenance in the libraries. Save/Restore Facility: The Save/Restore Facility on System/38 supports the 3410/3411 tape drive and the diskette magazine drive and the magnetic tape drives in the following functions: Back-up of user libraries and objects Keeping seldom used or sensitive information offline Data interchange between System/38s Back-up of the system library The SAVE commands are used to write a copy of a library, all libraries, an object, or a group of objects in a library to the save device. The RESTORE commands are used to restore to the system saved objects and libraries. The system maintains a directory of saved objects and can identify the most recent copy of a saved object. The system can identify by date and time when an object was last changed.. To provide for faster daily backup, a command is provided to save only those . objects which have changed after a specific date. Service Facilities: CPF supports servicing of CPF, the System/38, and workstations. Many service functions can be done concurrent to other system operations enhancing productivity for IBM and our customers. (Note: Concurrent servicing is accomplished through the Concurrent Service Monitor (CSM) which is a part of CPF.) Some of the service facilities available, through Control Language commands, to support CPF and the System/38 are: For CPF - Problem analysis and diagnosis through dumps of internal job information and traces of processing flow. - Problem reporting by prodUCing diagnostic documentation on a diskette for IBM service use. - Problem resolution by installing IBM-supplied program changes. For the System/38 - Providing the machine error log for print or display. - Production of a trace of internal machine activities. System specialization can be dono anytime and does not require a system generation function. The CPF provides support through which workstation device operation can be checked and workstation printer operation can be verified. System Services File Reference Facility: The File Reference facility provides the user with information about the definition, organization and usage of the data base. It also provides information about the definition and usage of device files. It will provide significant aid in two areas: Test And Debug Facilities: The Test and Debug Facilities offer System/38 users significant productivity in the testing and training area. The user can copy production files and programs to a 'test' library to create a test environment nearly identical to the production environment. The user still has the full range of system function and can observe and control operation of the program, but the user is prevented from updating production files. This also permits testing to occur concurrent to othor operations. For completo protection of the production environment, the security features of the system can be used to prevent any access of the production objects by the development planner. . This tost environment is also useful for training operators because: It duplicates the real environment. It protects production files. Debug support provides error diagnosis tools for the programmer. Debug requires no special statements in the source program. Through CL commands t~e user may: Halt executio~ at a'specified statement number (source listing). Tracethe sequericebf statement execution. Display and modify progr~in vnriables (fields). Obtain a printed copy of the interactive dialog with the system. The CL command for program debug places programs in debug mode. In debug mode, breakpoints to halt execution (source program statement numbers) may be specified. For trace, ranges of statement numbers may be entered' to determine the sequence of statement execution. Commands for breakpoint or trace do not affect any other concurrent operation of that same program. Documentation of the system. Supplying information to help determine the effect of planned changes. Some functions providing information on file and field usage throughout the system can be output to a disk file for subsequent access and manipulation by the user. The following information is available: Files currently using a specified format. Files dependent on a specified file and type of dependency. File members dependent on a specified file member and type of dependency. Field descriptions by file. Data file usage by compiled program. File Reference Facility functions can be invoked in interactive or batch mode. Output can be directed to a display or a printer, and in most cases to a data base file. Copy Facility: The System/38 copy function provides some enhancements to the traditional file copying capabilities. The copy support can: Copy data from diskette, card, magnetic tape, or data base files to diskette, card, printer, magnetic tape, or data base files. Provide selection of records to be copied by the ~alue of: - Fields within records - Characters within fields - Record formats Provide for adding records to an existing file member. Provide for the copying of an output spool file to a data base file to allow conversion of these files to microfiche applications, transmission to other systems, or processing of spooled output. --------------ISG PP Do not reproduce without written permission 5714~SS1.5 Mar 83 ":''::::§~E: PROGRAM PRODUCTS System/3S Control Program Facility (CPF) (cont'd) Provide for the selection of a record format when a multiformat (logical file) is being copied. Provide for reorganization of a data base file. Provide for a high speed copy of data base files which reads and writes disk sectors as opposed to individual records. Power Warning Feature: CPF provides progral)'lming support for user-supplied Uninterruptable Power Supply devices. A system value will control which message queue will be sent a message if normal power is lost or restored. This .allows user program logic to control termination/continuation of the System/38 operation. Program Use During Customer Pre-installation Testing: The System/38 Control Program Facility (5714-SS1) is available to customers for pre-installation testing on IBM Test Center Systems in accordance with IBM's Program Testing Policy. CUSTOMER RESPONSI~ILlTIES Installation of System/38 licensed programs is a customer responsibility. IBM may provide marketing assistance, in accordance with Marketing and Service Guidelines in the GI Section, in the installation of IBM licensed programs. However, the responsibility for providing accurate ordering information, personnel selection and training, installation, and continued day-to-day operation lies solely with the customer. SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT Support will be provided for this licensed program when it is operated in the following specified operating environment: HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS The IBM System/38 CPF runs on all models of the IBM System/38. All IBM licensed programs for System/38 ar!; designed to operate in an environment that includes the System/38 CPF (5714-SS1) or its equivalent. The licensed program order should be entered via AAS at the same time as the system order. IBM's ability to provide concurrent hardware maintenance is dependent upon functions provided by the CPF or its full equivalent support. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS: None i CPF Main Storage Usage: All Control Program Facility instructions are pageable, and therefore, invoked by the system as needed. The amount of main storage occupied at any given time is greatly dependent upon system functions concurrently and dynamically invoked by multiple system users. SECURITY Security on System/38 provides: the user a selectable degree of protection of the system and data that can be increased by stages. Its major features are: User-controlled level of security Security Officer to provide security control Ownership/ Authorization of objects (such as data files and programs) is user-controlled. The degree of security exercised on the system can range from minimal security, to authorization for use to each individual data file, program, and device. The security officer 'owns' the system objects, has full rights of access across the system, and controls enrollment of users of the system. All users of the system are enrolled and have a user profile which controls their access to system and data resources. Security is based on ownership and authorization of objects in the system. Objects are data files, programs, formats, device descriptions, etc. All objects; in the system have an owner.: The owner has all rights to the object and may authorize various classes of access and usage of these objects to other enrolled users of the system. Security support is divided into two types of functions - the definition and the enforcement of security procedures. Definition functions of Security are: The Security Officer - This person has full authority across the system and controls the installation security procedures. The User Profile - All users enrolled on the system' have a user profile. It is a collection point for all security information related to each user. User Idehtification - All users of the system must identify , themselves, tO,the system~ Object Authorization - Specifies the individual user's rights of use of the system resources. Enforcement functions of Security are: User Verification - Verifies a user's identity tocontrol.access to the system. Object Verification - Assures user's right to access system devices, ' programs, and data objects. Security Information Displays - Provides security status displays to the security officer to aid controlling security. Security may be controlled by library a'nd/or the'objects within a library. A special function exists to allow the owner of a program to allow authorized users of the program to use their authorizations. This can be used to minimize the number of detail specifications and ensure that certain functions and file accesses are performed only under the control of specific application programs. Data Base allows specific file formats to be created to provide a form of field level security. DOCUMENTATION (available from Mechanicsburg) IBM System/38 Control Program Specifications (GC21-7763). Facility RPQs ACCEPTED: No TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index Licensed Program -- ......... - -------:: - - ::E~E: ISG PP 5714-551.6 Do not reproduce without written permission Mar 83 New PROGRAM PRODUCTS SYSTEM/3S CONTROL PROGRAM FACILITY (CPF) RELEASE 5.0 ENHANCEMENTS 5714-551 PURPOSE IBM System/38 CPF is enhanced in Release 5.0 to include: Support for additional devices, communication enhancements, a commitment control (recovery/restart) function and many other functional improvements. Release 5.0 HIGHLIGHTS Communications Support - Advanced Program-to-Program Communications (APPC) - SNA-Alert Support - Mixed file and High-Level Language (HLL) Multiple Device Support - Error Recovery Procedure Enhancements - High-Speed Line Enhancements - 3270 Device Emulation - Copy file enhancements and new copy commands Most create commands will use source text as a default Display file description command option for outfile Increase in number of values for the DDS VALUES keyword Messages used as constants in DDS Command selection menu enhancements Programmer and systems operator menu prompting for SBMJOB option Option to preserve edit codes and system values at install Multidimension array support in debug functions RPG auto report added to programmer menu Forty-eight character names in debug functions Ease of conversion from System/34 - Several of the previously described native functions will provide a simpler conversion from System/34. Device Support - Existence check on media (diskette, tape) - Diskette command improvements Commitment Control - A commitment boundary restart aid, which assists in restarting following abnormal job or system termination. Spool Enhancements - DSPOUTQ identification of forms type and number of copies - Start a writer to a forms type - Support of change writer Save / Restore - Save/Restore of logical file access paths Save/Restore of message, job and output queue descriptions Option to prevent incomplete saves Optional listing for restore objects Improved allocation of source members Improved tape error recovery Journal - Protection against deletion of unsaved journal receiver New default for Apply Journal Change command Retrieve Journal Entry command Compare Journal Images command Enhanced journal displays Work Management Local data area Change of a job's execution attributes Option to control job log creation DSPJOB enhancements Job start/ completion message enhancements Display Active Job (DSPACTJOB) and Display System Status (DSPSYSSTS) enhancements - Job description parameter in user profile - Retaining once active batch jobs on job queues - Security • Operations from the DSPOBJAUT display Generic grant/ revoke of authority Revoke object authority feedback Display user profile option for changes Authority checking from system menus/displays Library Support - Add and remove from library list commands - Delete by genoric name - Library display command enhancements CL/Promptor - Inquiry message capability on unmonitored messages Send usor message command Data base sequential input in CL programs Retrieve job attributes command enhancements Selective prompting Noninteractive commands used with the prompter Return res~lting command from prompter without executing Data Base ..- Rename member ,command , User notification df access path rebuild at open Access patH rebuild options at IMPL Option to force access paths more frequently Freeing of space with CLRPFM Other Enhancements - Conditional defaults for inquiry m'essages DESCRIPTION Communications Advanced Program to Program Communications (APPC) APPC is a CPF enhancement that provides a program-to-program protocol between two applications in different products. APPC is based on SNA architecture and provides a peer relationship between the interconnected products. This support allows System/38 to function as a departmental node with the ability to duplicate systems between departments. Additionally, it provides horizontal growth capability. SNA-Alert Support This enhancement allows the remote host network operator to be notified of certain system conditions to assist in problem determination. Mixed File and High Level Language (HLL) Multiple Device Support This enhancement provides new function and an improved interface for multiple device applications. Communications Error Recovery Procedures (ERP) This function enables users to recover from many communication errors with little or no operator intervention. High-speed Lines Enhancement Allows high-speed (57.6K bps) local attachment of System/38 to 3705. Allows high-speed (56.0K bps) remote communication to 3705, 4331 Communications Adapter, and System/38. 3270 Device Emulation This enhancement allows the System/38 and locally or remotely attached 5250 Information Display System devices to appear as a 3270 control unit and devices. For more information on the Communications Enhancements for Release 5.0, see Programming Announcement Letter dated January 14, 1983. DEVICE SUPPORT Existence Check on Media Commands The new commands CHKDKT and CHKTAP are provided to allow the user to check for the existence of a specific volume (or file) lable on al diskette or tape. For example, this allows a program to precheck the existence of the correct media before proceeding on a specific function using that media. Diskette Command Improvements The SUFFIX parameter has been added to the CLRDKT, INZDKT, RNMDKT, and DLTDKTLBL commands. The RNMDKT command now supports a range of diskettes within a magazine thus allowing an entire magazine to be renamed. Commitment,Control Commitment control is a function designed to assist the user in recovery/restart of applications. The most difficult aspect of restart in a complex transaction environment is ensuring that restart will occur when all files are at a specific point. Commitment control ensures that a job is at a specific point (called a commitment boundary) in the event of a system or job abnormal termination. The user defines his commitment control environment in CL statements and specifies the files to be under commitment control in RPG or COBOL. New operations are supported in RPG, COBOl, and CL to allow the user to request a group of data base changes to be committed or rolled back. The rollback function allows the user to easily cancel a group of data base changes when the application program senses a need to cancel the effect of a transaction. Through commitment ------- -------=-===";' - ----= ISG Do not reproduce without written permission PROGRAM PRODUCTS PP 5714-551.7 Mar83 New System/3S CPF RS.O (cont'd) control, the system will implicitly roll back any uncommitted changes in case of a system or job failure. Restart can normally be provided by user coding which would access the la~t transaction record entered by an operator or by using a commitment control notify object. The notify object allows the program to store information about the last transaction before a failure in a data base file, a message queue, or a data area. Data base files used in a commitment control environment must be journaled to the same journal. All data base changes which are part of a commitment boundary will be locked until either a commit or rollback occurs. Optionally, records can also be locked in read-only files where the contents of a record should remain static until a commit or rollback occurs. Commitment control functions will also allow the user to retain locks on mUltiple records in a single file. Because the commitment control function will cause data base records to be locked until a commit or rollback occurs, the user must consider the. frequency of issu!ng a commit or rollback. A commitment boundary which can span multiple enter keys can cause other users to wait until the commitment boundary is reached. In the event of a record lock timeout, the message which occurs will be enhanced to include the job name which has caused the record to be locked. The DSPJOB menu will provide an option to show the commitment control status. SPOOL DSPOUTQ support of Forms Types and Copies The DSPOUTQ display will add columns for forms type and number of copies. This information will be truncated if displayed at the 64-character console device. Start a Writer to a Forms Type A new parameter will be added to STRPRTWTR to allow the user to control what form types in an output queue should be output. A CHGWTR command will also be available to allow formtype and output queue to be changed for an active printer writer without ending the writer. These functions should allow better control when dealing with spocial form types and help minimize the overhead associated with canceling and starting a writer mUltiple times to the same device. Support of Change Writer A CHGWTR command will be available to allow form type and output queue to be changed for an active printer writer without ending the writer. SAVE/RESTORE Save/Restore of Logical File Access Paths An option on the save commands will allow associated logical file access paths to be saved. An access path will only be saved or restored when all related physical files are saved or restored. This option will cause an incrosse in the amount of save time and media usage, but will decrease the amount of time necessary to complete a restore operation since the associated access paths will not have to be rebuilt. Save/Restore of Message, Job and Output Queue Descriptions The object types of *MSGQ, *JOBQ, and *OUTQ may' be saved and restored. Only the description (not the contents) Will be saved and restored. This facilitates the transfer and recovery of libraries. All object types are now supported by Save/Restore. save operations since each member will have only a single disk allocation. Improved Tape Error Recovery Tape error recovery has been improved to allow the user to mount a new tape when media errors occur during a save operation. This will eliminate most situations where the save function must be aborted due to media errors, by allowing the user to continue on a new tape. JOURNAL Delete Journal Receiver Protection If an attempt is made to delete a journal receiver that has never been saved, an inquiry message will be sent to the user allowing the option to cancel or ignore. The message should assist in prE!venting the user from destroying his means of backup or audit trail. New Default for Apply Journal Change Command The default for the TOENT parameter will be changed to *LASTRST. This will allow the defaults of the command to be used in a normal recovery environment where the user restores his last backup and reapplies the entries in the journal from the last save up to the restore. Retrieve Journal Entry Command A RTVJRNE command will be provided to retrieve a specific journal entry and return the entry into CL variables. Similar selection criteria as with the current DSPJRN command may be used. This simplifies determining the journal sequence number of journal entri~s which may be used to automate certain recovery or backup functions. Compare Journal Images Command A command will be available to compare the before and after images for record level changes recorded in a journal and highlight the differences. A listing form of output is provided. This can assist in problem determination. Enhanced Journal Displays The journal displays will be enhanced to include such things as an explanation of the code and type of journal entries and the ability to switch from a character to hex display. WORK MANAGEMENT Local Data Area Each job will have an implicitly defined 512-byte character data area. This can be used for Intrajob communication and it is also implicitly submitted to any batch Jobs when SBMJOB is used. The local data area will have a name of *LDA and may be accessed by CHG/RTV /DSPDTAARA commands. The DSPDTAARA command is enhanced to support hex values. The local data area is an alternative means of passing variables within a job and can also be used .to pass variables to batch jobs. Changing of a Job's Execution Attributes New options on the CHGJOB command will allow a change to the execution attributes of EXCPTY, TIMESLlCE, PURGE, and DFlWAIT. The user making the change may change any job on the system, but must have the special *JOBCTL authority defined in his user profile. This allows improved control over execution attributes. Option to Prevent Incomplete Saves Option to Control Job Log Creations An option will be added to the SAVOBJ/SAVCHGOBJ/ SAVLlB commands to ensure that all objects can be saved prior to saving them. This precheck function will allow the user to easily determine that all objects requested to be saved are available before any media is written. This can eliminate situations where a file is bypassed by the save function because the file is open for update by another user. A new job attribute will exist to control whether a job log should bfi produced if the job completes in a normal manner. This allows the user to eliminate the output of job logs except when a problem occurs. Optional Listing of Restored Objects An option will be provided on the restore commands to list each object that is being restored and its associated security-related information. The existing low level messages for a successful restore of each object will be removed to improve the performance when a large number of objects are being restored. The listing should allow a better means of security control when new objects are restored to the system. Improved Allocation of Source Members An internal option will be supported by SEU and Text Management to determine the exact number of records to be written to the member after creation or maintenance is performed. This will allow the system to tailor the allocation needed for the specific member instead of using a default allocation method. This should benefit DSPJOB Enhancements A new DSPJOB option will allow the display of the current library list. This output will also be supplied.in the DSPJOB dump described later. '. ' : " " Job Start/Completion Message Enhancements. ' The job start message (CPF 1124) will be enhanced to include the subsystem and the time the job entered the' system (e.g., the submitted time for batch. jobs). The job completion message (CPF 1164) will be enhanced to ,include such things as total response time, the number.ofinteractions, the number of disk I/O operations and the type of job. Both of these messages appear in the job log and in the QHST log. This information can be useful in analyzing system workload, '. providing job analysis statistics, and problem determination data. ' ------- -------- Do not reproduce without written permission ==:: :E~E: ISG PP 5714-SS1.8 Mar 83 New PROGRAM PRODUCTS System/38 CPF R5.0 (cont'd) Display Active Job (DSPACTJOB) and Display System Status (DSPSYSSTS) Enhancements The DSPACTJOB display will provide an improved description of certain wait conditions and an indication of whether a job's execution priority has been downgraded because the time-slice has been exceeded. The DSPSYSSTS internal fields, which are used to calculate page fault rates, have been increased in size to greatly reduce wrapping. Job Description Parameter in User Profile A job description parameter will be added to the user profile and *USRPRF may be specified on ADDWSE/CHGWSE to assign job attributes to communications jobs. This also allows job attributes to be specified for work station users (instead of the current approach, by device). Retaining Once Active Batch Jobs on Job Oueues A new command (similar to TFRJOB) will allow a currently executing batch job to be placed on a job queue. Unlike the TFRJOB command, the new command will allow the job to remain on the job queue in the event of an IMPL. SECURITY Data Base Sequential Input in CL Programs CL programs will support data base sequential input files. This simplifies working with files created by functions such as DSPOBJD. The support uses the existing DCLF and RCVF commands. MONMSG may be used for the end of file condition. Only one DCLF is allowed per CL program. Retrieve Job Attributes Command Enhancements ! The RTVJOBA command will support new parameters to allow retrieval of additional job attributes such as EXCPTY, OUTO, LOGLVL, and USRLlBL. This will simplify the changing of these job attributes and storing/ replacing them when a subprogram with unique requirements is called. Operations from the DSPOBJAUT Display Selective Prompting If the user has appropriate authority, a CF key option will appear on the DSPOBJAUT display to allow the user to redisplay the information as input capable fields. This allows the simple changing of authorization rights, as well as allowing new users to be added and existing users to be totally removed. Selective prompting allows a CL program to use the prompter facility at execution time to prompt for a command, and control: Generic Grant and Revoke of Authority The GRT /RVK commands will allow a generic function or will allow all objects in a library to be specified. This will simplify the specifying of security authorizations. Revoke Object Authority Feedback The RVKOBJAUT command will provide a diagnostic message when the user whose authority is being revoked does not have the specific authority being revoked. - Which parameters are prompted - Which defaults appear - If the user is allowed to change specific parameters This allows use of the prompter to directly invoke command functions, while allowing the programmer to control what is prompted and what may be changed by the user. Noninteractive Commands used with the Prompter Noninteractive commands (e.g., JOB, ENDJOB, etc.) will be prompted when PF4 is pressed. A warning message will be sent, but the user will be allowed to see the prompts for these commands. Display User Profile Option for Changes Return Resulting Command from Prompter Without Executing A GF key option will be added to the DSPUSRPRF command to allow the user to display the CHGUSRPRF prompt for the same user with the current values displayed. This simplifies changing the values for the various parameters. New Program OCACHEK (similar to OCAEXEC), may be called to either syntax check or prompt a command, and have the results returned without executing the command. This may be used in prompting for commands to be submitted or logged. Authority Checking from System Menus/Displays Authority checking will bo performed on all command functions attempted from CPF manus/displays. This will allow better security control when utilizing system menus/displays. LIBRARY SUPPORT Add and Remove from Library List Commands ADDUBLE/RMVUBLE commands will be provided to allow the user to add a library before or after the existing libraries on the user portion of the library list, or remove a library from the user portion of the library list. This will offer a simple means of adding specific user libraries to the existing library list without having to know what the current list is. Delete by Generic Name Most of the DLT commands are enhanced to allow use of a generic name. This will simplify operations when generic object types must be deleted. .. Send User Message Command A command will be provided for use in communicating from CL programs to users or the system operator. This will provide for simple inquiry messages to be handled in one command. A pause function is also provided. A VALUES keyword is supported to allow checking of responses and a translate table option is provided to allow conversion from lowercase to uppercase. This command should simplify the applications where a CL program needs a minimal amount of dialog with a user. Library Display Command Enhancements , When tho DSPLIB command is used without specifying a library, tho user will be presented with a list of library names to select from. Both the DSPLIB and DSPOBJD displays will provide an entry per object. to allow access to the full or service attributes provided by the DETAIL paramoter of lhe DSPOBJD command. The DSPLlBL command has boen enhanced to include the text description of the libraries. CL/PROMPTER Inquiry Messag,e Capability on Unmonitored Messages CL programs will now issue an inquiry message on an unmonitored escape and let the user request ignore and retry, in addition to the cancel and dump options already supported for the CPA 0701 message. CL programs· can now report· errors, similar to RPG or COBOL programs where inquiry messages are sent to the interactive user or system operator (depending on the type .of job) when an unexpected condition occurs. DATABASE Rename Member Command A RNMM command will be provided to simplify operations when a member must be renamed. User Notification of Access Path Rebuild At Open When the user opens a file, causing an access path to be rebuilt, a message will be sent to the external message queue stating the cause for the delay in proceeding to the function. This should minimize the need for problem determination in this circumstance. Access Path Rebuild Options at 1M PL Following an abnormal IMPL in which access paths have been invalidated, a display will be available to the operator. This will describe each access path which must be rebuilt, show the number of records which must be read to rebuild the access path, and allow the operator to temporarily change the value of the RECOVER option that was specified for the file. The operator will have better control over whether the system should be brought up quickly or not brought up until certain access paths are rebuilt. Option to Force Access Paths More Frequently An option will be provided on CRT /CHG data base file commands to cause the access paths and underlying data to be forced to disk on every access path update. This will minimize (but will not eliminate) the exposure to an access path rebuild in case of an abnormal termination. This function can be of value in certain large file/low activity environments, but performance should be carefully considered. Freeing of Space with CLRPFM When the CLRPFM command is issued, any space associated with the physical access path is reset and the file allocation is reset to its initial value. This will help provide better allocation of storage on the system. ------- ----:: - - :§'f§: ISG PP 5714-881.9 Do not reproduce without written permission Mar 83 New PROGRAM PRODUCTS 8ystem/38 CPF R5.0 (cont'd) OTHER ENHANCEMENTS Conditional Defaults for Inquiry Messages A job attribute will be added to the JOB, CHGJOB, and SBMJOB commands, and may be placed in a job description to determine automatic action when an inquiry message is sent by a program such as Cl, RPG, or COBOL. The user may choose to: EASE·Of·CONVERSION From System/34 The release includes general enhancements which can make it easier to convert from System/34. This includes such functions previously discussed as: Messages used as constants in DDS. CHKDKT command to check for the existence of a volume 10 or file label on diskette. Display output queue of a forms type. Start a writer to a forms type. local data area. Delete by generic name. Inquiry messages on unmonitored escape messages in Cl programs. Send user message command. Rename member command. Copy file enhancements and new commands. Mixed file and Hll multiple device support. - Send the inquiry message - Send a default reply - Use a new system-defined object for system reply values Commands exist to maintain the system reply list which allows entries for specific or generic messages. An option exists to allow a DSPJOB dump prior to replying to the message. This may be used for many functions such as: - Automatically taking a DSPJOB dump and a program dump, and cancelling the program when an inquiry occurs. This can be used to eliminate operator intervention and ensure that problem determination information exists. - Automatically responding to some messages which are sent to the system operator (messages relative to mounting the proper print belt, for example). Copy File Enhancements and New Copy Commands Enhancements to the CPYF command support have been made to allow such functions as creating the TOMBR when it does not exist, ' copying zero records, better handling of packed keys, and generic FROMMBR support. A new CPYSRCF command is provided which is designed to work with source members and provide a formatted listing. Four new commands (CPYFRMDKT, CPYTODKT, CPYFRMTAP, and CPYTOTAP) are available to simplify use of copy functions using diskette or tape. These commands support most of the device parameters found on the corresponding OVRDKTF and OVRTAPF commands. Most Create Commands Which Use Source Will Default TEXT Most of the CRT commands which use source members will change the default of the TEXT parameter to default to the text description of the source member. This will simplify the creation and retention of text descriptions on various objects. Display File Description Outfile Option The DSPFD command will provide an OUTFIlE option which will allow the attributes of the various file types to be placed in a data base file. A new parameter will control the subtype of file output. This output file option will allow many applications to take advantage of the attributes and statistics stored in the file descriptions to create reports and control various functions. Increase in Number of Values of DDS VALUES Keyword The DDS keyword VALUES will accept up to 100 entries instead of the current limit of 20. This should simplify the validity checking of certain fields. Messages Used as Constants in DDS A new DDS keyword (MSGCON) will allow the contents of a message description to be compiled into a device file. This can be used to simplify certain standard text functions used in multiple files. Command Selection Menu Enhancements A new command will be supported and will be an option on the programmer and system operator's menus to allow the user direct access to an enhanced version of the command selection menu. This will allow the user who knows a verb (e.g., CNl), or an object (e.g., SBSD), or a common abbreviation (e.g., JOB) to access all the commands with the same letter combinations. Over 175 additional menus will exist to simplify the process of selecting the proper command. Programmer and System Operator Menu Prompting for 5MBJOB Option The programmer and system operator menus will allow access to the prompter for the entry of RQSDTA when Option 6 is requested. In addition, the value in the RQSDTA field will be syntax checked as if it is a command. This will allow the full use of the prompter when submitting jobs from these menus. Install Options for Edit Codes and System Values Additional options will appear on the install prompt to allow retention of installed edit codes or system values. This will simplify the installation of a new release. Multidimension Array Support in Debug Functions The debug commands will allow changing and displaying of variables with up to three dimensions. This is specifically designed for COBOL support. Customer Education: follows: System/38 CPF education is available as Title Course Code System/38 Concepts System/38 Application Analysis System/38 Application Programming Workshop System/38 Implementation I System/38 Implementation II A2510 A2003 A2004 A2001 A2501 These courses will be updated to reflect the Release 5.0 enhancements. PLANNING INFORMATION For existing users, Release 4.1 must be installed prior to installing Release 5.0. CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES Installation of System/38 licensed programs is a customer responsibility. IBM may provide marketing assistance, in accordance with Marketing and Service Guidelines in the GI Section, in the installation of IBM licensed programs. However, the responsibility for providing accurate ordering information, personnel selection and training, installation, and continued day-to-day operation lies solely with the customer. SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT Support will be provided for this licensed program when it is operated in the following specified operating environment: HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS The IBM System/38 CPF runs on all models of the IBM System/38. AIIIBM licensed programs for System/38 are designed to operate in an environment that includes the System/38 CPF (5714-SS1) or its equivalent. The licensed program order should be entered via AAS at the same time as the system order. IBM's ability to provide concurrent hardware maintenance is dependent upon functions provided by the CPF or its full equivalent support. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS: None DOCUMENTATION (available from Mechanicsburg) The following documents are scheduled to be updated and available in June 1983: S/38 Guide to Publications, Glossary and Master Index (GC21-7726) ... S/38 Installation Manual - Conversion Planning (GC21-7732) .... S/38 Guide to Program Product Installation and Device Configuration.' (GC21-7775) ... S/38 Operator's Guide (SC21-7735) ... S/38 Programming Reference Summary (SC21-7734) ... S/38 Messages Guide: CPF, RPG //land IOU (SC21-7736) .. , S/38 Problem Determination Guide JSC21-7876) ... S /38 Control Languaf/.8 Reference Manual (SC21-7731) ... S /38 Control Program FaCility Licensed Program Specifications (GC21-7763) ... S/38Control Program Facility Programmer's Guide (SC21-7730) ... S/38 Control Program Facility Reference Manual - Data Description Specifications (SC21-7806) ... S/38Programmer's/User's Work Station. Guide (SC21-7744) ... S/38 Data Communications Programmer's Guide (SC21-7825) ... S/383270 Emulation Utility Reference Manual and User's Gl.!ide (SC21-7961). RPQs ACCEPTED: No TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index ------- -------.:.. ISG Do not reproduce without written permission ::-:.:§~a: PROGRAM PRODUCTS SYSTEM/7 ASSEMBLER 5718-SC2 (Features #7027, #7029, #9005) PURPOSE System /7 Assembler language is a symbolic programming language for use with the System/7. This language provides the programmer with a convenient means of writing machine instructions, designating registers, and specifying format and addresses of storage areas, data, and constants. All operational capabilities of the System/7 can be expressed in System /7 Assembler language programs. DESCRIPTION The System/7 Assembler is a paper tape-oriented, one pass, one-for-one Assembler program which translates source programs written in System/7 Assembler language into machine loadable object programs on paper tape. The most significant features provided are briefly summarized in the following paragraphs: One-pass: By resolving forward referenced symbols as overlay patches, the assembly is completed in one pass. Forward Referencing: Symbolic names may be referenced prior to definition. Renaming Symbols: A symbolic name can be equated to another symbol so that both refer to the same storage location, register, etc. Convenient Data Representation: Constants can be specified as alphabetic characters, decimal digits, and storage addresses for ease of definition. Optional Program Listing: Program listings can be provided, at assembly time, of source and resulting object program. This is a programmer option. Error Checking: Source programs are examined by the assembler for possible errors arising from incorrect usage of the language. A message is printed on the printer describing the error discovered. This occurs even if the above program listing was not requested. Subroutine Entry: Subroutine names that are still undefined symbols at the end of assembly are printed on the keyboard printer. The source for these subroutines can then be entered and the assembly completed. Multiple Assemblies: Multiple assemblies may be done without reloading the assembler program. Minimum System Requirements: A. System/7 with at least 4K words of storage and an Operator Station. Although this assembler offers a subset of the resources that are available with the macro assemblers, a programmer can prepare an effective program to control an application. (The Functional Subroutines, with the exception of mUltiply and divide, are not available in Paper Tape Format.) System/7 Utilities: Included with the System/7 Assembler are utility programs to provide the user with tested and maintained programs to assist in program maintenance and debugging on System/7. The following utilities require 128 words of storage and reside in the System/7 IPL area. Storage Dump: Output the contents of storage to the keyboard printer or paper tape punch. Storage Patch: Alter storage locations via the Operator Station keyboard. IPL Loader: Reads the storage load paper tape produced by the System/7 Assembler, Host Program Preparation Facilities, or storage dump. This loader will construct the necessary storage load in the System/7. Storage Initialization: Initializes both System/7 storage and registers. This function must be performed after power-on of the System/7. SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT HAJ:lDWARE REQUIREMENTS Minimum System '; Corifigu~ation: System/7 Assembler requires a System /7 with a minimum of 4K of storage and an Operator Station. (Program preparation cannot be accomplished on a 2K system.) DOCUMENTATION (available from Mec~a,nicsburg) MSp,/7 ProgralJ1 L(;gic Manual (GY34-0003); .:t-. . TERMS and ~ONDITIONS: See PP Index PP 5718-SC2.1 Mar 83 Major Revision ------- ----- PP 5718-XX1.1 Do not reproduce without written permission =--:§'=fE: ISG Mar 83 PROGRAM PRODUCTS 1800 CHROMATOGRAPH MONITORING 5718-XX1 PURPOSE SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT IBM 1800 Chromatograph Monitoring provides advanced data acquisition and fused peak analysis techniques for the simultaneous monitoring of multiple chromatographs in realtime. The program scans the signals from the chromatographs, analyzes the peak spectrum, and produces the reports. It is particularly well suited to the quality-control laboratory environment. Support will be provided for this licensed program when it is operated in the following specified operating environment: DESCRIPTION The Chromatograph Monitoring Program operates either under the 1800 Time-Sharing Executive (TSX) or the 1800 Multiprogramming Executive (MPX). Time-sharing jobs may execute concurrently in the TSX version, and background jobs in the MPX version. The advantages are reduced turn-around time on chromatograph runs, greater accuracy and better reproducibility than manual methods, better utilization of analyst time, and greater chromatograph utilization through automatic control. The maximum number of chromatographs that can be monitored is a function of 1800 core size and speed, and the scanning frequency desired. Typical systems have 10 to 60 chromatographs wired, with 10 to 30 operating simultaneously. Extensive digital filtering techniques are employed to minimize noise problems, including spike rejection of raw data. First and second curve derivatives are calculated using a least squares technique. Exponential smoothing is applied to raw data and curve derivatives. Dead bands and confirming counts are used to insure that only significant, persistent changes in the derivatives are considered. All filter parameters are adjustable and can be changed during a run. Backflushing, and column-switching can be controlled by the program. The rate of scanning each chromatograph can be varied individually, and can be changed during a run. Analytical methods (for example, run parameters, peak decomposition method, type of run) can be defined and updated in real time by a series of data cards without interrupting the routine operation of the system. MUltiple reference peaks can be used to improve the estimation of expected peak times. Peak areas can be calculated by several methods including a least squares curve fitting technique. Use: The lab analyst initiates scanning of the chromatograph by entering information about the analytical method to be used, the chromatograph number, date and time of the sample, and other experimental parameters through a 1092 Keyboard, and then closing the start switch on the chromatograph. The chromatograph start light is turned on confirming computer monitoring. No further attention by the analyst is required to record the spectrum and produce the report. Offline or background jobs can be executed during the monitoring of the chromatographs. CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES The customer is responsible for performing the following functions: Installing start buttons and lights at each chromatograph with cabling to the 1800 PI and ECO terminals. Providing low-noise, low-impedance chromatograph analog signals to the 1800. Generating a suitable TSX or MPX operating system. Defining system equates which specify the machine configuration \~i\addressing. Executing the customizer program to modify the source programs for the particulur installation. Geherating the required COMMON/INSKEL/cards using a utility program provided. Compiling or assembling the package programs supplied in source form and building the core loads and data files. Maintaining suitable listings and core maps for the use of system maintenance personnel •. As with other systems,. customers are responsible for providing adequate protection against accidental loss or misuse of their data. This includes an adequate review of the system's security provisions by the user. HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS IBM .1801 Processor-Controller model 1C or 2C (16K) for TSX, model1CB or 2CB (24K) for MPX IBM 1810 Disk Storage model A1 or B1 One IBM 1442 Card Read/Punch model 6 or 7 One IBM 1816 Printer Keyboard or 1053 Printer model 3 IBM 1828 Enclosure model 2 Analog - Digital Converter model 1 (#1231) Two IBM 1851 Multiplexer Terminals model 1 Three Differential Amplifiers (#3246) One IBM 1092 Matrix Keyboard model 1 with 1051 Attachment (#7915) and RPQ C08735 (1800 attachment) IBM 1894 model 10 (RPQ C08056), 1092 Keyboard Attach Basic with #3612, ECO-one group, #5715, PIC-one group, and #3285, DIC-one group (Option A) or #5715, PIC-one group (Option B) IBM 1894 model 1, 1092 Keyboard Attach, Adapter (RPQ C08057). The following is required for each chromatograph wired to the system: Four analog input MPX/R points; one on each of four input voltage levels (10 mv, 50 mv, 500 mv, 5 volt) (#5252) ... one point of Process Interrupt-Contact (#5715) ... one point of Electronic Contact Operate (#3612). Additional devices that are supported and recommended are: A 1443 printer if much offline work is to be done. It is also helpful in system installation for online monitoring of the scan program ... additional 1810 Disk Drive if more than 472 sectors are required for data files in TSX or 571 sectors in MPX ... additional 1053 Printers if chromatographs are widely separated ... additional 1092 Keyboards if chromatographs are widely separated. Note: The CNP programs may only use the 12 standard interrupt levels. The TSX Version requires a Variable Core of 5,600 words, 1,880 words for skeleton programs, and 2,626 words of skeleton COMMON (20 chromatographs and one 1092). The MPX version requires a Variable Core of 5,186 words, a core load area of 2,192 words, 3,592 words of skeleton programs including system routines, and 1,918 words of skeleton COMMON (14 chromatographs and one 1092). The core load area may be eliminated by operating an interrupt core load in variable core, at some increase in system overhead. To compile and build the program requires the above configuration without the Process I/O and 1092 Matrix Keyboard and its attachments. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS The IBM 1800 Chromatograph Monitoring Program is written in IBM 1800 Assembler language and 1800 FORTRAN. It operates under either the IBM 1800 Time-Sharing Executive (TSX) or the 1800 Multiprogramming Executive (MPX). The calculation routines, and the analysis report output programs, are written in FORTRAN to facilitate modification. This program product is released to work with Version 3 of TSX, or Version 3 of MPX, and all subsequent versions and modifications unless so stated in a future revision of this document. The Error Alert Control program (EAC) within the TSX operating system masks all interrupt levels during the processing of an error. Since EAC uses a series of overlays from the disk, the time involved can be as much as several seconds. The Chromatograph Monitoring program cannot operate under these conditions because data would be lost. A change is therefore made to EAC to allow the level(s) of the timers and analog input to remain unmasked during EAC operation. Any errors on the unmasked levells) can result in a double ontry Into EAC with a . resultant unrecoverable MLTP EAC message. The multiple EAC, however, is probably due to hardware problems on the unmasked leveHs) and should not be considerod a TSX problem. The Interval Timer Control program in TSX is also modified to allow timer A to continue running after a timor Interrupt is processed. Customer Engineering involvemont In those areas of code is potentially billable. DOCUMENTATION (available from Mechanicsburg) Application Description Manual (GH20-0724). TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index --.----- ----=- -:i'f5: ISG PP 5719-GP1.1 Do not reproduce without written permission Mar 83 New PROGRAM PRODUCTS 7361 FASTDRAFT LICENSED PROGRAM 5719-GP1 PURPOSE This IBM licensed program supports the IBM 7361 FASTDRAFT FUNCTIONAL CHARACTERISTICS For initial construction of shapes: System. The IBM 7361 Fastdraft licensed program supports the Fastdraft System configuration. This program is intended to satisfy requirements for general purpose interactive drafting using 2D cartesian coordinates. It has been developed for use by non-computer oriented drafters. The overall purpose of the 7361 system and the Fastdraft software is to provide an easy-to-Iearn and use system to enable drafters to improve drafting productivity. Mathematical/Construction Options maximum 7361 Edit Menu options provide for the construction of lines, circles, ellipses, boxes, etc. Editing Options (for use on existing shapes) Menu options are provided for Window, Restore, Delete, Intersect, Rotate, Move, Scale, Measure, etc. HIGHLIGHTS Drafting Options Has capabilities for Isometric drawings and assemblies for clearer visualization of a part and an expanded range of drawing disciplines. Provides drafters with graphics systems equivalents for all the conventional tools (i.e., drawing instruments, templates, drafting board) required for general drafting tasks. Drafting functions are selected by a drafter using a light-pen, from menus displayed on the 3251 mdl2 Display Station component of the 7361 system. Prompting messages on the 3251 mdl 2 guide the user through drafting functions requiring multiple steps. Isometrics, dimensioning, cross hatching, filleting, etc. Drafting Requirements of the following standards organizations are supported: - American National Standards Institute (ANSI) - International Standards Organization (ISO) CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES To install and use the 7361 Fastdraft licensed program, the customer will: Order, as a .minimum, the basic 7361 system shown under "Devices Supported". Drawings are saved on diskettes (one drawing per diskette) and can be restored to disk working storage for editing or plotting purposes at any time. Order the Fastdraft licensed program (5719-GP1) from IBM. Follow site preparation guidelines found in the IBM 7361 Fastdraft System Guide. Emphasis is on ease-of-Iearning and use. A User's Manual guides the drafter step-by-step through the use of prompting messages, from simple to more complex functions. Read the following publications to acquire a knowledge of the graphics functions provided and the installation procedures: Supports separate workstation areas on disk for each display station. Each action is written to disk. Therefore, minimal recovery is required in the event of a power outage. IBM 7361 Fastdraft System Guide (SC34-0514) introduces the system and gives instructions for software installation, operation and maintenance. It also includes physical installation planning information. User can create his own templates (as pattern library symbols). Fastdraft software offers a choice of the level of detail for creating/editing drawings. The level selected is highlighted and changes are restricted to that level. The five hierarchical levels are: - IBM 7361 Fastdraft Training Guide (SC34-0515) is a self-study manual that explains how to use the functions offered, plot a drawing, create pattern libraries, etc. No knowledge of computers or programming is required. Points Lines Shapes Patterns Views After the user has become initially familiar with the system, a review of the IBM Fastdraft Workstation Reference (SC34-0516) will provide in depth information about each of the drafting functions available. DESCRIPTION SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT Three function menus are provided. The drafter selects a menu, and follows with the selection of the functions needed from the displayed menu, by use of the light-pen and the keyboard. The keyboard is primarily used to select the menu and to input measurement and other alphameric data. Devices Supported: The IBM 7361 Fastdraft licensed program is specifically designed for use with the IBM 7361 Fastdraft System. Components of the 7361 system are: Main Menu consists of four parts: Basic HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS Drawing and Diskette Options. The IBM 7361 Graphics Processor Unit mdl 001. Drawing Identification. The IBM 3251 mdl 2 Display Station with two special features: Alphameric Keyboard (#4631) and Light-Pen (#4750). Drawing Parameters. The IBM 3101 mdl 10 Display Terminal (used as the system console for program installation and for DPCE Service Representative use in diagnostic testing). Notation Area. Provides the capability to get and save drawings, clear storage, identify jobs, format diskettes, plot, create notes, etc. Customizing Menu is used to: Specify metric or inch units for the drawing. Optional l':. A second 3251 mdl 2 Display Station (with #4631 and #4750/'~' features). An IBM 7374 Color Plotter mdl 001. Set or change the values for drawing and dimensioning the work. Set up the Edit Menu screen and text formatting. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS (None) DOCUMENTATION (available from Mechanicsburg) Select different pens for the plotter. The Fastdraft options from the Edit Menu use the specifications or attributes set up on the Customizing Menu. Display Window. IBM 7361 Fastdroft System Guide (SC34-0514)* ... IBM 7361 Fastdraft Training Guide (SC34-0515)* ... IBMFastdraft Workstation Reference (SC34-0516) ... IBM 7361 LicensedProgram Specifications (GC34-0513). ** Coordinate Readout Area. * Available by May 31,1983 Instruction Area. ** Describes the IBM 7361 Fastdraft licensE!d/progrflfTl and warrants that it conforms to its specifications (as"-contah\ed'.in the document). . ,'" ',. . Edit Menu has four areas: Edit Menu Options. Provides the capability to create, structure, copy, rotate, delete and modify drawings in working storage. . The 7361 Fastdraft system operates as a dedicated drafting system. RPQs ACCEPTED: Yes TERMS and CONDITIONS: See pp,jndex ------- - - - --. PP 5719-RJ6.1 Do not reproduce without written permission Mar83 :: - - :§':f§: ISG PROGRAM PRODUCTS IBM SERIES/1 REALTIME PROGRAMMING SYSTEM ADVANCED REMOTE JOB ENTRY 5719-RJ6 DESCRIPTION Full Function RJE The IBM Series/1 Realtime Programming System Advanced Remote Job Entry (ARJE) Licensed Program executes as an application program on the Realtime Programming System (RPS). The ARJE Licensed Program supports the use of an IBM Series/1 as a remote job entry workstation using either Systems Network Architecture (SNA) or Multileaving Binary Synchronous Communications (BSC). The workstation console function gives the user the ability to query the host system as to the status of a submitted job and / or query the host for any other normally allowed information (j.e., system status etc.). Facilities are also provided to allow a user to record ARJE console activity to an RPS data set for subsequent printing (called journaling). Advanced Remote Job Entry supports: The print output received by ARJE may be either printed directly on an available physical printer or, through the use of tho RPS spool function, placed in a disk/diskette spool data set for printing at a later time. The use of the spool facility to store output on a diskette allows the user to transport that data to another RPS Series/1 for printing. Facilities exist in the RPS spool function to allow the user to control the printing of specific jobs from the spool processor output queue. ARJE supports 3211/3203-4 Forms Control Blocks for printed data. The FCB parameters are: Lines per inch, form end (page length), and page line to channel assignments (i.e., for each "select vertical channel" command received from the host, ARJE will skip to a specific line on the current printer page). A utility will be provided with ARJE to allow the user to define FCBs corresponding to the FCB/forms requests that may be sent by the host. MRJE Multileaving Remote Job Entry (MRJE) Synchronous Communications (BSC). support for Binary SNA RJE Multiple Logical Unit Systems Network Architecture (SNA) support for Synchronous Data Link Control (SDLC). Unattended Operation ARJE allows unattended operation by having ARJE commands on disk/diskette, and support for dynamic punch file allocation, and auto answer. Full Function RJE In addition to standard RJE capabilities, ARJE has full function console support with status reporting and journaling, data decompression, and printer form support. ARJE Commands ARJE commands have been designed for ease of use and are identical for MRJE or SNA RJE operation. Host Remote Job Entry Subsystems ARJE supports the following: Bse OS/VS2JES2 OS/VS2JES3 VM/370 RSCS SDLC OS/VS2JES2 OS!VS2JES3 DOS/VSE VSE/POWER HIGHLIGHTS The ARJE licensed program is an application program loaded by the terminal operator or another RPS application program. The purpose of the program is to provido tho RPS user with the ability to participate in an SNA network or BSC environment as an RJE workstation. It will allow the user who has created a job stream via RPS edit facilities to transmit that job stream to a host Job entry subsystem for processing. Upon completion, tho output from the job stream(s) will normally be sent back to tho workstation for punching (routed to an RPS data set) and / or printing. MRJE The Binary Synchronous Support for point-to-point (switched or nonswitched) communication is with the ARJE Multileaving Remote .Job Entry (MRJE) option. Multileaving is a term which describes a computer-to-computer communications technique developed for use by tho HASP system. It has since been implemented by other IBM RJE programming systems. It permits the intermixing of input and output data streams on the communication lines. it is fully synchronizod, two directional transmission of a variable number of data stroams between the Series/1 and a host system. The Series/1 appears as a System/3 with console support to the host job entry subsystems. SNA RJE ARJE Commands The ARJE commands are single line commands with parameters that can be specified by the user. These commands are summarized below: - Help -- Print a list of the commands - Readfile -- Identify a command/data file to be processed - Printer -- Alter current ARJE printer assignment - Punch - - Modify punch specifications - Library -- Change library environment _. Attend -- Change operational mode (attended/unattended) - Status -- Report current ARJE status - Journal -- Turn on/off journal activity - Operator -- Transmit host operator command CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES The customer is responsible for the installation and use of this licensed program. SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT Support will be provided for this licensed program when it is operated in the following specified operating environment: HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS The Series/1 Realtime Programming System Advanced Remote Job Entry requires the following hardware for installation: A Series/ 1 4954 or 4955 processor. One of the following disk/disk13tte devices: .- 4962 Disk Storage Unit (all models). - 4963 Disk Storage Unit (all models). - 4964 Diskette Storage Unit. The Systems Network Architecture (SNA) RJE option of ARJE supports (switched or nonswitchedl point-to-point or multipoint Synchronous Data Link Control protocol. The Series/1 ARJE has Multiple Logical Unit support under a single workstation providing up to four LLJ to LU sessions. ARJE uses Logical Unit Type 1 protocols for session communication with the host job entry subsystems. - 4978 Display Station. Unattended Operation - 4979 Display Station. Three ARJE capabilities, I.e., ARJE commands in a disk/diskette data set, dynamic punch file allocation, and auto answer, enable the workstation to operate without the user being physically present. - 3101 Display Terminal Model 1 or 2 or Typewriter Models ASR33/ ASR35 or equivalent teletypewriter device attached by any of the following: The ARJE user can place ARJE commands in a disk/diskette data set in addition ·to entering thom at his workstation display terminal. These ARJE comrpands will be read in and processed just as if they . .. were entered-,iit the display. The usei'cari"also ~ctivate ARJE in a "'wait" state (auto answer), to establish thEr;Connection with the host job entry subsystem when a call is receiVed from the host. Thus,. Series/1 site personnel can perform other functions while ARJE is executing. The punched output receiv~d by ARJEis always placed in a Realtime Programming System disk/diskette data set. This data set is allocated by ARJE (dynamic allocation). - 4965 Diskette and I/O Expansion Unit. - 4966 Diskette Magazine Unit. One of the following interactive devices: Adapter (3101 or ASR33/35 #7850 Teletypewriter equivalent). #2095/ #2096 Feature- Programmable Adapter D02350 (3101 only) #1610 Asynchronous Single Line Adapter (3101 only). #2091/ #2092. Asynchronous Multi-line Adapter (3101 only). One of the following adapters: #1310 Multi-function Attachment (BSC modo). or --------= ------ISG Do not reproduce without written permission PP 5719-RJ6.2 Mar 83 :§~§: PROGRAM PRODUCTS Series/1 Advanced Remote Job Entry (cont'd) #2074 Binary Synchronous Control. Communications Single Lirie #2075 Binary Synchronous Control. Communications Single Line #2080 X.21 Adapter Interface. (BSC/SDLC mode) under V.35 #2093 Binary Synchronous Communications 8-Line Control #2094 Binary Synchronous Communications 4-Line Adapter #2090 Synchronous Data Link Control - Single Line Control Optionally, one of the following: 4973 Line Printer. 4974 Matrix Printer. 4975 Matrix Printer (via #1310 MFA). SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS The following IBM licensed programs or functionally equivalent programs are prerequisites for the installation of the IBM Series/1 Realtime Programming System Advanced Remote Job Entry Licensed Program (5719-RJ6): IBM Series/1 Realtime Programming System Version 5 (5719PC5). For SNA RJE option only of ARJE: IBM Series/1 Realtime Programming System Systems Extended Network Architecture Support Licensed Program (5719-SN1). The Series/l Realtime. Programming System Advanced Remote Job Entry Licensed Program requires an additional 26K bytes of storage. DOCUMENTATION IBM Series/1 Realtime Programming System Advanced Remote Job Entry Licensed Program Specification '" IBM Series/1 Realiime Programn?ing System Advanced Remote Job Entry User's Guido ... IBM Series/1 Realtime Programming System Advanced Remote Job Entry Reference Card. PROGRAMMING RPQs PRPQs will be accepted. Response time will dopend upon complexity. ------- -----------_.-------- ISG PP 5721-DC3.1 Do not reproduce without written permission Mar 83 PROGRAM PRODUCTS 5110 PRINT PLOT/PROBLEM SOLVER LIBRARY 5721-DC3 (BASIC) and 5721-DC4 (APL) PURPOSE IBM 5110 Print Plot/Problem Solver Library is an interactive program. When used in conjunction with the printer control function support provided (also available via RPQ S40161), it allows the IBM 5110 to plot data generated by BASIC or APL programs, or to plot data entered from the keyboard onto an IBM 5103 Printer. (Note: All further references to the Print Plot/Problem Solver Library assume the printer control function support is that provided with the Print Plot program and not the RPQ.) In addition, the Print Plot/Problem Solver Library, through the use of the Serial I/O Adapter, can be used with these types of peripheral devices: Guide to test the system and 5103 Printer, and to make sure the programs work properly. It is the customer's responsibility to provide sufficient backup cartridges or diskettes (see license agreement for limitations) to ensure continued operation in case of a failure. It is the customer's responsibility to provide sufficient security for these licensed programs. SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT Support will be provided for this licensed program when it is operated in the following specified operating environment: HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS Absolute Vector Plotters Print Plot/ APL requires a minimum of 32K of processor storage (IBM 5110 models A12 or C12 [tape], A22 or C22 [diskette ]). Storage Display Terminals The present implementation will be compatible only with certain peripheral devices of the above generic device types. Peripheral device support programs are the user's responsibility. See User's Manual for more detail. Print Plot/Problem Solver Library will provide the capability for generating the most used types of graphs such as line graphs, bar charts, histograms, point plotting, etc. The user may write a program to generate the data or enter the data directly from the keyboard. HIGHLIGHTS Print Plot/Problem Solver Library supports the following functions: Plot of horizontal and vertical lines given starting point and length. Automatic plotting of axes. Automatic plotting of grid. Automatic plotting of scale numbers and tick marks including logarithmic. Connect two points with straight line or connect more than two points with straight lines between points in the order given. Automatic plotting of histogram. Automatic plotting of bar charts. Plot of curve identifying characters (from standard character set). Built-in routine for scaling to compensate for dot density differences horizontally and vertically so that a square will be square and a circle will be round. Variable density of plot. Reversible platen so that the paper can move backward as well as forward. Standard 5103 character identification or title. set printed horizontally for chart Calculate and plot curve fits for given points. DESCRIPTION Print Plot/Problem Solver Library consists of a series of modules, that when loaded into the system, will provide a wide range of plotting capabilities. In generating a graph using Print Plot, the user would generally invoke processing as follows: Specify, interactively, metric or inch plotting. Specify the size and location of graph within the plot limits. Specify the location of the origin within tho graph, the user X value and Y value at the origin. and the horizontal and vertical scaling . factors. The scaling factors can be either linear or logarithmic. If axes are to be plotted, either specify Dutomatic plotting of axes, or use Print Plot commands to plot axes to user specifications. If grids are to be plotted, invoko the grid plotting functions. Specity horizontal and vertical dot density. Specify a symbol to be printed at all user-defined points. Input user coordinates for all points to be plotted indicating whether each individual point should or should not be connected to the last point provided. In addition to keyboard entered and user program-generated points,' the data for plotting points may be provided via a data file. When generating special typos of graphs (bar charts or histograms), the user may utilize the Print Plot routines which are tailored to these specific applications. CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES The Print Plot/ Problem Solver Library is distributed on cartridge or diskette for loading into the user's system. A User's Guide is also provided. The customer should use the test data supplied in the User's Print Plot/BASIC also requires a minimum of 32K of processor storage (IBM 5110 models B12, C12, B22 or C22). The printer control function support will be automatically provided with any Print Plot/Problem Solver Library ordered. The printer control function support is separately available via RPQ S40161. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS None TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index ------- ----- Do not reproduce without written permission =- -~r§: ISG PROGRAM PRODUCTS 5110 STAT/PROBLEM SOLVER LIBRARY (BASIC) 5721-0C7 PURPOSE The IBM 5110 STAT/Problem Solver Library is an interactive program encompassing commonly used statistical techniques for the analysis of numerical data. The library is available in BASIC only for the IBM 5110. STAT /Problem Solver Library helps the problem solver to utilize the computer directly for statistical analysis. A statistically-oriented user should have no difficulty in quickly learning the capabilities of the· programs. The interactive mode of the package allows a non-data processing-oriented professional to readily utilize the programs. Because of the interactive nature of the STAT/Problem Solver Library the user can sit at the keyboard and see the result of the analysis as it is developed. Delays and some of the sources of error associated with batch processing and time sharing usage are eliminated. HIGHLIGHTS A comprehensive set of statistical procedures. A user with a knowledge of statistics can learn the program with a minimum of effort. Interactive mode simplifies usage. Error checking with correction facilities. Instructional messages clarify procedures or options available. DESCRIPTION STAT /Problem Solver Library consists of a series of routines covering a wide range of capabilities under the following categories: Data Generation - Read, Print, Edit, Transform Elementary Statistics - Cross Moments, T - Test, Chi-Square Tabulation, Histogram, Tally, Regression and Correlation Analysis - Correlation, Simple Regression, Stepwise Regression, Multiple Regression, Polynomial Regression Multivariate Analysis - Discriminant Analysis, Canonical Correlation, Factor Analysis Analysis of Variance - One-way Analysis of Variance, Factorial Design Non-Parametric Statistics - Kendall Ranks Correlation, Sign Test, Wilcoxon's Matched-pairs Signed Ranks Test, Cochran Q- Test, Freedman Two-way Analysis of Variance, Mann-Whitney U-Test, Kendall Coefficient of Concordance Biserial Correlation, Point Biserial Correlation, Tetrachoric Correlation, Phi-Coefficient. Time Series Analysis - Moving Average, Seasonal Analysis, Cyclical Analysis, Auto-Covariance and Auto-correlation, Cross-Covariance and Correlation, Triple Exponential Smoothing. Biostatistics - Survival Rate, Probit Analysis CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES The STAT/Problem Solver Library is distributed in machine-readable form for loading into the user's system. A User's Guide is also provided. Customers should use the procedures outlined in the User's Guide with their own data to test the machine-readable code to make sure the programs are working properly. It is the customer's responsibility to provide sufficient backup cartridges or diskettes (no more than 5 are permitted under the license agreement) to ensure continued operation in case of a failure. It is the customer's responsibility to provide sufficient security for these licensed programs. SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT Support will be provided for this licensed program when it is operated in the following specified operating environment: HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS STAT /BASIC will operate on an IBM 16K 5110 system. The library is able to automatically adjust the minimum-maximum entries to fit various storage sizes and input/ output options. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS: None TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index PP 5721-0C7.1 Mar 83 ------- ----:: - - ~"f§: ISG PP 5721-XB1.1 Do not reproduce without written permission Mar 83 Major Revision PROGRAM PRODUCTS ACCOUNTING APPLICATIONS For The 5120 COMPUTING SYSTE"M 6120 BILLING ... (5721-XB1) IBM 6120 PAYROLL .• , (5721·XB2) IBM 6120 ACCOUNTS PAYABLE .•. (5721-XB3) IBM 6120 ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE •.• (5721-XB4) IBM 6120 INVENTORY REPORTING ••. (5721-XB5) IBM 6120 GENERAL LEDGER '" 15721-XB6) PURPOSE The IBM 5120 Computing System licensed programs for accounting applications are cross-industry programs, applicable to many different business types, which provide the user with powerful tools for running and managing a business. The levels of support provided for these programs .include: Documentation designed to increase ease-of-use and productivity; an Installa"; tion Support Center (JSC) Hotline available to all customers for assistance; Responsive Program Temporary Fix (PTF) - an enhancement to the distribution and applying of program fixes. HIGHLIGHTS Creates transaction data on diskette for direct input to the 5120 Accounts Receivable and Inventory Reporting. Installation-time tailoring including selection of Accounts Receivable/Inventory interface, back order, general ledger account numbers for use with accounts receivable input and automatic invoice numbering. PAYROLL (5721-XB2) 5120 Payroll provides an application that performs basic payroll computations and produces payroll checks with earnings statements and. deduction reports, It accommodates both hourly and salaried payrolls. Additional program flexibility and options are provided to satisfy many special customer needs. Functions and Features .Weekly, biweekly, semimonthly or monthly pay periods. Provides payroll register, payroll checks with Earnings Statements, Deduction Report (with exceptions) and Distribution Journal. Interrelated applications through generation and passing of transaction data on diskettes for direct input, as appropriate. Preparation of the 1979 W-2 forms with subtotals and 941-A showing excess wages for SUI. New approach to program documentation designed to significantly increase ease-of-use and customer self-sufficiency. during installation and operation. Vacation, holiday and sick time processing and reporting. Installation Support Center (ISC), with a direct customer hotline for questions related to the installation and operation of these applications. Central Service from the Application Development Center for error correction, including rapid distribution of PTFs and the capability for users to automatically apply the fixes through Responsive PTF facility. Enhanced ease-of-use through appropriate use of menu-driven procedure selection and/or screen prompting. Built-in auditibility and control through such techniques as zero balancing and control totals. Installation-time tailoring to select key options and user specific control and report data. BRADS " (5798- NXT) file definitions provided with the programs for selected portions of the application files. DESCRIPTION BILLING (5721-XB1) IBM 5120 Billing is a post-billing application providing the user the ability to create invoices for customer orders already shipped. The customer name and address, item descriptions and rrices are automatically obtained from the customer and item files I the 5120 Accounts Receivable and Inventory Reporting programs are installed. If these programs are not installed, the data can be keyed In directly for each invoice. Extensions and discounts are automatically applied and transaction records created for direct input to 5120 Accounts Receivable and Inventory Reporting programs. Functions and Features Pay for regular. employees on hourly basis, with additional capability for - Payment of special wages only (for example, piecework). - Two overtime rates set by user. - A shift differential premium handled as percent of hourly rate or flat amount per hour, set at user option. Shifts 2 and 3 may differ. - Pay rates based on "skill" codes. Pay for salaried employees, with additional capability for - Payment of cominissiononly. - Recording overtime hours, with or without pay. Provides for processing special payments such as awards and bonuses. Allows additional Federal Income Tax withholding at employee's request. Provides user a specified tax table for Federal and State/local tax computation with one state and one local tax deduction per pay period per employee. Up to four state/local changes allowed per year per employee. Non-statutory doductions allowed, with capability for: - Up to eight per employee, with a total system capacity of 40 non-statutory types. - Specirying deduction frequency, and continuing until stopped or predefined limit is reached. - Deduction amount may be percent of gross, amount per period, or amount per hour. - Stock/bond deduction with a certificate value and balance forward. Inquiry to any employee record. Post-billing. Security provisions with user pre-set passwords. Automatic price extensions. B~oken Case pricing. Discounts optionally applied based on invoice total. Interactive data entry for file creation/maintenance and transactions. Auditibility and control through payroll data batch proof and zero balancing general ledger distribution. Availability of four customer class prices per item controlled by a price code in the Customer Master File. Creation of summary job/department cost distribution data .for input to the 5120 General ledger program. Up to 2 sales taxes (State, local) plus Federal Excise tax. Installation-time tailoring, including company name/address, security password and various processing options such as pay rates based on skill, Interface to the 5120 General Ledger, job costing and distribution. Up to 3 classes of special charges (packing, freight, etc.). Handles cash sales. Billing of non-inventoried items. Optional handling of back order, back order shown on invoice. Invoice by single order, specified orders, or batch orders. Credit memos for returns and adjustments. Dally sales information from Billing is summarized in the order file and available to user as input to a user sales history file. Auditibility and control through edit lists and control totals for Invoice Register, Accounts Receivable and Inventory transaction files. Interactive data entry and edit of customer orders. Can override any fixed data during data entry (that Is, price, discounts, cost, etc.) ACCOUNTS PAYABLE (5721-XB3) The 5120 Accounts Payable is an interactive solution designed to assist the user in controlling cash outflow, while maintaining accurate and detailed records of vendor invoices and credits. . Information is provided to help management take advantage of vendor discounts. Accounting controls, audit trails, a menu facility and operator prompting can assist the user in maximizing productivity. Data validity is provided through zero balancing of debits and credits by voucher number at entry time. 't: Functions and Features Multicompany support. Payment options by "due date", "on demand", or "within date". ------- ------==:: ~~§: ISG PP 5721-XB1.2 Do not reproduce without written permission Mar 83 Major Revision PROGRAM PRODUCTS 5120 Accounting Applications (cont'd) Allows for expedited payments when necessary to deviate from regular payment cycles. Optionally allows generated standard recurring payable items for several payment cycles. Handles partially prepaid vendor invoices, adjustments, transfer, reversals, and vendor debit and credit memos on an accrual basis. Handling of broken-case quantities On-demand stock status reporting with flagging of exception items (for example, out of stock, below reorder level, etc.) which may optionally be restricted to selected vendors, item classes, or inventory items Comprehensive inventory analysis report Credit memo tracking through key reports. Perpetual inventory maintenance Use of up to nine specified cash bank account numbers for cash disbursements. Item costing - both average cost and last cost Allows accounting for and deduction of cash discounts. Maintenance of month-to-date and year-to-date sales and cost of items sold for all items Supports open payables and cash disbursements. Displayed inquiry of the contents of Inventory Master File records ' using the File Maintenance process Auditibility and control functions including zero balancing by voucher and control totals for batch input and update. Provides for vendor master file inquiry through file maintenance facility. Interactive data entry and correction capability with fast response screen for efficient data entry. Use of specified general ledger accounts for payables, discounts earned, cash and expense distributions. Creation of journal entry data to be used for input to general ledger or optionally create journal. entry on diskette for input to the 5120 General Ledger. Installation-time tailoring includes selection and definition of report titles, payment options, interface to 5120 General Ledger and use of security feature. ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE (5721-XB4) The 5120 Accounts Receivable is an application designed to provide the user with timely information to help improve cash flow, and reduce bad debt losses by control of the accounts receivable. The accounts receivable transactions are summarized into debits and credits to the general ledger accounts. The system provides a summarized journal report and optionally creates a general ledger transaction file on diskette, summarized by account, for entry to the user's general ledger. Functions and Features Open-item accounting or balance forward accounting selectable by customer. Accounts receivable aging Including three aged, one current, and one future period, with aged Trial Balanceon demand. Customer account information may be selectively printed for credit checking and cash application. Automatic creation of late charge transactions which may be reviewed and edited before posting. Late charge rate and first late period can be specified. Deferred statement printing. Suppression of statements and/or late charges on an individual customer basis, as required. . Credit limit reporting. Past due reporting. "Sundry" entries for which general ledger account numbe'rs may be specified at transaction entry time. Physical inventory list - in sequence by warehouse and location Auditibility and .control functions including Master File update sequence numbering and dating, and control totals for transaction entry Installation-time tailoring GENERAL LEDGER (5721-XB6) The 5120 General Ledger System is an application designed to accomplish the basic bookkeeping functions of posting journal entries to general ledger and creating financial statements. The programs are based on double-entry bookkeeping principles in accordance with established professional standards. The system has been designed for easy implementation and installation, allowing a user to be productively operational in a short time. ' Functions and Features Accommodate up to eleven major divisions of accounts. Account structure within each division can be tailored by the user to meet their specific requirements. Produces General Ledger, General Ledger Trial Balance, Chart of Accounts and Transaction Listings. Produces Balance Sheet and Income Statement on 8 1/2" x 11" format. Auditibility and control through edit of data input formats, entry of debit and credit transactions under systems guidance, batch total control and zero balancing for input transactions. Use of master menu screen, with optional return after each procedure. Accepts transactions, direct from diskette, generated by the 5120 Payroll, Accounts Payable and Accounts Receivable programs. Program Documentation: A documentation approach is provided to help customers install these IBM accounting applications. The materials offer significant improvements in the following areas: They are written in user-oriented language. The material within each book is presented in an easy-to-follow, step-by-step structure that guides the customer through the installation of the application. Hands-on operator training is provided. This training is self-paced and can be used with or without accompanying audio cassettes, depending upon the experience level of the user. Auditibility function including control totals for batch input and update. The materials are designed to interface with the 5120 Operator Training providing a coordinated prerequisite for the specific operator training. Interactive entry and correction capability for invoice, debit memo, credit memo, payment, adjustment data and late charge data. Fast response screen for efficient data entry. They are designed to work in conjunction with the ISC customer hotline. Creation of journal summary transactions for input to general ledger, with optional diskette output for input to the 5120 General Ledger program. Installation-time tailoring includes user company name and report titles, general ledger account numbers, interface to the IBM 5120 General Ledger and Billing programs, choice by customer of balance forward or open item accounting, and others. INVENTORY REPORTING (5721-XB5) The 5120 Inventory Reporting offers small enterprises the management reports to help appropriate optimizationof inventory levels. The user is assisted in purchasing decisions by up-to~date reports reflecting stock movement, on-hand and on-order quantities, as well as sales and cost data. \t, Functions and Features Quantity on-hand and warehouse location kept separately for up to three warehouses The books are visually attractive. The following materials are available for each application. Getting Ready: This book steps the customer through the implementation process. It spells out, in simple terms, what has to be done to get the application up and running. ' Operator Training: Complete instructional materials are provided for training the operator. This training program uses both audio and workbook to bring operators up to speed quickly. After training, the operator workbook and a Ready Reference Guide are used as needed. Reports and Information: This book helps management take full advantago of the reports and information provided by the application. It describes, in detail, the reports produced and how they are used. In addition, a separate program detail manual will be optionally available for each application. ------- ----:: - - :S~§: ISG PP 5721-XB1.3 Do not reproduce without written permission Mar 83 Major Revision PROGRAM PRODUCT5 5120 Accounting Applications (cont'd) Installation Support: 5110 5120 Atlanta National Market Support Center Customer telephone service to the Atlanta National Market 5upport Center, formerly the AC5C, is available only for selected 5120 licensed programs as follows: 5110 B22 Computer (32K BA5IC) Feature #3200 Diskette 50rt (except Payroll) 5110 B32 Computer (32K BASIC) Feature#32oo Diskette 50rt (exceptPayroll) 5103 mdl11 Printer 5103 mdl11 Printer IBM will provide 90 days of no-charge telephone service to 5120 customers who are installing their first 5120 licensed program. These programs are: - Billing (5721-XB1) Payroll (5721-XB2) Accounts Payable (5721-XB3) Accounts Receivable (5721-XB4) Inventory (5721-XB5) General Ledger (5721-XB6) BRAD5 " (5796-NXT) Customers may purchase 12 months of continuing telephone service for all of the above licensed programs. Telephone service for the 5100, 5110, and 5120 BA51C programming languages is no longer available. Responsive Program Temporary Fix (PTF: Responsive PTF is a diskette system designed to have customers automatically install program fixes for the 5120 Accounting Applications and BRAD5 II. It consists of a single diskette containing program fixes and a program which prompts the customer to apply the required fix or fixes. The diskette will contain all known fixes to the supported applications. Central 5ervice. at the West Coast Application Development Center, is responsible for developing fixes, maintaining the Responsive diskette, and shipping it to a customer at the request of the ISC. The customer will also receive information on how to initiate the system to the point where screen prompts are provided for further guidance. Responsive PTF does not replace the normal methods of periodic update releases, as required, through PID. It is meant to serve as an enhanced level of support for use between releases. Use of Accounting Applications with BRADS" (5798-NXT): BRAD5 II provides the facility for a non-programmer to define files, create and maintain the files, build file inquiries and generate reports from the file data. The 5120 Accounting Applications (except General Ledger) will further support that capability by providing selective BRAD5 " file definitions with the applications. Thus, the task of definition, file creation, and maintenance is accomplished as part of the application. A user who has BRAD5 " can then build inquiries and develop additional reports for the defined files. This facility can help meet user unique inquiry and report requirements not contained in the applications. In addition, with BRAD5 II, the user can extend the usefulness and value of the 5120 by developing additional simple applications (that is, asset inventory. company phone book, price lists. mailing lists. bills of material. etc.). without requiring a knowledge of BA51C programming. BRAD5 " is also a highly productive application development tool. Thus the user. who also has BA51C language programming experience. can productively develop additional applications of varying complexities. CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES IBM may provide normal marketing assistance and guidance. The responsibility for personnel selection and training. installation and continued day-to-day operation lies solely with the customer. The customer is responsible for error detection and analysis and submission of APARs. but can obtain obtain hotline assistance from the 15C. IBM Central 5ervice is responsible for the development and distribution of program fixes. but the customer has the responsibility to apply fixes to the program and can obtain hotline assistance from the 15C and use of the Responsive PTF diskette and program. SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT 5upport will be provided for these licensed programs when they are operated in the following specified operating environment: HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS The IBM 5120 Accounting Applications (General Ledger. Accounts Payable, Payroll. Billing. Inventory Reporting. Accounts Receivable) are designed to operate on an IBM 5120 Computing 5ystem or a 5110 Computer with the following minimum configur.ations: 5114 Diskette. Unit Feature #3240 (5econd Diskette Drive) Each of the applications operates individually. with its own diskettes. on a dedicated 5120 or 5110. Though there is data-passing. via diskette. between selective applications. there is no system or file co-residency. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS The IBM 5110 Accounting FOPs [General Ledger (5798-NPH). Accounts Payable (5798-NPK). Payroll (5798-NPJ). Inventory Reporting (5798-NXK). Accounts Receivable (5798-NPN) 1 were used as a base for development of the 5120 Accounting Applications. Enhancements. extensive changes to the interfaces. the addition of Billing with an interface to the enhanced Accounts Receivable and Inventory. and the development of a new documentation approach have resulted in major changes. Because of these changes operational problems can occur if the 5110 and 5120 programs are used together. Therefore. IBM cannot support the intermixing of the 5110 and the 5120 applications. DOCUMENTATION (available from Mechanicsburg) Marketing Publications The following program documentation is provided as part of the Basic Material shipped with the programs from PID. It is also available from Mechanicsburg. and includes the following: IBM 5120 Billing (5721·XB1) Getting Ready Binder (5B30-0438) contains: ... Getting Ready Manual (5B30-0439) ... Getting Ready Planner Form (5B30-0441) ... Reports and Information Manual (5B30-0440) ... Operator Training Binder (5B30-0442) contains: '" Operator Training Manual (5B30-0443) .,. Operator Training Cassette (5V30-0236) ... Ready Reference Manual (5B30-0444) ... Program Detail Manual (LB30-2519) ... Application Extension Booklet (L830-2527). IBM 5120 Payroll (5721-XB2) Getting Ready Binder (5B30-0403) contains: ... Getting Ready Manual (5830-0404) ... Getting Ready Planner Form (5B30-0406) .. , Reports and Information Manual (5830-0405) ... Operator Training Binder (5B30-0407) contains: ... Operator Training Manual (5B30-0408) ... Operator Training Cassette (5V30-0231) ... Ready Reference Manual (5830-0409) ... Program Detail Manual (LB30-2516) ... Application Extension Booklet (LB30-2524). , IBM 6120 Accounts Payable (5721-XB3) Getting Ready Binder (5B30-0424) contains: ... Getting Ready Manual (5B30-0425) ... Getting Ready Planner Form (5B30-0427) ... Reports and Information Manual (5B30-0426) ... Operator Training Binder (5830-0428) contains: ... Operator Training Manual (5B30-0429) ... Operator Training Cassette (5V30-0234) ... Ready Reference Manual (5B30-0430) ... Program Detail Manual (LB30-2518) ... Application Extension Booklet (LB30-2525). IBM 5120 Accounts Receivable (5721-X84) Getting Ready Binder (5B30-0431) contains: ... Getting Ready Manual (5B30-0432) ... Getting Ready Planner Form (5B30-0434) ... Reports and Information Manual (5830-0433) ... Operator Training Binder (5B30-0435) contains: '" Operator Training Manual (5B30-0436) ... Operator Training Cassette (5V30-0235) ... Ready Reference Manual., (5830-0437) ... Program Detail Manual (LB30-2515) ... Application Extension Booklet (LB30-2523). IBM 6120 Inventory Reporting (5721-XB5) Getting Ready Binder (5B30-0417) contains: ... Getting Ready Manual (5830-0418) ... Getting Ready Planner Form (5B30-0420) .. , Reports and Information Manual (5B30-0419) ... Operator Training Binder (5B30-0421) contains: '" Operator Training Manual (5830-0422) ... Operator Training Cassette (5V30-0233) ... Ready Reference Manual (5B30-0423) ... Program Detail Manual (LB30-2520) .... Application Extensiof1Booklet (LB30-2526). IBM 5120 General Ledger (5721-X86) . Getting Ready Binder (5830-0410) contains: ... Getting Ready Manual (5830-0411) ... Getting Ready Planner Form (5830-0413) .. , Reports and Information Manual (5B30-0412) ... Operator Training Binder (5B30-0414) contains: ... Operator Training Manual. (5B30-0415) ... Operator Training Cassette (5V30-0232) '" Ready Reference Manual (5B30-0416) ... Program Detail Manual (LB30-2517): • RPQs ACCEPTED:· No TERMS and CONDITIONS: 5ee PP Index ------- -------=ISG Do not reproduce without written pormission -~~~ PROGRAM PRODUCTS SYSTEM/32 BASIC ASSEMBL.ER LANGUAGE and MACRO PROCESSOR 5725-AS1 PURPOSE The Basic Assembler language is a symbolic programming language used to write programs for the System/32. Source programs written in this language are processed by the Basic Assembler licensed program to produce relocatable object programs which are converted to executable format by the System/32 System Control ProgrammingOverlay Linkage Editor facility. The Basic Assembler can be used to create a stand-alone program. The object programs are stored in the System/32 Library. Program loading is performed through System/32 OCL. Programs may be coded entirely by the user with no dependence on any other programming other than System/32 System Control Programming (5725-SC1). Basic Assembler may also be used for assembly of relocatable subroutines for use with System/32 RPG II. The subroutines written in the Basic Assembler language are coded by the user and separately assembled. The process of program linking is accomplished during compilation of the RPG II source program. HIGHLIGHTS Some of the features provided by the Basic Assembler licensed program and its language are: Mnemonic Operation Codes Symbolic Referencing of Storage Addresses Automatic Storage Assignment Address Displacement Calculation Convenient Data Representation Operand Field Expressions Source Identification - Sequence Fields Assembler Instructions Cross-Reference Listings Error Checking and Diagnostic Messages System/32 macros provide support to the Assembler user through the Macro Processor for the following System Control Program facilities: Disk functions, printer operations, keyboard and display screen access and binary synchronous communications. The macros are supplied to provide an interface to existing SCP support. Additional macros may be written by the user using the macro definition language provided. By referring to macro definitions, the Macro Processor expands macro instructions coded by the user. The macro definitions are coded in a macro language. The macro definitions may be supplied by either the user or IBM. See the related System/32 SCP macros. All macro instructions are expanded into assembler source language statements that in turn can be processed by the Basic Assembler. SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS IBM System/32 Basic Assembler .. language and Macro Processor licensed program supports all models and features of the IBM 5320. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS A concurrent version of IBM System/32 System Control Programming (5725-SC1) is required to support IBM System/32 Basic Assembler language and Macro Processor licensed program. TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index PP 5725-AS1.1 Mar 83 Major Revision ------- -------.:.~ ~~E: ISG PP 5725-C21.1 Do not reproduce without written permission Mar 83 Major Revision PROGRAM PRODUCTS SYSTEM/32 CLIENT ACCOUNTING and FINANCIAL REPORTING SYSTEM (CAFRS) 5725-C21 PURPOSE The System/32 Client Accounting and Financial Reporting System (CAFRS) offers the public accounting profession a comprehensive aid to solving the problems of client accounting. It assists the Certified Public Accountant, Public Accountant, or bookkeeper in operating a more profitable and productive practice. HIGHLIGHTS CAFRS can be installed without in-house programming capability: File sizes may be changed, within limits, as needed, by the system tailoring procedure to allow additional clients to be serviced or to offer optional processing features to more clients on a System/32. The Operator Reference Summary Card is provided for the operator as a reminder of the major operational functions of each procedure. It is intended to be used once the operator is thoroughly trained in tile particular application. Instructional material in the form of a self-study course is provided for the operator for training in the use of the runbook. An Application Logic Manual is provided, as optional licensed material, for use by the self-sufficient customer and for systems engineering continuing support. It describes the architecture of programs, procedures, data base cross-references, data dictionary, and detailed descriptions of each program. Easy-to-use runbook is available Application Description: The Client Accounting and Financial Reporting System is a full-function ready-to-execute application. It includes application reference manuals. a run book. source code. object code, execution procedures, and an application logic manual, if ordered as optional base material. Step-by-step installation activity plan and detail user's information supplied by Application Reference Manuals It is designed to allow flexibility in the options included to meet an individual client's special needs: File load and maintenance procedures provided System-controlled master and transaction file backup procedures CAFRS provides ease-of-use options to the user Designed to fit industry requirements OCl procedures, Sort specifications, and processing programs are packaged into logical work units which simplify system operation Monitoring of procedures prevents execution of a program until preceding programs have been completely and successfully executed Compatible online/offline file maintenance and transaction data entry via the System/32 keyboard or diskettes created on the 3740 Data Entry System Dynamic Backup and Recovery System forces periodic backup of master files and edited transactions and keeps track of what procedures need to be rerun from the last backup point to recreate up-to-date master files Reprint options are possible because file updating is separated from report writing functions Selective printing options are available for many report functions CAFRS uses recognized accounting techniques and terminology to provide a solid accounting system: Sample user-oriented forms for data preparation, file creation, audit and control are provided Clear audit trails and control techniques are provided Standard types of accounting reports, such as journals, ledger, trial balance, and financial statements plus special supporting analyses and lists, are provided DESCRIPTION The Client Accounting and Financial Reporting System is a ready-toexecute application for the small accountmg firm. It combines two data entry approaches - operator-oriented and batch-oriented. Support is provided for transaction entry through the System/32 keyboard or through a diskette created on a 3740 Data Entry System. The application has certain records within a control file which contain questionnaire responses. These records allow the application to select file sizes and functions to suit each firm's needs. The questionnaire responses are keyed during initial installation and may be changed as needed. The System Tailoring Procedure allows these responses to be entered. The System Tailoring Procedure utilizes the answers to .a series of questions regarding the firm's requirements. It provides the following: Tailoring the application on-site at installation time. Allows users to activate and deactivate provided functions as their requirements change. All provided functions are included in the programs but only required functions are executed. File sizes may be expanded or contracted, as needed. by rerunning the System Tailoring Procedure. An Application Reference Manual provides a step-by-step installation activity plan including sample numbering systems, sample input and maintenance data forms. file loading sequences, control forms with suggested procedures. Volume" of the Application Reference Manual provides information on the day-to-day use of the application. The Runbook provides the operator with a detailed and easy-to-use set of instructions showing all the activities necessary to run the programs Up to 13 periods per fiscal year Automatically calculated journal entries based upon algorithms previously defined by the accountant Multiple special-purpose journals with accounts, and headings specified by client source code, related Ability to correct prior periods Extensive chart of account flexibility to provide desired heading and account description information, up to 9 levels of subtotals for combining accounts, spacing and paging control Optional titles and formats for financial statements Support is provided for the optional consolidation of multiple clients. Maintenance is provided for eliminating entries. Controls are included to force fiscal period alignment of clients being consolidated. The same processing capabilities are available for the consolidatp,d client as for others. Optional features and reports are available for any client, such as: - last year comparative data on financial statements - Print-suppression of zero-balance accounts on financial statements - Balance sheet - I ncome and expense statement - Combined department income and expense reporting - Income and expense comparison to budget - Income and expense account balance comparison to a specified account balance, by department - Income and expense account balance comparison to a clientspecified base, such as number of rooms. square feet, or miles driven - Supporting schedules - Statement of Changes in Financial Position with related worksheet and ability to process adjustments - Reporting of financial ratios, defined by client with comparison to industrial averages - Employee payroll register - Printing of presently formatted 941a and W-2 forms - Accountant's transmittal letter - Notes to the financial statements - Annual General ledger CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES IBM may provide marketing assistance "in the installation of IBM licensed programs. However, the responsibility for providing accurate ordering information. personnel selection and training, installation, and continued day to day operation lies solely with the customer. Installation of System/32 licensed programs is a customer responsibility. SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT' HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS This IBM System/32 program will execute on all models of the IBM System/32. The programs are compiled assuming a 16K minimum system. Because of volume and time constraints, there may be a requirement for providing .offline keying on an IBM 3740 Data Entry System. If an IBM 3742 is to be used. it must have the 128-character record features (128-character - #5455. and feature group A - #4004). For presentation purposes on the reports. left and right parentheses have been included to indicate a dollar amount opposite an account's normal balance: The 64-character set feature is required for the System/32to print the parEmtheses. ------- - - - ----'='::...::§':f~ ISG Do not reproduce without written permission PROGRAM PRODUCTS System/32 CAFRS (cont'd) Many functions have been included to protect the integrity of the master files, programs, procedures, and libraries. Because of this, no other user-written program may co-reside with this application unless stringent coding requirements for these programs are met to insure compatibility with the Client Accounting and Financial Reporting System. The Application Logic Manual discusses in detail the coding conventions used for the development of CAFRS. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS These programs are written in IBM System/32 RPG II Programming language and execute under control of the IBM System/32 System Control Program (5725-SC1). IBM System/32 Utilities licensed program (5725-UT1), which includes Sort, Data File Utility, and Source Entry Utility, is required for execution of the programs. The IBM System/32 RPG II Compiler (5725-RG1) is required if modifications to the source code are necessary. DOCUMENTATION (available from Mechanicsburg) ... Design Objectives (GH30-0306) ... Education Flyer (G580-0108) ... Seminar Slide Set RPQs ACCEPTED: No TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index PP 5725-C21.2 Mar 83 Major Revision ------- -------= - - :§'f§: ISG PP 5725-04B.1 Do not reproduce without written permission Mar83 Major Revision PROGRAM PRODUCTS SYSTEM/32 LUMBER DEALERS MANAGEMENT ACCOUNTING SYSTEM BILLING ... 5725-D4F ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE ... 5725-D4B INVENTORY CONTROL ... 5725-040 SALES ANALYSIS ... 5725-049 PURPOSE These modular applications are available for either a 16K or 24K System/32. The application function and data base are exactly the same. Performance improvements in the larger memory size versions for each system come from the reduction of overlays, incorporation of larger blocking factors, and use of dual I/O areas. When all four applications are installed they constitute an interrelated application set with an integrated data base. They can help users manage their two largest business assets, accounts receivable and inventory, and give them profit performance data on their products, customers, and salesmen. They can also help the user increase operational efficiency and customer service. - Alternate cost on hand - Year-to-date sales Basic Unit Cost - Standard cost method Alternate Cost - average cost Multiple Warehouses SALES ANALYSIS (5725-049) Sales and profitability figures by salesman, customer, item, and item class. Availability of the information in the following reports is dependent upon the applications selected and their installation sequence. Daily sales recap by salesman (Data from Billing or Accounts Receivable) Monthly salesman sales analysis (Data from Billing or Accounts Receivable) The Payroll, Accounts Payable, and General Ledger licensed programs of the Distribution Financial Accounting System (DFAS) can co-reside with the Lumber Dealers Management Accounting System. Monthly customer within salesman sales analysis (Data from Billing or Accounts Receivable) DESCRIPTION Monthly customer sales analysis (Data from Billing or Accounts Receivable) BILLING (5725-04F) A post-billing system with data entry from the System/32 keyboard and/or diskettes keyed on a 3740 Data Entry System. Editing, invoice printing, invoice register, and sales summary. Features include: Ship-to address file Variable price selection methods - Operator entry of price - Contract price file - Customer code selects either the list price, or, one of six prices, discounts from list price, or markups from cost Price convorsion, with computations for square foot, lineal foot, and board foot items Estimate preparation Price list printing - six prices in addition to list price State sales tax and one local sales tax Customer code selects 1 of 6 payment terms ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE (5725-04B) A combined balance forward and open item method, with data editing, monthly statements, and delinquency notices. Features include: Balance forward or open item selectable by account lien expiration date checking Late charge capability for both open item and balance forward accounts Credit limit checked during order edit if Billing is installed Monthly item and item within item class sales analysis (Data from Billing or Inventory) Monthly item class within customer sales analysis (Data from Billing) The ability to report sales information for groups of items which do not have inventory records on file If Sales Analysis is the first or only Lumber Dealers application installed, the customer must provide data entry and edit programs. System Functions Integrated data base which simplifies filn maintenance and provides for more efficient disk utilization User-maintained constants file is used in most programs which allows operator to modify data subject to change, such as late charges rate, tax rates, terms, or aging dates, without the need to change and recompile programs Specific file load and maintenance programs are included for each master file Easy-to-use printed Runbook for each application Contains additional space in item and customer master records for customer use OCL procedures, sort specifications, and processing programs are cataloged into logical work units which optimize system utilization Automatic monitoring of execution sequence prevents execution of a program until preceding required programs have been completely and successfully executed. Aged trial balance monthly or on-demand Dynamic backup and recovery system provides for periodic backup of master files and edited transactions and keeps track of what procedures need to be rerun from the last backup point to recreate up-to-date master files. Statement by job for contractors or by branch for multi-location wholesalers Reprint options are possible because file updating is separated from report printing functions. Variable statement format - two options INVENTORY CONTROL (5725-040) A system which allows management to obtain the information needed for purchasing and profitability analysiS, including reports to assist in taking inventory. Features include: Stock Status Review - on demand, selectable for - All items, item within limits, active items only Sequence by vendor (optiona!), item class, or item Exceptions only: Bolow minimum or cost deviation Current stock position: On hand, on order, and available Sales and cost information: This month and year-to-date Stock Status Report - monthly - Current stock position - Activity during the month - Year-to-date drop shipped quantities Inventory Analysis Report - on demand in sequence by - Item number Date of last use or sale Months supply on hand Extended cost on hand Vendor number Item class Vendor/item class Selective printing allows the operator to control the printing mode for reports. Inquiry programs Offline 3741 data entry diskette formats File Size and Application Function Tailoring Capability Programs and procedures for file allocation are included. The customer can allocate file space during installation and change file space allocations as business volumes change. Also, customers may control the operation of some application functions by file maintenance and by operator-controlled run-time options. CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES IBM may provide marketing assistance .in the installation of IBM licensed programs. However, the responsibility for providing accurate ordering information, personnel selection and training, installation, and continued day-to-day operation lies solely ~ith tJm...cust.omer. Installation of System/32 programs is a cust~mer "espo.~sibility. SPECIFIED OPERATING ENViRONMEiT HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS· '~b I ". The 16K options of these lAPs will execute~n all mo~6ls :of the IBM: System/32. The 24K option ~ill':q~ecl!te o~ all modet~ o{ the IBM ------- ----:: - -~~§: ISG Do not reproduce without written permission PROGRAM PRODUCTS System/32 Lumber Dealers Management Accounting System (cont'd) System/32 except the 16K model. There may be a requirement for providing offline keying on an IBM 3740 Data Entry System. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS The LOMAS programs are written in IBM System/32 RPG 1\ programming language. The 16K and 24K IBM System/32 options are executed under control of the IBM System/32 System Control Program (5725-SC1 Version 5 and above). IBM System/32 Utilities licensed program (5725-UT1), which includes Sort, Data File Utility. and Source Entry Utility, is required for execution of the system. The RPG 1\ Compiler (5725-RG1) is required if modifications are anticipated. Instructional Materials Operator Introduction and Exercises These materials. consisting of a Student Guide. audio cassettes, and System/32 diskettes. will help the operator learn and. practice operations without using the customer data files. One copy will be provided at no charge to the customer. One copy of the following material is supplied via SLSS when program number and initial library are specified. Additional copies may be obtained by ordering them individually from Mechanicsburg. Audio Cassettes (2) (SV30-0002) ... System/32 Diskettes (3) (SV300003) ... Student Guide (SR30-0171) ... Advisor Guide (SR30-0169) ... Runbook (SR30-0170) ... Binder (SV30-OO24). DOCUMENTATION (available from Mechanicsburg) Executive Guide (G580-0121) ... General Information Manual (GH30-0166) ... lAP Specifications (GH30-0167) ... Application Reference Manual (SH30-0168). TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index PP 5726-048.2 Mar 83 Major Revision ------- -------.::.::: ISG PP 5725-D6A.1 Do not reproduce without written permission :§~5: Mar83 Major Revision PROGRAM PRODUCTS SYSTEM/32 FOOD DISTRIBUTORS MANAGEMENT ACCOUNTING SYSTEM BILLING ... 5725-06A ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE ... 5725-066 INVENTORY CONTROL .. , 5725-068 SALES ANALYSIS .. , 5725-06C Aging into four aging periods PURPOSE INVENTORY CONTROL (5725-068) These modular applications are available for either a 16K or 24K System/32. The application function and data base are exactly the same. Performance improvements in the larger memory size versions for each system come from the reduction of overlays, incorporation of larger blocking factors, and use of dual I/O area. Inventory control involves the recording of items received, sold, and on hand, the updating of item costs and the recording of activity dates. When all four applications are installed, they constitute an interrelated application set with an integrated data base. They can help users manage their two largest business assets, accounts receivable and inventory, and give them profit performance data on their products, customers, and salesmen. They can also help the user increase operational efficiency and customer service. The open order file, slot sequenced picking lists and automated pricing and discounting methods can help improve order processing speed and accuracy. Inventory Control provides information to the buyer that will help optimize inventory investment through identification of the obsolete, slow moving, and unprofitable items; and help increase inventory turns and service levels. Automatic credit limit checking, variable credit terms, late charges on open item and balance forward accounts, delinquency notices, and aged receivables reports provide tools for reducing bad debt losses and increasing cash flow. Daily, monthly, and on-demand sales reports help monitor the attainment of the distributor's sales objectives. The Payroll, Accounts Payable, and General Ledger licensed programs of the Distribution Financial Accounting System (DFAS) can co-reside with Food Distributors Management Accounting System. If Billing is used in the prebilling mode, a compatible inventory control system must be installed before or with Billing. DESCRIPTION BILLING (5725-D6A) A prebilling system (when used with a compatible inventory control system) with postbilling capability, with data entry from the System/32 keyboard and/or from diskettes keyed on a 3740 Data Entry System, with editing, invoicing, invoice register, and a salesman's recap. Features include: Open orders file with listing by customer and/or item that allows either case labels or picking list in warehouse (slot) sequence Ship-to address file Variable pricing methods, including: - Contract pricing Customer class pricing (six classes) Cost plus pricing Catchweight pricing Broken case pricing and surcharge Special charges and allowances Case label charges Cash and trade discounts Inventory Control can provide accurate, periodic reviews of the status of each item, while identifying any exception conditions, to assist management in deciding what to buy, how much to buy and how often to buy. Inventory Control provides information that helps: Maintain records of all items physically in stock as well as on order, providing control and auditing for this major investment Arrange for timely, economical ordering of stock Minimize investment required to meet a specific service level, by highlighting overstocked or slow-moving items. The major features of Inventory Control include: Two cost figures - last cost and burdened cost Maintenance of broken case quantities Warehouse location (slot) Physical inventory aids An array of reports to assist in: - Buyer ordering Inventory Management Transaction recording and control Inventory Accounting SALES ANALYSIS (5725-06C) Sales Analysis offers sales and profitability figures by salesman, customer, item, and item class. Availability of the information in the reports is dependent upon the applications selected and their installation sequence. Major Sales Analysis Reports include: Daily sales recap by salesman (data from Billing or Accounts Receivable). Monthly salesman sales analysis - current and year-to-date (Data from Billing or Accounts Receivable). Monthly customer sales analysis - current and year-to-date (Data from Billing or Accounts Receivable). Monthly salesman/customer sales analysis current year-to-date (Data from Billing or Accounts Receivable). and Monthly item and item within item class sales analysis - current and year-to-date (Data from Billing or Inventory). Monthly item class, within customer, within salesman sales analysis - current and year-to-date (data from Billing). Sales and tobacco tax If Sales Analysis is the first or only application installed, the customer must provide data entry and edit programs. Credit limit checking Functions Automatic invoice numbering Special deals Automatic substitution Suggested retail price on invoice and case labels ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE (5725-066) Accounts Receivable provides for the recording, controlling, and reporting of money owed for merchandise sold or services rendered. Recognizing that a major portion of a wholesale food distributor's assets may be tied up in accounts receivable, the procedures are designed to provide timely information that helps your customer: • Monthly or weekly statements and delinquency notices Aged trial balance monthly or on demand - Summary or detail Maximize profit and return on investment through tight control over all accounts due Minimize losses from bad debts through appropriate attention to slow-paying accounts Maintain customer goodwill through prompt, accurate record keeping The major features of Accounts Receivable include: Balance forward or open item selectable by account Late charges for both open item and balance forward accounts on monthly statements Credit limit checked during order edit if Billing installed Integrated data base which simplifies file maintenance and provides for more efficient disk utilization. User-maintained constants file is used in most programs which allows operator to modify data subject to change, such as I~te charge rate, tax rates, terms, or aging datos, without the need to change and recompile programs. Specific file load and maintenance programs are included for 'each master f i l e . ' Easy-to-use printed Runbook for each application. Contains additional space in item and customer master records for customer use. I OCL procedures, sort specifications, and processing programs are cataloged into logical work units which optimize system utilization. Automatic monitoring of execution sequence prevents execution of a program until preceding required programs have been completely and successfully executed. Dynamic backup and recovery system provides for periodic backup of master files and edited transactions and keeps track of what procedures need to be rerun· from the last backup point to re-create up-to-date. master files. Reprint options are possible because file updating is separated from report printing functions. ------- - - - ----=- -~~§: ISG Do not reproduce without written permission PROGRAM PRODUCTS System/32 Food Distributors Management Accounting System (cont'd) Selective printing allows the operator to control the printing mode for reports. Inquiry programs, with data retrieval options selectable at program run time, provide current information from the customer and item master files. Offline 3741 data entry diskette formats. File Size and Application Function Tailoring Capability: Programs and procedures for file allocation are included. Customers can allocate file space during installation and change file space allocations as business volumes change. They may control the operation of some application functions by file maintenance and by operator controlled run-time options. CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES IBM may provide marketing assistance in the installation of IBM licensed programs. However, the responsibility for providing accurate ordering information, personnel selection and training, installation, and continued day-to-day operation lies solely with the customer. Installation of System/32 licensed programs is a customer responsibility. SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS The 16K option of these lAPs will execute on all models of the IBM System/32. The 24K option will execute on all models of the IBM System/32 except the 16K mdl. There may be a requirement for providing offline keying on an IBM 3740 Data Entry System. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS The FDMAS lAPs are written in IBM System/32 RPG II programming language. The 16K and 24K IBM System/32 options are system-executed under control of the IBM System/32 Control Program (5725-SC1 Version 5 and above). IBM System/32 Utilities licensed program (5725-UT1), which includes Sort, Data File Utility, and Source Entry Utility, is required for execution of the system. The RPG II Compiler (5725-RG1) is required if modifications are anticipated. Instructional Materials Operator Introduction and Exercises These materials, consisting of a Student Guide, audio cassettes, and System/32 diskettes, will help the operator learn and practice operations without using the customer data files. One copy will be provided at no charge to the customer. One copy of the following material is supplied via SLSS when program number and initial library are specified. Additional copies may be obtained by ordering them individually from Mechanicsburg. Audio Cassettes (2) (SV30-0002) ... System/32 Diskettes (3) (SV300003) ... Student Guide (SR30-0171) ... Advisor Guide (SR30-0169) ... Runbook (SR30-0170) ... Binder (SV30-0024) DOCUMENTATION (available from Mechanicsburg) Executive Guide (G580-0120) ... General Information Manual (GH30-0156) ... lAP Specifications (GH30-0157) ... Application Reference Manual (SH30-0158). RPQs ACCEPTED: No TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index PP 5725-D6A.2 Mar83 Major Revision ----- - --- ----.:..::..: :§':f.E: ISG PP 5725-041.1 Do not reproduce without written permission ---. Mara3 Major Revision PROGRAM PRODUCTS SYSTEM/32 DISTRIBUTORS MANAGEMENT ACCOUNTING SYSTEM (DMAS) BILLING •.. 5725-041 ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE ... 5725-043 INVENTORY CONTROL ... 5725-045 SALES ANALYSIS ... 5725-047 PURPOSE These modular applications are available for either a 16K or 24K System/32. The application function and data base are exactly the same. Performance improvements in the larger memory size versions for each system come from the reduction of overlays, incorporation of larger blocking factors, and use of dual I/O areas. When all four applications are installed they constitute an interrelated application set with an integrated data base. They can help users manage their two largest business assets, accounts receivable and inventory, and give them profit performance data on their products, customers, and salesmen. They can also help the user increase operational efficiency and customer service. The open order file, warehouse sequenced picking lists and automated pricing and discounting methods can help improve order processing speed and accuracy. The inventory control system provides information to the buyer that will help optimize inventory investment through identification of the obsolete, slow moving, and unprofitable items; and help increase inventory turns and service levels. Automatic credit limit checking, variable credit terms, late charges on open item and balance forward accounts, delinquency notices, and aged receivables reports provide tools for reducing bad debt losses and increasing cash flow. Daily, monthly, and on-demand sales reports help monitor the attainment of the distributor's sales objectives. The Payroll, Accounts Payable, and General Ledger licensed programs of the Distribution Financial Accounting System (DFAS) can co-reside with the DMAS licensed programs. DESCRIPTION BILLING (5725-041) A postbilling system with data entry from the System/32 keyboard and/or from diskettes keyed on a 3740 Data Entry System, with editing, invoicing, invoice register, and salesman's recap. Features include: Open orders file allows printing of either order acknowledgements or packing lists Ship-to address file Variable price selection methods Variable item discount or markup flexibility Variable payment terms and cash discounts Broken case pricing with surcharge Pricing unit conversion - when inventory unit differs from selling unit Container charges automatically applied Price list Daily backorder slips Federal Excise tax calculated Inventory Analysis Report - on demand Basic Unit Cost - average cost method Alternate Cost - last cost method MUltiple Warehouses SALES ANALYSIS (5725·047) Sales profitability figures by salesman, customer, item, and item class. Availability of the information in the following reports is dependent upon the applications selected and their installation sequence. Daily sales recap by salesman (data from Billing or Accounts Receivable) Monthly salesman sales analysis - current and year-to-date (data from Billing or Accounts Receivable) Monthly customer sa.les analysis - current and year-to-date (data from Billing or t'.ccounts Receivable) Monthly salesman/customer sales analysis - current year-to-date (data from Billing or Accounts Receivable) and Monthly salesman/customer/item class sales analysis - current and year-to-date (data from Billing) Monthly item and item within item class sales analysis - current and year-to-date (data from Billing or Inventory) If Sales Analysis is the first or only DMAS application installed, the customer must provide Data Entry and Edit Programs. System functions Integrated data base which simplifies file maintenance and provides for more efficient disk utilization. User-maintained constants file is used in most programs which allows operator to modify data subject to change, such as late charge rate, tax rates, terms, or aging dates, without the need to change and recompile programs. Specific file load and maintenance programs are included for each master file. Easy-to-use printed RUN BOOK for each application Contains additional space in item and customer master records for customer use. OCl procedures, sort specifications, and processing programs are cataloged into logical work units which optimize system utilization. Automatic monitoring of execution sequence prevents execution of a program until preceding required programs have been completely and successfully executed. Offline 3741 data entry diskette formats. Dynamic backup and recovery system provides for periodic backup of master files and edited transactions and keeps track of what procedures need to be rerun from the last backup point to re-create up-to-date master files. Reprint options are possible because file updating is separated from report printing functions. State sales tax (standard) plus two local sales taxes Selective printing allows the operator to control the printing mode for reports. Monthly tax totals report Inquiry programs provide current information from the customer and item master files. ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE (5725-043) A combined balance forward and open item method, with data editing, monthly statements, and delinquency notices. Features inClude:. Balance forward or open item selectable by account Late charges for both open item and balance forward accounts Future dating File Size and Application Function Tailoring Capability: All necessary programs and procedures for file allocation are included with the DMAS programs. The customer can allocate file space during installation and change file space a!locations as business volumes change. Also, the customer may control the operation of some application functions by file maintenance and by operator-controlled run-time options. CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES Credit limit checked during order edit if Billing is installed Monthly statements and delinquency notices Aged trial balance monthly or on demand - summary or detail Statements by .iob or branch location Aging of customer invoices with three past due periods INVENTORY CONTROL (5725-045) A system which allows management to obtain the information needed for purchasing and profitability analysis, including a perpetual inventory system and a physical inventory system. Features include: Stock Status Review - on demand Stock Status Report - monthly IBM may provide marketing assistance in the installation of IBM licensed programs. However, the responsibility for providing accurate ordering Information, personnel selection. and training, installation, and continued day-to-day operation lies solely. with the customer. Installation of System/32 licensed programs is a customer responsibility. SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS The 16K option will execute on all models of the IBM System/32. The 24K option will execute on all models of the IBM Syst8!1l/32 except the 16K model. There may be a requirement for providing 'offline keying on an IBM 3740 Data Entry System. . SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS ------- ----:: - -~~§: ISG Do not reproduce without written permission PROGRAM PRODUCTS System/32 OMAS (cont'd) The DMAS licensed programs are written in IBM System/32 RPG II programming language. The 16K and 24K System/32 options are executed under control of the IBM System/32 System Control Program (5725-SC1 Version 5 and above). IBM System/32 Utilities licensed program (5725-UT1), which includes Sort, Data File Utility, and Source Entry Utility, is required for execution of the system. The RPG II Compiler (5725-RG1) is required if modifications to the lAPs are anticipated. Instructional Materials Operator Introduction and Exercises These materials, consisting of a Student Guide, audio cassettes, and System/32 diskettes, will help the operator learn and practice operations without using the customer data files. One copy will be provided at no charge to the customer. One copy of the following material is supplied via SLSS when program number and initial library are specified. Additional copies may be obtained by ordering them individually from Mechanicsburg. Audio Cassettes (2) (SV30-0002) ... System/32 Diskettes (3) (SV300003) ... Student Guide (SR30-0171) ... Advisor Guide (SR30-0169) ... Runbook (SR30-0170) ... Binder (SV30-0024) A prerequisite to these exercises is the System/32 Operator Training Self-study Course (SR30-0004). DOCUMENTATION (available from Mechanicsburg) Executive Guide (G580-0112) '" General Information Manual (GH30-0093) ... Specifications (GH30-0095) ... Application Reference Manual (SH30-0141 ) RPQs ACCEPTED: No TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index PP 5725-041.2 Mar83 Major Revision ------- -------- PP 5725-061.1 Do not reproduce without written permission ..:. =:: ~'fE: ISG Mar 83 Major Revision PROGRAM PRODUCTS SYSTEM/32 DISTRIBUTION FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING SYSTEM (DFAS) GENERAL LEDGER •.. 5725-061 ACCOUNTS PAYABLE •.. 5725·062 PAYROLL ... 5725-063 PURPOSE These three applications provide distributors with a powerful aid in managing their business. HIGHLIGHTS Independent or Interrelated application approach: - Modular design 'facilitates sequential application installation - Single data entry results in multiple application updates - Modular design allows users to choose the applications that address their problem areas Wide variety of reports and report options included: - Management reporting is a byproduct of normal data entry - The 941-As and W-2s are saved on diskette and may be printed later - Detail or summary listings within a range of keys is supported in many reports Uses recognized accounting techniques and terminology to provide a solid accounting system: - Clear audit trails and control techniques are provided - Sample user-oriented forms for data preparation, file creation, audit and control are provided - Security code deters unauthorized execution of key programs in each application - A journal reference numbering system supplies an audit trail for any application that generates transactions into the General ledger - Tailoring the application on site at installation time. - Allows users to change the selection of provided functions as their business changes. - All provided functions are included in the programs but only required functions are executed. - File sizes may be expanded or contracted as needed by rerunning the System Tailoring Procedure. An Application Reference Manual Volume 1 provides a step-by-step installation activity plan including sample numbering systems, sample input and maintenance data forms, file loading sequences, and control forms with suggested procedures. Volume 2 of the Application Reference Manual provides information on the day-to-day use of the application. The Runbook provides the operator with a detailed and easy-to- use set of instructions showing all the activities necessary to run the programs on a System/32. The Operator Reference Summary Card is provided for the operator as a reminder of the major operational functions of each procedure. It is intended to be used once the operator is thoroughly trained in the particular application. Instructional material, with exercises, is provided for operator training in the use of the Runbook. The course is not application-dependent. Therefore, only one copy of the course is needed per customer no matter how many DFAS applications are installed. An Application Logic Manual is provided, as optional licensed material, for use by the self-sufficient customer and for systems engineering continuing support. It describes the architecture of programs, procedures, data base cross-references, data dictionary, and detailed descriptions of each program. The System/32 product may co-reside, but not interact, with the System/32 Distribution lAPs written up elsewhere in this section. Applications Description: The three applications are ready-to-execute applications. Each includes samples of all input forms and control forms. Also included are the Application Reference Manuals, a Runbook, Source Code, Object Code, execution procedures, and the Application Logic Manual, if it is ordered as optional basic material. Can be installed without customer programming capability: These are some general features which all three applications have: - System tailoring procedure facilitates account growth by allowing on-site changes to file sizes and determination of functions used - File maintenance and audit procedures provided - Easy-to-use runbook - Operator self-study course is available - Step-by-step installation activity plan provided by the Application Reference Manuals - User's information supplied to the supervisor by the Application Reference Manuals SPECIAL SALES INFORMATION Each application offers opportunities for growing installed System/32s. Each is primarily intended for the distributor with 20-250 employees. Key accounting and management reports are provided to allow selling and installing without a requirement for Systems Engineering Services or customer programming capabilities. Each application is a customer requirements-oriented system, and caution should be used in changing the system design, function, or data base layout. Exercise care in proposing these applications to large distributors. Make an extensive study of the large distributor's needs to determine the applicability, throughput, and the extent of any needed modification to the programs, procedures, or file sizes. Designed to fit industry requirements Security codes to deter unauthorized use of master files In-house inclusion/exclusion of functions to be executed OCl procedures, Sort specifications, and processing programs are packaged into logical work units which simplify system operation Monitoring of execution soquence prevents execution of a program until preceding required programs have been completely and successfully executed Compatible online/offline file maintenance and transaction data entry via the System/32 keyboard or diskettes created on the 3740 Data Entry System Dynamic Backup and Recovery System forces periodic backup of master files and edited transactions, and keeps track of what procedures need to be rerun from the last backup point to recreate up-to-date master files Reprint options are possible because file updating is separated from report writing functions Some report printing can be deferred to a more convenient time Selective printing options are available for many report functions DESCRIPTION GENERAL LEDGER (5725-061) These three applications are independent yet interrelated, ready-toexecute applications for the small distributor: This application combines all the transactions affecting the financial status of the company during the period. They may be entered directly as a General Journal Entry or may have been previously entered through; interface with Accounts Payable or Payroll. Support is provided for either a 13-period or 12-month fiscal year. At period-end closing time; audit listings and the Financial Statement Worksheet are provided to help verify that the user is still in balance before proceeding into the actual closing. The reports will also aid in generation of any necessary closing entries. ' General ledger Accounts Payable Payroll The system combines two data entry approaches - Operator-Oriented and Batch-Oriented. Support is provided for transaction entry through the System/32 keyboard or through a diskette keyed offline on a 3740 Data Entry System. The three easy-to-operate applications can be installed in separate stages at different times and still be an interrelated system. Each application has certain requirements for records within a cross-application Constants File which contains questionnaire responses. These records allow the application to select certain fields for editing, file sizes, and functions to suit each customer's needs. The questionnaire responses are keyed during initial installation and may be changed as needed. The System Tailoring Procedure allows these responses to be entered. The System Tailoring Procedure utilizes the answers to a series of questions regarding a distributor's requirements. It provides the following: An Income Statement and' Balance Sheet are standard report outputs. The user can design the format of these reports with an easy-to-use format description procedure. The financial reports can illustrate current financial data as compared to historical information, also te;> budget information on the Income Statement. The capability is provided to format Income Statements by subdivisions of a company,· such as department. Several companies' financial information may b~ combined into one Balance Sheet and Income Statement. A Stateme~ of Changes in Financial Position Worksheet is provided. i~j I': Users may define their own Chart of Accounts or use a suggest account structure provided with the application. The fiscal year st ~ period or month is user-defined. Multiple company support for up • ' ten companies is included. Any transactions passed from Payroll ar!ii applied to, company number one only. ------- ----:: - - ::E'f~ ISG PP 5725-061.2 Do not reproduce without written permission Mar 83 Major Revision PROGRAM PRODUCTS System/23 OFAS (cant'd) ACCOUNTS PAYABLE (5725-062) The Accounts Payable application provides an Open Payables and Cash Disbursements function on either an accrual or cash basis. Invoices and credit memos entered may be multi-lined and distributed by General Ledger account number. Entries may be for standard or one-time vendors and may be open or pre-paid. Credit memos may be entered manually or initiated automatically by referencing a prior entered invoice. Invoice payments may be aSSigned to a vendor other than the original vendor. Invoices may be controlled through the application based upon a voucher number entered with the invoice. A Purchase Journal provides the audit trail for cost transactions entering into the General Ledger system and into the Open Payables File. An Open Payables Report is provided in due date or vendor sequence. This turnaround document provides a way to select for payment by date, vendor, or invoice, including partial payments, for Cash Disbursements. Invoices may be entered or placed in hold status to prevent inadvertent payment. A Cash Requirements Report is used to assist in insuring sufficient funds are available and proper invoice selection was made before the checkwriting procedure begins. The Cash Disbursements Journal provides an audit trail for its transactions entering the General Ledger application and acts as the Check Register. Checkwriting and reconciliation are also provided. A Vendor Analysis Report indicates key business volumes and discounts lost and taken by previous year and current year. An additional analysis report by business volume per vendor is also provided. Multiple company support for up to 10 companies is provided. PAYROLL (5725-063) This hourly/salary/executive payroll provides for regular, overtime, premium, vacation, and sick pay. It may be run weekly, biweekly, semimonthly, monthly. Hours may be entered daily or by pay period. Exception hours provide time and one-half, double-time, double-time and one-half, and triple time capabilities. Rates may be selected from the Employee Master Record or keyed in as an override. Shift differential capabilities are provided for second and third shift. The differential may be defined as a percentage of the rate or cents to be added to the rate. these original shipments will have to update their lAPs to the larger record size before they will co-reside with DFAs. HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS Each of these IBM system/32 Industry Application Programs will execute on all models of the IBM system/32. The programs are compiled assuming a 16K system. Because of volumes and time constraints, there may be a requirement for providing offline keying on an IBM 3740 Data Entry System. If an IBM 3742 is to be used, it must have the 128-character record features (128-character - #5455 and feature group A - #4004). SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS The application programs for the IBM system/32 are written in IBM system/32 RPG II Programming language and execute under control of the IBM system/32 System Control Programming (5725-SC1 Version 3). The IBM system/32 Utilities licensed program (5725-UT1), which includes Sort, Data File Utility, and Source Entry Utility, is required for execution of the programs. The IBM system/32 RPG II Compiler (5725-RG1) is required if modifications to the source code are necessary. Instructional Materials DFAS Operator Instructions (sBOF-3584). One copy is supplied via sLss when program number and initial library are specified. Additional copies can be obtained by specifying sBOF-3584 which includes the following: Binder (sR30-0120) .•. Study Guide (sR30-0117) '" Sample Run Book (sR30-0ll8) ... Advisor Guide (sR30-0ll9) ... Cassette (sV30-0073) .. , Diskette (SV30-0074) ... Plastic Insert (sR30-0l66) RPQs ACCEPTED: No TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index Vacation/Holiday pay may be part of a regular paycheck or on a separate check. A bonus payment is paid on a separate check with a flat percentage of income tax deducted. Sick pay may be fully non-taxable or only liable for income tax. Wages subject to Federal Unemployment Insurance (FUn and State Unemployment Insurance (SUI.) are determined. The ability to handle taxable or non-taxable adjustments, pay advances, and employer-paid union benefits (taxable and non-taxable) is also provided. Once the gross earnings is calculated, deductions will be taken to reach net pay. In addition to calculating present Federal and FICA taxes, a standard tax algorithm is provided to calculate most present state taxes based upon customer-provided data. Local taxes may also fit the standard tax algorithm provided. The state disability insurance deductions also use a standard algorithm based upon customer-provided data. Miscellaneous deductions may be taken by percent, fixed amount, hourly rate, upper limit, or cyclic within a user-specified frequency. Union deductions may be taken by percent, hourly rate, or fixed amount within a user-specified frequency. Handwritten paychecks and paychecks never cashed (reversals) are also supported by the application. Once the payroll register and checks are printed, many analysis reports are produced: Labor Distribution, Miscellaneous Deductions, Union Deductions, YTD/QTD Earnings, Workmen's Compensation Worksheet, and Payroll Journal. The presently formatted W-2 and 941A reports are also provided. The capability is provided to pass transactions to the General Ledger application, if installed. These transactions will be applied towards company one only. Payroll may be on either a cash or accrual basis. "If the cash basis is selected, no transactions are passed to the General Ledger. CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES IBM may' provide marketing assistance in the installation of IBM licensed programs. However, the responsibility for providing accurate ordering information, personnel selection and training, Installation, and continued day-to-day operation lies solely with the customer. Installation of system/32 programs is a customer responsibility. SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT Tl'i~ three applications are intended to be independent yet interrelated. Many functions have been included to protect the integrity of the ~ster files, programs, procedures, and libraries. I f, .~ h application may co-reside, but will not interact, with the tribution lAPs but may also operate as stand-alone applications . .:~~·e Distribution lAP must have a Constants File with a record length of : JM characters. The original shipments of the Food and Paper lAPs for . .J4K machines had 59-character records. The customers that received '~ III." . ~.~'~ " --..------------==::: :§~E: ISG PP 5725-E31.1 Do not reproduce without written permission Mar 83 Major Revision PROGRAM PRODUCTS SYSTEM/ 32 STUDENT RECORDS (5725-E31), STUDENT ACCOUNTING (5725-E32), STUDENT SCHEDULING (5725-E33) PURPOSE Each program. offers opportunities for new name and first systems account sales in small school districts. These applications are primarily intended for small school districts, or large secondary schools. The Student Records lAP, which provides the data base and file maintenance functions, is a prerequisite for either or both of the other packages. These three applications provide the school with a powerful aid in managing its student record keeping functions. The system design of these packages incorporates many significant features: • G~neral ~ Sv.st.em 1ailorjng.t.9 ~I).e ~i(:hQ9h(.Yrlique" r~q.l!i~enienjs for number of periods in a school day, number of terms (or semesters) in a year, state reporting cycles, etc. All input specifications are described in terms familiar to school administrators and require no detailed knowledge of data processing techniques. Data files are shared among applications. Student Records - provides common data base and file maintenance functions for the other applications. Basic record keeping and reporting functions essential for secondary schools are also included. Student Accounting - consists of an Attendance Accounting Application and a Mark Reporting Application. Student Scheduling - supports both machine scheduling and "arena" scheduling of students to classes. Provides many reports to assist the principal and counselor in the scheduling process. HIGHLIGHTS Interrelated applications approach: - Modular design allows users to choose applications that address their problem areas - Modular design facilitates sequential application installation - Single data entry results in mUltiple application updates Wide variety of reports and report options included: - Management reporting is a byproduct of normal data entry - Optional sequences and selection within a range is supported in many reports Uses recognized accounting techniques and terminology to provide a solid student accounting system: as needed. The System Tailoring Procedure allows these responses to be entered and maintained. The System Tailoring Procedure utilizes the answers to a series of questions regarding a school's requirements. It provides the following: Tailoring of the application at installation time. Allows users to change the selection of provided functions as the environment changes. All provided functions are included in the programs but only required functions are executed. Files may be resized as needed by rerunning the System Tailoring Procedure. Application Reference Manual Volume 1 provides a step-by-step installation activity plan including sample input and maintenance data forms and file loading sequences. Application Reference Manual Volume 1 is delivered with the Student Records application. It contains information pertinent to all three applications. Each Volume 2 of the Application Reference Manual provides information on the day-to-day use of the application. The Runbook provides the operator with a detailed and easy-to-use set of instructions showing all the activities necessary to run the programs on a System/32. The Procedure Reference Summary is provided for the operator as a reminder of the major operational functions of each procedure. It is intended to be used as a quick reference once the operator is thoroughly trained in the particular application. Instructional material with exercises is provided for System/32 operator training in the use of the Runbook. The course is not application dependent. Therefore, only one copy of the course is needed per . customer no matter which of the student applications is installed. An Application Logic Manual is provided, as optional licensed material, for use by the self-sufficient customer and for systems engineering continuing support. It describes the architecture of programs, procedures, data base cross-references, data dictionary, and detailed descriptions of each program. Applications Description: The three applications are ready-toexecute. Each includes source code, object code, execution procedures, and the Application Logic Manual, if it is ordered as optional basic material. These are some general features which all three applications have: Designed to fit industry requirements - Clear audit trails and control techniques are provided - Sample. user-oriented forms for data preparation, file creation, audit and control are provided - Security codes deter unauthorized execution of key programs in each application Security codes to deter unauthorized use of master files Can be installed without customer programming capability: Monitoring of execution sequence prevents execution of a program until preceding required programs have been completely and successfully executed - Designed to fit industry requirements - System tailoring procedure facilitates account growth by allowing on-site changes to file sizes and determination of functions used - File maintenance and auditability provided - Easy-to-use run book - Operator self-study course - Step-by-step installation activity plan and detailed user information provided by the Application Reference Manual DESCRIPTION These three applications are an interrelated and ready-to-execute set of applications for the small school district or large secondary school: Student Records - Data Base and Maintenance Student Accounting - Attendance Accounting and Mark Reporting Student Scheduling - Assignment of Students to Classes The system combines two data entry approaches - operator-oriented and batch-oriented. Support is provided for transaction entry through the System/32 keyboard or through a diskette keyed offline on a 3740 Data Entry System. Student Records is a prerequisite to the other applications which can be installed at different times. Each application has certain requirements records within a crossapplication Constants File which contain questionnaire responses. These records allow the application to select certain fields for editing, file sizes, and functions to suit each customer's needs. The questionnaire responses are keyed during initial installation and may be changed In-house inclusion/exclusion of functions to be executed OCl procedures, Sort specifications, and processing programs are packaged into logical work units which simplify system operation Compatible online/ offline file maintenance and transaction data entry via the System/32 keyboard or diskettes created on a 3740 Data Entry System Dynamic Backup and Recovery System forces periodic backup of master files and edited transactions and keeps track of what procedures need to be rerun from the last backup point to recreate up-to-date master files Reprint options are possible because file updating is separated . from report writing S~lective' pri"nifriQ" QPt!Qn-s are ayailable f9r many reports. STUDENT RECORDS (5725-E31) The Student Records area represents a systems solution to the problems of recording, retrieving, manipulating, and reporting student data. The student record is the key to the school's student accounting system. It is a vital source of information necessary to the implementation of the other applications. In addition to providing data to and collecting data from the scheduling, mark reporting, and attendance accounting applications, it contains student personal data for counseling. This data includes the student's name, school code, year of graduation, current grade level, sex, birth date, address, and a number of other data elements. It also contains student attendance information, the student's current schedule and mark reporting information, and the school's curriculum for the current school year. From these files, many reports can be provided for the school administration, teacher, counselors and parents. As the Student Records system is designe'd to be an ongoing systerT'!, it I is not necessary to recreate all of the basic files at the beginning of each school year. Programs are provided to accomplish a year-to-year ------- ----:: - - a'=f~ ISG PP 5725-E31.2 Do not reproduce without written permission Mar 83 Major Revision PROGRAM PRODUCTS Student Records, Accounting, Scheduling (cont'd) transition by indicating the promotion of qualified students to the next grade level, and their new school, if that is indicated at promotion time. An important aspect of the student records application is the file maintenance functions. Programs are provided to update information in each of the files in the student records application as well as performing the year-end transition functions (student transfers between schools, promotions of students from one grade level to the next, etc.). student's class assignments. For those students who could not be completely scheduled because of a conflict in their course requests, a Student Conflict report can be printed to assist the school administrator in resolving that student's conflict. ' Once a final scheduling run has been processed, the school may optionally run the study hall scheduler which will assign the student to study halls during any unassigned time in the school day. The integrity of the data in the files is maintained through the use of extensive editing of the data when it is entered into the system and through complete backup .and recover{ procedures which are an integral part of the package. Output reports include: Output reports include: Student listings Course Request Tally Report Potential Conflict Matrix Student Conflict Report Ethnic Distribution Report Student Schedules Student Profiles Room Schedules Instructor Schedules Class Rosters STUDENT ACCOUNTING (5725-E32) The Student Accounting package consists of two applications, Attendance Accounting and Mark Reporting. The Student Records package, which provides the data base and file maintenance functions, is a prerequisite to this package. Attendance Application The maintenance of attendance records is an important aspect of Student Accounting. In many states the amount of state aid for public education is based on average student attendance. Under manual methods, a considerable amount of time is expended by teachers and staff personnel in keeping records and accumulating data for state reports. The Attendance Accounting application simplifies such tasks by collecting original data at the source through the use of attendance data gathering documents, enabling reports to be prepared accurately and rapidly, and reducing clerical transcriptions. Output reports include: Daily Absence Phone list Daily Absence Report Unresolved Absence Report Student Attendance Register Student Category Register School Category Register B. Course Request Verification Name and Address Labels Student Schedules A. Student Request Verification Mark Reporting Application The Mark Reporting application provides a means of recording student progress data for reports to parents and to school personnel. The primo data processed by this application are .the student marks, which may be either numeric marks or alphabetic marks with optional plus or minus signs. In addition, up to two comments may be selected from a list of 99 user-defined comments and associated with each student's graded course. The Mark Reporting application is designed to fit the needs of many schools by providing a selection of reports and processing methods from which to choose. Output reports include: Report Card Labels for Permanent Records GPA listings Mark Analysis . Exception Reports, STUDENT SCHEDULING (5725-E33) The Student Scheduling package (Student Records (6725~E31) is a prerequisite) processes student course requests against a manually prepared master schedule of classes to produce a schedule of classes for each student. To assist the school administrator in preparing this master schedule of classes, the following reports are produced from the student course requests: Student Verification Report, Course Verification Report, Course Request Tally Report, and Potential Conflict Matrix. Once the master schedule of classes has been prepared, student requests are processed by the Main Scheduler programs, or schools may wish to use the arena scheduling option. Whether the class assign~ents are accomplished through machine scheduling or arena scheduling, the results are the same: A data base. reflecting each Programs are provided to pass basic student identifying information from the Student Records package to the Scheduling package and then, once scheduling is completed and the scheduled term is about to begin, the student data records will be updated to reflect the student's current schedule of classes. One of the. primary objectives of the Student Scheduling package is to provide for the variety of scheduling philosophies present in today's secondary school environment. This flexibility is accomplished by offering a number of basic scheduling features and options which include: Scheduling of up to 4 terms, or semesters Up to 24 periods in a school day Up to 20 requests per student Flexibility in course requests - section requests, instructor requests, term requests, free time requests, and alternates Add-on scheduling Study hall scheduling option Arena scheduling option Student scheduling is far more than a clerical chore. The basic educational philosophy of an institution is reflected in the manner in which students are assigned to a class section. For example, many school systems permit varying degrees of student-elected alternates and teacher preferences. This example illustrates the need for flexibility in a student scheduling system to accommodate a wide spectrum of educational policies. The student scheduling package provides the administrator with a large variety of optional system features which can be used to tailor the scheduling system to coincide with the policies of the school. CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES IBM may provide marketing assistance in the installation of IBM licensed programs. However, the responsibility for providing accurate ordering information, personnel selection and training, installation, and continued day-to-day operation lies solely with the customer. Installation of System/32 licensed programs is a customer responsibility. SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS The minimum system System/32 with: . configuration requirements are an IBM 24K bytes of main storage 5.0 M B of disk storage Character or line print capability with 132 print positions and the 48-character set. The lAPs are designed to process data recorded on the IBM System/32 keyboard, or data from a diskette recorded by the IBM 3740 Data Entry System. Because of volumes and time constraints, there may be a requirement for providing offline key entry on an IBM 3740 Data Entry System. If an IBM 3742 is to be used, it must have the 128-character record features (#5455) and Feature Group A (#4004). The three applications are interrelated. Many functions have been included to protect the integrity of the master files, programs, procedures, and libraries. Because of this, no other lAP or user-written programs may co-reside unless stringent coding requirements for these programs are met to insu're compatibility with the Student Administration System. The Application Logic Manual discusses in detail the coding conventions used for the development of the Student Administration System. Because of the printing volumes and timing constraints involved in the Mark Reporting applications, an 80 cps printer is recommended as a practical minimum. ------- ----:: - -~~§: ISG Do not reproduce without written permission PROGRAM PRODUCT5 PP 5725-E31.3 Mar 83 Major Revision Student Records, Accounting, Scheduling (cont'd) SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS The application programs are written in IBM 5ystem/32 RPG II Programming language and execute under control of the IBM 5ystem/32 5ystem Control Programming (5725-5C1) Version 5. The IBM 5ystem/32 Utilities licensed program (5725-UT1), which includes 5ort, Data File Utility, and 50urce Entry Utility, is required for execution of the programs. The IBM 5ystem/32 RPG II Compiler (5725-RG1) is required if modifications to the source code are necessary. DOCUMENTATION (available from Mechanicsburg) Student Records Runbook (5B30-0127) ... Student Records Reference Manual Volume 1 (5B30-0128) ... Student Records Reference Manual Volume 2 (5830-0129) ... Student Accounting Runbook (5830-0131) .. , Student Accounting Reference Manual (5830-0132) ." Student Scheduling Runbook (5830-0134) ... Student Scheduling Reference Manual (5830-0135) ... Student Records Logic Manual (L830-0130) ... Student Accounting Logic Manual (L830-0133) ... Student Scheduling Logic Manual (L830-0136) TERMS and CONDITIONS: 5ee PP Index \ ... ------- ----- Do not reproduce without written permission =--~~~ ISG PROGRAM PRODUCTS SYSTEM/32 FORTRAN IV 5725·F01 PURPOSE System/32 FORTRAN IV processes programs written in the System/32 FORTRAN IV language, producing output suitable for execution with the System/32 System Control Programming (5725-SC1). DESCRIPTION The System/32 FORTRAN IV language contains those features defined in American National Standard Basic FORTRAN, X3.10.1966; language extensions supported by IBM 1130 Basic FORTRAN; and additional features and capabilities previously available only with certain IBM Full FORTRAN compilers. These features include: Logical data, logical expressions, and logical IF are supported. - Logical elements (that is, constants, variables, and arrays) contain true or false values. - Operation symbols are used in logical and relational expressions .NOT. (negative) .AND. (conjunction) .OR. (union) . LT. .LE. .EO. .GT. .NE. .GE. (less than) (less or equal to) (equal) (greater than) (notequal) (greater or equal to) - Logical expressions evaluate elements to obtain true or false values. - Logical assignment statements define a relationship - placing the value of a logical expression in a variable or array element. - The logical IF statement evaluates an expression and executes or skips an associated statement, depending upon whether the value of the expression is true or false, respectively. - Logical variables and arrays can be initialized to true or false using the DATA statements. - Logical elements can be used as arguments of a CALL statement. Integer 2-byte constants are provided to facilitiate IBM 1130 to System/32 FORTRAN IV conversion. Source Entry Utility [Utilities licensed program (5725- UT1 )], although not a part of the FORTRAN lic~nsed program, may be used to enter and maintain FORTRAN source programs. IBM FORTRAN IV language extensions INVOKE, PROGRAM and GLOBAL allow FORTRAN main programs to be loaded successfully into main storage and executed, while permitting these programs to share· a common data area. These language extensions provide function equivalent to 1130 FORTRAN CALL LINK. The Overlay Linkage Editor will automatically create overlays which reduces the amount of .storage required to run System/32 FORTRAN IV programs but may increase the execution time. The DEBUG facility enables the user to locate errors in a FORTRAN source program. By use of four basic statements, the DEBUG facility provides for tracing flow within a program and between programs and for checking the validity of subscripts. List directed input/output permits reading and writing of formatted data without a FORMAT statement. The GENERIC statement enables the user to specify a single name for a FORTRAN built-in or library function having several names. Depending on argument type, the correct function is selected by the compiler with each appearance of the name. The System/32 FORTRAN IV library contains mathematical and service subprograms required during execution to perform arithmetic operations, input and output constant conversions and input! output control. System/32 FORTRAN IV is supplemented by () commercial subroutine package which is equivalent in function to the 1130 Commercial Subroutine Package insofar as is meaningful in terms of System/32 devices and data management. SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS FORTRAN IV compiler and its generated programs will oxecute on any model of IBM System/32. Object programs will support Additional Support (#1005) and Data Recorder Attachment (#3200). Control Storage Increment (#1500) is required on the IBM 5320 for execution of object programs. It is not required for compilation. On IBM 5320 Band C models, FORTRAN graphics are provided by a 64-character EBCDIC print belt or a 48-character FORTRAN print belt. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS A current version of IBM System/32 System Control Programming (5725-SC1) is required t~.execute the FORTRAN IV compiler and its generated programs. TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index PP 5725·F01.1 Mar83 Major Revision ------- -------====";' - ---= ISG Do not reproduce without written permission PP 5725·F11.1 Mar 83 Major Revision PROGRAM PRODUCTS SYSTEM/32 FINANCIAL INSTITUTIONS CUSTOMER ACCOUNTING SYSTEM CUSTOMER INFORMATION FILE ... 5125-F11 DEMAND DEPOSIT ACCOUNTING ... 5125-F12 SAVINGS ACCOUNTING ... 5725-F13 INSTALLMENT LOAN ACCOUNTING ... 5125-F14 PURPOSE The Customer Information File lAP (CIF) includes the data base, the application conversion procedures, and the file maintenance procedures for the system. It is a prerequisite for the Demand Deposit Accounting, Savings Accounting and Installment Loan Accounting lAPs, which may be installed independently of each other. The applications provide broad application support for the small commercial bank. The Customer Information File lAP enables the bank to associate all of a customer's checking, savings, and installment loan accounts with a single record that contains common information about the customer and the customer's relationship to the bank. This enables the bank to make decisions based on a broader knowledge of the status of the customer's accounts. Account and customer information is accessed by account number for daily transaction processing, and by customer name for management reports, inquiries, etc. The Demand Deposit Accounting, Savings Accounting and Installment loan Accounting lAPs support the three most important data processing applications in a commercial bank. Each of these lAPs contains a variety of functional options, enabling the bank to tailor the application to its own requirements. These applications offer an opportunity for new name a'nd first system account sales to small commercial banks. While the applications are primarily intended for commercial banks with deposits of $5 to 25 million, the size of the bank deposits is not· by itself an accurate indicator of proper lAP fit at any given bank. HIGHLIGHTS Can be Installed without Customer Prograinming Capability: - Step-by-step installation activity plan and detailed user guidance is provided in the 'Application Reference Manual - System Tailoring Procedure accommodates account growth by allowing on-site changes to file sizes and functions used. - Application conversion procedures are provided. - Conversion aids are provided to assist in, consolidating the master. data from a customer's account records 'into a single CIF record. - Strict DP controls are enforced during conversion. - File maintenance is provided. - Operator self-study course is provided. Accounting and Control Techniques - Two levels of security codes help deter unauthorized access to programs and data. : - Sample audit trail and control techniques are documented. - Sample user-oriented forms for data preparation, file creation, audit and control are provided. Interrelated Application Design - Data base design reduces file space requirements. - Common procedures add new accounts and provide file maintenance for all installed applications. - Access to all application accounts through the CIF Master Record. At installation time the options provided in the systems are selected through a System Tailoring Procedure which allows the user to: Tailor the application to use only the functions wanted. Change selection of functions to be executed as the environment changes. Resize files as the bank's business expands, or if the bank wishes to revise its original estimates. There is only one Application Reference Manual, Volume 1, provided with the System/32 Financial Institutions Customer Accounting System. It is shipped with CIF and provides instructions for installing and converting all of the Financial Institutions Customer Accounting System lAPs. It contains guidance on installation planning, data gathering, and the use of the installation and conversion procedures. Samples of all required input data and. control forms are included. A separate Volume 2 of the Application Reference Manual is provided for each of the four lAPs. These manuals contain information on the daily operations of the application. Included is information on procedure scheduling, the operating of each procedure and the implementation of sound operational controls. A runbook and a procedure reference summary is provided for each application. The Runbook provides the operator with an easy-to-use set of instructions showing all the activities necessary to run the procedures on a System/32. The Procedure Reference Summary is provided for the operator as a reminder of the functions and use of each procedure. It is intended to be used as a quick reference once the operator is thoroughly trained in the particular application. An Operator Instruction Manual with exercises is provided for operator training in the use of the run book. The course is not oriented specifi-. cally to financial applications. Therefore, only one copy of the course is needed per customer regardless of which of the lAPs are installed. An Application Logic Manual is provided for each application as licensed material. It is mainly useful for the self-sufficient customer and for systems engineering support. The manual describes the architecture of the Financial Institutions Customer Accounting System, and the logic of the programs and procedures. Data base cross references and a data dictionary are also included. The four applications are ready-to-execute. Each includes the sourc~ code, object code, execution procedures and the Application Logic Manual. Some general features common to all four applications are: I Two levels of security codes help deter unauthorized access to programs and data. Customer tailors application processing by including or excluding functions to be executed. OCl procedures, Sort specifications, and processing programs are packaged into logical work units which simplify system operation. Monitoring of execution sequence prevents execution of a program until the required preceding programs have been successfully executed. File maintenance and monetary transactions may be entered via the System/32 keyboard or diskettes created on a 3740 Data Entry System. DESCRIPTION Monetary transactions may be entered via the 1255 Magnetic Character Reader. These four applications are an interrelated and ready-to-execute set of applications for the small commercial bank: A single set of CIF procedures enters and edits application conversion data for all lAPs and creates the master files. Customer Information File - Data Base, File Maintenance, Application Customer-oriented reports. Conversion and Demand Deposit Accounting - Processing of checking accounts with optional functions of Overdraft Banking, Automatic Funds Transfer. and Combined Statements. Savings Accounting The Backup and Recovery design forces periodic backup of master files and transactions. This provides for tracking of what procedures need to be rerun in recovery to re-create the master files. Three generations of backup diskettes can be. maintained, each containing a complete set of master files and transact~ons. Reprint options permit printing multiple copies of reports. CUSTOMER INFORMATION FILE (5125·F11) - Processing of savings accounts, both regular savings accounts and time deposit open accounts. Installment loan Accounting - Processing of installment loan accounts, interest, add-on, and discount loans. A single set of CIF procedures establishes new accounts and performs master file maintenance for all lAPs. including simple The system provides transaction and file maintenance data entry through the System/32 keyboard or through a diskette keyed offline on a 3740 Data Entry System. The bank may optionally elect to use the 1255 Magnetic Character Reader (MICR) to capture transactions for Demand Deposit Accounting, Savings Accounting, and Installment loan Accounting. An installation questionnaire and data capture programs are provided to support the 1255 MICA. The Customer Information File lAP supports three general functions of the System/32 Financial Institutions Customer Accounting System: Application Conversion Master File Maintenance Cross-Application Reports Customer Information File is a prerequisite for Demand Deposit Accounting, Savings Accounting, and Installment Loan Accounting, and is installed in conjunction with the installation and conversion of each of those lAPs. The conversion process creates a CIF Master File, (which contains customer-related data for each of. the bank's customers) and separate Account Master Files for DDA, Savings, and Installment ------- -----------_.-------- ISG Do not reproduce without written permission PROGRAM PRODUCTS PP 5725-F11.2 Mar 83 Major Revision System/32 Financial Institutions Customer Accounting System (cont'd) Loans. The Account Master Files contain account-related data for each account in the three applications. The system maintains linkage from each customer's Customer Information File record to the account master record for each account - checking, savings, and installment loan accounts. In addition a cross-reference file provides an access path from each account master record to all of the customers associated with the account, based on the account number. HIGHLIGHTS Application Conversion: Separate programs are provided to enter and edit the customer and account data and to build the data base during application conversion. A two-phase conversion procedure is established for each application. During the first phase the data that is less subject to change (such as customer name and address, account type, etc.) is entered. The master data from each customer's account records is consolidated into a single Customer Information File record. A unique access key is developed for each customer and all master records are created. At this stage the records can be maintained, but monetary transactions cannot be processed. This phase may take place over several weeks 'or months. During the second phase the remaining data, such as account balances are entered, edited and loaded into the master records created in the first phase. The records are placed in active status and the application is ready for daily processing. Strict batch controls are implemented for both phases of conversion. The controls will not permit either phase to proceed if edit errors exist in any records or if the monetary controls do not balance. File Maintenance: All maintenance of inter-application master files is performed by Customer Information File programs. A single operator procedure is provided to add new customers or new accounts to any converted application. Another procedure is used to change the data in these master files - including status, etc. Monetary data can only be changed through application transaction processing. A separate procedure is provided to change the operator and supervisor security codes. Cross-Application Reports: A basic set of cross-application reports is provided. The advanced customer may wish to extend the use of the Customer Information File data base through additional user-written report programs. (If these programs are to co-reside with the Financial Institutions Customer Accounting System lAPs, they must, however, meet stringent coding requirements to insure complete compatibility.) The following items are provided: A Customer Services Report, summarizing the number of customers using installed applications or combinations of applications. Mailing labels, to assist the bank in selective marketing of its services, may be printed according to customer selection criteria established by the execution of the Customer Services Report. A Customer Profile showing information for an individual customer, and the account status. A customer inquiry, display on the console CRT, and containing a subset of the information printed for a Customer Profile. Inquiry may be by full or partial customer namo, customer key, or an account number. A Spread Report showing the distribution of account~ and the total deposits for up to five user-supplied ranges of DDA and Savings account balances. A Master File List, in customer key sequence, to assist in the maintenance of customer and account data. DEMAND DEPOSIT ACCOUNTING (5725·F12) The Demand Deposit Accounting (DDA) lAP provides daily transaction processing and reporting for checking accounts for a commercial bank. The lAP includes broad support for the standard processing functions and for two. major optional functions - Overdraft Banking and Automatic Funds Transfer (AFT). The Customer Information File (5725-Fll), which provides the data base and file maintenance functions, is a prerequisite for this lAP. Standard DDA Functions: Transactions can be entered from the operator console, a diskette creatod on a 3740 Data Entry System, or a 1255 Magnetic Character Reader. Transactions can be posted against the current, available or collected balance in the account. The bank must select one of these options at installation time to apply to all DDA accounts. Either one or two classes of float may be used for deposits to calculate thecoJlected balance for accounts. The bank specifies the number of days it requires to coJlecteach class. The bank must assign one of the supported service charge options to each DDA account. In addition, if the Savings Accounting Application (5725-F13) is installed, the service charge may be waived based on either a minimum or average balance maintained in the customer's savings account. The supported service charge options are: Free Checking - No service charge. Single Plan - A fixed monthly service charge. Special or Thrift - A fixed monthly charge plus an extra charge for each item designated by the bank as "service chargeable". Minimum Balance and Charge Per Item - The same as the Special or Thrift Option except that provision is made for a charge for each item in a deposit: and the service charge is zero if a bank-specified minimum or average current balance is maintained in the account during the statement period. Three-Two-One - The service charge for the account will be one of three fixed monthly charges, or will be zero, depending on the relationship of the minimum current balance for the period to three ascending balance levels designated by the bank. The account will be charged amount 1 if the minimum current balance is below level 1, amount 2 if it is between level 1 and level 2, amount 3 if it is between level 2 and level 3, and no charge if it is above level 3. Volume Earnings - The service charge is determined by calculating the cost of servicing the account, subtracting from this amount a credit for the amount the bank earned on the average collected balance, and charging the account the difference. The bank may include a fixed monthly cost, a cost per service-chargeable item, and a cost per item deposited in the cost computation. The earnings credit is a specified percentage of the average collected balance for the statement period. If the earnings credit exceeds the cost, the service charge is zero Stop payment actions may be ordered against a check, based on check amount or serial number. In addition a "stop all" action may be initiated to prevent the posting of any checks to the account. A hold for a specific amount may be specified against an account, or the account may be frozen - in which case all transaction:; against it are rejected. The bank may specify a short list factor which applies to all accounts. When the daily number of checks for an account reaches the specified level, the checks are added together to form a single item for account posting and statement printing. A list of the checks that were combined to produce this single item is printed for filing in the customer's account folder. The short list factor may be overriden to always short list or never short list an account regardless of the number of checks. The bank must select one of two procedures for determining how to handle an account when there are not sufficient funds to post all checks that are presented. They may choose to, (1) post each item individually until the balance is insufficient and then reject those items that cannot be posted; or, (2) add all checks together and either post them or reject them. Overdraft Banking: The overdraft banking function may be invoked for any specific account. If a check would normally cause the posting balance to fall below zero, a loan sufficient to cover the check is automatically advanced. Loans are always advanced in user-defined increments, with a credit limit specified for each account. The loan balance is maintained separate from the checking account balance, and deposits do not reduce the loan balance. Finance charges are accrued daily and added to the loan balance when the monthly statement is printed. A user-defined minimum payment is also calculated at statement time and automatically deducted from the DDA account balance. The overdraft banking format of the standard statement shows the running balance of the overdraft loan, its associated transactions, and the loan status. Automatic Funds Transfer (AFT): The AFT function provides periodic transfers of funds from a checking account to another account - such as a savings or installment loan account. If the Savings Accounting lAP (5725-F13), or the Installment Loan Accounting lAP (5725-F14) is installed, the deposit or payment is automatically credited. If the credit is to some other account, it is listed on a report and must be credited offline. The account holder may designate a frequency of weekly, biweekly, monthly or quarterly for the transfer. A number of transfers may b~ established against a single account. Customer-Oriented Reports: These reports are all produced on pre-printed forms. The sample forms shown in the documentation may be ordered from the Systems Supplies Division. --------------- Do not reproduce without written permission .:.. =-= :§~~ ISG PP 5725-F11.3 Mar 83 Major Revision PROGRAM PRODUCTS System/32 Financial Institutions Customer Accounting System (cont'd) Account statements are printed monthly. One of the five service charge options, or free checking, must be assigned to each account. The bank may offer each customer either the standard statement or a "combined" statement. The combined statement includes the balances of selected customer savings and installment loan accounts, if they exist on an installed Savings Accounting lAP, (5725-F13) or Installment Loan Accounting lAP (5725-F14). The NSF Notice is a combination form which is used to notify the customer either of checks drawn on insufficient funds, or of an overdraft loan advance. Auditor Confirmation Notices are generated on request, based on a multiple start point systematic sample technique. The random start points are selected by the auditor. Internal Reports: The reports produced for internal use within the bank include: Transaction entry and edit reports. Trial Balance Activity Journal Unposted Items Report Auditor Confirmation Notices are generated on request, based on a multiple start point systematic sample. techique. The random start points are selected by the auditor. Special Activity Report Internal Reports: The reports produced for use within the bank include: Inactive and Dormant Accounts Transaction entry and edit reports Earnings Journal Closed Accounts Trial balance and Activity Journal No- Book Transactions List Unposted Items Report Transaction History Report Service Charge Journal Accrual Report Overdrawn and Drawing Against Uncollected Funds Report Account Status Change Report Significant Balance Change Report Stop/Hold Journal Inactive and Dormant Accounts List Inactive and Dormant Accounts Activity Report Account Status Change Report Stopped Items List Closed and Zero Balance Accounts List Short Lists Overdraft Banking Trial Balance Report AFT Debits List and AFT Credits List AFT Journal Stop/Hold Journal SAVINGS ACCOUNTING (5725-F13) The Savings Accounting lAP provides daily transaction processing and reporting for regular savings accounts and time deposit open accounts. The Customer Information File (5725-F11), which provides the data base and file maintenance functions, is a prerequisite for this lAP. INSTALLMENT LOAN ACCOUNTING (5725-F14) The Installment Loan Accounting lAP provides daily transaction processing for installment loan accounts for a' commercial bank. The lAP includes broad support for the handling of the common interest calculation types, accrual and refund methods, and provides a variety of other features. The Customer Information File (5725-F11), which provides the data base and file maintenance functions, is a prerequisite for this lAP. Standard Functions: Transactions may be entered from the operator console, a diskette created on a 3740 Data Entry System, or a 1255 Magnetic Character Reader. If the Demand Deposit Accounting lAP (5725-F12) is installed, AFT payments to installment loan accounts will be merged by the system into the daily transactions and automatically applied to the designated accounts. For simple interest loans, interest is accrued daily. For precomputed (add-on and discount) laons, interest is accrued monthly on the loan's anniversary day (the day of the month on which payment is scheduled) by either the rule of 78s or straight-line accrual methods or on a cash basis. Standard Functions: Transactions may be entered from the operator console, a diskette created on a 3740 Data Entry System, or a 1255 Magnetic Character Reader. If the Demand Deposit Accounting lAP (5725-F12) is installed, Automatic Funds Transfer (AFT) to savings accounts will be merged by the system into the daily transactions and automatically credited to the designated accounts. Early payoff calculations for precomputed loans use either the rule of 78s or straight-line method. They are performed monthly on, or up to 15 days after, the anniversary day. These calculations are performed monthly for all loans including those on a quarterly payment schedule. A loan paid off prior to the first regular monthly accrual will earn either one full month's interest or interest computed at a daily rate for the number of days outstanding. A hold for any amount may be specified against an account, all withdrawals may be stopped, or the account may be frozen - in which case all transactions against it will be rejected. Credit life and accident and health insurance are supported. Earnings and collections on each type of insurance are maintained and reported separately. Early payoff calculations include insurance earnings. Up to eight different account plans, based on combinations of the interest calculation techniques, and the compounding and crediting options discussed below, may be offered at one time. Dealers can be associated with a loan and earn a portion of the interest. Dealers will earn by the same schedule and method that the bank earns. Banks earnings and dealers earnings are reported separately on a daily and monthly basis. The bank's recourse to dealer is identified. Interest Calculation Techniques: The lAP supports both regular saving deposits and time deposit open accounts. The Low Reference Balance and Day of Deposit to Day of Withdrawal (000- DOW) interest calculation techniques may be selected for savings deposit account plans. Time deposit open account plans may be based on either, (1) a requirement that the funds be on deposit for at least one complete calendar quarter, or, (2) a requirement that they be on· deposit for at least ninety consecutive calendar days. For Low Reference Balance accounts, interest is calculated. and compounded either quarterly or semi-annually. Grace periods at the beginning of each month and end of the period may be defined, and either the LIFO or FIFO posting option must be selected for each plan. For all except Low Reference Balance accounts, interest is accrued daily, and the bank may elect to compound interest continuously, daily, quarterly or semi-annually. The bank may elect to credit interest to the account (add it to the account balance) either quarterly or semiannually. Customer-Oriented Reports: For both regular savings deposit and time deposit open accounts, the bank may choose to provide passbooks, periodic statements, or may do both. The system records and reports "no-book" transactions against a passbook account. Interest earned during the preceding year may be reported to the customer each January on 1099 forms. The bank may choose to print reminder notices and late notices and to assess late charges for accounts missing a payment. A percentage of the payment may be allowed to fulfill the payment obligation and prevent late charges from being assessed. Payments may be applied first to either past due amounts or to the current payment, based on a bank-selected option. Late charges are assessed only if the current payment has not been paid. The bank has the option to permit automatic deduction of late charges from a payment. The late charges will only be deducted after the current month's payment obligation is fulfilled, past due amount is satisfied, and full payments are applied to the loan balance. A separate late charge payment is also accepted. Loan extensions may be granted, thereby deferring payments for some number of months. The bank may require a fee for extensions. ' . ,,' Notices of Interest can be produced on request for all or selected accounts. These notices are also produced automatically at the end of ~ each month for accounts closed during the month. Payment notices can be printed for simple interest loans, advi§ing customers of payments due. Auditor confirmation, notices are. generated on request based on' ~'.~ multiple start point systematic sample technique. The random start points are selected by the auditor. ------- ----! --~~~ ISG PP 5725-F11.4 Do not reproduce without written permission Mar 83 Major Revision PROGRAM PRODUCT5 System/32 Financial Institutions Customer Accounting System (cont'd) Internal Reports: The reports produced for use within the bank include: Transaction entry and Edit reports Trial Balance Update Totals Earnings Update 5ummary Transaction Journal Unposted Items Report 5uspected Closed Report Special Activity Report DOCUMENTATION (available from Mechanicsburg) Customer Information File Runbook (5B30-0137) ... Customer Information File Reference Manual Volume 1 (SB30-0138) ... Customer Information File Reference Manual Volume 2 (5B30-0139) ... Demand Deposit Accounting Runbook (5B30-0141) ... Demand Deposit Accounting Reference Manual (SB30-0142) ... Savings Accounting Runbook (5B30-0144) ... Savings Accounting Reference Manual (5B30-0145) ... Installment Loan Accounting Runbook (5B30-0147) ... Installment Loan Accounting Reference Manual (SB30-0148) ... Customer Information File Logic Manual (LB30-014O) ... Demand Deposit Accounting Logic Manual (LB30-0143) ..• Savings Accounting Logic Manual (LB30-0146) ... Installment Loan Accounting Logic Manual (LB30-0149). Exception Report Additional Support Materials New Loans Report ... Licensed Program Design Objectives: ... Installment Loan Accounting (GH30-0362) '" Licensed Program Specifications: ... Customer Information File (GH30-0358) ... Demand Deposit Accounting (GH30-0359) ... Savings Accounting (GH30-0360) . Late Charge Assessments Report Collection Report RPQs ACCEPTED: No History Merge Monthly Earnings Report Dealers Monthly Earnings Report Monthly Insurance Company Report Closed Loans Report Transaction History Report Aged Delinquency Report Dealers Trial Balance Loan Class Report Loan Plan Report Collateral Insurance Expiration Report· CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES IBM may provide marketing assistance in the installation of IBM licensed programs. However, the responsibility for providing accurate ordering information, personnel selection and training, installation, and continued day-to-day operation lies solely with the customer. Installation of System/32 licensed programs is a customer responsibility. SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS Each of these IBM System/32 Industry ~~plication Programs is compiled assuming a 24K (#9041) or 32K (119141) system and will execute on all models of the IBM System/32 equipped with a minimum of 24K or 32K of memory. Because of volumes and time constraints, there may be a requirement for offline keying on an IBM 3740 Data Entry System and/or transaction entry IBM 1255 Magnetic Character Reader. If an IBM 3741 is to be used, it must have Feature Group A #4002. If an IBM 3742 is to be used, it must have 128-Character feature - #5455 and Feature Group A - #4004. In addition, the Proof Keyboard feature (#5901 or #5902) is desirable but is not required. All models of the IBM 1255 Magnetic Character Reader (MCR) that can be attached to the IBM System132 are supported by these lAPs. The Dash Symbol Transmission feature (#3215) cannot, however, be installed if the customer wishes to use the MICR data capture programs . supplied with the lAPs. Consult the appropriate pages for ordering instructions and any restrictions that pertain to attachment of the IBM 1255 MCR to the IBM System/32. The four applications are closely interrelatod. Many functions have been included to protect the integrity of the master files, programs, procedures, and libraries. Because of this, no other lAP or user-written programs may co-reside unless stringent coding requirements for these programs are met to insure compatibility with the Financial Institutions Customer Accounting System. The Application Logic Manual discusses in detail the coding conventions used. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS IBM System/32 System Control Program (5725-SC1) (Version 6 or above) IBM System/32 Utilities Licensed Program (5725-UT1) RPG II Compiler (5725-RG1) is required if modifications to the RPG programs are required. Customer Information File (5725-F11) is a prerequisite for Demand Deposit ~ccounting· (5725- F12), Savings Accounting (5725- F13), and Installment Loan Accounting (5725-F14). TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index ------- -------.:.:::: ~~E: ISG Do not reproduce without written permission PP 5725·H11.1 Mar 83 Major Revision PROGRAM PRODUCTS SYSTEM/32 HOSPITAL FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (HFMS) PATIENT BILLING .•. 5725·H11 ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE ... 5725-H12 PAYROLL ... 5725·H13 GENERAL LEDGER/ACCOUNTS PAYABLE ... 5725·H14 system or overridden by keyboard entry. It produces reports necessary to verify the accuracy of the information, automatically prepares the daily revenue entries for General Ledger (5725-H14), and updates the detail revenue file records. PURPOSE All detail posted charges are saved by the system on an accumulated charges file, which is used by the billing subsystem to prepare detail patient bills. Accounts Receivable (5725-H12) will post payments against accounts not yet final billed into the accumulated charges file. The Hospital Financial Management System offers the small hospital a disk data-based system comprised of a series of programs and procedures that perform the accounting, management reporting and statistical functions for patient billing, accounts receivable, payroll and , general ledger/accounts payable. Presentation of timely information enables management to observe trends and deviations from the hospital's planned financial position. This enables Hospital Management to quickly spot problems and initiate corrective action. More important, it provides a basis upon which to institute plans to improve the financial position. The accuracy of the accounting information is mandatory because of reporting requirements placed upon the hospital by regulatory agencies. Completeness of hospital operating information provides the basis for review, analysis, and cause-and-effect relation studies of such things as rate setting, reimbursement analysis, patient mix, and services performed. A comprehensive information base provides the justification for decisions regarding future operations and services. Four applications are supported in HFMS. They are Patient Billing, Accounts Receivable, Payroll, and General Ledger/Accounts Payable. General Ledger and Accounts Payable are marketed together as one offering. Each of the other applications is a separate offering. Each application may be installed and operated independently or as an integrated system. A description of the four offerings follows the general highlights of the system. HMS is designed for the small hospital, in general 50 to 150 beds. HIGHLIGHTS An integrated series of offerings that can be installed in any sequence for stand-alone or integrated operation. The HFMS offering consists of: - Source Code and Object Code - Ready- To- Execute Procedures - Predefined File Sizes - Installation Guides - Operator Runbooks - Installation Supervision Self-Study Instructions -Operator Self-Study Courses With Machine Exercises - Hospital Application-Oriented Specifications for Data Entry and Control Forms - Technical Documentation for problem determination Simplicity of operation characterized by application-oriented commands, prompting, responses, and messages Complete hospital disk data base Complete file load and maintenance programs Backup/recovery procedures imbedded in the application flow Comprehensive data entry editing with errors explained to facilitate correction Inquiry facility for Patient Billing and Accounts Receivable Optional entry of batch transaction input through diskettes prepared on the 3740 Data Entry System Comprehensive accounting controls through a defined audit trail User-defined system control file entries for adapting HFMS to customer requirements DESCRIPTION PATIENT BILLING' (5725·H11) The system provides for accurate and timely postinQ of inpatient and outpatient charges to produce patient bills and prOVIdes the basis for the revenue statistics needed for third-party reporting, cost reimbursement, internal rate setting and revenue analysis. The offering has five logical subsystems: Census, posting, billing, and revenue usage, and statistics. The census subsystem tracks the location of inpatients and processes all outpatient activity. Census reports are produced in various sequences which serve the needs of different users in the hospital. The census reports and the daily recap are used to verify the accuracy of the reported day's activity. The generation of the final census triggers the automatic generation of room charges to the posting subsystem. The posting subsystem enters all routine and ancillary charges (including room charges from the census subsystem) into the inpatient and outpatient billing files. Charges can be automatically priced by the The billing subsystem uses the information in the inpatient and outpatient billing files and the accumulated charges file to print patient bills. The detail bills for both inpatients and outpatients include a complete chronological detail of charges and a summary of charges at the end of the bill. Inpatients' final detail bills are automatically' produced after discharge. Outpatient emergency (one-time visit) detaIl final bills are automatically produced after the patient visit, while recurring outpatient final detail bills are produced when requested by the hospital. After the detail final bill is produced, the billing file record is deleted. Prior to this deletion, it is transferred to the accounts receivable file if HFMS Accounts Receivable (5725-H12) is installed. Detail cycle bills can also be requested for any current inpatient account. This bill shows the balance as of the last cycle bill and a detailed summary of current charges. Requesting cycle bills does not alter the processing or format of the detail final bill which will eventually be produced. Summary bills can be printed on demand (inquiry) for any inpatient or outpatient account not yet final billed. The bill is in summary format containing all charges as of the last posting period. The revenue usage subsystem is driven by the inpatient and outpatient charges from the posting subsystem. Daily and monthly revenue reports are produced in detail or in summary by departments showing usage of individual services within the current period and year-to-date. The statistics subsystem maintains and reports patient statistics by medical service and patient category for both inpatients and outpatients, ancillary utilization statistics by department for all inpatients and for five outpatient categories, and departmental revenue by six financial classes. ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE (6725·H12) Managing the Hospital's Accounts Receivable has become an increasingly complex task. Required interaction with patients and many third parties (including private and public insurance companies and various governmental agencies) has created an explosion in clerical tasks. This has resulted in a difficult control problem in the hospital business office. The offering has three logical subsystems to aid in the collection of accounts receivable and in controlling the large volume of data involved. They are daily posting, statement writing, and reporting. The posting subsystem creates receivable accounts either through keyboard entry or by accepting transferred inpatient and outpatient accounts which have been final billed from the HFMS - Patient Billing offering (5725- H 11). The subsystem accepts a full range of transactions such as payments, adjustments, late charges, and bad debt recoveries. If HFMS - Patient Billing (5725-H11) is installed, payments can be accepted against active billing accounts and posted as credit charges. Controls, procedures, edit and audit reports assist the accounts receivable department in making sure transactions are posted to the correct accounts. This automated posting procedure eliminates many clerical tasks and frees business office personnel to concentrate the majority of their time analyzing and pursuing collection of open accounts. The posting subsystem maintains a separate account for each patient for each hospital visit. However, the ability to assign a guarantor number (family number) is provided. The facility enables the system to group all accounts for one family together for statement writing and accounts receivable reporting. The system has further facilities to handle both active and bad debt accounts with separate controls, to transfer from patient to insurance and from insurance to patient, and to generate entries for the General Ledger (5725-H14). The Statement Writing Subsystem generates balance-forward statements and includes a number of options that allow the user to operate the system to meet unique reqUIrements. Statements can be written on a weekly, biweekly, or monthly cycle to smooth the business office workload. Statements can be written for all financial classes or only selected financial classes (financial class denotes primary method of payment, such as self-pay, Medicare, Blue Cross, Welfare, etc.). Finance charges can be assessed at the option of the user. Statements can be either family statements or individual account statements. The Reporting Subsystem provides the user with a flexible information system to be used in handling the unique patient and third-party col/ection problems encountered in a hospital receivables system. Aged receivables reports can be produced in varying sequences or as varipus exception reports to help hospital personnel zero-in on specific collection problems or to satisfy specific information needs. The a'ge of accounts can be calculated based on discha.rge date, date of' tast ------- -------.! ISG Do not reproduce without written permission -~~~ PROGRAM PRODUCTS PP 5725-H11.2 Mar 83 Major Revision System/32 HFMS (cont'd) payment. or date insurance was filed. Reports can be produced for all open accounts or selected accounts based on financial class, range of dollar balances, and age since discharge date, last payment date, or date insurance was filed. If patient number is aSSigned to all accounts, the aging reports can be printed for all accounts for a patient alphabetically by patient name. A selective Detail Status Report facility is provided in the system for the user to retrieve reports showing all detail transactions for any specific account or group of accounts, based on financial class or patient number. The system handles the processing for both Active and Bad Debt Accounts. A report showing all accounts that have been transferred to bad debt can be run at any time. Account Balance Inquiry can be requested at any time to be displayed on the System/32 Display Unit or printed or both. This allows the business office to retrieve the most current information regarding any account when it is required. The Patient Account record and all Detail Transactions for an account are maintained in the system until a user-specified number of days after the account zero balances or until the account is deleted from the system as an uncollectable bad debt. At the time an account is deleted from the system, a one page report is printed showing all the detailed information for the account. This report is then filed for reference purposes. PAXR~L~ (572~-~131 Within the hospital, personnel represents the most valuable and most expensive resource. While an efficient mechanism for prompt employee payment and bookkeeping is essential, the emphasis today is necessarily on astute management - planning, scheduling, and monitoring - to ensure the most productive use of this valuable and costly resource. This application addresses these needs through four logical subsystems: Payroll Processing, Labor Distribution, Benefits Analysis, and Personnel Reporting. The biweekly Payroll Processing subsystem calculates hourly and salaried employee earnings, calculates statutory and voluntary deductions, accrues vacation and sick leave, accumulates quarter and year-to-date totals needed for 941-A and W-2 reports, and prints the employee's check. It also provides necessary reports to show a complete audit trail of each payroll run and to perform check reconciliation. The system calculates and deducts tax sheltered annuities, federal withholding taxes, and Federal Insurance Compensation Act (FICA) withholding. Rates are supplied to the programs from a system control file to avoid program recompilation as rates change. The data fields needed to calculate existing state, county, or city withholding taxes are included in the data base and an exit point is provided in the program for the inclusion of a user-written subroutine to calculate these taxes. However, the earnings statement and reports have provisions to print only one non-federal withholding tax. Vacation and sick-leave hours are accrued based on actual hours worked and a hospital-defined accrual rate that can vary by employee. The system will handle up to 10 types of voluntary deductions that can vary among employees regarding the frequency and method of calculation. These hospital-defined voluntary deductions are calculated, deducted, and reported each pay period on both a current period and year-to-date basIs. The labor distribution subsystem produces current and year-to-date reports each pay period by using the extended employee time records and budgeted and year-to-date balances from the position control file. These reports show hours and dollars (actual, budget, and variance) categorized by productive and non-productive time. This subsystem produces the departmental expense entries for General Ledger (5725-H14). The benefits analysis subsystem produces reports for both included and contributory benefits each pay period. Included benefits are generally those that are completely paid by the hospital, such as vacation, sick leave and holidays. Contributory benefits are generally those that are partly paid by the hospital and partly by the employee, such as life insurance and health insurance. employee verification of pertinent data. It serves as a turnaround document for entering changes into the system. Employee listings by name and number are printed for reference purposes. An Annual Employee Benefits Report is produced for each employee showing total earnings, included benefits, and contributory benefits. The Turnover Report provides an analysis of employee terminations by department showing the reason for each termination. Union Listings by employee within union can be produced when required. GENERAL LEDGER/ACCOUNTS PAYABLE (5725-H141 In order to provide increased patient care, hospitals must work from a sound financial base. In order to develop that base, the hospital executive must have detailed hospital operating information that is accurate, timely, and complete. The hospital must establish a plan, and since they are controlled to cost-dependent prices,. they must work within that plan. The general ledger application provides the information that is key to more effective management through three logical subsystems: Daily processing, accounting period-end updating, and accounting period-end financial reporting. The daily processing subsystem produces a journal of the day's valid transactions and adds them to the accumulated transaction file. Transaction validity is established through the use of the batch proof report. All transactions can be entered as miscellaneous journal entries. However, other offerings of the Hospital Financial Management System automatically provide journal entries from· Patient Billing (5725-H11), Accounts Receivable (5725- H12), Payroll (5725- H 13), and General Ledger / Accounts Payable (5725- H14) which will substantially reduce keying time. All transactions from whatever source are thoroughly edited by the system. The accounting period-end updating subsystem provides the detail and summary trial balances. They are produced at the close of each accounting period. The system is deSigned to handle either 12 or 13 accounting periods per fiscal year. The trial balances can be run as many times as necessary to insure that all closing and correcting entries for that accounting period have been processed and the ledger is in balance. The system then updates the General Ledger Accounts file by extracting all entries for the accounting period (from the Accumulated Transaction File and summing these entries with the balance as the end of the last accounting period) to obtain the new year-to-date balance of each account in the General Ledger Accounts File. The updated General Ledger Accounts File is then used to produce the Financial and Management reports by the accounting period-end reporting subsystem. Comparative schedules of Patient Revenue, Miscellaneous Revenue, Deductions from Revenue, and Expenses are produced showing variances on a current month and year-to-date basis for either this year versus last year or this year versus budget or both. The format of the Balance Sheet. Income Statement, Pre-Cost Allocation Schedule, Per Diem Revenue Report, and Per Diem Expense Report can be tailored to the user's requirements through the use of the Report Description Master file. This file contains a record for each physical line that appears on each of the reports. By adding, changing or deleting records in this file, characteristics of the reports such as the number of lines, levels of total, and line and total descriptions. can be changed to meet the needs of the user. This feature, along with the ability to define the chart of accounts desired, provides a flexible financial information system that can be defined by the user to produce financial reports for assistance in creating and maintaining financial stability for the hospital. Accounts Payable: Inflation has caused a rapid increase in the cost of supplies in all departments of the hospital. An accurate, efficient Accounts Payable system has become a requirement. It is one of the basic tools needed by hospital management to assist in reducing and controlling the cost of providing health care because most of the hospital's supplies expense originates through Accounts Payable. Approved vendor invoices must be accurately recorded, efficiently analyzed, and accurately distributed to affected cost centers. The Included Benefits Report shows vacation and sick leave hours carried over, accrued, taken and remaining for oach employee and department. Holidays taken are also noted on this report. The . Contributory Benefits Report provides an analysis of the amount paid by the hospital for life and health insurance on a total cost basis and cost per hours basis for each employee, position classification, and department. The key element of expense control can only be obtained if the proper departments are given the information they need. For example, the purchasing agent requires information regarding standardyendor terms and volume of the businoss. The financial officor needs timely information regarding opon Accounts Payable to analyze cash requirements. Available cash must be usod effectively to take advantage of all discounts through prompt payment. The business office needs on efficient method of recording items, reporting to management, and accurately distributing supplies expense to appropriate cost centors. The personnel reporting subsystem· provides reports to assist the personnel department in effectively using the people resource of the hospital. The Accounts Payable application meets these objectives and satisfies these needs through four logical subsystems: Transaction entry, check writing, expense distribution, and reporting. An~~p-t~-date Employee Status Report for each employee in the hospital IS produced by the system whenever a change is made on an ~mploye~'s record. AII:additio~s, changes, or. deletions of employee information. are thoroughly edited by the system and printed on M.aintenan~e Reports. .An Employee Personnel Profile is produced for The transaction entry subsystem performs an extensive edit on all approved invoices and credit memos. The required information is keyed into the system and a Proof Report is printed to balance to controls. Any errors are corrected prior to further processing. These transactions ------- -------.:. =:: :5~§: ISG Do not reproduce without written permission PROGRAM PRODUCTS PP 5725-H11.3 Mar 83 Major Revision System/32 HFMS (cont'd) are accumulated with any prior unpaid items and a Cash Requirements Report is printed to provide a current listing of all unpaid items listed by invoice within vendor. The items to be paid are noted on the Cash Requirements report and control totals are developed. Items to be paid can be selected in either of two ways: All invoices for a vendor or only certain invoices within a vendor can be selected. The computer operator uses this report to enter a notification of items to be paid into the system. A Payment Journal is printed by the system showing all transactions selected to be paid. This report is used to balance to the control totals and any keying errors are corrected prior to the writing of checks. Further flexibility is provided by the system because a check for any items may be typed at any time and entered into the system with a different code to designate a demand check. The transactions for these demand checks flow through to the expense distribution, but no computer checks are prepared. This facility provides the hospital maximum flexibility for taking advantage of discounts and creating of special checks such as travel advances. The check writing subsystem produces the Check Registers, Checks, and Remittance Advices for those items checked on the cash requirements report. The system allows for multiple check-writing runs during the month which, in conjunction with the ability to handle demand checks, provides the flexibility needed to control the payment of outstanding accounts payable items. Check reconciliation reports are included to allow the user to control the reconciling of checks and produce an Aged Outstanding Check Register. Once each accounting period, the Accumulated Transaction file is sorted by General Ledger number and the expense distribution subsystem is run. An Accounts Payable Distribution Report is produced and summary expense entries are created for entry into the General Ledger System. The reporting subsystem provides analysis of year-to-date purchases and discounts taken based on information in the Vendor Master file. This file contains one record for each permanent or temporary vendor used by the system to obtain vendor name, address, and discount terms information. The amount of purchases, credit memos and discounts for each vendor are also maintained in this file and Vendor Analysis Reports can be printed whenever desired. CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES IBM may provide marketing assistance in the installation of IBM licensed programs. However, the responsibility for providing accurate ordering information, personnel selection and training, installation, and continued day-to-day operation lies solely with the customer. Installation of System/32 licensed programs is a customer responsibility. SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS These IBM System/32 Industry Application Programs will execute on all models of the IBM System/32. Information regarding disk allocation and usage (master and transaction files) and recommended backup levels and diskette requirements are available in the HFMS Installation Guide. The OCL and file sizes, as distributed, will be fixed at the maximum capacity, assuming all five applications are to be installed on a 5 megabyte file. Any changes to file sizes other than those shown above should be carefully reviewed by the customer and IBM System Engineering to determine the necessity for more storage, estimate time required to convert eCl procedures, and estimate throughput performance. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS The IBM HFMS System/32 program is written in IBM System/32 RPG II and 0llerates under control of IBM System/32 System Control Program (5725-SC1). In addition, the IBM System/32 Utilities licensed program (5725-UT1) must be available for sorting of data (SORT), entering transactions with the Data File Utilities (DFU) and for making source program corrections with Source Entry Utility (SEU). If compilation of the RPG HFMS source programs is required, the IBM System/32 RPG II Compiler (5725-RG1) and Source Entry Utility (SEU), for making RPG II program corrections, must be available. DOCUMENTATION (available from Mechanicsburg) Patient Billing Installation Guide (SB30-oo08) ... Patient Billing Runbook (SB30-0014) ... Accounts Receivable Instal/ation Guide (SB30-ooo9) ... Accounts Receivable Runbook (SB30-oo15) ... Payroll Installation Guide (SB30-oo10) ... Payroll Runbook (SB30-0016) ... Accounts Payable Installation Guide (SB30-0011) ." Accounts Payable Runbook (SB30-0017) ... General Ledger Installation Guido (SB300012) ... General Ledger Runbook (SB30-oo13) ... Patient Billing Reference Manual (LB30-0004) ... Accounts Receivable Reference Manual (LB30-000S) ... Payroll Reference Manual (LB30-0006) ... Accounts Payable Reference Manual (LB30-0007) ... General Ledger Reference Manual (LB30-0019). RPQs ACCEPTED: No TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index ------- -------.=.=:: ~~~ ISG PP 5725-H15.1 Do not reproduce without written permission Mar 83 Major Revision PROGRAM PRODUCTS SYSTEM/32 MEDICAL GROUP MANAGEMENT SYSTEM 5725-H15 PURPOSE The application provides the medical group with a powerful aid in managing its business. DESCRIPTION The application is ready-to-execute. It includes source code, object code, and execution procedures as basic material. The Application Logic Manual is included if it is ordered as optional licensed material. The Medical Group Management system is primarily intended for a group of up to 20 doctors using a single accounting system. There are some general features included in the application: Key accounting and management reports are provided to allow selling and installing without a requirement for services or customer programming capabilities. Security codes to deter unauthorized use of master files HIGHLIGHTS Wide variety of reports and report options included: - Management reporting is a byproduct of normal data entry - Detail or summary listings within a range of options is supported in many reports Uses recognized accounting techniques and terminology to provide a solid accounting system: Designed to fit business requirements In-house inclusion/ exclusion of functions to be executed OCl procedures, Sort specifications, and processing programs are packaged into logical work units which simplify system operation Monitoring of execution sequence prevents execution of a program until preceding required programs have been completely and successfully executed Compatible online/offline data entry through the System/32 keyboard or by means of diskettes created on a 3740 Data Entry System - Clear audit trails and control techniques are provided - Sample user-oriented forms for data preparation, file creation, audit and control are provided - Security code deters unauthorized execution of all programs in the application - A Reference Number may be used to supply an audit trail for any transaction entered into the system Reprint options are possible because file updating is separated from report writing functions Designed to be installed without customer programming capability: Some report printing can be deferred to a more convenient time - System tailoring procedure facilitates account growth by allowing on-site changes to file sizes and determination of functions used - File maintenance and audit procedures - Easy-to-use runbook - Operator self-study course is available - Step-by-step installation activity plan provided by the Application Reference Manual - User's installation and daily operating information supplied to the supervisor by the Application Reference Manual DESCRIPTION The system combines two data entry approaches: Operator-oriented and batch-oriented. Support is provided for transaction entry through the System/32 keyboard or through a diskette created on a 3740 Data Entry System. The application has requirements records which contain Questionnaire responses stored in a Constants File. These records allow the system to select certain fields for editing, report formats, file sizes, and functions to suit each customer's needs. The Questionnaire responses are typed in during initial installation and may be changed as needed. The System Tailoring Procedure allows these responses to be entered. The System Tailoring Procedure uses the answers to a series of questions regarding a medical group's requirements to build the system. It provides the following: Tailoring the application and Operational Control Language (OCl) on site at installation time. All provided functions are included in the programs but only required functions are executed. Allows the user to activate and deactivate provided functions as the user's business changes. File sizes may be increased or decreased as needed by rerunning the System Tailoring Procedure. Application Reference Manual Volume I provides a step-by-step installation activity plan including sample numbering systems, sample input and maintenance data forms, file loading sequences, and control forms with suggested procedures. Volume II of the Application Reference Manual provides information on the day-to-day use of the application. The Runbook provides the operator with a detailed and easy-to-use set of instructions stating all the activities necessary to run the programs on a System/32. The Proceduro Roference Summary is provided for the operator as a reminder of the major operational Instructions for each procedure. It .is intended to be used once the operator is thoroughly trained in the application. Instructional material in the form of a self-study guide is provided to train the System/32 operator in the use of the Runbook. An Application. Logic Manual is provided, as optional licensed material, for use by thE!;,self-sufficient customer and for systems engineering c~"tinuing suJjport. It describes the architecture of programs, pr,Qcedures, data base cross-references, data dictionary, and detailed jpO:Scriptions Of each program. . Dynamic Backup and Recovery System forces periodic backup of master files and edited transactions and keeps track of what procedures need to be rerun from the last backup point to recreate up-to-date master files. Selective printing options are available for many report functions The Medical Group Management System lAP is intended to provide a balance forward accounts receivable system for a group of up to 20 doctors using a single accounting system. The lAP provides the ability to bill patients on a monthly basis. Third parties (insurance companies) can be billed as required. It provides accounts receivable information including status reports and aged trial balances in order to control accounts receivable. An optional Daily Charge Slip system is provided to print an appointment list showing patient appointment information and patient charge slips for recording patient charges, diagnoses and procedures. The charge slips can then be used as turnaround documents for input into A/R. A practice analysis system is also optional and provides statistical reports for each doctor on a calendar year basis. Inquiry is provided allowing the user to locate a guarantor record by keying either the guarantor's last name and first initial or the guarantor's account number. CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES IBM may provide marketing assistance in the installation of IBM licensed programs. However, the responsibility for providing accurate ordering information, personnel selection and training, installation, and continued day-to-day operation lies solely with the customer. Installation of System/32 licensed programs is a customer responsibility. SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS Each of these IBM System/32 Industry Application Programs will execute on all models of the IBM System!32. The programs are compiled assuming a 16K system. Because of volume and time constraints, there may be a requirement for providing offline key entry on an IBM 3740 Data Entry System. If an IBM 3742 is to be used, it must have the 128-character record feature (#5455) and Feature Group A (#4Q04). Many functions have been included to protect the integrity of the master files, programs, procedures and libraries. Because of this, no other lAP or user-written programs may co-reside unless stringent coding requirements for these programs are met to insure compability with the Medical Group Management System. The Application Logic Manual discusses in detail the coding conventions used for the development of the Medical Group Management System. SOFlWARE REQUIREMENTS The application programs for the IBM System/32 are written in IBM System/32 RPG II Programming language and execute under control of the IBM System/32 System Control Program (5725-SC1 Version 3. IBM System/32 Utilities licensed program (5725-UT1), which includes Sort, Data File Utility, and Source Entry Utility, is required for execution of the programs. The IBM System/32 RPG II Compiler (5725-RG1) is required if modifications to the source code are necessary. RPQs ACCEPTED: No TERMS and CONDITIONS: Seo PP Indox --..----- ----:: - - :S~S: ISG Do not reproduce without written permission PROGRAM PRODUCTS PP 5725-K11.1 Mar 83 Major Revision SYSTEM/32 MEMBERSHIP and MAILING LIST SYSTEM 5725-K11 PURPOSE Associations are constituted to serve their memberships. Their prime functions are information retrieval and dissemination, establishment of standards and ethics, research, and representing their members to external agencies. Items of general interest are disseminated through association publications sent through the postal service. However, the need often exists to make specialized mailings to selected members with specific characteristics. Information exchange also takes place at events sponsored by associations. Associations, then, have data processing needs characterized by large data bases which must be processed in total but with the ability to process individual records or groups of records on a selective or exception basis. The Membership and Mailing List System is designed for associations of up to approximately 15,000 members if optional files are not used. HIGHLIGHTS The Membership and Mailing List System provides an economical approach for the needs of business and professional associations. It addresses the following areas: Data Base Management Interrelates up to 10 master files into a single data base Non-redundant data base (duplicate records eliminated) Can be installed as: - Single-file system (members are individuals) - Dual-file system (members are companies with mailing sent to and events attended by individuals). Usage of other master files is optional as needed. Full maintenance procedures Cash Accounting Invoices generated for dues and publications Balance forward accounts maintained for dues Cash application through file maintenance runs Mailing Labels One-up or four-up Names and addresses vertically and horizontally aligned Produced from the data base on user-defined selection criteria Zip code changes noted and count shown Includes zip codes and circulation reporting Membership and Association Services Membership cards 3 x 5 information cards Membership rosters, dynamic listings, and profiles Data file inquiry Analyze Procedure Provides a means to select and sequence. subsets from the data base Used for statistical profiles; input to all of the above runs; input to a preformatted dynamic listing program - for management review and analysis. The Membership and Mailing list System a.so Includes the following features: Installation through a System Control File which allows implementation of user options and printed descriptions without recompilation Inquiry capability to display or print individual member'S records DESCRIPTION The Membership and Mailing list System organizes the vital records of an association into a comprehensive data base. The data base is modular in design so that only those portions which are required for user-desired functions need to be implemented. For example, if the association does not maintain its membership in a chapter structure, the chapter file is not used. Similarly, if it has no interest in knowing who sponsored a member for membership, the sponsor file is not used. The basic decision to be reached regarding the optionality of files, however, concerns the manner in which the association structures its membership and what dues functions are required. A typical difference between business associations and professional organizations is that business associations tend to have companies as members while professional organizations tend to have individuals as members. The Membership and Mailing List System accounts for this difference by separating the dues function from the mail function. Data required to implement these two functions is· separated into two discrete files: the dues file and the mail file. If your customer has company members with individuals within the company receiving mail, both files would be used (dual-file system). If, however, the members of the association are individuals, either the dues file or the mail file, or both, may be used. If partial payments are to be accepted and the association has only one publication that it distributes, the dues file should be implemented. If the association has multiple publications with different payment rates and accepts full payment only, the mail file should be implemented. However, whichever file is implemented, the basic cash accounting and mailing function are provided. The optional nature of the data base files is implemented through a Systems Control File without need for recompilation. Consult the Membership and Mailing List System Installation Guide for further information. The following sections describe system highlights in three important functional areas: Accounting, mailing, and service. Accounting Functions Invoicing: Invoices are generated for both dues and publications. The dues invoice shows the balance brought forward, the current dues amount, and a new total owed. An optional special charge amount (such as an initiation fee) can also be included. First dues billing for new members can be pro-rated. Publication invoices can handle amounts for two separate publications (mail file). Both types of iiwoices as well as follow-up notices'are prepared' on user-defined billing cycles and frequencies. Cash Application: Cash can be applied to dues on a partial payment basis (dues file only) or on a full-payment required basis. Payments for publication subscription can be applied in even increments of the base subscription rate with automatic calculation of the "paid to" date. Cash receipts can also be applied for registration fees for associationsponsored events. Mailing Functions Mailing Labels: Mailing labels are prepared for user-defined subsets of the data base. The selection is dynamic. User-defined parameters for inclusion/exclusion and sequencing are keyed prior to the label run. The labels can be printed one-up or four-up with names and addresses horizontally and vertically aligned. Changes in zip code (if the labels are sequenced by zip code) can be highlighted to facilitate mailing bundling. Mailing type is noted, that is, sample publications. Circulation Reports: This report recaps totals by state, zip code, or type of mailing for each mailing. It can be used for advertising rate setting by showing circulation demographics. Membership/Association Service Functions Membership Cards: Membership identification· cards, can be prepared showing member'S name and current membership period. 3 x 6 Information Cards: These cards can be prepared with user-defined inclusion/exclusion and sequencing criteria. They are useful for such functions as convention registration, direct sales follow-up, etc. Rosters: Periodic alphabetic listings of the membership, mailing lists, or event participation can be prepared for reference. Membership Profile: A profile of all information regarding a member can be printed that can be sent for review and correction. Therefore, it can serve as a turnaround document to maintain the accuracy of the data base. Additional Features: The Membership and Mailing List System is deSigned to meet the needs of associations by producing standard printouts of selected input. Input inclusion/exclusion and sequencing criteria are entered through a simple ANALYZE command. This feature provides great flexibility to your customer. For example, the system does not arbitrarily send follow-up notices for dues or publication invoices after a fixed period. Your customer can implement a 30- or SO-day follow-up policy by simply entering the appropriate 30- or 60-day parameter into the ANALYZE command prior to running the follow-up procedure. Analysis report formats have been established for each major file. The user of the ANALYZE command in conjunction with these report programs gives the user a dynamic listing capability to answer needs as they occur. The ANALYZE command can also be used without a subsequent report to develop statistical profiles (demographic analysis) of the membership. The optional files are implemented and descriptions are supplied to the programs by answering a questionnaire. The responses are then entered into a Systems Control File. Other options addressed on the questionnaire include such policy matters as invoicing frequency and dues proration for new members. An inquiry capability is provided through the Data File Utjiities (DFU) to indicate individual records on the System/32 display screen or to print the records. ------- ----:: - -~~§: ISG Do not reproduce without written permission PROGRAM PRODUCTS System/32 Membership 8t Mailing List System (cont'd) CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES IBM may provide marketing assistance in the installation of IBM licensed programs. However, the responsibility for providing accurate ordering information, personnel selection and training, installation, and continued day-to-day operation lies solely with the customer. Installation of System/32 licensed programs is a customer responsibility. SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS This System/32 Industry Application Program will execute on all models of the IBM System/32. Information regarding disk allocation and usage (master and transaction files) and recommended backup levels and diskette requirements are available in the Installation Guide. The OCl and file sizes, as distributed, will be fixed at the maximum capacity and normal distribution for the 5-megabyte file. Any changes to file sizes should be carefully reviewed by the customer and IBM Systems Engineering to determine the necessity for more storage, estimate the time required to convert OCl procedures, and estimate throughput performance. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS The Membership and Mailing List System programs for IBM System/32 are written in IBM System/32 RPG 1\ and operate under control of IBJV1 System/32 System Control Program (5725-SC1). In addition, the IBM System/32 Utilities program product (5725-UT1) must be available for sorting of data (SORT), entering transactions with the Data File Utilities (DFU) and for making source program corrections with Source Entry Utility (SEU). If compilation of the RPG II source programs is required, the IBM System/32 RPG 1\ Compiler (5725-RG1) and Source Entry Utility (SEU), for making RPG II program corrections, must be available. CONVERSION The Membership and Mailing List System requires loading of a large volume of data. This may make use of the System/32 keyboard inadvisable for conversion input. Programs are supplied to load the files from diskettes produced by the 3740 Data Entry System. Discussing conversion approaches and schedules with your customer or prospect will be a key element in your installation planning process. DOCUMENTATION (available from Mechanicsburg) Installation Guide (SB30-oo78) ... Runbook (SB30-oo79) ... Reference Manual (lB30-oo76). RPQs ACCEPTED: No TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index I: PP 5725-K11.2 Mar 83 Major Revision ----- ---! - - :§'f§: ISG --. PP 5725-M3A.1 00 not reproduce without written permission .-. Mar 83 Major Revision PROGRAM PRODUCTS 5230 DATA COLLECTION SYSTEM SUPPORT for SYSTEM/32 5725-M3A PURPOSE The 5230 Data Collection System Support for System/32 program provides the manufacturer with a convenient, practical means of preparing shop floor data for processing by the System/32 Manufacturing Management Accounting System (MMAS) application programs. Data collected by the 5230 Data Collection System is edited, consolidated, and formatted for processing by the MMAS Payroll, Inventory Management, and Production Status and Costing lAPs or for userwritten manufacturing management systems (with appropriate changes to the output modules). This lAP offers current System/32 MMAS account upgrading in the manufacturing industry. It is primarily intended for the manufacturer with 50 to 250 employees. HIGHLIGHTS Interrelated to MMAS applications: - Elapsed time calculation for Payroll - Material receipt and issue data for Inventory Management - Job time for Production Status and Costing application to select certain options for the procedures to be used. The questionnaire responses are keyed during initial installation and may be changed as needed. An Application Reference Manual provides a step-by-step installation activity plan including sample input and maintenance data forms, file loading sequences, and control forms with suggested procedures. This manual also provides information on the day-to-day use of the application. The Runbook provides the operator with a detailed and easy-to-use set of instructions showing all the activities. An Application Logic Manual is provided, as optional licensed material, for use by the self-sufficient customer and for systems engineering continuing support. It describes the architecture of programs, procedures, data base cross-references, data dictionary, and detailed descriptions of the program. The 5230 Data Collection System Support for System/32 is a ready-to-execute program. It includes source code, object code, execution procedures, and the Application Logic Manual, if ordered as optional basic material. Management reports generated as a byproduct of data entry - Option to print or not print all reports except error reports and audit summaries - Labor report by supervisor for checking - Attendance and absentee reports Provides internal cross-checking and editing - Jobs started checked against jobs stopped - Employee time on jobs checked against time and attendance record - Transaction records checked for complete and accurate entry Provides automatic generation of machine-readable data - Reduces transcription errors - Eliminates time keeper calculation of elapsed time - Supports up to 40 different shifts to provide added flexibility for special starting times, lunch and other break times, and unique weekend schedules. CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES IBM will provide marketing assistance in the installation of IBM licensed programs. However, the responsibility for providing accurate ordering information, personnel selection and training, installation, and continued day-to-day operation lies solely with the customer. Installation of System/32 licensed programs is a customer responsibility. SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS The IBM 5230 Data Collection System Support for IBM System/32 will execute on all models of the IBM System/32 The programs are compiled assuming a 16K system. If data communications features are to be used, the Binary Synchronous Communications Adapter (#2074) must be installed in the IBM 5230 System Unit. If card output from the IBM 5230 System is to be used, the Data Recorder Attachment (#3200) may be installed on the System/32 only. Can be installed without customer - System tailoring procedure facilitates account growth by allowing on-site changes to file sizes and determination of functions used - File maintenance and audit procedures ' - Easy-to-use runbook - Step-by-step installation activity plan provided by the Application Reference Manual - User's information supplied to the supervisor by the Application Reference Manual DESCRIPTION The 5230 Data Collections System Support for System/32 provides two .phases of operations: 5230 personalization phase and a data conversion phase. The 5230 personalization provides a menu of actions from which the users select those that best fit their operation. Using the menu selections and loop definitions for up to three 5231 Controllers with up to four loops each, this phase creates the personalization records required to personalize the 5230 Data Collection System. The data conversion phase preparos the data received from the 5230 Data Collections System for processing by the MMAS applications. The data can be accepted through the data communications facilities, the cards, or the diskette offered as output options by the 5230 Data Collection System. Both material transactions and labor transactions are prepared. The material transactions are edited, listed, formatted, and stored for later use by the Inventory Management and Production Status and Costing applications. Labor transactions are expanded, edited, checked for accuracy, and adjusted for break and lunch times. They are also adjusted for lunch and shift start-stop time variances. The elapsed time for time and attendance and job time is calculated, and job time applied to overlapping jobs is apportioned to the jobs. Time and attendance totals are checked against job time totals with warning messages printed for differences that exceed user-prescribed limits. A correction procedure is included to allow for changing incorrect labor transactions. The results of the labor transaction proceSSing are stored for later use by the Payroll and Production Status and Costing applications. Reports are printed, at the user's option, for material transactions and for labor transactions. The material transactions report is a single listing. Labor transaction reports provide labor-related information suitable for management review and checking by supervisors for correctness. Attendance and absentee reports are also printed. This program augments the MMAS cross-application Constants File with its own questionnaire responses. These records allow the SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS The IBM 5230 Data Collection System Support program for the IBM System/32 is written in IBM System/32 RPG II Programming language and executes under control of the IBM System/32 System Control Program (5725-SC1 Version 3). IBM System/32 Utilities licensed program (5725-UT1), which includes Sort, Data File Utility, and Source Entry Utility, is required for execution of the program. The IBM System/32 RPG II Compiler (5725-RG1) is required if modifications to the source code are necessary. In addition, one of the following MMAS applications should be installed. Payroll (5725- M32) Inventory Management (5725-M35) Production Status and Costing (5725-M31) Additional Materials: Data Collection Application Workbook (GH20-0203) ... 18M 5230 Data Collection User's Guide (GA34-0040) DOCUMENTATION (available from Mechanicsburg) Runbook (SB30-0092) ... Application Reference Manual (SB30-0093) ... Logic Manual (LB30-0094). TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index ------- -------..:.::: ISG Do not reproduce without written permission :§':f~ pp 5725~M31.1 Mar 83 Major Revision PROGRAM PRODUCTS SYSTEM/32 MANUFACTURING MANAGEMENT ACCOUNTING SYSTEM (MMAS) PRODUCTION STATUS AND COSTING ••. 5725-M31 PAYROLL ... 5725-M32 ACCOUNTS PAYABLE ... 5725-M33 ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE ... 5725-M34 INVENTORY MANAGEMENT ... 5725-M35 PRODUCT DEFINITION AND COSTING ... 5725-M36 GENERAL LEDGER ... 5725-M37 SALES ANALYSIS ... 5725-M38 ORDER ENTRY AND INVOICING ... 5725-M39 PURPOSE The System/32 Manufacturing Management Accounting System (MMAS) provides manufacturers with a powerful aid in managing the business. MMAS offers flexible applications specifically designed for the manufacturing industry. MMAS provides key reports to help management direct and control their business effectively. MMAS offers opportunities for new name and first systems account sales in the manufacturing industry. It is primarily intended for the manufacturer with 20 to 250 employees. HIGHLIGHTS Independent or interrelated applications approach: - Modular design facilitates sequential application installation - Single data entry results in multiple application updates - Modular design allows users to choose the applications that address problem areas Wide variety of reports and report options included: - Management reporting is a byproduct of normal data entry - Certain reports (statements, 941-As, and W-2s) can be saved on diskette for later printing - Detail or summary listings within a range of keys is supported in many reports Uses recognized accounting techniques and terminology to provide a solid accounting system: - Clear audit trails and control techniques are provided - Sample user-oriented forms for data preparation, file creation, audit and control are provided - Security code deters unauthorized inquiry or execution of key programs in each application - A Journal Reference Numbering System supplies audit trail for any application that automatically generates transactions into the General Ledger Provides manufacturers with an easy-to-use method for organizing and using manufacturing information such as bills-of-material, product cost, and shop order or job cost. MMAS can be installed without customer programming capability: - System tailoring procedure facilitates account growth by allowing on-site changes to file sizes and determ'ination of functions used - File maintenance and audit procedures - Easy-to-use run book - Supervisor and operator self-study courses are available - Step-by-step installation activity plan provided by the Application Reference Manual - User's information supplied to the supervisor by the Application Reference Manual DESCRIPTION The Manufacturing Management Accounting System is a set of nine ,independent yet interrelated, ready-to-execute applications for the small manufacturer: Order Entry and Invoicing Sales Analysis Accounts Receivable Inventory Management Receivable (5725- M34) must be installed before Sales Analysis (5725- M38). Each application has certain requirements records, within a crossapplication Constants File which contain questionnaire responses. These records allow the application to select certain fields for editing, report formats, file sizes, and functions to suit each customer's needs. The questionnaire responses are keyed during initial installation and may be changed as needed. The System Tailoring Procedure allows these responses to be entered. The System Tailoring Procedure utilizes the answers to a series of questions regarding a manufacturer's requirements. It provides the following: Tailoring the application and Operator Control language (OCl) on-site at installation time. Allows the user to activate and deactivate provided functions as the user's business changes. All provided functions are included in the programs but only required functions are executed. File sizes may be expanded or contracted as needed by rerunning the System Tailoring Procedure. An Application Reference Manual provides a step-by-step installation activity plan including sample numbering systems, sample input and maintenance data forms, file loading sequences, control forms with suggested procedures. Volume II of the Application Reference Manual provides information on the day-to-day use of the application. The Runbook provides the operator with a detailed and easy-to-use set of instructions showing all the activities necessary to run the MMAS programs on a System/32. The Operator Reference Card is provided for· the operator as a reminder of the major operational functions of each procedure. It is intended to be used once the operator is thoroughly trained in the particular application. Instructional material in the form of self-study courses is provided for the System/32 supervisor and operator to train them in"the use of the Application Reference Manual and Runbook. The two courses are not application dependent. Therefore, only one copy of each course is needed per customer no matter how many applications are installed. An Application Logic Manual is provided, as optional licensed material, for use by the self-sufficient customer and for systems engineering continuing support. It describes the architecture of programs, procedures, data base cross-references, data dictionary, and detailed descriptions of each program. Fea.tures: The Manufacturing Management Accounting System consists of nine full-function, ready-to-execute applications. MMAS includes source code, object code, execution procedures, and the Application Logic Manual, if ordered as optional basic material. These are some general features which all applications have: Designed to fit industry requirements Security codes to deter unauthorized use of master files In-house inclusion/exclusion of functions to be executed Oel procedures, Sort specifications, and proceSSing programs are packaged into logical work units which Simplify system operation Monitoring of execution sequence prevents execution of a program until preceding programs have been completely and successfully executed Compatible online/ offline data entry through the system console or by means of diskettes created on a 3740 Data Entry System Dynamic Backup and Recovery System forces periodic backup of master files and edited transactions. and keeps track of what procedures need to be rerun from the last backup point to recreate up-to-date master files Reprint options are possible because file updating is separated from report writing functions Product Definition and Costing Some report printing can bo doferred to a more convenient time Payroll Selective printing options are availablo for many report functions Accounts Payable General Ledger Production ~tatus and Costing: The system combines two data entry approaches - operator-oriented and batch-oriented. Support is provided:.fpr transaction entry through the System/32 keyboard or throughi.S" diskette created on a 3740 Data Entry System. The nine easy..;to-operate applications can be installed in separate stages at different times and still be an interrelated system. The only requirement is that Order Entry and Invoicing (5725-M39), and/or Inventory Management (5725-M35), and lor Accounts PRODUCTION STATUS AND COSTING (6726-M31) This program provides management information on jobs or shop orders from the point of release to the shop floor through the closing process. Also, it provides a means to build and maintain a job select file for retaining and releasing repetitive or standard jobs. This file contains information at an operation and material level. Jobs or shop orders may be released from the job select file and/or manually, based on individual requirements. During the release function the shop data base is created to provide for editing of feedback from the shop floor and for management reports. In addition to the creation ------- ----=- - :S~S: ISG PP 5725-M31.2 Do not reproduce without written permission Mar 83 Major Revision PROGRAM PRODUCTS System/32 MMAS (cont'd) of a shop data base, the release function creates a job worksheet to move with the work and a group of labor tickets for labor reporting. A Vendor Analysis Report indicates key business volumes and discounts lost and taken for previous year and current year. . The report function provides a variety of production and accounting reports such as Job Status, Work List, and exception reporting· for quantity variance or cost variance. These reports reflect variance from projection on both production and accounting information and may be . obtained in summary or detailed format. Accounts Receivable supports a combination of both open-item and balance-forward customers. Billing transactions are directly keyed or accepted from Order Entry and Invoicing if that application is installed. The updating function records information from the shop floor to· the shop data base at the operation and material detail level. Updates to the shop data base occur via labor, move, material issue, miscellaneous, outside operations and material receipts transactions. These transactions reflect the activity (hours and cost) and movement (quantity) of jobs or shop orders as they progress through the manufacturing facility. Transactions may be entered either manually or from other applications (Payroll, Inventory Management, and Accounts Payable) via the application interface. Upon completion of a job, the closeout function produces closeout reports in both production and accounting formats to allow the analysis of labor and cost projections against actual. After producing these reports the closed jobs or shop orders are removed from the shop data base. PAYROLL (5725-M32) This hourly/salary/executive payroll provides for regular, overtime, premium, vacation, and sick pay. It may be run weekly, biweekly, semimonthly, monthly. Hours may be entered daily or by pay period; if selected, balancing time worked to attendance may be accomplished daily or weekly. Exception hours provide time and one-half, double time, double time and one-half, and triple time capabilities. Rates may be selected from the Employee Master Record or keyed in as an override. Shift differential capabilities are provided for second and third shift. The differential may be defined as a percentage of the rate or cents to be added to the rate. Vacation/Holiday pay may be part of a regular pay check or on a separate check. A bonus payment is paid on a separate check with a flat percentage of income tax deducted. Sick pay may be fully non-taxable or only liable for income tax. Wages subject to Federal Unemployment Insurance (FUI) and State Unemployment Insurance (SUI) are determined. The ability to handle taxable or non-taxable adjustments, pay advances and employer-paid union benefits (taxable and non-taxable) is also provided. Once the gross earnings is calculated, deductions will be taken to reach net pay. In addition to calculating present Federal and FICA taxes, a standard tax algorithm is provided to calculate most present state taxes based upon customer-provided data. Local taxes may also fit the standard tax algorithm provided. The state disability insurance deductions also use a standard algorithm based upon customer-provided data. Miscellaneous deductions may be taken by percent, fixed amount, hourly rate, upper limit, or cyclic within a user-specified frequency. Union deductions may be taken by percent, hourly rate, or fixed amount within a user-specified frequency. Handwritten paychecks and paychecks never cashed (reversals) are also supported by the application. Once the payroll register and checks are printed, many analysis reports are produced: Labor Distribution, Job Distribution, Miscellaneous Deductions, Union Deductions, YTD/QTD Earnings, Workmen's Compensation Worksheet, and Payroll Journal. The presently formatted W-2 and 941-A reports are also provided. Tho capability is provided to pass transactions to the General Ledger application, if installed. These transactions will be applied toward company use only. Payroll may be on either a cash or accrual basis. If the cash basis is selected, no transactions are passed to the General Ledger. ACCOUNTS PAYABLE (5725-M33) Accounts Payable provides an Open Payables and Cash Disbursements function on either an accrual or cash basis. Invoices and credit memos entered may be multi lined and distributed by job, item number, cost type and General Ledger account number. Entries may be for standard or one-time vendors and may be open or prepaid. Credit memos may be entered manually or initiated automatically based upon a prior entered invoice. A Purchase Journal provides the audit trail for cost transactions entering into the General Ledger system and into the open payables file. An Open Payables Report is provided in due date or vendor sequenco. This turnaround document provides a mechanism to indicate payment by data, vendor or invoice, including partial payments, for Cash Disbursements. Invoices may be entered or placed In hold status to prevent inadvertent payment of invoices in question. A Cash Requirements Report is used to assist the controller In insuring sufficient funds are available and proper invoice selection was made before the checkwriting procedure begins. The Cash Disbursements Journal provides an audit trail for its transactions entering the General Ledger application and acts as the Check Register. Checkwriting and reconciliation are also provided. ACCOUNTS. RECEIVABLE (5725-M34) All transactions (that is, invoices, cash receipts, adjustments, and credit memos) are retained in an Open-Item File. This file may be purged daily or monthly at the user's request. An Aged Trial Balance with current plus four past periods is provided. It has multiple printing options (summary, detail, selected line, within limits). Delinquency Notices may also be printed. Late charges can be calculated for balance forward customers. Two optional formats are provided for the customer statements which are printed at month-end. The capability is provided to delay the printing of the statements until a more convenient time without affecting the closing of the books. An account status inquiry feature is also provided. INVENTORY MANAGEMENT (5725-M35) Inventory Management maintains a perpetual inventory and on-order status for each item. It calculates and prints on demand numerous management figures including: Economic order quantity, dollar profit and percent of profit, average monthly usage, turnover rate, and reorder point. Management reports are also provided: ABC Analysis Report, two types of Stock Status, Inventory Analysis Report, Physical Inventory Checklist, On-Order Status Reports, Inventory Valuation and Variance Report, and Inventory Reorder Report. It can also interface with Order Entry and Invoicing, Sales Analysis, Product Definition and Costing, and Production Status and Costing. PRODUCT DEFINITION AND COSTING (5725-M36) Product Definition and Costing provides manufacturers with an easy-to-use method of organizing bills-of-material and item information and calculating product costs using bills-of-material. Costs are built from raw material up to the finished end-item. Assembly costs may be recalculated when there is a change in the bill-of-material or in the assembly labor or material costs or burden. The user can simulate the effect of proposed cost changes in end-item costs due to changes in labor, material or burden cost. For all product costs the total cost of purchased parts is maintained separately as material cost. These costs are calculated and maintained level by level and make it possible for the user to identify the added value (Jabor, burden) for products and assemblies for tax purposes. Management reports can be produced when required since the cost information is stored in the Product Definition and Costing data base. These reports include costed bills of materia', cost reports reflecting either real or potential cost changes and variances (simulations), and special vendor where-used and final assembly where-used lists. The basic formats used for parts lists and where-used lists are single level, indented and summarized. GENERAL LEDGER (5725-M37) General Ledger combines all the transactions affecting the financial status of the company during the month. They may be entered directly as a General Journal Entry or may have been previously entered through interface with Accounts Payable or Payroll. At month-end closing time, Audit Registers and the Financial Statement Worksheet are provided to help verify that the user is still in balance before proceeding into the actual closing. The reports will also aid in generation of any necessary closing entries. An Income Statement and Balance Sheet are standard report outputs. The user can define these reports with an easy-to-use format description procedure. The financial reports can illustrate current financial data as compared to budget or h~storical information. Users may define their own chart of accounts or use a suggested account structure provided with the application. The fiscal year start month is user-defined. Multiple company support for up to ten companies is included. Any transactions passed from Payroll or Accounts Payable are applied to the first company only. SALES ANALYSIS (6725-M38) Sales Analysis reports summarize the activity and highlight the performance of items, customers, and/or salespersons. Selected reports may be printed in detail or summary, depending on the option selected at printing time. Since all data used in Sales Analysis can be entered through Order Entry and Invoicing, it should be installed to obtain full benefit of the Sales Analysis application. If Sales Analysis is installed with Accounts Receivable alone, only Salesperson and Customer Sales AnalysiS can be obtained; or with Inventory Management alone, only Item Sales Analysis can be obtained. ORDER ENTRY AND INVOICING (5725-M39) This postbilling program includes order entry and edit, invoicing, and preparation of an invoice register and price lists. The Order Acknowl- ------- ----:: - - ::FS'=f~ ISG Do not reproduce without written permission' PROGRAM PRODUCTS PP 5725·M31.3 Mar 83 Major Revision System/32 MMAS (cont'd) I edgement will show warehouse location. while the picking list is printed in warehouse sequence. Pricing options include selection of the actual selling price. a discount percent from a list price. operator-entered price. or a contract price by customer. Up to six user-assigned discount percentages by item and up to three tax percentages are provided; Quantity break prices can be established optionally by item. Order status and backorder status is provided by item. customer, or due date. Support is also provided for partial shipments and backordering or cancellation of the balance of the order. This application provides data for input into Inventory Management,' Accounts Receivable, and Sales Analysis. Two invoice formats are available. Picking list is optional and can be run either at order entry time or just prior to billing. Order acknowledgements are optional and may optionally be printed with prices. CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES IBM may provide marketing assistance in the installation of IBM licensed programs. However. the responsibility for providing accurate ordering information. personnel selection and training, installation, and continued day to day operation lies solely with the customer. Installation of System/32 licensed programs is a customer responsibility. SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS Each of thes'e' IBM 'Sy'stem/32' 'Industry Application Programs will execute on 16K or 24K models of the IBM 'System/32. The programs are compiled assuming either a 16K or 24K system. It is not intended that anyone customer install all nine applications on one IBM System/32. Because of volume and time constraints. there may be a requirement for providing offline keying on an IBM 3740 Data Entry System. If an IBM 3742 is to be used. it must have the 128-character record features (#5455 and #4004). , The Manufacturing Management Accounting System is intended to be an independent yet interrelated set of applications. Many functions have been included to protect the integrity of the master files. programs, procedures. and libraries. Because of this, no other user-written program may co-reside with any MMASapplication unless stringent coding requirements for these programs are met to insure compatibility with the MMAS applications. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS The application programs are written in IBM System/32 RPG II Programming language and execute under control of the IBM 5ystem/32 5ystem Control Program (5725-5Cl Version 2). IBM 5ystem/32 Utilities licensed program (5725-UT1), which includes 50rt. Data File Utility, and 50urce Entry Utility, is required for execution of the programs. The IBM 5ystem/32 RPG II Compiler (5725-RG1) is required if modifications to the source code are necessary. DOCUMENTATION (available from Mechanicsburg) MMA5 Application Guides: Production Status and Costing (G580-0029) ... Payroll (G580-0031) .. . Accounts Payable (G580:-0035) ... Accounts Receivable (G580-oo33) .. . Inventory Management (G580-0030) ." Product Definition and Costing (G580-0028) ... General Ledger (G580-0036) ... Sales Analysis (G580-0034) ... Order Entry and Invoicing (G580-0032). M MA5 lAP 5pecifications: Production Status and Costing (GH30-oo37) ... Payroll (GH30-0035) ... Accounts Payable (GH30-0036) ... Accounts Receivable (GH300031) ... Inventory Management (GH30-0032) ... Product Definition and Costing (GH30-0033) ... General Ledgor (GH30-0034) ... Sales Analysis (GH30-0039) '" Order Entry and Invoicing (GH30-oo38). Customer Self·Study Education: MMA5 Users Guide. Modules 1 - 4 Set of 4 Audio Topes (5V30-0072) ... Workbook " Introduction to MMAS (SR30-0104) ... Workbook 2, Product Definition and Costing (5R30-0105) ... Workbook 3, Inventory Management (5R30-0106) ... Workbook 4,Production Status ond Costing (5R30-0107). MMA5 Users Guide. Modules 6 - 8 5et of 4 Audio Tapes (5V30-0091) ... Workbook 5" Accounts Payable and General Ledger (5R30-01BO) ... Workbook 6, Payroll (5R30-0181) ... Workbook 7, Accounts Recoivllble, Order Entry ond Invoicing, Sales Analysis (5R30-0182) ... Workbook 8, 5230 Data Collection System 'Support (SR30-0183). Unlicensed Publications ... Production Status and Costing Runbook (5B30-oo38) '" Reference Manual Volume 1 (5B30-0039) .;. Reference Manual Volume 2 (5B30-0059) ... Payroll Runbook (5B30-0032) ... Reference Manual Volume 1 (SB30-0033) ." Reference Manual Volume 2 (SB30-oo56) ... Accounts Payable Runbook (5B30-0035) ... Reference Manual Volume 1 (SB30-0036) '" Reference Manual Volume 2 (5B30-oo57) ... Accounts Receivable ... Runbook (SB30-0020) ... Reference Manual Volume 1 (5B30-oo21) ... Reference Manual Volume 2 (5B30-oo51) ... Inventory Management Runbook (5B30-oo23) ... Reference Manual Volume 1 (5B30-oo24) ... Reference Manual Volume 2 (5B30-oo53) '" Product Definition and Costing Runbook (5B30-oo26) ... Reference Manual Volume 1 (SB30-oo27) ... Reference Manual Volume 2 (5B30-oo54) ... General Ledger Runbook (5B30-0029) ... Reference Manual Volume 1 (5B30-oo30) ... Reference Manual Volume 2 (5B30-oo55) ... Sales Analysis Runbook (SB30-0044) ... Reference Manual Volume 1 (5830-0045) ... Reference Manual Volume 2 (SB30-oo61) ... Order Entry and Invoicing Runbook (SB30-0041) ... Reference Manual Volume 1 (SB30-0042) ... Reference Manual Volume 2 (5B30-oo60). Licensed Publications Production Status and Costing Logic Manual (LB30-0040) ... Payroll Logic Manual (LB30-oo34) ... Accounts Payable' Logic Manual (LB30-oo37) ... Accounts Receivable Logic Manual (LB30-0022) ... Inventory Management Logic Manual (LB30-0025) '" Product Definition and Costing Logic Manual (LB30-0028) .. , General Ledger Logic Manual (LB30-0031) ... Sales Analysis Logic Manual (LB300046) ... Order Entry and Invoicing Logic Manual (LB30-0043). TERMS and CONDITIONS: 5ee PP Index --.--- ---:: - - :S~5: ISG PP 5725·M44.1 Do not reproduce without written permission Mar 83 Major Revision PROGRAM PRODUCTS SYSTEM/32 SHIPPING CONTROL for SUPPLIERS TO THE AUTOMOTIVE INDUSTRY 5725·M44 PURPOSE System/32 Shipping Control for Suppliers to the Automotive Industry provides solutions for many problems associated with planning, controlling and reporting shipping dock transactions for the automotive supplier. Shipping Control for Suppliers to the Automotive Industry addresses the requirements for both release orders and discrete quantity orders by generating a wide variety of planning reports, shipping documentation and reporting of completed shipping transactions, which assists suppliers in effectively managing and controlling their shipping operations. Providing any programs which might be required to interface with existing user· systems. Specifically, if discrete quantity orders are to be' processed in the shipping application, the order file must be prepared in the proper format. SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS Shipping Control ,has been designed for a minimum configuration of IBM System/32 mdl A12. The IBM System/32 mdl B12 can be used if the printing of cut form bills-of-Iading is not required. It is recomShipping Control for Suppliers to the Automotive Industry offers . mended that users of Shipping Control review with their marketing representatives their direct access storage requirements which are a opportunities for new name and first system account sales as well as function of the' size of the' master data files and transaction volumes. established data processing accounts in the automotive industry. It is The size of the user's files will dictate the size of the disk storage intended for automotive suppliers starting with enterprise locations with capacity required. Listed below is a guideline which will be helpful in at least 50 employees or 2 million dollars in sales, and ranging up to the ~etermining the user disk requirements. size of manufacturing plants of the automotive companies. Shipping Control for Suppliers to the Automotive Industry was designed DESCRIPTION to fit on the IBM System/32 with 5-megabyte disk capacity and the 80 Shipping Control is an operator~oriented system for suppliers, to the cps Printer (mdl A22),assuming the following volumes: automotive industry. The system is designed to operate in conjunction 1,700 Customer Master Records with Release Control for Suppliers to the Automotive, Industry 800 Destination' Master Records (5725-M45), or as a stand-alone, application interfaced, to, the 1,000 Item Master RecOrds customer's release order processing and/or discrete order processing 200 Routing Master Records systems through customer-supplied programs. The application is 4,000 Order Records designed for the needs of the automotive supplier by incorporating both 800 Open Shipping Activity Records batch and interactive modes of operation. All reports and shipping 450 Advanced Shipping Notification Records documents generated in the application are designed to meetthe needs for both the automotive original equipment manufacturers and the These volumes are not restrictive but can be used as a guide to " replacement market. determine if the customer's shipping control system and files can be contained within the minimum system. The minimum IBM System/32 An installation guide provides a step-by-step installation activity plan (mdl A 12) is supported if the customer daily transactions can be including sample reports and maintenance user data forms, 'control handled by a 4O-cps printer. . forms with suggested procedures, and other information necessary for a successful installation. The file sizes set in the distributed OCL reflect these volumes for a 5-megabyte file. The runbook provides the operator with the detailed instructions necessary to effectively operate Shipping Control and provide accurate Any changes to the" file sizes should be carefully reviewed by the and timely management reports for planning, controlling, reporting and customer and IBM Systems Engineer to determine the necessity for documenting shipping activity. more direct access storage, estimate of time required to convert OCL Procedures, and estimate of throughput performance. HIGHLIGHTS SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS Provides key planning reports: Schedule and Status Report showing the daily shipping schedule for current week, behind schedule position, current release position and last shipment date and quantity. Load and Routing Report showing projected daily shipments in terms of net, tare and gross weight with the associated carrier and routing instructions. Container requirements reports showing detailed requirement by customer andlor container part number. container Allows selection and printing of shipping documents in a batch mode or through interaction between the system and the operator. Picking slips may be printed in customer, part number, or location sequence. Load sheets selected in interactive mode allow the operator to view the customer's requirements and the total weight buildup as parts are assigned to the load. Shipper documents designed to meet the requirements of the original equipment manufacturer and the replacement market. Bills of Lading may be printed in the formats required for direct shipments or shipments through consolidation points. Provides a wide variety of reports of completed shipping transactions. Data files of shipping transactions are available for interfacing to other applications areas through user-supplied programs. . Creates advanced shipping notification data files for most of the major automotive manufacturers. Audit reports of all generated files are provided. . Interfaces with Release Control for Suppliers to the Automotive Industry (5725-M45) without programming modification. . CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES The customer is responsible for the following: Making all decisions regarding the application processing options (refer to Installation Guide for a discussion of system options). Acquiring all forms and supplies. Gathering all master file data and generating all master files. Preparing schedules. Providing for installation assistance if required. The programs in Shipping Control for Suppliers to the Automotive Industry are written in IBM System/32 RPG II and operate under the control of IBMSystem/32 System Control Program (5725-SC1). In addition, the IBM System/32 Utilities licensed program (5725-UT1) must' be available for sorting of data (SORT) and Source Entry Utility (SEU) for making procedure or RPG II source program modifications. If compilation of the RPG II source programs is required, the IBM System/32 RPG II Compiler (5725-RG1) must be available. DOCUMENTATION (available from Mechanicsburg) Profit Building Resources from IBM for the Automotive Supplier (G580-0066) ... Shipping Control Licensed Program Design Objectives (GH30-oo13) ... Release Control Licensed Program Design Objectives (GH30-oo14) ... Runbook (SB30-oo98) ... Installation Guide (SB300099). TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index --- --- ---- PP 5725-M45.1 Do not reproduce without written permission :: - - :E'f~ ISG Mar 83 Major Revision PROGRAM PRODUCTS SYSTEM/32 RELEASE CONTROL for SUPPLIERS to the AUTOMOTIVE INDUSTRY 5725-M45 PURPOSE System/32 Release Control for Suppliers to the Automotive Industry provides the automotive parts suppliers with solutions to many problems associated with processing and maintaining release orders from the major automotive manufacturers. ~elease .Control. offers a' means of easily maintaining accurate release information which may be used to better manage the planning of shipments, fabrication activities and material acquisitions. Release Control offers opportunities for new name and first system account sales as well as established data processing accounts in the automotive industry. It is intended for automotive suppliers starting with enterprise locations with at least 50 employees or 2 million dollars in sales, and ranging up to the size of manufacturing plants of the automotive companies. Any changes to the file sizes should be carefully reviewed by the customer and IBM Systems Engineer to determine the necessity for more storage, estimate of time required to convert OCl procedures, and estimate of throughput performance. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS The programs in Release Control for Suppliers to the Automotive Industry are written in IBM System/32 RPG II and operate under the control of IBM System/32 System Control Program (5725-SC1). In addition, the IBM System/32 Utilities licensed program (S72S-UT1) must be avail~ble for sorting of data (SORT) and Source Entry Utility (SEU). fo~ making procedure or RPG II source proQram modifications. If compIlation of the RPG II source programs IS required, the IBM System/32 Compiler (5725-RG1) must be available. . DOCUMENTATION DESCRIPTION (available from Mechanicsburg) Release Control is an operator-oriented system for suppliers to the . a~tomotiye !ndustry. The system is. designed to operate in conjunction With Shipping Control for Suppliers to The Automotive Industry (5725-M44), or as a stand-alone application. Profit Building Resources from IBM for the Automotive Supplier (G580-0066) ... Shipping Control Licensed Program Design Objectives (GH30-0013) ... Release Control Licensed Program Design Objectives (GH30-0014) ... Runbook (SB30-0095) ... Installation Guide (SB30(096). ~n in~tallation g~ide provides a step-by-step ~nstallation activity plan including sample Input and user data forms for file maintenance control forms with suggested procedures, and other information nece~sary for a successful installation. The runbook provides the operator with information necessary to effectively operate Release Control to provide accurate and timely management reports. HIGHLIGHTS Provides for key entry of release data with the ability to tailor the operator prompting to the specific release document. . Provides for the processing of machine-readable release data as if it were key entered. Audit reports are printed showing release status before and after update. \ Processes shipping activity and adjustments to update release status and to maintain shipping history. Provides management reports in detail and summarized formats. Allows inquiry into the release and shipping history' files for quick resolution of customer or supplier questions. Comes complete with source code, ready-to-execute. procedures and object code. ' Is documented with an installation guide, application logic manual and an operator run book. Provides for file maintenance to generate, list, update . or delete '. . master file records. DeSigned to interface with the Shipping Control for Suppliers to the Automotive Industry licensed program (5725-M44) without program modification. CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES The customer is responsible for the following: Acquiring all forms and supplies Gathering all master file data and creating all master files Preparing run schedule Providing for installation assistance if required SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS Release Control has been designed for a minimum configuration of IBM System/32 mdl A12 (Matrix Printer) or B12 (Line Printer). It is recommen~ed that users ~f the !BM R~lease C~ntrol for Suppliers to ~he Automotive Industry review With their marketing representatives their direct access storago requirements which are a function of the size of the master data filos and transaction volumes. The size of the user's file will dictate the storage capacity required. The minimum system was deSigned to handle the following approximate volumes: 800 releases (customer/part number) with. an average of three destinations each. 6,000 shipping history records, before a purge is necessary. The file sizes set in the distributed OCl reflect these volumes for a 5-megabyte file .. TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index --..---- -------- Do not reproduce .:.:::: :2~E: ISG witho~t PP 5725-M61.1 written permission Mar83 Major Revision PROGRAM PRODUCTS SYSTEM/32 CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT ACCOUNTING SYSTEM (CMAS) JOB COSTING ... 5725-M61 ACCOUNTS PAYABLE ... 5725-M62 PAYROLL ... 5725-M63 GENERAL LEDGER ... 5725-M64 PURPOSE The System/32 Construction Management Accounting System (CMAS) provides the construction industry with a complete, yet flexible method for managing their Payroll, Accounts Payable, Job Costing, and General Ledger. . CMAS offers opportunities for new name and first systems account sales in the construction industry. It is primarily intended for the general contractor with 1 to 7 million dollars in contracts per year, 25 to 250 employees; or the subcontractor with $65,000,000 in contracts per year, 35 to 250 employees. CMAS offers flexible applications specifically designed for the construction industry. CMAS key'reports help construction management effectively direct and control their business. The Construction Management Accounting System consists of four full function ready-to-execute applications. CMAS includes source code, object code and execution procedures. HIGHLIGHTS Independent or interrelated applications approach - Modular design facilitates sequential application installation. - A journal reference numbering system ties the four applications together when multiple CMAS Applications are installed. - Single data entry results in multiple application update Wide variety of reports and report options included • Management Reporting is a byproduct of normal data entry - All applications provide for multicompany entries and reports - Field reporting allows for projecting profit and loss by joh Uses recognized accounting techniques and terminology to provide a solid accounting system. - Clear audit trails and control techniques are provided - Sample user-oriented forms for data preparation, file creation and audit and control are provided - Security code deters unauthorized inquiry or execution of key programs in each application CMAS can be installed without customer programming capability - System tailoring procedure on-site to facilitate account growth changes - Display Screen input prompting and output report formats are tailored to meet specific customer requirements - Complete, system-controlled, operator oriented input prompting - Complete file maintenance and audit programs and procedures - Installation and operator self-study training exercises . are provided to each customer DESCRIPTION The Construction Management Accounting System is a set of four independent, interrelated, ready-to-execute applications for the small to medium size contractor/subcontractor. The system combines two approaches - operator-oriented and batch reporting. This approach and programming system provides a sound accounting base by doing Payroll with Labor Distribution, Accounts Payable with Subcontract Accounting, Job Costing with Management Reporting and General Ledger with Financial Statements. The four easy-to-operate programs may be installed in separate stages at different times and still be a totally interrelated system, that is, payroll data may be passed by the system directly to general ledger and job costing, etc. Each application contains a requirements file with user questionnaire responses which allows the application to select Input formats, report formats, and functions to suit each customer's needs. These responses are keyed in during initial installation and may be changed as customer needs change. The systems tailoring procedure controls the prompting of input records and fields to be entered, the types of reports and fields on reports, and data files used for output. Systems tailoring procedure .is a procedure requesting the answers to a series of questions regarding a contractor's company requirements. Systems tailoring provides the following: Tailoring the system on-site at installation time Application reprogramming is not required as business changes because system tailoring parameters can be changed by the customer The programs contain all the announced functions, but only required functions are performed by the system Applications may be installed in any sequence System tailoring options include the following: - Multiple companies or single Multiple states or single Multiple unions or no unions Custom formatting of Balance Sheets and Income Statements An installation guide provides a step-by-step installation activity plan including suggested numbering systems, sample input and maintenance user data forms, control forms with suggested procedures, and other activities necessary for a successful installation. The runbook provides the operator with activities necessary to effectively operate CMAS as an accounting system to provide accurate , and timely management reports. Two self-study guides lead the user through the installation guide, runbook, and associated materials to assist the self-sufficient customer. JOB COSTING (5725-M61) General Journal entries with cost distribution may be entered with distribution by company, job, pay item, cost code, and cost type. Job Costing automatically updates the General Ledger component, if available. General Ledger is then updated on a monthly basis. Job Costing is automatically updated by the Accounts Payable application, if installed. Payroll reports, when used with the Job Cost reports provide a total perspective of job status. Job Cost management reports are provided with unit costs, budget comparison, and projected profit or loss based on field reporting of percent complete or quantity 'put-in-place'. Income reporting with distribution provides the basis for cash flow reports by company and by job. ACCOUNTS PAYABLE (5725-M62) Invoices and credit memos entered may be multiline and distributed by company, job, pay item, cost code, and cost type. The entries may consist of vendor, miscellaneous, estimated or subcontract invoices. Prepaid invoices are permitted on all of the invoice types. Credit memos may be entered manually or initiated automatically based on a prior enter .invoice. Subcontract accounting provides for automatic movement and accountibility of retainage and change orders. Subcontracts are maintained on either a balance forward or open items basis. Subcontract status reports by job and by vendor denote the contract amount, change orders, billed amount and date, payment amount and date, retention, and taxes. An accrued accounting system provides for timely job cost information, while a cash flow handling capability indicates job cash position through the general ledger. The Accounts Payable application provides an Open Payable and Cash Disbursements function. An Open Payable report is provided in due date or vendor sequence. This turnaround document provides a mechanism to indicate payment by date, job, vendor, or invoice, including partial payments for Cash Disbursements. Invoices may be entered or placed on hold status to prevent inadvertent payment of invoices in question. A Cash Requirements report is used to assist the controller in insuring funds are available and proper invoice selection was made before the check writing procedure begins. Check writing and reconciliation are provided. The check format provided includes a user-indicated check stub length to adapt the size of the remittance advice. Stub overflow initiates a separate supplementary stub. An Accounts Payable trial balance is available in job or vendor . sequence. A Vendor Analysis Report indicates key business volumes and year. by~ quarter PAYROLL (5725-M63) This hourly/salary distributed payroll provides for regular, overtime, premium, vacation, sick and travel pay. It may be run weekly, biweekly, semimonthly, or monthly. Exception hours provide ~me and one-half, double time, double time and one-half, and tripl~:;'time capabilities. Rate selection may be standard, selected by· craft, 'PI: keyed in as an exception overtime or premium rate. -c., .• . --- - PP 5725-M61.2 Do not reproduce without written permission --- ---- :: - -~~E: ISG Mar 83 Major Revision PROGRAM PRODUCTS System/32 CMAS (cont'd) Clear audit and accounting procedures aid in maintaining an in-balance Payroll system. Handwritten checks (payoffs, special, etc.) are easily handled. Standard union deductions are used to prepare two standard union deduction reports. Multiple union reporting is supported. Workmen's compensation calculations and a workmen's compensation worksheet report provide a mechanism for weekly tracking of insurance premiums. A standard tax algorithm calculates federal, FICA. and all state income taxes based on customer-provided data. Local taxes may fit the standard tax algorithm provided. Deductions by percent, fixed amount, upper limit, and miscellaneous deductions. Taxable or non-taxable adjustments State Disability Insurance is calculated and reported. Federal Unemployment Insurance and Insurance are calculated and reported. State Unemployment Check writing and reconciliation are provided. A payroll journal provides a clear audit trail of entries to the CMAS General Ledger application. Labor cost management reports are provided with unit cost budget comparison, and projected profit or loss based on field reporting of percent complete or quantity put-in-place. The reports are available with distribution by company, job, pay item, cost code, cost type, and job class. 941-A, W-2, and Certified Payroll reports are provided. GENERAL LEDGER (5725-M64) General Journal entries may be entered for end of month closings or for out-of-balance conditions. Journal entries identified by journal names and numbers are indicated on the Financial Statement Worksheet and Trial Balance Listing. These entries are automatically accepted from the Payroll, Accounts Payable, and Job Costing applications. On an out-of-balance condition, a procedure is provided to rearrange the entries into journal reference number sequence and print out a selective audit listing. This listing can be compared with the monthly journals to quickly identify the out-of-balance entry. An Income Statement and Balance Sheet are standard report outputs which provide the user with the flexibility of defining these reports with an easy-to-use format description procedure. This definition may be changed as needs vary. Financial reports can iIIustrato current financial data as compared to budget or historical information. Users may define their own chart of accounts or use a suggested account structure provided with the application. The fiscal year start date is user defined. Application Files (Online all the time) 476 Payroll System - 250 Active Employees Design -Payroll System File - 3 Records -Employee Master - 250 inactive, 250 active employees -Current Hours - 1,400 Distributions / Pay Period -Employee Deductions - 2,000 Deductions for active or inactive -Check Reconciliations - 1,250 Outstanding Checks (250 checks x 5 weeks) -Job Classifications - 65 Job Classes -Distribution - 160 Payroll Distribution Codes -Active Labor Cost Distributions - 700 Weekly Distributions -Union Master Deductions - 80 Union Deductions 10 Unions + (10 Unions x 7 deductions/union) -Monthly Union Deductions - 3,000 deductions -Tax Tables Federal/State/Local - 30 tax brackets (Federal, single, weekly, 10 $ Brackets) -Employee State and Local Taxes - 2,000 Deductions with additional withholding (2 states x 2 locals x 500 active/inactive employees) -Insurance File - 155 Insurance company masters -Insurance Summary - 1,200 Employee Workmen's Compensation Accounts Payable - 1,200 checks design 401 -Payables Systems File - 3 records -Active Vendor Master - 900 name and address -Checks Written - 1,200 check/ month -Open Payables Distribution - 1,000 Outstanding Invoices with three distributions per invoice (3,000 records) -Active Subcontracts - 1,000 Subcontracts -Payables Work File - 1,400 Invoices and distributions Job Costing - 100 Job Vouchers/Month Design 117 -Job Costing Systems File - 3 records -Job Work File - 400 Job Vouchers/Batch -Job Name Master - 240 Active Jobs -Job Cost Detail - 2,100 Costing Entries (Active Job Costing Distributions + Income Distributions) 389 General Ledger - 200 Journal Entries/Month -General Ledger Systems File - 3 records -General Ledger Work File - 200 General Journal Entries -General Ledger Chart of Accounts - 800 accounts -Temporary General Ledger Account Transactions - 9,200 entries -General Ledger Format - 400 formatting records Application Work Files Area (Loaded by Application) Paid for CMAS User 208 6 1,968 Total Blocks The OCL and file sizes, as distributed, have been fixed· at the maximum capacity with normal distribution for the 5 MB file. Any changes to file sizes other than those shown above should be carefully reviewed by the customers and IBM System Engineering to determine the necessity for more storage, estimate of time required to convert OCL procedures, and estimate throughput performance. IBM may provide marketing assistance in the installation of IBM licensed programs. However, the responsibility for providing accurate ordering information, personnel selection and training, installation, and continued day-to-day operation lies solely with the customer. The IBM System/32 disk is backed up by dumping the disk to multiple diskettes. IBM-supplied system programs are provided to the user on diskettes initially and should be retained by the user for backup. The user-created application data files must also be backed up on diskette. Users are required to provide their own backup diskettes for CMAS procedures, programs, and data files. Installation of System/32 licensed programs is a customer responsibility. Number of User-Supplied Diskettes Required for Backing Up the System/32 Distributed System and Data Files CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT System/32 Back Up· HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS This IBM System/32 program will execute on all models of the IBM System/32. It is recommended that users of IBM Construction Management Accounting System (CMAS) review with their Marketing Representatives their direct access storage requirements which are a function of the size of master data files and transaction volumes. The size of the user's files will dictate the size of the storage capability required. Listed below are some guidelines which should be helpful in determining user disk requirements. Distributed System for System/32 5 Megabyte file (1 ,968 Blocks) Files Number of Blocks· . System Control Programming SORT Executable Code CMAS Executable.Work Units 239 34 98 ·,These block,fiijures are for the System/32 feature only. Single Level Double Level Payroll Accounts Payable Job Costing General Ledger All 4 Applications 18 12 8 13 38 36 24 16 26 76 -Includes Backing Up: Daily Transactions: CMAS MachineReadable Object Programs; Disk-Resident Application Files It does not include SCP 5725-SC1, Utilities 5725-UT1, RPG II 5725-RG1 machine-readable materials (PID shipment) or any other programs, procedures, data files, and spare diskettes to replace damaged or worn diskettes. The System/32 user will require either the sum of the backup diskettes for each application installed or 38 diskettes, whichever is less. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS The CMAS licensed programs are written in IBM System/32 RPG II and operate under control of IBM System/32 System Control Program (5725-SC1). In addition, the IBM System/32 Utilities licensed program (5725-UT1) must be available for sorting of data (SORT) and Source ------- ----- Do not reproduce without written permission :: - -~~§: ISG PROGRAM PRODUCTS System/32 CMAS (cont'd) Entry Utility (SEU) for making RPG II source program corrections. If compilation of the RPG CMAS source programs is required, the IBM System/32 RPG II Compiler (5725-RG1) must be available. DOCUMENTATION (available from Mechanicsburg) CMAS Specification Sheets: ... Payroll (GC21-5120) .. , Accounts Payable (GC21-5117) .,. Job Costing (GC21-5119) ... General Ledger (GC21-5118) ... Job Costing: ." Installation Guide (SC21-7624) ... Runbook (SC21-7630) .. , Accounts Payable: ... Installation Guide (SC21-7626) '" Runbook (SC21-7629) .. , Payroll: ... Installation Guide (SC21-7625) ... Runbook (SC21-7268) '" General Ledger: ... Installation Guide (SC21-7623) ... Runbook (SC21-7631) ... Job Costing Reference Manual (LY21-0549) ... Accounts Payable Reference Manual (LY21-0548) ... Payroll Reference Manual (LY21-5110l ... General Ledger Reference Manual (L Y21-0550) .. , Construction Industry Brochure for System/3 (GC20-1999). TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index PP 5725-M61.3 Mar 83 Major Revision ------- ----:: - -~~E: ISG PP 5725-RG1.1 Do not reproduce without written permission Mar 83 Major Revision PROGRAM PRODUCTS SVSTEM/32 RPG II 5725-RG1 PURPOSE System/32 RPG II provides the following capabilities: RPG II Language Level System/32 Device Support Auto- Report Binary Synchronous Communications (BSC) "System/32 Device Support" for the expanded definition of SET/KEY which replaces the function. Header specification entries have been added to specify UDATE formats of mm/dd/yy, dd/mm/yy, yy/mm/dd and to designate the edit character to be used with the Y edit code. The Shared I/O Access Method is supported. The MOVEA and SETLL operation codes are supported. SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT DESCRIPTION HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS RPG II Language Level: The RPG II language is supported as on the System/3 mdl 6. Overlays are automatically generated when necessary. Differences do occur due to different devices and SCP function. System/32 RPG II supports all models of the IBM 5320 and the following special features: System/32 Device Support: All the devices available on the System/32 are supported by s7:stem/32 RPG II, except the diskette drive. Through the use of System 32 OCL. the diskette drive is supported as an offline multivolume sequential input, output or update file. The shared input/ output access method is also supported. The following expanded device support is provided: SET/KEY Display Support: The field light capability (System/3 mdl 6) has been replaced by a prompting capability which will use messages stored either in the program or the library to prompt the operator. CONSOLE File Support: Through the use of normally coded File Description and Input Specifications, the CONSOLE File (keyboard/display) is supported in a buffered interactive mode. The operator is prompted by field name, one field at a time. All input is buffered and overlapped with processing. The program is coded to process records as from any other sequential input device. Auto-Report: Auto-Report is included with the System/32 RPG II compiler and includes the following features: Copy: Specifications may be cataloged in the library and included in any RPG II program via the COpy statement. It is especially useful for cataloging the File Description and Input SpecificatiOnS for which overrides may be coded to specify such thinqs as control levels. By using the COPY statement, only one description of the file need be catalogod and changed for all programs using the file. Page Headings: Page hoadings can easily be speCified on Output Specifications without tho need for Output Indicators or end positions. The hoading Is centered over the report complete with page numbers and date. Simplified Report Specifications: A report may be produced by listing on Output Specifications the fields desired in the order desired. On one Output Specification, the field, column heading, and an indication for column totals may be entered. The column headings, fields, and column totals are automatically generated. Binary Synchronous Communications (BSC): The Telecommunications Specification is supported in System/32 RPG II. Support of Binary Synchronous Communications will be provided by System/32 to communicate with: - - - Another System/32 with RPG II System/34 with RPG II and Assembler System/3 with ML/MP, CCP or RPG II System/7 with MSP/7 S/360 with any of the following: BTAM TCAM/NCp· CICS/DOS, CICS/OS S/370 with any of the following: BTAM TCAM/NCp· VTAM/NCP CICS/DOS, CICS/OS, CICS/VS IMS/VS S/360 mdl 20 with BSCA 10CS 3741 mdl2 or4 A 3747 A 5110 Computer System supported as a 3741 mdl 2 or 4 5231 mdl 2, Receive mode only. Supported as a 3741 mdl 2 or 4. - 5280 Distributed Data System • Note: The 3704/3705 Emulation Program (EP) or the Partitioned Emulation Program (PEP) extension to 3704/3705 NCP can be used to emulate the 2701. The BSC support for System/32 is supported on the host system as System/3 BSC. The RPG II device names are DISK, PRINTER, CRT, CONSOLE, KEYBOARD and BSCA. The user indicators (Ul-U8) may be turned on and off in the RPG II program. The status of these indicators may then be tested by OCL The DSPLY operation code is not supported. See #1005 Additional Storage #1100 1255 Attachment #2074 BSCA #3200 Data Recorder Attachment SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS A current version of IBM System/32 System Control Programming (5725-SC 1) is required. DOCUMENTATION (available from Mechanicsburg) Introduction to RPG /I (GC21-7514) ... RPG 1/ Additional Topics Programmer's Guide (GC21-7567) ... Disk Concepts and Planning Guide (GC21-7571) ... RPG /I Disk File Processing Programmer's Guide (GC21-7566). TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index --..--- ---- PP 5725-T21.1 Do not reproduce without written permission :: .::...: :S~§: ISG Mar 83 Major Revision PROGRAM PRODUCTS SYSTEM/32 MOTOR FREIGHT ACCOUNTING SYSTEM (MFAS) 5725-T21 PURPOSE This application provides small to medium size general commodity or . spe~ialty motor freight carriers with a powerful aid in managing their business. The MFAS Revenue Accounting lAP offers conventional revenue accounting functions to the small and medium size general commodity and specialty carrier in the motor freight industry. These functions are divided into the five categories of (1) Freight Bill Entry and Daily Reports, (2) Accounts Receivable, (3) Interline Payables, (4) Shipment Analysis, and (5) Owner/Operator Accounting. The application is designed to help the general freight and specialty carrier manage revenue accounting requirements and report prime motor freight sales and operational data. Volume 1 of the Application Reference Manual provides a step-bystep installation activity plan including sample input and maintenance data forms, file loading sequences, and control forms with suggested procedures. Volume 2 of the Application Reference Manual provides information on the day-to-day use of the application. The Runbook provides the operator with a detailed set of instructions showing all the activities necessary to run the procedures on a System 132. The Operator Reference Summary Card is provided for the operator as a reminder of the major operational functions of each procedure. It is intended to be used once the operator is thoroughly familiar with the particular procedure. Instructional material with exercises is provided to train the operator in the use of the Runbook. The entry of data from a coded copy of the freight bill establishes records for daily statistical reporting, accounts receivable, interline payables, shipper / consignee and interline statistics and shipment analysis. An Application Logic Manual is provided, for use by the self-sufficient customer and for systems engineering continuing support. It describes the architecture of programs, procedures, data base cross references, data dictionary, and detailed descriptions of each program. The entry of the owner/operator accounting data produces records of owner / operator freight bill revenue, expenses, charges, advances, and settlement amounts. Owner/operator accounting will also produce settlement sheets detailing those items used in settling with the owner/operator. Owner/operator accounting is by owner and/or driver or unit. Application Description: The Motor Freight Accounting System is a full function, ready-to-execute application. Included are Source Code, Object Code, execution procedures, and the Application Logic Manual. HIGHLIGHTS These are some general features which the Motor Freight Accounting System has: Designed to fit industry requirements Security codes to deter unauthorized use of master files Wide variety of reports and report options included: In-house inclusion/exclusion of functions to be executed - Management and operational data reporting is a byproduct of normal data entry - Detail or summary listings within a range of keys is supported in many reports - Statements for freight bill accounts receivable optionally printed on stock paper or preprinted forms with or without tear off portion for turnaround document. OCL procedures, Sort specifications, and processing programs are packaged into logical work units which simplify system operation The Motor Freight Accounting System can co-reside in the System/32 with the Distribution Financial Accounting System and all application areas with the exception of owner/operator accounting can supply data to general ledger. Uses recognized accounting techniques and terminology to provide a solid accounting system: - Clear audit trails and control techniques are provided - Sample user-oriented forms for data preparation, file creation, audit and control are provided - Security code deters unauthorized execution of programs - A journal reference numbering system supplies an audit trail for any area that generates transactions for the DFAS General Ledger Can be installed without customer programming capability: - System tailoring procedure facilitates account growth by allowing on-site changes to file sizes and determination of functions used - File maintenance and audit procedures provided - Detailed runbook - Operator self-study course is available - Step-by-step installation activity plan provided by the Application Reference Manuals - User's information supplied to the supervisor by the Application Reference Manuals DESCRIPTION The Motor Freight Accounting System is a ready-to-execute application for the small to medium size motor carrier. The system uses the Data File Utility as its data entry approach. Support is provided for transaction entry through the System/32 keyboard or through a diskette keyed offline on a 3740 Data Entry System. The Motor Freight Accounting System Revenue Accounting lAP can be installed with the Distribution Financial Accounting System General Ledger, Accounts Payable, and Payroll lAPs in separate steps, at different times and be an interrelated system. The System Tailoring Procedure utilizes the answers to a series of questions regarding a carrier's requirements. It provides the following: Tailoring the application on-site at installation time. Allows the users to change selections of provided functions as the business changes. All provided functions are included in the programs but only reql;lired functions are executed. File sizes may be expanded or contracted as needed by rerunning the System Tailoring Procedure. Monitoring of execution sequence prevents execution of a program until preceding required programs have been completely and successfully executed Compatible online/offline data entry through the System/32 console or by means of diskettes keyed offline on a 3740 Data Entry System. Dynamic Backup and Recovery System forces periodic backup of master files and edited transactions and keeps track of what procedures need to be rerun from the last backup point to recreate up-to-date master files Reprint options are possible because file updating is separated from report writing functions Selective printing options are available for many report functions CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES IBM may provide marketing assistance in the installation of IBM licensed programs. However, the responsibility for providing accurate ordering information, personnel selection and training, installation, and continued day-to-day operation lies solely with the customer. Installation of System/32 licensed programs is a customer responsibility. SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS The IBM System/32 Industry Application Program feature will execute on all models of the IBM System/32 which have 24K bytes of main storage. The programs are compiled assuming a 24K system. Because of volume and time constraints, there may· be a requirement for providing offline keying on an IBM 3740 Data Entry System. If an IBM 3742 is to be used, it must have the 128-character record features (128-character feature #5455 and feature group A #4(04). SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS The application programs are written in IBM System/32 RPG " Programming language and execute under control of the IBM System/32 System Control Programming (5725-SC1 Version 5). IBM System/32 Utilities licensed program (S725-UT1), which includes Sort, Data File Utility, and Source Entry Utility, is required for execution of the programs. The IBMSystem/32 RPG II Compiler (5725-RG1) is required if modifications to the source code are necessary. DOCUMENTATION (available from Mechanicsburg) Runbook (SB30-0111) ... Reference Manual Vol. 1 (SB30-0112) ... Reference Manual Vol. 2 (SB30-011~) ... Logic Manual (LB;30-0114). ------- ----:: - - :§':f§: Do not reproduce without written permission ISG PROGRAM PRODUCTS System/32 MFAS (cont'd) Education: Industry Marketing Education Self-Study Binder (ZR30-0202) ... Industry Marketing Education Self-Study Workbook Vol 1 (SR300203) ... Industry Marketing Education Self-Study Workbook Vol 2 (ZR30-0207) ... Industry Marketing Education Audio Cassettes (ZV30-0098). RPQs ACCEPTED: No TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index PP 5725-T21.2 Mar 83 Major Revision ------- - - - -:: - -~~E: ISG PP S72S-UT1.1 Do not reproduce without written permission Mar 83 Major Revision PROGRAM PRODUCTS SYSTEM/32 UTILITIES S72S-UT1 , PURPOSE The following utilities are provided with the Utilities licensed program: The ability to move statements around in a program. The ability to include statements from another library member. Data File Utility (DFU) The ability to delete statements. Sort Statement insertion. Source Entry Utility (SEU) The following data base management functions are provided as part of DFU: - Data File Creation and Maintenance - Data File Inquiry - Data File List DESCRIPTION All functions of the above utility take advantage of cataloged RPG II File Description and Input Specifications. To use any of the functions, the user need only know the name of the file and the name of the cataloged RPG II specifications. The functions will prompt for all the other information necessary to tailor the job to the user's task. Field names are included with the prompts to aid the user in selecting the data fields to be used. Data File Creation and Maintenance: This function provides the necessary capabilities to create and maintain data files in a data base. Maximum use is made of the display to prompt the operator by field name for the data to be entered. For update, the data currently in the field is displayed. This function operates only with indexed sequential files. Highlights include: Formatted Report for an Audit Trail Auto- Duplication of Fields Control Totals Generated Keys Modulus 10 and 11 Self-Check Digit , Data File Inquiry: This function provides the necessary capability to allow inquiry into a file. Any indexed file may be inquired into. The records are displayed showing the current status of the information in the file. Highlights include: Retrieval by record key The capability to roll forward or backward in key sequence through the file. The ability to optionally print a record with the 'PRINT REC' command key. All displayed fields include column headings for easy identification. Data File List: This function provides the capability to list and summarize selected information from any indexed or sequential file in the data base. The function is very useful for obtaining one-time reports and for creating recurring management reports. Highlights include: Page headings including date and page number Column headings Edited data fields Column totals - both final and subtotals Selection based on record codes and/or field values Sort-Ascending or Descending Summary list with totals only Retrieve and print data from a related file Calculate and print additional fields Sort: The System/32 Sort utility provides the function and capability of the proven System/3 Sort. Highlights include: Selection based on field contents: for example, record codes - Support of any data field ADDROUT (Tag) Sort Summary Sort Automatically allocated work file Ascending or descending sequence Sourco Entry Utility (SEU): SEU can be used to create and maintain OCl procedures, RPG " and FORTRAN IV source statements and SORT source statements. Highlights include: Sort formats to aid in entering Sort statements. RPG II and Auto-Report formats to aid in entering RPG II and Auto-Report statements. Optional RPG " and Auto-Report syntax checking Optional resequencing of statements in library. Rolling forward or backward through cataloged statements. Optional listing of statements. Use of display to show statement being entered or updated. SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS IBM System/32 Utilities licensed program supports all models of the IBM 5320 and #1005 Additional Storage. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS A current version of IBM System/32 System Control Programming (5725-SC1) is required to support IBM System/32 Utilities licensed program (5725-UT1). TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index ------- - - - ----- Do not reproduce without written permission =- -:§~~ ISG PROGRAM PRODUCTS SYSTEM/32 FILE CONVERSION UTILITY (FCU) 5725-UT2 PURPOSE The File Conversion Utility (FCU) is a stand-alone System/32 utility accepting input from and providing output to 5321 Magnetic Card Unit or fixed disk (Link Direct Access Method [LOAM], sequential, direct or indexed sequential file organization). DESCRIPTION Functions Convert numeric fields to packed, unpacked or signed binary. Convert monocase EBCDIC characters to lowercase or to proper noun (characters following blank or hyphen and first character of field converted to uppercase; all others converted to lowercase). Convert lowercase EBCDIC to uppercase. Format numeric data for word processing (insert minus sign, insert decimals, right or left justify, suppress leading zeroes and trailing blanks). Resequence fields in an output record Insert constant data. Process selected records (include or exclude based on field comparison). Display audit totals (sum, maximum and minimum) for packed or unpacked numeric fields over an entire file. Combine a primary Magnetic Card, LOAM or System/32 file with a secondary input file to produce a merged output file. (The secondary file must be indexed by a field in the primary file.) Can process up to 512-byte records. Support all System/32 Keyboard/Display character sets for update. Supports Magnetic Card data. Access variable-length characters. fields separated by field separator - Proper noun conversion exceptions. Names requiring nonstandard capitalization (such as von Fleet, McKinley, O'Connor) can be properly converted to upper/lowercase .by defining special conversion specifications. - Abbreviation expansion. LOAM records up to 512K bytes can be processed when 24K bytes of main storage are available. User instruction and/or input is provided the utility through data specification forms similar to forms used by RPG. This utility provides support for the sharing of stored information between application programs. The utility provide!:! the user with the capability of converting a file formatted for lAP or· data processing applications to a format acceptable to the word/text processing applications. Similarly, data entered into Document Libraries can. be used by other data processing programs after conversion by the utility (each user installation requires analysis for limitations). SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS IBM System/32 File Conversion utility supports all models and features of the IBM 5320. For IBM 5321 Magnetic Card Unit support to LOAM support, the Word Processor feature. (#6002) on 5725-SC1 is required. 24K bytes of main storage is required for processing records greater than 256 bytes. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS A current version of IBM System/32 System Control Programming (5725-SC1) is requirod to support IBM System/32 File Conversion Utility (5725-UT2). . TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index PP 5725-UT2.1 Mar 83 Major Revision ------- -------.:. ISG Do not reproduce without written permission ~ :§~E: PROGRAM PRODUCTS SYSTEM/32 STATISTICAL SYSTEM 5725-XA1 ,PURPOSE The System/32 Statistical System is a set of routines offered for use by Problem Solvers to satisy their needs in statistical data analysis. This licensed program is a set of four major tools: Stepwise· Linear Regression Analysis, Factor Analysis, Analysis of Variance, and Orthogonal Polynomial Curve Fitting. This flexible statistical system accepts user-supplied commands and data which instruct the system to perform one or more of the above analyses. Many options are available to the user, as described below. Orthogonal Polynomials Curve Fitting - derivatives can be obtained ... polynomials can be reentered for evaluation at a specified set of points. Analysis of Variance - four factors are allowed ... balanced designs can be analyzed, using factorial techniques ... a program for arranging the Analysis of Variance table to conform to specific design needs is included. Factor Analysis - twenty-five variables are allowed ... eigenvalues produced using the QR algorithm matrix output from programs can be used as input for later analyses ... orthogonal and oblique reference frames are possible. Stepwise Linear Regression Analysis - matrix output can be used and pooled with other matrices for use as input in later analysis ... twenty-five variables are allowed ... deletion and entry of variables are automatic. In addition, many output report options may be selected by the user. HIGHLIGHTS Data irtput to the Statistical System can be entered from the keyboard at the time of execution or read from the disk (stored from a previous run) or read from disk where the data had been created offline and transferred from diskette. Output to be retained will be saved on disk. Although FORTRAN coding knowledge is desirable,· it is not required to use the Statistical System. Prompting messages on the display device will aid the user in selecting options available. Interactive response is provided for the user via the keyboard. Error checking and associated messages will be furnished. CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES This program is distributed in machine-readable form (diskette). It is the customer's responsibility to provide for safekeeping of the diskette to ensure continued operation (back-up). A User's Guide is also provided. Procedures for installation are furnished. SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENTc HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS The IBM System/32 Statistical System is designed to operate on all models of the IBM System/32. The IBM System/32 Control Storage Increment (#1500) is required. FORTRAN graphics on IBM 5320 Band C models are provided by the 64-character EBCDIC print belt or by a new 48-character FORTRAN print belt. This new belt is recommended and may be ordered as #9492 as the belt provided with the system, or as feature #5552 as an additional print belt. IBM 5320 A models automatically provide FORTRAN graphics. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS The IBM System/32 System Control Programming (5725-SC1), Version 6 or later is required. RPQs ACCEPTED: No TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index PP 5725-XA1.1 Mar 83 Major Revision ------- ----- PP 5725-XA2.1 Do not reproduce without written permission :: - -:5~~ ISG Mar 83 Major Revision PROGRAM PRODUCTS SVSTEM/32 RETAIL DATA PREPARATION 5725-XA2 PURPOSE The System/32 Retail Data Preparation licensed program is designed to satisfy the basic functional requirements of retailers. It is available for a System/32 with 32K. It provides flexible, ready-to-execute programs specifically designed for processing transaction log data produced on 5265 Point-of-Sale Terminals. HIGHLIGHTS Transaction data may come from diskettes created on 5265 Point-of-Sale Terminals (TP or hand carry). Processing frequencies are user-specified, governed only by file capacities and execution of prerequisite programs. File sizes can be periodically reallocated. Process-convert-separate transaction log data. Establish control counts. Publications: The RMAS General Information Manual contains a description of RMAS and its application features and functions as they may be used by a typical customer. It contains three sections. The first introduces IBM's retail offering, as it pertains to the 5265 terminals, with special attention to the licensed programs, of which Data Preparation is the only one for System/32. The second provides more detailed information on the major functions and operations associated with the application programs. The last section reviews installation and planning tasks, and customer responsibilities. The Data Preparation User's Guide provides the technical planning, reference, and operational information needed to understand, install, manage, and use Data Preparation. A Logic Manual is provided, as licensed material, for use by the self-sufficient customer and for the systems engineer in maintaining and modifying Data Preparation. The Logic Manual contains information on naming conventions, controls, program functions and specifications, problem determination and resolution steps and other application-independent information. In addition, the Logic Manual will contain information that is relevant to the application, such as program descriptions, cross-reference lists and data dictionary. CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES IBM may provide marketing assistance, in the installation of IBM licensed programs. However, the responsibility for personnel selection and training, installation, and continued day-to-day operation lies solely with the customer. . Installation of System/32 licensed programs is a customer responsibility. SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS The minimum system configuration is an IBM System/32 consisting of: IBM 5320 System Unit mdl A01 (with 3.2 megabytes of disk storage) Two #1005 Additional Storage special features (to 32K) Although there is nothing inherent in the design of the IBM System/32 Retail Data Preparation program to prevent the use of the minimum system configuration stated above, the system configuration for a particular customer must be able to accommodate the expected business volumes, data base size, and operating requirements. The amount of disk storage required is influenced by: The volume of daily transactions The frequency of processing SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS The IBM System/32 Retail Data Preparation programs are written in IBM System/32 RPG .11 programming language and execute under control of the IBM System!32 Control Program (5725-SC1) (Version 8 or later). The IBM System/32 Utilities licensed program (5725-UT1), which includes Sort, Data File Utility, and Source Entry Utility, is required for execution of the programs. The IBM System/32 RPG II compiler (5725";RG1) is required if modification of the source code is . desired. DOCUMENTATION (available from Mechanicsburg) 5260 Introduction (GA21-9284) ... RMAS General Information Manual (GH30-0136) ... Executive Brochure (G580-0201) ... Product Brochure (G580-0202) ... Industry Segment Brochures: ... Department/Discount Stores (G580-0203) ... Specialty Stores (G580-0204) ... Drug Stores (G580-0205) ... Apparel/Shoe Stores (G580-0206) ... Hardgoods Stores (G580-0207) ... Home Furnishing Stores (G580-0208) RPQs ACCEPTED: No TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index ------- ----:: --:s'f~ ISG Do not reproduce without written permission PROGRAM PRODUCTS SYSTEM/32 SUBROUTINE LIBRARY - MATHEMATICS SL-MATH (5725-XM1) PURPOSE The Subroutine Library - Mathematics (SL-MATH) is a set of basic computational subroutines for the solution of. mathematical problems. It includes a wide variety of subroutines, but is not exhaustive. in terms of either functions performed or methods used. It provides powerful tools for the solution of many problems in industry, science, and engineering. The subroutines, which are designed as computational building blocks, operate on data that resides in main storage. Included are three subroutines dealing with optimization. The solution of a standard linear programming problem by (1) the revised simplex method with bounds and ranges and (2) the revised dual simplex method is provided. The third optimization subroutine provides for the solution of a capacitated network flow problem (generalized transportation problem). Sample programs will be provided for two of the optimization subroutines. HIGHLIGHTS Some of the characteristics of SL-MATH are: The subroutines are purely computational in nature. They do not contain references to external devices, but operate exclusively on data already contained in main storage. The user must prepare a main program calling the SL-MATH subroutines and must furnish, as part of this program, the input/output and, possibly, other operational routines for the total solution of the problem. All subroutines comply with the FORTRAN IV conventions. They are called by means of the FORTRAN CALL statement, and are executed according to the normal rules of FORTRAN IV. The numerical mathematics part often provides multiple algorithms for one problem class, allowing the user to choose the method . appropriate to the specific problem. Certain classes of errors are detected and flagged. The program takes appropriate action and warns the user. CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES The Subroutine Library - Mathematics is distributed in machinereadable form (diskettes). It is the customer's responsibility to provide for safekeeping of the diskettes to ensure continued operation (back-up). A User's Guide is also provided. The user must be familiar with FORTRAN and must prepare a main program. SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS The storage requirements for a specific problem will depend on the routines used, the size of the main program, and the data storage requirements. The IBM System/32 Control Storage Increment (#1500) is required. FORTRAN graphics on IBM 5320 mdl Band C models are provided by the 64-character EBCDIC print belt or by a new 48-character FORTRAN print belt. This new belt is recommended and may be ordered as Specify #9492 as the belt provided with the system, or as feature #5552 as an additional print belt. IBM 5320 A models automatically provide FORTRAN graphics. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS The SL-MATH subroutines require the following: IBM System/32 System Control Program (5725-SC1) Version 6 or later is required. IBM System/32 FORTRAN IV (5725-F01) RPQs ACCEPTED: No TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index PP 5725-XM1.1 Mar 83 Major Revisior -------- ------_.----- --- ISG ------ PP 5725-XX1.1 Do not reproduce without written permission Mar 83 Major Revision -~-- PROGRAM PRODUCTS SYSTEM/32 WORD PROCESSOR/32 5725-XX1 PURPOSE The Word Processor/32 (WP/32) licensed program provides a set of office-related word processing functions to process text information from a keyboard, store it in document form, and operate on and print this information in a batch mode. DESCRIPTION Word Processor/32 (5725-XX1), combined with the System/32, offers a comprehensive office data and word processing system. The Word Processor/32 licensed program provides programming that supports System/32 word processing features: 5321 Magnetic Card Unit Dual Case Keyboard/Display with keys and functions corresponding to standard typewriter keyboards Print features, including superscripting and subscripting This combination of licensed program and System/32 hardware features provides a comprehensive systems solution for: Document and letter generation from stored and original text Document editing at the magnetic card typewriter or via batch edit Creation, maintenance, sequencing, and selection of lists used for , mass mailing or miscellaneous administrative support Sharing data for word processing and data processing use Production statistics reports It provides functions ranging from automatic printing of data from magnetic cards prepared at a magnetic card typewriter, to comprehensive formatting and editing of long documents stored in a document library on the System/32 nonremovable disk storage facility. Word Processor/32 will execute with System/32 System Control Program (SCP), 5725-SC1. SCP feature #6002 is required. HIGHLIGHTS Existing functions of the Magnetic Card Selectric® typewriters are enhanced by providing automatic printing and extended word processing functions on the System/32. Multiple input media Magnetic cards recorded on (standard features supported): Magnetic Card Selectric® Magnetic Card II Magnetic Card/ A Magnetic Card Executivo® Communicating Magnetic Card Selectric® (in nonteleprocessing mode) - Format Feature on Magnetic Card II and Magnetic Card/ A for input or output - Standard· System/32 keyboard redefined to support one, of twelve-character arr.~I'!Q~ments (requires Dual Case Keyboard and Display feature #3400.) - Diskette created on 3741 or 3742 in monocase or upper /Iowercase convention. (3742 requires the 28-character blocking feature #5455). - Comprehensive document formatting including: - Stored formats for standard settings such as margins, tabs, line spaCing, page length, etc. - Headings and footings - Page numbering - Footnote control and numbering - Line numbering - Automatic pagination control including ability to keep blocks of text together or reserve white space on a page (for insertion of figures and tables) and controlled start/end of pages (sections, chapters, etc). - Right margin justification - Line ending adjustment to accommodate change (no adjust is an option). - Centering, - Superscript/Subscript, Word Underscore Document Generation from a combination of original text and prestored text. Documents can ran~e from simple letters built from paragraphs to mUlti-page specifications. Media Handling Efficiency through storage and retrieval of documents from System/32 nonremovable disk. Insertion of variables at designated places. within text, such as tailoring a form letter with name and address and personal comments. Decimal Arithmetic performed on numeric symbol values. Keyboard efficiencies including: - Automatic paragraph and section numbering . - Encoding/Expansion using three character 'symbols' to generate long names or phrases commonly used - Global change - Support of tables with: - Easy definition and entry - Headings centered on columns - Headings repeated on. multi page tables - Blank space optionally padded with fill characters - Right, left, and decimal alignment - Automatic layout of table between margins Forms fill-in with prestored definition of form and position of variables Mass mailing including: - Conditional generation of paragraphs or whole letters based on a test or comparison - Easy definition and edit of name and address files - Sequencing of letters; for example, into zip code order . . - Direct access to contents of a System/32 data processing file with data conversion to a format suited to text printing (unpacked, commas inserted, decimals inserted, names converted to upper /Iowercase, etc.) Preparation of' code-compatible magnetic cards for revision or playout at a magnetic card typewriter, except proportional spacing at Magnetic Card Executive. Revision of disk-resident text with editing instructions entered from magnetic card, System/32 keyboard, or diskette created on 3741 or 3742. Change list printed during edit provides ease of proofing. Author / operator 'comments' or instructions can appear in proof copy with automatic deletion in final print. Production statistics control information trailer sheet printed at the end of each task giving as appropriate: Date. operator. author. department, task name, number of output pages, number of output cards, number of input lines. Production statistics reports printed daily, weekly, or monthly detailing production volumes and system utilization by author, department, and job, including year-to-date summary. Administrative lists (personnel listings, telephone directories, sales and inventory summaries, document logs of location of incoming and outgoing correspondence, etc.) supported by: - Formatting and printing of lists with headings, page numbers, etc. - Word processing-oriented definition and update of lists - Sort and selection of lists via typist-oriented commands Document security prohibiting read/write access by unauthorized WP/32 users Alternate use of the System/32 for word processing and data processing applications CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES Document security including Document Class assignment Security Key assignment and Manual operations and backup procedures Data conversion Implementor, system operator, and typist training Installation of hardware and prerequiSite programs System/32 operation Installation of the licensed program SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS IBM System/32 with at least 3.2 million bytes of disk storage, 50lpm line printing speed, and 16K bytes of main storage capacity (an IBM 5320 System Unit mdl B or C). SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS This Word Processor/32 licensed program is distributed as IBM System/32 load modules. It is released to execute with Version 6 of the IBM System/32 System Control Program (SCP), 5725-SC1, and all subsequent versions and modifications unless so stated in a future revision of this document. Some production statistics report generation programs are written in RPG. SCP feature #6002 is required. Notes: -------:: -- --.- :§"f!: ISG Do not reproduce without written permission PROGRAM PRODUCTS Word Processor/32 (cont'd) 1. There is no increase in printing throughput on C model systems over B model systems for Word Processor /32 applications. 2. Some applications executing c;omplex PRINT task in a ~6K main storage environment may exhaust available main storage. If. this occurs, it will be called to the attention of the IBM. System/32 operator by a message, and will require the operator to rerun the PRINT task preceded by a PROOF task. The print speed, when executing most print tasks, will be less than rated printer speed. The speed of printing is dependent upon factors such as memory size and the complexity of the task formatting requirements of the application. ' 3. Thorough evaluation of each prospect's throughput and file sizing requirements must be made prior to proposal of either 16K main storage or 3.2 million bytes of fixed disk storage, or both. Support is provided for the following: IBM 5321 Magnetic Card Unit IBM 5321 Magnetic Card Unit Attachment Dual Case Keyboard and Display Half Line Space 48-character EBCDIC Print Belt 64-character EBCDIC Print Belt 96-character Artisan Print Belt 96-character Modified Courier Print Belt Magnetic Card Typewriters supported by Word· Processor/32 must have the Paragraph Indent Feature. DOCUMENTATION (available from Mechanicsburg) Product Flyer (G580-0095) ... Executive Brochure (G580-0094). TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index PP 5725-XX1.2 Mar 83 Major Revision ------- ----:: - -~'f~ ISG PP 5725-XX2.1 Do not reproduce without written permission Mar 83 Major Revision PROGRAM PRODUCTS SVSTEM/32 LETTER WRITING APPLICATION 5725-XX2 PURPOSE System/32 Letter Writing Application licensed program provides the System/32 user with the additional data processing capability of printing personalized letters for large volume distribution. The Letter Writing Application licensed program is directed toward the user with a System/32 installed or on-order, whose primary volume letter generation or response is nonexistent or presently done by means of preprinted forms or flyers. DESCRIPTION The Letter Writing programs produce a letter in upper and lower case with the ability to insert name and addresses into the address line, and other variable information into the body of the letter. When inserting variable information, the text line is spread, the phrase inserted, and unnecessary blanks deleted. The resulting line length must not exceed 80 positions or data will be lost. A maximum of 73 phrase characters, including phrase separator (», blanks, and shift designator ( - ), can be entered for anyone name and address record for insertion into the body of the letter. Multiple phrases are separated in the phrase field of the name and address record by the phrase separator (»,and are used sequentially as phrase insert characters. Logical OR symbols (I - upper shift 1) are encountered in the letter text. Labels can be produced from the Name and Address File as one-, two- or three-up across the page for mailing purposes. A statistical detail or summary report may be printed showing the number of name and address records on file by zip code or one of two user-specified codes (5 alphameric positions each). The system has three primary files; a Name and Address file, a Letter Text file and a Title Table file. .. The Name and· Address file contains first and last name, address information, a letter code, a title· code and 2 user codes. It also has space for limited phrases which may be inserted automatically into the body of the letter. The letter code specifies which letter, from the Letter Text file, the individual is to receive. This code may be changed if desired, so that all addresses in the name and address file get the same letter. The Letter Text file contains fixed format text lines along with control information for the selection of salutation format (casual or formal), letter style, tab stops, date location and spacing, and name and title default values, if they are not present in the name and address record. The casual format allows use of first names or nicknames in the salutation line while containing the surname in the address name line. Suffixes to the last name (Jr., Sr., etc.), may be specified to print on the name line but omitted from a formal salutation. The Title Table file contains thirty-six titles which may be specified in the name and address record by a title code. This information is automatically inserted into the name line of the address and salutation line, if desired. File creation is in the form of diskettes from the 3740 Data Entry System or through the System/32 keyboard. Maintenance is via the System/32 keyboard only. Text changes to the Letter Text file are limited to one line at a time. All text changes to the Letter Text file are done as a replace .function. This means that the entire line displayed on the CRT, a maximum of 40 characters including blanks, must be retyped. (40 characters represents 1/2 line.) Changes to the Name and Address file are handled in the same manner on a field by field basis. User codes in the name and address record. - A three-position letter identification code in the name and address record to specify the letter to be printed from the letter text file. ' - Two 'user codes of 5 alphameric positions each in the name and . address record to allow selective processing and sorting by user-defined data when printing labels or letters. Selective printing of letters from the text file by a letter identification code in the name and address record. Label printing 1-, 2-, or 3-up with optional print alignment pattern. Selective printing of labels or letters for any valid range of zip codes, or range within one of the two user-specified codes. Additional selective printing capability for restart of letters or labels (skip X number of records, print Y number of records). I Sort and print labels or letters in sequence by zip code,. or one of two user codes, or original entry sequence. Print total at the end of each label or letter run to show the number of labels or letters printed. Print a brief statistical report showing detail or summarized total for name and address records on file, by zip code,· or one of two user-specified codes. Print proof listing for all, or selected, labels or letters. CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES The 'customer is responsible for the following: Personnel selection and training: The customer is responsible for selecting at least one person who will oversee the installation and at least one person to assume the duties of an operator. The customer is also responsible for the coordination and education of the various departments affected by the installation. Providing for installation assistance if required and completing the file· sizing necessary to insure adequate disk space for proper installation. Acquiring all forms and supplies. Making all decisions regarding the application processing options or user codes in the name and address records. Gathering data for name and address file and generating all master files. Providing any programs that may be required to interface with existing user programs, PPs or lAPs. SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT Due to the unique upper and lower case printing requirements of IBM System/32 Letter Writing Application, throughput performance will not be enhanced by upgrading from an IBM 5320 mdl B2X to a mdl B3X. However, the joint letter writing/data processing user may require a mdl B3X for increased throughput when using a monocase print belt for data processing applications. Full operator guidance through interactive CRT prompting for ease- of- use. It is recommended that IBM representatives review their direct access storage requirements with their customers that have the System/32 Letter Writing Application. Storage requirements are a function of the size of the master data files and transaction volumes. The size of the master files will also dictate the size of the diskette storage capacity required. Input from either the System/32 keyboard or diskettes from the 3740 Data Entry System. Maintenance .is from System/32 Keyboard only. The Letter Writing Application was designed to execute on all Band C models of the IBM System/32. The following file capacities are programmed into the Letter Writing OCL statements: Routines for creation and maintenance of name and address records and their translation into upper/lowercase characters. 1,898 name and address records (256 characters each) in the Name and Address file 1,898 lines of text (96 characters each) in the Letter Text file 36 records in the Title file HIGHLIGHTS Routines for creation and maintenance of text files made up of multiple letters and their translation into upper/lowercase characters. . Routines for creation and change of title table file, which contains up to 36 title descriptions for insertion into the name line. Letters printed in block, modified block, or personal format. Casual or formal salutation. Variable phrase insertions Into the body of the letter from the phrase field of the name and address record. With the above file size allocations, the Letter Writing Application requires a minimum of 478 blocks of available data file area on the system's fixed disk for proper execution. This space is required only while using the Letter Writing Application, and may be returned for the use of other applications. after Letter Writing tasks have been completed. The above file volumes are not restrictive but can be used as a guide to determine if the Letter Writing files can be contained within the system where other Application files are also online. Further information regarding disk allocation, diskette requirements, and file size modifications are contained in the Application Reference Manual/Runbook (SH30-0207). Any changes to file sizes should be carefully reviewed by the customer and IBM Systems Engineering to determine the necessity for more storage, estimate the time required to convert OCL procedures, and estimate throughput performance. ------- - - - -- Do not reproduce without written permission :: - - :§'f§: ISG . PROGRAM PRODUCTS System/32 Letter Writing Application (cont'd) HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS This IBM System/32 licensed program was desi9ned to execute on all line printing Band C models of the IBM System/32. Matrix printing is not supported. In addition to the system, a 96-character print belt (RPQ #GG0339) is required for the upper/lowercase type. Program maintenance may be performed on all models of the IBM System/32. Dual Case Keyboard and Display (#3400) for the IBM System/32 is not supported by the IBM System/32 Letter Writing Application. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS The Letter Writing programs are written in IBM System/32 RPG II and operate under control of the IBM System/32 System Control Program (5725-SC1). In addition, the IBM System/32 Utilities licensed program (5725- Un) must be available for sorting of data. If procedure and source program modifications are to be made, Source Entry Utility (SEU) must be installed. If compilation of the RPG II. Source Programs is required, the IBM System/32 RPG II Compiler (5725-RG1) must be available. System and File Backup: The System/32's disk is backed up by dumping the disk to multiple diskettes. IBM-supplied system programs are initially shipped to the user on IBM-provided diskettes which should be retained by the user for backup. The user created application data files (Name and Address file, Leher Text file and Title file) may be backed up on one or more diskettes (depending on the size of the file), using the file backup procedure provided in the Letter Writing Application. The user is required to provide backup diskettes for procedures, programs, and data files. RPQs ACCEPTED: No TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index PP 5725-XX2.2 Mar 83 Major Revision ------- -------!.::.: :E~E: ISG Do not roproduce without written permission PROGRAM PRODUCTS SYSTEM/32 JOB ANALYSIS SYSTEM (JAS/32) 5725-XX3 PURPOSE The System/32 Job Analysis System (JAS/32) is a powerful tool to aid management in the planning, supervising, and controlling of projectoriented work by the critical path method. It is designed to be easily used by nontechnical personnel. The JAS/32 operates under the System/32 System Control Program, (5725-SC1). Depending on main storage availability, the JAS/32 has the ability to handle 275 to 736 activities or work items and relationships per subnet. HIGHLIGHTS Front-to-pack interfacing of up to 10 subnets to form a network with up to 7,360 activities. Up to 10 subnets per master file. Up to 32 calendars. Four types of time relationships between work items. Multiple starts and ends. Reports easily modifiable. Progress reporting specifying actual start date and/or remaining duration. Three types of schedule dates: Actual, data, scheduled. Nine levels of milestones. Free-form or fixed-data input. CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES All users should know the various features of this system before attempting to use it for actual project control. Users will need to know the fundamentals of the critical path technique before they can prepare input. The customer must describe the activities which form the project network. This data may be recorded on diskettes for entry into the System/32 using an IBM 3740. or it can be entered directly from the keyboard. Processing and report requests may also be entered in either fashion. The customer should provide for safekeeping of the diskette to ensure continued operation (backup). A User's Guide will also be provided. Procedure for installation will be furnished. SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS The JAS/32 is deSigned to operate on all models of the IBM System/32. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS IBM System/32 System Control Programming (5725-SC1), Version 6 or later Source Entry Utility licensed program (5725UT1). TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index PP 5725-XX3.1 Mar 83 Major Revision --- - PP 5726-F52.1 Do not reproduce without written permission --- ---:: - - :S~5: ISG Mar 83 PROGRAM PRODUCTS SYSTEM/34 MANAGEMENT SYSTEM FOR LAW FIRMS 5726-F52 [NO LONGER AVAILABLE, effective May, 1983.] PURPOSE The IBM System/34 Management System for Law Firms licensed application program offers the partners in a law firm a practical, convenient means of capturing time and disbursement data, and organizing that data into meaningful working documents and management reports. The application program is designed for the small to medium sized law firm. It is a complete set of programs designed to assist the law firm in time and disbursement accounting, billing and accounts receivable. These programs capture and store data which is then organized into reports to aid law partners in effectively controlling and managing the firm's business functions. In addition, it can be utilized with the MMAS General Ledger System licensed application program (5726- M37) to provide traditional general ledger functions such as balance sheet, Income statement and other reports describing the financial status of the firm. The System/34 Management System for Law Firms includes the components necessary for a controlled flow of daily time entries, disbursement entries (made on behalf of a client) and billing information, from data capture to final reports. Other entries, such as time or disbursements transfers, cash receipts, accounts receivable journal entries, file maintenance, and accounts receivable writeoffs, are supported. A series of comprehensive reports, with frequency of many of the reports being user-determined, is provided to the law firm. HIGHLIGHTS Provides Missing Time Report which flags individuals who have reported less time than the firm standard Provides a turnaround document for billing information on demand or periodically with all of the necessary information to make billing decisions and update computer stored records. Provides disbursement-only billing information memos on demand or periodically Prints client bills in a variety of formats Calculates the variance between the firm investment of time for a bill and the actual amount received on the bill Provides aged accounts receivable reports Prepares aged reports of uribilled time and disbursements Analyzes billed and unbilled time Nonbillable time can be tracked for management analysis. Billing Proofs can be used to verify billing attorney instructions. A broad range of time and disbursements reports is provided: - Weekly Time Report Missing Time Report Individual Time Summary Individual Unbilled Time Summary Disbursements Journal Billing Journal Unbilled Time and Disbursements The billing information function of the application processes time and client disbursement records to provide billing information to assist in the billing process. Features of the billing information function are: Produces Billing Information Memos on demand showing all reported activity performed by the firm for a client. This report is used by the billing attorney as a turnaround document to record decisions on actual amounts billed and/or written off. Enables the billing attorney to bill without relieving time entries (payment on account), by relieving time and client disbursement entries, or by relieving client disbursements only. Prints client bills in a variety of formats Produces Matter Billing Summary reports showing billing analysis for the billing attorney, the matter, or the client. Shows billing variance (the dollar difference between time value and fees billed) and billing realization (the ratio, expressed as a percentage, between fees billed and the value of the individual's reported and billed time). Prepares retainer lists showing billable retainer amounts. ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE The Accounts Receivable application offers a systematic procedure of recording and reporting client fee and disbursement bills, receipts and write-offs as well as the firm's cash receipts. Features of the Accounts Receivable application are: Aging of client accounts Allocation of fees and write-off amounts Summary or detail printing of the Aged Receivables Report Provides a file sizing program to create file sizes based on individual user needs Advance payments for fees and disbursements Provides system tailoring procedures for user to select functions Allows entry of billing information into Accounts Receivable without any supporting time or client disbursement entries Designed to be used with the General Ledger licensed program. Provides initial file loading, record addition, and data entry capabilities through keyboard entry or 3740 Data Entry System. Provides data entry for daily transactions through keyboard or 3740 Data Entry System .• All information is automatically adjusted and all transfers are listed for control and auditing purposes. Provides file maintenance on existing master file records which use DFU (keyboard only) DESCRIPTION TIME and DISBURSEMENT ACCOUNTING The Time and Disbursement Accounting application controls recorded unbilled time and disbursement entries made by the firm on behalf of a client, and provides a broad ran~e of management reports. The major . Time .and Disbursement Accou(ltmg features are: Additional time recording steps are not required of the professional staff. Aged unbilled time and disbursement reporting triggers billing activity and should help improve cash flow. Time and disbursement information is maintained in detail with tot~ls accumulated at the matter and client levels. One of two billing rates can be selected per individual. Time and client disbursement description codes are user-defined. Cash Receipts/Write-off Journal Paid Open Bill and Write-off Report Inactive Client/Matter List Features: Included as part of this application program are several features designed to enhance day-to-day operation. File maintenance is a part of every application within the program. Maintenance may be performed on descriptive data in all major files but not on auditable totals and dollar amounts. Checking procedures guide the correct sequence of operations to maintain data integrity. When an operation is not successfully completed due to missing or incorrect information, or due to an attempt to perform an operation out of sequence, the operator is notified that corrective action must be taken. The operator can then correct problems before running subsequent tasks, which are dependent upon the accuracy of prior input for proper reporting. Backup and recovery routines maintain a dynamic tracking history which records previously executed tasks. If recovery is necessary, the recovery routines guide the user in recovering required data developed since the last data back-up point. Reprint options are available for most reports. Reports can be reprinted to provide extra copies. If recovery is needed to recreate data files, report printing is bypassed, thus saving time. Narrative can be included or omitted as required. Selective printing allows the operator to specify various options to control the content and level of detail contained in reports. References to an Individual can be suppressed on selected reports. Printing options include: A single disbursement journal handles both firm and client disbursements. All or selected time or client disbursement records can be transferred from client-to-client, matter-to-matter, attorney-toattorney, or date-to-date. Range printing. For example, the operator may specify client identifiers as limits so that information IS printed only for the group of clients whose identifiers fall between those specified. . Selection of specific data. For example, the operator may select to print only matters whose unbilled disbursement totals exceed a specified amount. -------=:: - ---..:.---:5~5: ISG Do not reproduce without written permission . Mar83 PROGRAM PRODUCTS S/34 Management System for Law Firms (cont'd) Selection of detail level. For example, the operator may optionally request a detailed report or a summary report. Users may modify information that is subject to change, such as report selection criteria and aging periods. Individual security codes for time and disbursement accounting, accounts receivable and maintenance are user-assigned. at installation time. These codes may be periodically changed as authorization changes dictate. File sizes, which are determined at installation time, may be resized in the future to accommodate the firm's growth. CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES IBM may provide marketing assistance, in accordance with the Marketing and Service Guidelines in the GI section, in the installation of IBM licensed programs. However. the responsibility for providing accurate ordering information, personnel selection and training, installation, and continued day-to-day operation lies solely with ,the customer. Installation of System/34 application programs is a customer responsibility. SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT Support will be provided for this licensed program when it is operated in the following specified operating environment: HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS The minimum system configuration requirement is an IBM System/34 with: 32K bytes of main storage 8.6 megabytes of disk storage 40 characters per second matrix printer IBM 5251 mdl11 Information Display Station Because of volume and time constraints, there may be a requirement for providing offline keying on an IBM 3740 Data Entry System. If an IBM 3742 is to be used, it must have the 128-character record features 128-character (#5455) and feature group A (#4004). SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS IBM System/34 System Support licensed program (5725-SS1 Version 1), and System/34 Utilities licensed program (5726-UT1). TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index PP 5726-F52.2 --.--- ---:: - - :s'f§: ISG PP 5734-F03.1 Do not reproduce without written permission Mar 83 PROGRAM PRODUCTS OS FORTRAN IV (H EXTENDED) COMPILER . 5734-F03 PURPOSE The FORTRAN IV (H Extended) Compiler program product, with the FORTRAN IV Library (Mod II) program product, provides OS and CMS FORTRAN users with increased performance and additional functional capabilities. DESCRIPTION The compiler provides a compile time option which allows the introduction of source programs in either BCD or EBCDIC character codes. If a cross-reference listing and/or a structural source listing is requested, a data set for each option must be defined. This product includes language extensions to the Full FORTRAN language. OS Full FORTRAN language is compatible with and encompasses the American National Standard (ANS) FORTRAN. The language includes the following extensions to ANS FORTRAN: IMPLICIT statement allowing extended implicit classification by first character of a name. An extended type statement. including length specification. G-conversion, extended to cover all numeric and logical data types. Multiple entry points to subprograms, and non-standard returns from subroutines. Arrays of up to seven dimensions. PAUSE statement extended to permit output of messages. NAMElIST statement permitting input/output and conversion without an explicit I/O list and FORMAT statement Extended subscripts. Hexadecimal constants and FORMAT code. Support of the direct (BDAM fixed length only) data access method. Compatible extensions to the READ and WRITE statements to provide direct data organization in support of direct access storage devices. Mixed mode arithmetic. The T -specification, permitting printed output to begin at any print position. STOP statement allows the processing of codes for testing by OS Job Control statements. Enhancements to the OS Full FORTRAN language are: EXTERNAL Statement Extension ... the EXTERNAL statement is extended to provide the capability to' 'detach' the names of FORTRAN-supplied library functions and subroutines. This feature provides the user with the advantage of being able to supply his own functions or subroutines in the place of FORTRAN-supplied library functions and subroutines. The extension is achieved by the use of an ampersand prefixed to the function or subroutine name in its . appearance in the EXTERNAL statement. Automatic Precision Increase Option ... this feature enables the compiler to convert single precision floating point calculations to double preCision and/or double precision floating point calculations to extended precision. The Automatic Precision Increase option is a useful tool in precision conversion. Automatic Precision Increase assists in overcoming precision problems encountered in converting second generation FORTRAN programs to OS floating point format. SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS The FORTRAN IV (H Extended) Compiler supports all iBM OS machine configurations currently supported by' the OS FORTRAN IV (H) Compiler. In MFT and MVT, a minimum of 160K bytes of main storage is required for operation of the compiler, inclusive of data management. In VS1 and VS2, 192K bytes of virtual storage, and in CMS, a virtual machine of at least 600K bytes of virtual storage is required for the compiler. The standard instruction set and floating point option are required. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS The FORTRAN IV (H Extended) Compiler requires no additional data sets beyond the SYSIN, SYSPRINT, SYSLlN, SYSPUNCH, SYSUT1 and SYSUT2 data sets currently required by the FORTRAN H Compiler depending upon the execution options selected. Extended precision divide instruction is simulated for processors with extended precision instruction set. Extended precision add, subtract, multiply and divide instructions are simulated by the OS Supervisor for processors not having the extended precision hardware. The extended precision simulator is also available with eMS. Operating Environment: The FORTRAN IV (H Extended) Compiler operates as a separate component under OS MFT, MVT, VS1 and VS2, as well 8S under CMS. The FORTRAN IV Library (Mod II) (5734-LM3), or its equivalent, is required when compiling and executing under the FORTRAN IV (H Extended) Compiler. For extended preciSion floating point simUlation, the Extended Precision Simulation is required. COMPATIBILITY/CONVERSION CONSIDERATIONS The FORTRAN IV (H Extended) Compiler program product will compile programs written for the OS FORTRAN H Compiler. Object code compatibility will also be assured. Thus, users will not have to recode nor recompile their FORTRAN programs when obtaining this program. The disk format of CMS data sets are not compatible with OS, however, the data sets are transferrable through utilities or card or tape. It should be noted that ASCII data sets are not allowed under CMS. DOCUMENTATION (available from Mechanicsburg) List-Directed I/O ... List-Directed I/O facility enables the user to read and write formatted data without having to specify a FORMAT statement. In List-Directed READ or WRITE statements, an asterisk is substituted for the FORMAT statement number. Installation Procedure Letter ... FORTRAN IV Language (GC28-6515, TNL GN28-0595) ... FORTRAN IV (H Extended) Compiler and Library (Mod I/) Genera/Information (GC28-6884). Automatic Function Selection ... This facility simplifies the user's task of referencing built-in and library functions by obviating the need for codinQ specific or data dependent function names. Automatic Function Selection is requested by means of a new specification statement, GENERIC • TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index . The processor can be invoked under CMS using the CMS command FORTHX. The three most significant features of the FORTRAN IV (H Extended) Compiler program product are the ability to handle extended precision arithmetic and to support asynchronous 1/ O. Extended Precision ... FORTRAN is used extensively to solve complex scientific problems. As the number of operations performed on a piece of data Increases, so do the accumulated errors due to truncation. Higher procision, therefore, has to be used in certain stages of the computation to maintain the desired result significance. The FORTRAN IV (H Extended) Compiler provides extended precision support to assure optimum accuracy of computational results. Asynchronous I/O ... In the large systems area, where the requirement for reading and writing large logical records is frequent. this feature will offer significant performance improvement. (This feature is not available under CMS.) --------------.:..~ :5~5: ISG PP 5734-F04.1 Do not reproduce without written permission Mar 83 Major Revision PROGRAM PRODUCTS SYSTEM/7FORTRANIV HOST COMPILER and LIBRARY 5734-F04 • OS; 5736·F01 • DOS PURPOSE Provides high-level FORTRAN IV Language support for the System/7 user, enhances the System/7 Host Program Preparation Facility II, and offers to the System/7 user the ease and speed of coding in the FORTRAN language. System/7 FORTRAN IV (S/360/370 OS, DOS Host Compiler and Library) processes source programs written in System/7 FORTRAN IV, which is an extension of American National Standard Basic FORTRAN, X3.10-1966. The FORTRAN processor is installed on a host S/360 or S/370 under the facilities of OS/VS1, OS/VS2, DOS/VS, Operating System, or the Disk Operating System; and produces relocatable object code that is suitable, after link-editing and formatting, for execution on a System/7. System/7 FORTRAN IV requires the use of Host Program Preparation Facility " for processing object and load modules. The required facilities are: MSP/7 Macro Library/Relocatable, which contains IBM supplied sensor-based, input/output, and supervisory macros that are used by the System/7 FORTRAN IV programs, ASM/7 which assembles the MSP/7 macros, LlNK/7, which link edits the compiled object code and combines it with appropriate library and sensor-based subprograms to form a load module, and FORMAT /7, which accepts the output of LlNK/7 and produces a System/7 storage load. DESCRIPTION The Floating Point feature must also be installed in the host System. A minimum system configuration requires the following devices: 1111- Input device Output device Console Typewriter Disk Storage Device For its residence on the host, the compiler and library require the following number of tracks on an IBM 2314: OS 15 Compiler 12 Library DOS 11 Compiler (in the core-image library) 19 Library An additional 21 tracks are required for DOS if the compiler object modules are also kept in the relocatable library. Systemn (for execution) The minimum system configuration for executing on System/7 is the following: 1 -IBM 5010 Processor Module - 6K or larger 1 - IBM 5028 Operator Station To use FORTRAN direct-access or sequential I/O statements unformatted, an IBM 5022 Disk Storage Module is also required plus additional memory required by Symbolic File Support access methods. Use of the 5022 disk device also requires the Disk Support System (DSS/7) service programs. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS Compiler Supports all devices available to 5/360/370 FORTRAN IV compilers during compilation. Device statement support for the 5022 Disk Storage Module, the 129 Data Recorder, the 7431 Line Printer, the 5028 Operator Station, and BSCA during execution. Access, through CALL statements, to MSP /7 functions (including sensor-based input/output). Extensive syntax checking and diagnostics. Time and Space optimization for enhanced object-time perform~ ance. Library Sensor-based subroutines per ISA S61.1 Mathematical subprograms for exponential, natural logarithm, square root, sine, cosine, arctangent and hyperbolic tangent. Subprograms for extensive error handling and diagnostics, format conversion of numeric data, and input/output operations for the 5022 disk device (formatted and unformatted direct access and unformatted sequential records) and the 5028 Operator Station (ASCII data). Environment specification macro instructions to identify the user's FORTRAN input/output environment when configuring a storage load module for System/7. Modular and reentrant. CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES Understand the application they wish to perform and provide the appropriate hardware and software design. Generate a supporting system nucleus using the facilities of MSP /7 Host Program Preparation Facilities" on a S/360 or S/370. Provide the required user-written programs and link edit these programs with the MSP /7 nucleus on a S/360 or S/370. Load and test the resulting object programs on a System/7. Note: Generation of the supporting nucleus requires a thorough understanding of MSP/7. The user should consider attending the required MSP /7 education courses, or requesting IBM to provide this nucleus through Systems Engineering Services. SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS Host System (for compilation) The system configuration required on the host is an IBM S/360 or S/370 CPU with at least 40K bytes of main storage available to the compiler, exclusive of the storage required by data management and the overlay supervisor (overlay supervisor exists for OS/VS1, OS/VS2, and OS only). Source programs of 250 cards can be processed in the minimum storage available to the compiler. IBM System/7 FORTRAN IV runs under the facilities of OS/VS1, OS/VS2, DOS/VS, Operating System or Disk Operating System. The object modules produced by System/7 FORTRAN IV must be link-edited using LlNK/7 and the resultant load module must be formatted using FORMAT /7 ~rior to execution on a System/7 machine. Both LlNK/7 and FORMAT!7 are system control-type programs that execute on the host machine. The System/7 Host Macro Assembler and the MSP /7 Macro Library /Relocatable are required for preparing the nucleus and for those user applications that utilize sensor-based subprograms. COMPATIBILITY The host compiler accepts source programs written in System /7 FORTRAN IV, which is an extension of American National Standard Basic FORTRAN, X3.10-1966 and produces object modules that are acceptable to LlNK/7 for link-editing. The System/7 FORTRAN IV compiler will also accept source programs written in ANS Basic FORTRAN. Its language level is similar to stand-alone System/7 FORTRAN, with minor differences due to hardware restrictions. System/7 FORTRAN IV can process on the .5022 Disk Storage Module, formatted and unformatted direct-access data sets that are compatible with System/3 data sets. RPQs ACCEPTED: No TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index ------- ----:: --~~~ ISG PP 5734-XC3.1 Do not reproduce without written permission Mar 83 Major Revision PROGRAM PRODUCTS APPLICATION PROGRAM GENERATOR OS - 5734-XC3; DOS - 5736-XC3 PURPOSE The System/7 Application Program Generator (APG/7) offers high-level program support for many different sensor~based applications found in the plant automation, process control, and dataacquisition applications. APG /7 reduces the. programming effort required to install and maintain such applications. It allows the customer or IBM systems en~ineer to focus attention on application design, rather than machine-oriented programming details. DESCRIPTION APG/7 is made up of three major components: 'fill-in-the-blanks' facilities, a high-level language compiler, and a series of System/7 subroutines. The first two execute on a S/360 or S/370; the third consists of subroutines that execute on System/7, and are used to implement functions invoked by 'fill-in-the-blanks' specifications, or by language statements. The 'fill-in-the-blanks' facilities provide question forms that guide the user in the selection and specification of programs from the library of Modular Systems Programs (MSP /7) or from the Application Module Library (5707-LM1). The APG /7 compiler provides the user a means for specification of operations that are more conveniently handled by language statements, rather than by specification of tables for library subroutines. The language contain~ a compatible subset of PL/I. The APG/7 language may be used to READ/WRITE files from/to a remote computing system, using the System/7 Binary Synchronous Communications Adapter (BSCA). "Transmission of data to/from the remote computer will be in EBCDIC ,ransparency mode in fixed record length. The remotecomRuting system may be an S/370, mdl115 through mdl 195, an System/3, 'md110 or mdl15 Disk or another System/7 with the BSCA feature. \ The APG/7 language contains speCial features oriented to System/7 applications. These features are peculiar to APG /7; they are not part of PL/1. HIGHLIGHTS 'Fill-in-the-blanks' forms - guide users as they select and tailors library programs to be used, describes their data tables, and specifies the hardware configuration. Host file maintenance - S/360-S/370 host data files can be updated to reflect alterations to the System /7 program and data. Report generation - data from S/360-S/370 host files can be printed according to user-defined formats; Language compiler - provides users with high level method of describing their operating procedures using terminology familiar to them. The language contains a compatible subset of PL/I. Applications: APG/7 is designed for crOSS-industry use in realtime sensor-based applications found in the plant automation, process control, and data acquisition applications. The APG/7 language addresses a broad spectrum of sensor-based applications including manufacture, movement, test, and batch sequence control. Use: To create a program for execution in System/7, the user answers questions about the application on 'fill-in-the-blanks' forms. These answers select and tailor the operating system facilities required from the MSP /7 library. If AML/7 is used, answers are also provided for the application data tables and facilities. Application operations are than described using the APG/7 procedural language. (Alternatively, subroutines may be written using the macro assembler language.) APG/7, working with the MSP/7 Host Program Preparation Facilities II, converts this information into a System/7 storage load module. The MSP /7 facilities are also used to format the storage load for transfer to the System/7 for execution. Maintenance of such application programs is eased, since APG/7 provides facilities to generate reports that completely document the selections and the data provided on the forms. Additions to the APG/7 files can easily extend the use of the tailoring and documonting facilities to application subroutines that the user may personally write. CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES Create specification Information for the application and complete the 'fill-in-the-blanks' forms for input to APG/7. Supply all program libraries necessary to the implementation of the application. This includes program products such as AML/7 if required. Provide, if necessary, appropriate application routines using the APG /7 procedural language. SPEC'IFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS System Configuration for OS, OS/VS" or OS/VS2: APG/7 requires a partition· or region. size of approximately 80K bytes. APG /7 requires storage space on a disk file for programs and files. The OS version uses approximately 418 tracks of an IBM 2316 Disk Pack or equivalent 3336. or 3348 Disk Pack Space. The sizes of some files are specified by the customer and may be smaller than the standard values. The use of tapes or cards for backup files can further reduce requirements. System Configuration· for DOS or DOS/VS: APG /7 requires a partition size of approximately 52K bytes. APG/7 requires storage space on a disk file for programs and files. The DOS version uses approximately 685 tracks of an IBM 2316 Disk Pack or equivalent 3336 or 3348 Disk Pack Space. The sizes of some files are specified by the customer and may be smaller than the standard values. The use of tapes or cards for backup files can further reduce requirements. An APG/7 application program including only MSP/7 routines and not using the APG/7 language, the IBM 5022 Disk Storage Module, the IBM 3340 Disk Storage Module, an IBM 2790 Data Communication System, the BSCA support, or the Sequential Access Method requires a minimum System/7 configuration of 4K words of storage (an IBM 5010 Processor Module mdl A4 or B4) and an IBM 5028 Operator Station. Normally, at least a mdl A6 or.86 (6K words) is required if the APG/7 language is used. If other programs are included, such as AML/7 or PCP/7, the appropriate amount of storage must be added to the requirement. The System/7 Processor mdls E16-E64 (16K words to 64K words) are supported. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS The portions of APG/7 that execute on the IBM S/360 or S/370 are written in macro assembler language. APG /7 operates under Release 26 and Release 27 of the Disk Operating System (DOS), and under Release 29 (DOS/VS), using the SAM and DAM access methods. When o'perating under the Operating System (OS), access methods used are QSAM, BSAM, and BDAM. APG /7 also operates under OS/VS1, and OS/VS2, in Real or Virtual Mode. When using the IBM System/7 BSCA feature to communicate to a remote computing system, the remote system must use Teleprocessing access methods as follows: For IBM S/370: - DOS, DOS /VS - BTAM - OS, OS/VS1, OS/VS2 - BTAM or TCAM - DOS/VS, OS/VS1, OS/VS2 - VTAM Refer to System/7 Facilities II Macro Library/Relocatable for System/7 specifications. For IBM System/3: - System/3 MLMP For IBM System/7: MSP /7 Communications Access Method The IBM System/7 subroutines are written in· the System/7 macro assembler language. The Modular Systems Program (MSP/7), ASM/7 and LlNK/7 are used in support of APG/7. DOCUMENTATION (available from Mechanicsburg) General Information Manual (GH20-1162). TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index ------- ----:: - - :§"f§: ISG PP 5J35-RC2.16 Do not reproduce without written permission Mar 83 PROGRAM PRODUCTS ACF/VTAM R3 (cont'd) Decrypt Features September 30, 1981 OS/VS1 Release 7 SCP BASE, MSNF and Encrypt/ Decrypt Features September 30, 1981 OS/VS2 (MVS) Release 3.7 SCP BASE, MSNF and Encrypt/ Decrypt Features September 30, 1981 OS/VS2 (MVS) Release 3.8 SCP BASE, MSNF and Encrypt/ Decrypt Features September 30,1981 December 31, 1980 September 30, 1981 September 301981 (1) End of currency for ACF/VTAM Release 1 on DOS/VS Release 34 is being extended from December 31, 1980 to March 31; 1981. ACF/VTAM Release 2 The VSE System SCP BASE and MSNF Feature December 31, 1982 December 31, 1982 OS/VS1 Release 6.7 SCP BASE, MSNF and Encrypt/ Decrypt Features December 31, 1980 OS /VS 1 Release 7 SCP BASE, MSNF and Encrypt/ Decrypt Features December 31, 1982 December 31, 1982 December 31, 1982 OS/VS2 (MVS) Release 3.8 SCP December 31, 1982 'BASE, MSNF and Encrypt/ Decrypt Features December 31, 1982 DOCUMENTATION (available from Mechanicsburg) Introduction to Advanced Communications Function (GC30-3033) ... Advanced Communications Function for VT AM (ACF /VT AM) General Information: Introduction (GC27-0462) ... ACF /VT AM Program Summary (GC27-0457). ACF /VT AM Licensed Program Specification will be available at program product availability. ACF/VTAM R3 TERMINAL SUPPORT CHARTt Start/Stop Terminals (Note 1 ] . 2740-1 *2741 3101, as CPT-TWX (M33/35) 3232-51 as CPT-TWX (MdI33/35) 6733 as CPT-TWX (M33/35) *CPT-lWX (M33/35) * WT Telegraph BSC Terminals * 3271-1, -2 rNote 21 * 3274-1C,-2'C,-31C",-51C,(3271-1, -2) [Notes 2 and 4] *3275-1, -2 [Note 21 * 3276-1, -2, -3, -4 (~271-1, -2) (Notes 2 and 4] * 3780 [Notes 2 and 81 * 5275 [3275-1. -2) [Note 2l *5937 (3271-1, -2) [Note 2 * 8100/DPPX (3276-1, -2, - , -4) [Note 2] SDLC Terminals * 3232-1 *3271-11, -12 [Note 21 * 3274-1C,-21 C,-31 C,-S1C (3791) [Notes 2 and 4] * 3275-11, -12 [Note 21 *3276-1, -2, -3, -4 (37~1) rNote 5] *3276-11, -12, -13, -14 (3i91) [Note 4] 3601,3602 3614,3624 [Note 21 3631,3632[3601,3~02) 3661 [Note 3] 3684 3694 *3767-1, -2, -3 *3771-1, -2,-3 * 3773-1, -2, -3 3773-P1, -P2 -P3 *3774-1, -2 3774-P1, -P2 *3775-1 3775-P1 3776-1, -2, -3, -4 3777-1, -3, -4 3791 [Note 61 * 3791 (3730 [~ote 6] 3791/3760 4701-1,-2 5285/5288 (3770) 5520 (3791/3730) 5937 (3271) [Note 2] 6670 * 8100/DPPX (3791) [Note 6\ *8100/DPCX (3791) [Note 6 8775-11,-12 (3274) (Note 7 S/32 (3770) S/34 (3770) (3791) S/38 (3770) Series/1 Local Terminals *3272-1, -2 *3274-1A,-21A,-31A (3791), -1B,-21B (3272-1, -2). -10,-210,-310 (3272-1, -2) * 3791 } Note 61 * 3791 3730 [~ote 6 ] 3791/3760 4331 Display/Printer Adapter (3272- 2) 4331 Loop Adapter (3274-1 A) t All of the above terminals have both single and multisystem support. The terminal type in parentheses designates the programming support provided by ACF/VTAM R3, e.g., S/32 (3770) means the S/32 is supported as a 3770. * Also supported by TSO /VTAM Note 1: The Start/Stop Terminals shown are supported only via the Network Terminal Option (NTO) program product. Note 2: Nonswitched connection only. Note 3: Switched connection only. Note 4: Buffer sizes of 960, 1920, 2560 and 3440 are supported. Note 5: With the SDlC/BSC switch feature set to SDlC. Note 6: TSO support applies only with 3270 Data Stream compatibility. Note 7: For OS/VS1, ACF/VTAM Release 3 supports the IBM 8775 with Downstream loadable Functions. ACF/VTAM Release 3 on VSE and OS/VS2 (MVS) for the IBM 8775 is for base function only. Note 8: Supported only via tho Network Terminal Option Release 2 (NTO) program product. MVS INTEGRITY IBM will accept APARs do scribing any situation where the installation of ACF /VTAM R3 causes an exposure to the system integrity of OS/VS2 (MVS). RPQs ACCEPTED: No TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index ------- --------====';'= - --- ISG Do not reproduce without written permission PP 5735-RC3.1 Mar 83 PROGRAM PRODUCTS ADVANCED COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTION FOR TCAM (ACF/TCAM) VERSION 2 RELEASE 1 OS/VS1 and OS/VS2 MVS (5735 - RC3) PURPOSE Advanced Communications Function for TCAM Version 2 .Release 1 is a program product for users of OS/VS1 and OS/VS2 (MVS) that can provide additional capabilities for improved installability and usability, . problem determination, network operation and data communications in . a network with a single S/370 or with multiple S/370s. To support multiple S/370 networks, a user must install the ACF /TCAM V2 Multisystem Networking Facility feature. HIGHLIGHTS OF ACF/TCAM V2 R1 Problem determination and network operation... Includes additional functions that can assist in optimizing management and control of a user's data communication installation. Enhanced SDLC data link test. SNA terminal connectivity test. Intensive mode recording of SDLC data link errors. Dynamic display Qf ACF/NCP/VS storage. Dynamic reconfiguration of nonswitched SNA-SDLC devices under ACF/NCP/VS Release 2. 'Support for the Network Communications Control Facility (NCCF) program product and its related NetWork Problem Determination Application program product. Enh!l~c;:ed datac?mmunicat!ons capabilities... Includes improved fle)ublhty for session operation, data security and enhanced device support. Negotiable session initialization parameters. Support of the Programmed Cryptographic Facility program product (5740-XY5). Support of channel-attached 3790 and 3270 systems. Support of the channel-attached 3270 systems (SNA only) and 3790 systems (configuration support #9165 and #9169 only) in a multiple processor network, using the Multisystems Networking Facility feature. Support of the 3790 Communication System inbound message traffic pacing function. (Also supports 8100 and 3730 systems). ACF /TCAM V2 R1 provides service programs and customer tailorable facilities that enhance the installability and usability of ACF /TCAM in the following areas: System startup and restart. Session establishment and routing control. Statistics gathering. Exception and error control. Operator control. Message retrieval. Message routing. In addition, the Multisystem Networking Facility feature has been enhanced by providing customer aids for implementing the following: Installation and management of ACF /TCAM host to host data flows in large networks with mUltiple application types, such as: - Interactive applications. Message routing. Data collection. Data distribution. Extended device support for ACF /TCAM host to host networking. Automatic recovery of ACF/TCAM host to host message traffic. Other usability enhancements. SUMMARY AND ADVANTAGES OF ACF/TCAM V2 R1 Problem Determination and Network Operation Functions Enhanced data link test offers the capability to dedicate one station on an SDLC to testing while allowing the remaining stations on that link to remain active. When a station comprises a cluster control unit and its attached devices, the control unit is dedicated to the tost; its attached devices are deactivated. SNA terminal connectivity test provides the capability of initiating an echo test from the terminal end of a session to determine that an SNA terminal and its connection to ACF /TCAM V2 are functioning correctly. The test does not interlere with other stations on the link, or with other devices on the same control unit. Intensive mode error recording of SDLC data link errors allows a network operator to dynamically invoke and terminate recording of information about temporary errors that may be occurring on an SDLC data link. This capability supplements existing support that records permanent error information and permits a user to collect additional information on SDLC data link errors. This detailed information could preclude the need for specific testing in order to recreate an error situation. Dynamic display of ACF/NCP/VS storage allows the network operator to display any contiguous 256 bytes without disrupting normal ACF/NCP/VS operation. This display capability, provided in hexadecimal representation, can be useful in dynamically evaluating network problem situations. Dynamic reconfiguration of nonswitched SNA-SDLC devices under ACF/NCP/VS R2 allows the user to selectively add or delete supported nonswitched SNA-SDLC devices, without disrupting other network functions. This capability supplements the ACF/NCP/VS R2 generation process, and supports temporary configuration in a non-disruptive fashion, until a permanent network control generation can be done. In support of· the Network Communications Control Facility program, ACF/TCAM V2 R1 provides an interface to support the problem determination and operation facilities offered by this program product. Additional Data Communications Capabilities Negotiable session initialization parameters allow a more flexible session initialization process. During session initialization, two user-written application programs or message handlers can dynamically exchange certain session parameters to establish and/ or modify transmission control and integrity of session data. With this capability, it may be possible for a user to. simplify the predefined installation of intercommunicating application programs. ACF /TCAM support of the Programmed Cryptographic Facility offers the user transmission security of data. Support of enhanced 3705-11 (mdls J, K, & L) permits channel attachment and/or SDLC data link attachment of the enhanced 3705-11 in an ACF/TCAM V2 R1 network with ACF/NCP/VS Release 2. Support of channel-attached 3270 and 3790 systems permits these systems to be included in the single system SNA· environment supported by ACF/TCAM V2 R1. Channel-attached SNA 3270 system and 3790 system networking permits the channel,:"attached 3270 systems (SNA only) and 3790 systems (configuration support #9165 and #9169 only) supported by ACF/TCAM V2 R1 to participate in multiple system networking. 3790 inbound paCing is supported as a user-selectable session establishment function under ACF/TCAM V1 and V2 R1 with 3790 support. ACF/TCAM V2 R1 also supports 8100 and 3730 systems. Enhanced Installability and Usability Capabilities: The following enhancements to ACF/TCAM V2 R1 consist of macros, system service programs, and message handler facilities that a customer can tailor to meet unique system configurations. Model message control programs are provided to aid the customer in implementing these new capabilities and minimize his coding requirements. Enhancements to the Base ACF/TCAM V2 R1 Program Product An initiator program... Functions as a master task for a customer's message control program. The initiator provides for automatic activation, monitoring and selective restart of the message control program and associated IBM or user supplied service programs. The initiator allows non-failed tasks in the MCP region to continue running when another task in the region fails. The initiator will. optionally restart the failed task. . ." A message generation facility for building variable content start-up' and restart messages. ' Enhanced message handler facilities to provide ease of use arid flexibility in: . ' , - ACF /TCAM session establishment. - Routing control. - Security checking. - Logon/logoff message handling. - Error handling. A system accounting facility that enables an installation to gather system utilization data for financial accounting and system control. Data such as line utilization, application program logons, number of messages processed by each terminal, etc., can be captured for either on-line or deferred processing. Enhanced exception and error control facilities are. provided in the form of macro instructions that the installation can use to achieve a high degree of automation in exception handling procedures. To end users and operations people, these facilities· can provide awareness of exception conditions; advise the operator of ------- ----:: - -::E,;"E: ISG Do not reproduce without written permission PP 5735-RC3.2 Mar 83 PROGRAM PRODUCTS ACF/TCAM V2 R1 (cont'd) automatic actions taken and / or generate messages indicating required action and deliver the messages to the point where the action needs to be taken. Enhancements to operator control .... - A command for transferring, copying and purging unsent queued messages. - A facility for adding user written commands. - An on-line operator's guide that displays available commands and command format details. - Additional commands to facilitate large system management. A message retrieval system service program allows disk queued messages to be retrieved by command from specially designated stations. Retrieved messages may be sent to any station(s) and / or tape. This facility may be used in support of a message routing application, or to aid in investigation and analysis of user difficulties. The program can locate sent and unsent messages by specification of. sending or receiving station, time of entry, sequence numbers or range of sequence numbers. A message queue system service program that at the time of system closedown can search all, or selected, queues for unprocessed or unsent messages and place those messages on tape for introduction into a changed or altered system after a cold start. This facility allows the installation to redefine the network configuration and perform a cold restart without message loss and without having to wait for the system to drain. The latter could be difficult if traffic has been queued after hours to terminals that have been turned off for the night. - A single set of input and output sequence numbers can be defined and assigned to messages received from and sent to each terminal. Messages may be retrieved by input and output sequence numbers, thereby facilitating error recovery and problem determination. Data Collection - Input from a terminal to an application in a cross-domain host can be edited and accepted for processing by the terminal's host, even if the application host has not been brought up. - Using host to host data flows, message$ enter the terminal's host immediately, and are delivered to the application host at the system's convenience -- as determined by the priority and routing parameters specified by the customer. Data Distribution - Output for a terminal can be accepted for delivery by the terminal's host node even if the terminal is not up. - Data may be moved in stages to other host(s) closer to the destination terminal, or directly from the source host to the destination host. The staging of data can be controlled by the system operator, contributing to a more manageable and and efficient flow of data through the network. In addition, the macros, system service programs and message handler facilities of the Multisystem Networking Facility feature provide the customer with the following capabilities: - Host-to-Host networking support for: Non-SNA Channel attached devices. Enhancements to the ACF/TCAM V2 R1 Multisystem Networking Facility Feature: The enhancements to the networking feature of ACF/TCAM V2 R1 are oriented toward support of large networks with multiple application types. Two important elements of the enhanced support are: Host to host data flows... In which message traffic flowing on the network is always handled by both the originating host and the destination host. Depending upon the particular application, and user specified routing instructions, message traffic may also be handled by intermediate host nodes, in addition to the originating and destination hosts. Host to host data flows can contribute to increased network usability by providing capabilities such as: - An efficient mechanism for session establishment and message routing for interactive applications. - A technique for re-routing of interactive data around failed network elements that is transparent to the terminal operator. - A facility for staging the movement of non-interactive data across a network during periods of low interactive message traffic. - Added capabilities for system accounting and control in large networks. Transmission categories ... A customer may establish up to 16 transmission categories in his network. All messages in the same category are treated similarly with respect to queuing medium, message priority, sequence checking, error handling, data staging, routing alternatives, etc. Use of host-to-host data flows and transmission categories is facilitated by enhanced message handler facilities and user specified networking tables. Within the structure provided by these enhancements, the ACF/TCAM V2 R1 user has the following capabilities: Interactive Applications: Enhanced session establishment message routing capabilities for interactive applications: - Transaction routing on a message by message basis. - Extended interchanges between a terminal and application. and a single Transaction input to different application programs residing in different hosts may be routed without requiring the terminal operator to establish separate SNA sessions for each transaction. A terminal may access an application in another host, even if the terminal is not defined in the application's host. I"put for a conversational application that is not currently active can be ~ejected, with an appropiate message sent to the terminal sending the mput. Non-Interactive Applications Message Routing - Terminals need be defined to only their owning host nodes in order to gain access to the network via host-to-host message routing flows. New destinations may be added to the network, affecting only the owning host's ACF1TCAM terminal table. EP attached devices. NCP attached start/stop, BSC and and SNA-SDLC devices (in addition to the networking support already provided to these devices). - In the event that the primary route to a destination host node is unavailable, messages in a particular transmission category can be re-routed through an intermediate host node(s) enroute to the destination host. - The balancing of message traffic between two host nodes by the use of transmission categories. - Automatic recovery of host-to-host message traffic. - Automatic monitoring of the availability of cross-domain host nodes, terminals, and applications. - Through the use of an expanded ACF /TCAM addressing structure, networking support can be extended to: • • • • Non-SNA hosts. SNA clusters as "hosts". Non-SNA links. Multiple SNA networks. Model Message Control Programs: The base and networking capabilities previously described are utilized in Model Message Control Programs, which are shipped to the customer in machine readable form. The programs are Class A supported, and may be used exactly as is, or tailored to the user's installation requirements. The models include message handlers for 2740 EP start/stop, 3270 EP BSC, 3270 local, and 3767 SDLC devices, including TSO support. The models will be documented in the publication, ACF /TCAM Instal/ation Sample Programs. MIGRATION and PL.ANNING CONSIDERATIONS ACF/TCAM V2 R1 with ACF/NCP!VS: When used only for local user applications (that is, data communications between two application programs or message handlers in the same S/370 or between a channel-attached terminal and an application program or message handler on the same 5/370) ACF/TCAM V2 R1 supports the following items without the need for AC F / NC P/VS: Support of channel-attached 3790 and 3270 systems. Support of IBM 3790 inbound pacing. Negotiable session initialization parameters, Support for the Network Communications Control Facility program product. When used for remote network user applications, ACF/TCAM V2 R1 supports the following items in conjunction with NCP /VS 5.0, ACF/NCP/VS R1, or with ACF/NCP/VS R2: Dynamic display of ACF/NCP/VS storage. SNA terminal connectivity test. Multisystem networking featuro support of channol-attached 3790 and 3270 systems. ----. - --- ---:: '::":::SV5: ISG Do not reproduce without written permi.sion PP 5736-RC3.3 Mar 83 . PROGRAM PRODUCTS ACF/TCAM V2 R1 (cont'd) Support for the Programmed Cryptographic Facility' program product. Support for the NCCF program product. Support for 3790 inbound pacing. Negotiable session initialization parameters application). • Enhanced installability and usability capabilities. • Applicable only to ACP/NCP/VS R1 and R2 (1) (2) (3) (appli~tion-to- When used for remote network user applications, ACF/TCAM V2 R1 supports the fol/owing items only in conjunction with ACF/NCP/VS Release 2: Enhanced SOlC data link test. Intensive mode recording of SOlC data link errors. Notes: (4) (5) (6) (7) Single system support is provided through ACF/NCP/VS or NCP/VS. Multiple Systems Support Is provided through ACF /NCP /VS. Nonswitched support only •. S/360 mdls 25, 30, 40, 50, 65, 65MP, 67 (65 Mode) 75, 85, 91, 195 with either BOS, BPS, ~OS, OS; S/370 mdls 115-168MP with either BOS, BPS, DOS, OS, DOS/VS, OS/VS1 or OS/VS2. 3771-1,-2,-3; 3773-1,-2,-3; 3773-P1,';'P2,-P3; 3774-1.-2; 3774-P1,-P2; 3775-P1; 3776-1,-2,-3,4: 3771-1,-3,-4. . In 3767 compatibility mode. TSO support applies only to 3790 with 3270 data stream compatibility. Configuration support 119165 and 1/9169 only. ------- ----:: - -~'=f~ ISG PP 5735·RC3.4 Do not reproduce without written permission Mar 83 PROGRAM PRODUCTS ACF/TCAM V2 R1 (cont'd) ACF/TCAM V2 R1 TERMINAL SUPPORT CHART FOR GET/PUT INTERFACE Single System MultiSingle System Support ACF/TCAM via EP/VS SIS Terminal 1030 1050 1060 2260 2265 2740-1,2 2741 2760 3101 3232-51 (as CPT-TWX) 6733 (as CPT-TWX 33/35) AT&T 83B3 WU 115A line control type CPT-TWX (M33/35) line control type WT Telegraph (CCITT2 & 5) BSC Terminals 2715-2 2772 2780 2922 2972-8,-11 3271-1,-2 3275-1,-2 3670 3735 3741-2,-4 3747 5110 1131 1826 5/3 5/360-20 5/360 (3) 5/370 (3) 5/38 (3271) 5285/5288 (as a 3271-2) x x x system Support(1) ACF/TCAM via NCPI VSor ACF/NCPI VS Single System Support TSO with ACFI TCAMvla EP/VS Single System Multisystem Support (1) TSO with ACFI TCAM via NCPI VSor ACF/NCP/VS x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x (8) xIS) x (8) x (8) x x x (2) x (2) x (2) x (2) x x x x x X X X X (2) x (2) x (2) x x x x X x x x x x x x (2) x (2) x (2) x x x X x x x x x x x (2) x (2) SOLC Terminals x x (2) x (2) x (2) x x x (2) x (2) 3232-1 3271-11,-12 3275-11,-12 3274-1 C,-21C,-31C,-51C 3276-11,-12,-13,-14 3601,3602 3614 3624 3694 3767-1,-2,-3 3770 (4) 3791/3730 3791/3760 4701 5285/5288(as a 3274-1C) Series/1 x x x x x x x x Communications Controllers 3705-1 Remote 3705-11 Remote * Local Terminals 2260 2715-1 3272-1,-2 3274-1A,-1 B,-1 0, -21A, 21 B,-21 0, ::-31 A,-31 0 3791 3791/3730 7770-3 x TCAM x TSO x X x x x x (7) x (7) x x x (6) x (6) x x (2) x (2) x (2) x x x (5) x (6) x (6) --- - PP 5735-RC3.5 Do not reproduce without written permission --- ---.-:: - - i'f5: ISG Mar 83 PROGRAM PRODUCTS ACF/TCAM V2 R1 (cont'd) ACF/TCAM TERMINAL SUPPORT CHART FOR GET/PUT INTERFACE (Cant'd.) COMPATIBILITY MODE (1) Single SYltem Support TSO with ACFI TCAMvla EP!VS Sing'. System Multllystem Support (1) TSO with ACF/ TCAM via NCPI VSor ACF/NCP!VS x x (4) x x x x x x x x x x (3) x (3) x (3) x (3) x (3) x(3) x (3) x (3) Single System Support ACF/TCAM via EP!VS SIS Terminals 3767-1,-2 (2740-1) 3767-1,-2(2740-2) 3767-1,-2 (2741) CMCST (2741) S/7 (2740-1) 5100 (2741) 5110 (2741) Single System Multi. system Support(1) ACF/TCAM via NCPI VSor ACF/NCPI VS x x (3) x x x x x x x (3) x x BSC Terminals 3274-1 C,-21 C,-31 C,-51 C (3271) 3276-1,-2,-3,-4 (3271) 3771-1,-2,-3 (2772) 3773-1,-2,-3,-P1 -P2,-P3 (2772) 3774-1,-2.-P1 -P2 (2772) 3775-1,-P1 (2772) 3776-1,-2 (2772/3780) 3777-1 (2772/3780) 3780 (2772) 5265 (3741-2, -4) 5274 (3275-1,-2) 5285/5288 (3770) 5937 (3271-1,-2) 8130 (3271) 8130 (3780) 8140 (3271) 8140 (3780) 5/7 (S/3) 5/32 (5/3) 5/34 (5/3) 5/38 (5/3) Series/1 (5/3) x x x x x x x x x x x x (3) x x (3) x (3) x (3) x (3) x (3) x x x x x x x x x (3) x x (3) x (3) x (3) x (3) . x (3) x (3) x (3) x (3) x (3) x (3) x x x x x SOLC Terminals 3232-1 3274-1C,-21C,-31C,-51C (3791) 3276-1 , - 2, -3,-4 (3791) 3276-11,-12,-13,-14 (3791) 3770}3767) 5285 5288}3770) 5520 (3791 3730) 8130 (3791) 8140 (3791) 5/32 (3770) 5/34 (3770) 5/34 (3791) 5/38 (3770) x (5) x (6) x (5) x x x x (6) x x x x x x x x The terminal type in parenthesis designates the programming support provided by ACF /TCAM, e.g., 5/7 (2740-1) means the 5/7 is supported as a 2740-1. (2) Single System Support is provided through ACF/NCP/VS or NCP/VS. Multiple System Support is provided through ACF/NCP/VS. Nonswitched support only. (4) Switched support only. (5) Supported as an interactive 3767 - applies to 3777-1,-2,-3; 3773-1,-2,-3; 3774-1,-2; and 3775-1, -3 only. (6) Buffer size of 960, 2560, and 3440 also supported • .If x x (1) (3) x (7) x x (7) ·Local devices, except for SNA 3270 and 3790 systems, are not supported by ACF /TCAM for cross-system communications with the ACF /TCAM Multisystem Networking Facility .,. Unless such devices communicate via host-to-host data flows. Notes: x(6) x (6) x (7) Applies to 3276 mdls 1, 2, 3, 4 with BSC/SOLC SWitch set to SOLC mode. ACF/TCAM V2 RECORD MODE TERMINAL SUPPORT CHART BSC Termlnall 3271-1,-2 (2,4) 3274-1C,-21C,-31C,-61C (2,4) 3275-1,-2 (2,4) 3276-1,-2,-3,-4 (2,4) 6274 (3275-1,-2) (2,4) 6937 (3271-1,-2) (2,4) 8130 (3276) (2,4) 8140 (3276) (2,4) --...- --- ---- Do not reproduce without written permission Mar 83 :: - -:s'=fs: ISG PROGRAM PRODUCTS ACF/TCAM V2 R1 (cont'd) SOLe Terminals 3271-11,-12(2) 3274-1C,-21C,-31C,-51C (2) 3275-11,-12 (2) 3276-11,-12,-13,-14 3601,3602 3614 (2) 3624 (2) 3631 (2) 3632 (3601,3602) (2) 3651 (5) 3694 3767-1,-2,-3 3771-1,-2,-3 3773-1,-2,-3 3773- P1, - P2, - P3 3774-1,-2,-P1,-P2 3775-1 3775-P1 3776-1,-2,-3,-4 3777-1,-3,-4 3791 3791/3730 5285/5288 (3770) 5520 (3791 /3730) 5937 (3271) (3) 8130 (3791) 8140 (3191) S/32 (3770) S/34 (3770) S/34 (3791) Local Terminals 3272-1,-2 3274-1A,-1 8,-1 D,-21A,-21 8,-21 D,-31A,-31 0 3791 }1) 3791 3730 (1) All the above terminals have both single and multisystem support. (1) PP 5735-RC3.6 Configuration Support #9165 and #9169 only. (2) Nonswitched connection only. (3) Switched connection only. (4) Connection only through NCP/VS or ACF/NCP/VS. (5) Applies to 3651 mdls A25, 825, A75, 875, C75 and 075, with the appropriate SDLC communications features. TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index - -~--- ---- :: - - :§~§: PP 5735-RC3.7 Do not reproduce without written permission Mar 83 ISG PROGRAM PRODUCTS APVANCED COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTION FOR TCAM , ACF/TCAM VERSION 2 RELEASE 2 5735 - RC3 Advanced Communications Function for TCAM Version 2 Release 2 adds support for record mode operations and associated device products. . program product. Support for 3790.inbound pacing. Also supported between ACF /TCAM V2 and ACF /TCAM V1 or between ACF/TCAM V2 and ACF/VTAM V1 R1 systems. •• Support provided in ACF /TCAM V2 R2 Record API. HIGHLIGHTS OF ACF/TCAM V2 R2 Record API support... Provides a single telecommunications access method interface to subsystems for ACF/TCAM V2 R2, and VTAM and ACF/VTAM, and support for device products associated with record mode operations. Permits use of CICS, DSX, IMS, JES 2/3, and/or VSPC under ACF/TCAM at execution time without change to the .existing subsystem/service program. . Supports single-session inter-host subsystem communication .. ACF/TCAM V2 R2 WITH ACF/NCP/VS: The following ACF/TCAM V2 R2 enhancements are supported in conjunction with ACF/NCP/VS Release 1 or with ACF/NCP/VS Release 2: Record API support. * Single-session inter-host communication. • •• The following ACF /TCAM V2 enhancement is also supported from an ACF/TCAM V2 host system when intercommunicating with an ACF/TCAM Vl or ACF/VTAM R1 host system: Channel-attached SNA 3270 system and 3790 system networking. In the above configuration, the appropriate access method features for multisystem networking must be installed. ACF/TCAM V2 can co-exist with non-ACF/TCAM hosts and provide the structure for network-wide services such as message routing, data collection and data distribution. In addition, ACF /TCAM V2 enhanced installability and usablilty functions can be used to interface two separate networks that wish to communicate with one another. ** Supported also by NCP /VS 5.0. Requires the ACF/TCAM V2 R2 Multisystem Networking Facility feature. Communications Controller Support: ACF /TCAM Version 2 operates with the following communications controllers, as supported by NCP/VS 5.0, ACF/NCP/VS R1, and ACF/NCP/VS R2: 3705-1 Communications Controller. 3705-11 Communications Controller. CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES To install and use ACF/TCAM V2, the customer must: Design the single system network. Order and install all required communications equipment. Have prerequisite TCAM SCP for ACF /TCAM V2 installed. Install ACF /TCAM V2. Define the network to ACF/TCAM V2. * • MIGRATION Migrating from TCAM 10 or ACF/TCAM V1 to ACF/TCAM V2: The following migration paths are available for the given levels of TCAM and ACF/TCAM: TCAM 10 will operate with the following levels of NCP/VS and ACF/VS: . NCP/VS 5.0. ACF/NCP/VS R1~ ACF/NCP/VS R2 (with appropriate TCAM 10 PTFs). ACF/TCAM V1 will operate with the following levels of NCP/VS and ACF/NCP/VS: NCP/VS 5.0. ACF/NCP/VS R1. ACF/NCP/VS R2 (with appropriate ACF/TCAM V1 PTFs). ACF /TCAM V2 R1 and R2 will operate with the following levels of ACF/NCP/VS: NCP/VS 5.0. ACF/NCP/VS R1. ACF/NCP/VS R2. Install NCP/VS 5.0, ACF/NCP/VS R1, and/or ACF/NCP/VS R2 (unless all terminals defined to ACF /TCAM V2 are channelattached to the host processor or are EP /VS-defined). Functions supported by TCAM 10 or ACF/TCAM V1 are also sup.ported by ACF /TCAM V2 with the appropriate level of NCP /VS or ACF/NCP/VS with the following exceptions: Define the network to ACF/NCP/VS R1 and/or ACF/NCP/VS R2. OS/VS2 SVS is not supported by ACF/TCAM V2, and consideration must be given to migrating a user's operating system support before or at the same time as migrating to ACF/TCAM V2. To install and use the ACF/TCAM V2 Multisystem Networking Facility feature, the customer must: Design the multisystem network. Order and install any additional communications equipment (for example, intersystem links between interconnected 3705 Communications Controllers). Have prerequisite TCAM SCP for ACF /TCAM V2 installed. Install ACF /TCAM V2. Install ACF/NCP/VS R1 and/or ACF/NCP/VS R2. Install the ACF/TCAM V2 Multisystem Networking Facility feature. Define the multisystem network to AC F/TCAM V2 and to ACF/NCP/VS R1 and/or ACF/NCP/VS R2 in each host system. The enhancements to ACF/TCAM V2 R1 include an initiator task that allows non-failed tasks in the MCP region to continue running when another task in the region fails. The initiator will optionally restart the failed task. Both the MCP and TCAM operator control run as subtasks of the initiator. These subtasks, along with other initiator subtasks, are defined in a subtask table which contains information on each subtask running under the control of the initiator. A default subtask table, which may be changed by the user, is shipped with ACF/TCAM V2 Rl. The TCAM 10 or ACF/TCAM Vl user will need to do the following in order to execute his MCP as an ACF/TCAM V2 system: 1) Modify JCL to start the initiator rather than the MCP. 2) Update the subtask table to include his MCP name, or 3) Rename his MCP to the default name supplied in the subtask table, or OS/VS1 Release 6.7. 4) Override the default name via JCL. OS /VS2 (MVS) Release 3.8. If the user chooses to code his own subtask table rather than use the one supplied, he must code entries for his MCP and for the TCAM operator control program. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS ACF/TCAM V2 R1 and V2 R2 require one of the following operating systems at the specified level or subsequent levels unless otherwise specified: Multisystem Considerations: In a multiple host system environment, the ACF/TCAM V2 enhancements are supported for each respective ACF /TCAM V2 host system just as they are within a single host system environment. ACF/TCAM V2 supports the following items between ACF/TCAM V2 host systems, or betweon ACF/TCAM V2 and ACF/VTAM R2 host systems: Negotiable session initialization parameters. Channel-attached SNA 3270 and 3790 systems. Single-session inter-host subsystem communication .•• Support for the NCCF program product. * Support for the Programmed Cryptographic Facility In an ACF/TCAM V1 R1 multisystem networking environment, when one host had two or more 3705s with ACF/NCP/VS, cross-domain session traffic could be routed either through an ACF/TCAM host transit node or directly through the 3705s without host involvement. In ACF/TCAM V2, the host transit node capability has been removed. Therefore, cross-domain session traffic which does not use host to host data flows must be routed directly through the 3705s. The new· 3705-11 high speed local attachment feature for communication between 3705- lis offers an attractive means of off-loading this function: Migrating from TCS-ACF to ACF/TCAM V2 R1: All TCS-ACF macros are supported by ACF ITCAM V2 R1. In addition, the functions ------- ----- PP 5735-RC3.8 Do not reproduce without written permission Mar83 :: - -~~§: ISG PROGRAM PRODUCTS ACF/TCAM V2 R2 (cont'd) of the following TCS-ACF macros have been incorporated into ACF ITCAM macros: TCS-ACF ACF/TCAM Macro/Operand TCSROUTE HOLDNEXT NEXTMSG TCSINTRO FORWARD TTCIN = HOLDSYNCHLD = IEDRELS SYNCHLD =, BRANCH =, INTRO NETMON =, MANUAL =, NEWLINE =,NODEID =, LOOPCNT =, LOOPQ = OPTION USE = PRIORITY PRISAVE = SETSCAN SKIPFLD = TERRSET MASK = TOPTION TCSPRIOR SKIPFLD MEROFF Related IBM Programs: The following table summarizes ACF /TCAM Version 2 relationships in a networking environment: ACF/TCAM V2 R2 OSI OS/ VS1 VS2 MVS * * * The physical device address (used on the copy function). Machine and storage requirements will be provided in the Advanced Communications Function for TCAM (ACFITCAM) Version 2 Installation: Storage Estimates, Conversion Information, Sample Programs, at the availability of ACF/TCAM V2 on each supported operating system. IBM will accept APARs describing any situation where the installation of ACF/TCAM V2 causes an exposure to the system integrity of OS/VS2 MVS. * * • . * VSPC * SSS 5.0 * DSX * * * * * * 3650 Host Sup't** Device Suppt. Communication Network Mgt. * II S * NCCF-NPDA Programmed Cryptographic Facility ** *** * JES2/NJE 3.0 TSO * * · JES2/RJE 4.1 JES3/SNA RJP Interactive Other Considerations: ACF/TCAM V2 requires the following features in support of the Compare and Swap instructions: Conditional Swapping (#1051) on the 3135; Advanced Control Program Support (#1001) or Conditional Swapping (#1051) on the 3145. . Record API IMS!VS 1.1.5 * Compatibility: Source code compatibility is retained for existing user programs that utilize current levels of TCS-ACF. However, such programs may require changes to take advantage of the additional capabilities offered through ACF ITCAM V2 R1. In a mixed ACF/TCAM - ACF/VTAM multisystem environment, the ability of ACF/VTAM to access device characteristics of terminals controlled by ACF /TCAM V1 or ACF /TCAM V2 is limited to those indicators defined and maintained by these versions of ACF ITCAM. In particular, the ability to determine the following SNA 3270 (3271-11,12; 3275-11, -12) device characteristics is not supported: CICS!VS 1.4 DB/DC * Users of TCS levels prior to TCS-ACF Version 1 Release 2 modification 2 should note that the format and size of two controls fields, the FHP and TCSOPTS option field, have been changed. Any absolute (rather than symbolic) references in user code to their content or size may to be changed. Each OS/VS1 or OS/VS2 (MVS) virtual machine in which ACF/TCAM V2 resides rquires a. dedicated sub-channel address to a 3705-1 or 3705-11 with ACF/NCP/VS. GET/PUT Interface· Job Entry To aid in migration, ACF ITCAM V2 R1 will also support the above TCS-ACF macros in their TCS-ACF form. However, it is recommended that customers use the new TCAM operands. ACF/TCAM V2 will operate in a VM/370 virtual machine which supports the required release of the operating system (OS/VS1, OS/VS2 MVS). ACF/TCAM V2 operation in a VM/370 environment is intended for use in program development and testing and other uses where performance is not critical. Operation of ACF ITCAM V2 under VM 1370 Release 5, even with the virtual machine assist feature, may add significant additional processor overhead. If your customer has specific throughput or terminal response requirements, you should plan to benchmark under VM/370 to ensure that any proposed configuration will meet the customer's performance needs. ACF/TCAM V2R1 * · * *** *** Includes programs utilizing TGET, TPUT, READ, WRITE, and native TCAM applications not written to Record API. Host support for 3650 Programmable Store System. Supported by ACF /VTAM V2 but independent of interface levels shown. COMPATIBILITY ACF/TCAM V2 R1 and R2 retain compatibility with ACF/TCAM V1, with the following exception: ACF ITCAM V2 does not support OS/VS2 SVS. Consideration for this difference is described above under the section entitled "Migration and Planning Considerations". ACF/TCAM V2 R1 and R2 offer compatibility with NCP/VS 5.0, ACF/NCP/VS R1, and ACF/NCp/VS R2. Compatibility of related IBM programs (see previous chart) written to the Record Mode Application Program Interface (Record API) is retained in ACF /TCAM V2 R2, except for programs written to the Programmed Operator interface and user programs written directly to the Record API. PROGRAM CURRENCY ACF/TCAM V1 is currently supported under OS/VS1 release 6.0 and 6.7, OS/VS2 (SVS) release 1.7, OS/VS2 (MVS) release 3.7 and 3.8. ACF/TCAM V2 R1 and V2 R2 is supported by OS/VS1 Release 6.7, and OS/VS2 (MVS) Release 3.8, and subsequent releases unless otherwise specified. DOCUMENTATION: (available from Mechanicsburg) Publications currently available which describe ACF I NCP /VS V2 are the following: Advanced Communications Function for TCAM (ACF I TCAM) Version 2 General Information: Introduction, ACF/TCAM Version 2 Program library and Introduction to Advanced Communications Function. TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index ------- ----=- -:i"f5: ISG PP 5735-RC3.9 Do not reproduce without written permission Mar 83 PROGRAM PRODUCTS ADVANCED COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTION .FOR TCAM (ACF/TCAM) VERSION 2 RELEASE 3 OS/VS1 and OS/VS2 MVS (6735:'RC3) Advanced Communications function for TCAM Version 2' Release 3 is a' program product for users of OS/VS1 and OS/VS2 (MVS) that offers expanded network configurability, network management capability and enhanced network recoverability. . To support multiple S/370 netWorks, •a user must install the ACF /TCAM V2 R3 Multisystem Networking Facility feature. To take advantage of some of the functions provided by the Multisystem Networking Facility, a user may install the feature in large, multi-node single system environments.'" HIGHLIGHTS OF ACF/TCAM V2 R3 Parallel Links: Multiple active SDLC links between adjacent 3705s. Transmission' Groups: Logical groupings of transmission links ' between adjacent network nodes. • 'Multlple Routes: Mi.J1tiple routes for SNAand non-SNA message , transmission between nodes in a network. • Automatic Session Re-initiation Option: Disrupted sessions can be automatically re-initiated to take advantage of multiple' route availability. • Multiple Priority Levels: Three levels of transmission' priorities; selectable by session. • '. Extended NCP I~terconnection: New capabilities' for interconnecting 3705s in single and multiple system networks. Extended NCP Ownership. . Flow Control: Enhanced management of network traffic demands! . . Reduced Cross- Domain Resource Definition, Requirements. Session Outage Notification: outages. Enhanced awareness of session Enhanced Recovery Capabilities. • Route Verification and Error Notification Facilities. • Route Availability Monitoring Option: Notification to a session requestor that a previously unavailable route is now available. • Transmission Group Option for Line Trace. Dynamic NCP Oump Facility. • , Support of the Network Terminal Option (NTO) program product. possible to distribute the' traffic for different sessions to. different routes, dividing the load among several routes. The ordered sequence of routes, determined by the installation, defines the set of alternate routes available for session traffic. In the event a route becomes inoperative during a session, the application program or terminal may request that the session be re-initiated. This causes automatic selection of one of the alternate routes. The user can then resynchronize the session data traffic and continue data communications and application processing via network routes that remain in operation. Automatic Session Re-Initiation Option:' A user-provided exit routine gains control whenever a session is terminated. The routine may specify that automatic session re-initiation is to be provided for a given session. When this OPtion is requested, TCAM will immediately request a new session with the same characteristics as the terminating session. The exit routine could be designed so that, for example, sessions terminating because of route failure will be automatically re-initiated. When a route fails, sessions using the route are terminated, the exit routine gains control for each session and new sessions are requested. If other routes are operational, a new session can be started immediately on one of the other routes, and data transmission can resume as soon.asthe new sessions are established.· Multiple Priority Levels: Three levels or transmission priorities, selectable by session... A user can specify one of three message traffic priorities for a session between two application programs or between a terminal and an application program. For example, this permits message traffic for a time' dependent session to be transmitted through a network ahead of other message traffic. That is, interactive processing may be given top priority. by a user while other network traffic,. such as batch processing, is assigned to a lower priority by the user. Extended NCP Interconnection: New capabilities for interconnecting 3705s in single and multiple system networks... in ACF ITCAM V2 R2 a remote NCP could only be link-attached via a single link to a single channel-attached 3705. In ACF /TCAM V2 R3 a 3705 may now be link-attached via Transmission Groups to one or more channelattached and/or link attached 3705s. These capabilities can significantly expand the installation's configurability options. Also, they can improve the overall efficiency of the network and improve the ability of a host processor to take over a 3705 whose current owner (or a link to that owner) has failed or has· been deactivated. See Figure 1 for Interconnection flexibility . Supports the CCITT X.21 switched interface when the 3705-11 is attached to an X.21 Interface via the 3705-11. . • Requires the Multisystem Networking Facility feature . Note: The ACF/TCAM V2 R3 Base ·System provides 'the capability to define one Transmission Group between adjacent network nodes. The capability to define more than one Transmission' Group requires the networking feature. SUMMARY AND ADVANTAGES OF ACF/TCAM V2 R3 . +~-----+ I HOST I +------+ I +------+ I I I I, I NCP I , I +------+ Transmission Groups: Logical groupings of transmission links between adjacent network nodes .... A user may define up to eight Transmission Groups, each with one or more, SOLC links between adjacent 3705s with ACF/NCP/VS R3. A Transmission Group permits multiple SDLC links to be defined as a single logical Iirik.· A single channel between a host and its channel attached 3705 is also defined as a Transmission Group. If a link or links in a Transmission Group fails, session traffic will automatically be placed on remaining active links without loss of data. This enhances the reliability and availability of service between 3705s. Multiple Transmission Groups and appropriate route selection permit a user to specify message traffic for different applications to flow through a network via pre-assigned Transmission Groups. For example, interactive processing may be assigned one group and batch procossing may be assigned a different group, each with its own physical link support. +------+ I I 1/1 1/1 I I +------+ I I I NCP I I I +------+ I HOST I +------+ I +------+ Parallel Links: Multiple active SOLC links between adjacent 3705s .... Parallel Links allows data traffic to flow simultaneously over two or more SOLC links between adjacent 3705s. All such links can be operational and in use at the same time, and each can be activated or deactivated independently of the others. This capability can provide increased message flow and improve the availability and reliability of transmissions between 3705s. . Multlplo Routes: Multiple routes for SNA and non-SNA message' transmission between nodes in a network... A user may define up to eight routes for message transmission between two host systems or between a host system and a 3705. When a session is initiated between two application programs or' between' a terminal and an application program, one of the routes is automatically selected to transmit the session traffic. The user may. limit the selection to a particular route or to one of an ordered sequence of routes. Thus, it Is FIGURE +------+ I HOST I +------+ I +------+ I~ I NCP I ----I I~ I 1 I +------+ +------+ I +-----1 I I NCP I I I +------+ I I I I NCP 1 I +------+ +------+ I HOST I +------+ I I I +------+ I~ +------+ I I 1/1 1/1 I I I I I I 1/1 I NCP 1 I~ 1 I +---~--+ I' 1/1 I I' I NCP I +------+ I I~ 1 NCP 1 I~ I 1-----+ +-~----+ I I I NCP. I I I +------+ +---~--+ . 1 +------+ I I 1/1 I 1/11/1 1 ' 1 I ~---~~------------~~~------+ I I, NCP I I , +-------_._-----------------+ -.-.-._.~._I_._~~.---.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.-.~.-.-.-.-. --- - --- ---- :: - -:S";,§: PP 5735-RC3.10 Do not reproduce without written permlnlon Mar 83 ISG PROGRAM PRODUCTS ACF/TCAM V2 R3 (cont'd) +------+ +------+ +------+ +------+ I I I HOST I I HOST I +------+ +------+ I NCP 1-+ /1 NCP I +1---1-+ I / +/-----+ I I 1/1/ / I 1/1 1/1/1 /1/ 1/1 I /1 1/ I +--1/--+/1 +------+ I NCP I +-------1 NCP I +------+ +------+ +--------+ ---I HOST 1--I . +--------+ I I I +----+ +----+ I NCPI'-7 +----+ I NCPI ---+----+ I I 1/1 I 1/1 I +-~--+ +----+ . +----+ +----+ II Ncpl'-7-1 I~_I Ncpl I Extended NCP Ownership: As many as eight host systems can share the . ownership of a 3705 that is channel-attached • and/or link-attached to another 3705{s). Each of the owning host systems is notified in the event the 3705 becomes inoperative. This permits re-instatement of a failed or deactivated 3705 via anyone of the host systems that shares in its ownership. • The channel attachments cannot exceed the number of channels supported by the 3705-1 or the 3705-11 communications controllers. Flow Control: Enhanced management of the network traffic demands ••• Via SNA protocols, the flow of message traffic is dynamically regulated between a host system and a 3705 and between two host systems. Continuous feedback is exchanged between network resources in order to regulate network traffic and reduce the possibility of network congestion. Reduced Cross-domain Resource Definition Requirements: An enhancement that is available for both SNA terminal or application definitions ... A SNA terminal in one domain can request a session with an application program in a different domain without prior definition of the terminal within the application program's host. Also, an application in one domain can request a session with an application program or SNA terminal in a different domain without prior definition of the requesting application within the cross-domain application program's or crossdomain terminal's host. This enhancement is designed to reduce the need for user-specified cross-domain resource definitions in a multisystem environment and also to reduce the storage required to support such definitions. It permits the addition of an application program or SNA terminal to one host system without the need to re-define other host systems with which the resource may want to enter into a SNA session. Session Outage Notification: If the route supporting a session becomes inoperative, the session ends are made aware of the outage. Session reinitiation may be requested as described under" Multiple Routes". Enhanced Recovery Capabilities: Enhanced restart or host-to-terminal control sessions: In recovering from a host failure situation, a host system can recover its control session for a 3271-11··, 3271-12··, 3274-10*, 3275-11··, 3275-12··, 3684, 3770 MLU, S/32. S/34 or S/38 without disruption of existing sessions between the device and application programs on other host systems~ This permits user applications that are not affected by such a failure to continue' processing during recovery of the control session. This capability is included in the base ACF/TCAM V2 R3 system. • This product must be 8t an appropriate EC level for this function. •• Support for these devices is provided by ACF/NCP/VS R3• Enhanced takeover of a 3705: In the event a host system fails or otherwise gives up control of a 3705, any host system that is sharing ownership of the same 3705 will have its network operator notified about the lost host. Any of the notified host systems can take over control of the devices mentioned above without ~isrupt ing their existing cross-domain sessions with application programs. It Is no longer necessary to deactivate corresponding cross-domain resource definitions before acquiring resources attached to the 3705 that were controlled by the lost host system. •. Enhanced multiple host system re-synchronization: In recovering from a failure situation, two host systems can re-synchronize their control session without disruption of existing cross-domain sessions between two application programs, or between II terminal ~nd an application program. This permits user applications that are ~'Pt affected by such a failure event to continue operations during re-instatement of the host system's cross-domain control session. Route Verification and Error Notification Facilities: Via the DISPLAY command, a network operator can determine if a message route originating in his host is operative or inoperative. This permits a network operator to verify the availability of network routes and to take corrective action for routes that may have become inoperative. It also permits a network operator to verify that a route has been returned to service following a failure or deactivation. During the verification, appropriate resource owners are notified when an inactive or failed resource is encountered on a route. In addition, if during network operation a route fails, an awareness message is issued at the host end point(s) identifying the inoperative route to the network operator. New display commands have been added which permit a network operator to take appropriate action to minimize the affects of an unusable message route on network applications. Route Avail.bUlty Monitoring Option: A Ller-provided exit routine gains control whenever a session initiation is attempted. The routine may specify that route availability monitoring is to be provided for a given session. When a session initiation is attempted but there is no route available, the' session attempt is rejected and the requestor is notified of the failure.· It is the responsibility of the requestor to retry the session request later. requesting the same or a different route. When route availability monitoring is in effect for a session, however, the failure of the initiation attempt is remembered by TCAM and the requestor is notified of the availability of the route when it becomes available. Transmlnlon Group Option for Line Trace: Extends the existing SOLC line trace capabilities to Transmission Groups. Via the network operator MODIFY command, the message traffic over a Transmission Group between two 3705s can be traced as if it were a single SOLC link. Dynamic NCP Dump Facility: A network operator can invoke a dump of NCP storage from a channel-attached or SOLC-attached 3705. Since NCP continues. to operate durin~ the dump process, the dump will represent NCP status over a period of time. The dump contents are recorded and printed via the facilities of the appropriate System Support Programs (SSP) for NCP, and can be useful in dynamically evaluating network problem situations. Note: ACF /TCAM V2 R3 provides Multiple Active Routes and Session Outage Notification support to non-SNA. non-EP devices. EP device networking sUPPQrt continues as in ACF ITCAM V2 R2. In addition to the existing TCAM support for non-SNA devices, ACF /TCAM V2 R3 supports the following devices as virtual SNA devices through its support of the Network Terminal Option (NTO) program product. 2740 mdl 1 Communications Terminal, switched and nonswitched. 2741 Communications Terminal, switched and nonswitched. Western Union Teletypewriter Exchange Service (TWX) M33/35, switched and nonswitched. World Trade Teletypewriter Terminal (WTTY), nonswitched only. The support is provided for users of the OCB application interface and the TCAM subsystem interface. These devices can participate in a multiple system as well as a single system environment. In addition to the existing support for non-SNA devices, TSO /TCAM supports the 2741 and TWX M33/35 via the NTO program product. ACF /TCAM Version 2 Release 3 also supports the following CCITT X.21 switched function when attached to an X.21 Interface via the 3705-11: - Address calling. Auto Answer. Call progress signal. Direct call. Closed User Groups. Abbreviated Address Calling. CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES To inltalland use ACF/TCAM V2 R3, the customer must: Design the single system network. Order and install all required communications equipment Have prerequisite TCAM SCP for ACF /TCAM V2 R3 installed. Install ACF /TCAM V2 R3. Define the network to ACF/TCAM V2 R3. Install NCP/VS 6.0, ACF/NCP/VS R1, ACF/NCP/VS R2, or ACF /NCP /VS R3 (unless all terminals defined to ACF /TCAM V2 R3 are channel-attached to the host processor or are EP /VS - defined). .~ Define the network to NCP/VS 5.0, ACF/NCP/VS R1, ACF/NCP/VS R2 or ACF/NCP/VS R3. To install and use the ACF /TCAM V2 R3 Multisystem Networking Facility feature, the customer must: ------- ----:: - - :E'fE: ISG PP 5735-RC3.11 Do not reproduce without written permission Mar 83 PROGRAM PRODUCTS ACF/TCAM V2 R3 (cont'd) Design the single or multisystem network. Order and install any additional communications equipment (for example, intersystem links between interconnected 3705 Communications Controllers). refer to the ACF ITCAM V2' Installation and Migration Guide available at first customer shipment. MIGRATION AND PLANNING CONSIDERATIONS Install ACF /TCAM V2 R3. ACFITCAM V2 R3· with NCP/VS and ACF/NCP/VS: With the exception of the dynamic NCP Dump facility and Reduced Cross Domain Network Definition Requirements, the enhanced functions of ACF /TCAM V2 R3 are supported only in conjunction· with ACF/NCP/VS R3. Install ACF/NCP/VS R1, ACF/NCP/VS R2, or ACF/NCP/VS R3. The NCP Dump facility will operate with NCP /VS 5.0 (with appropriate PTFs), ACF/NCP VS R1. R2 or R3. Install the ACF /TCAM V2 R3 Multisystem Networking Facility feature. Reduced Cross Domain Network Definition Requirements will operate with ACF/NCP/VS R1, R2 or R3. Define the network to ACF /TCAM V2 R3 and to ACF/NCP/VS R1, ACF/NCP/VS R2, or ACF/NCP/VS R3 in each host system. ACF/TCAM V2 R3 with EP/VS: ACF/TCAM R3 will continue to support the latest current level of the Emulator Program (EP /VS) and Partitioned Emulator Program (PEP). See the Terminal Support chart for specific device support. Have prerequisite TCAM SCP for ACF /TCAM V2 R3 installed. SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS Hardware Configurations: ACF /TCAM V2 R3 operates with the following communication controllers: 3705-1 Communications Controller. Migrating from ACF/TCAM R1, ACF/TCAM V2 R1, or ACF/TCAM V2R2 to ACF/TCAM V2 R3 The following. support alternatives are provided to aid in migration planning: NCP/VS 3705-11 Communications Controller. Hardware Features: ACF /TCAM V2 requires the following features. in support of the Compare and Swap instruction: Conditional. Swapping (#1051) on the 3135; Advanced Control Program Support (#1001) or Conditional Swapping (#1051) on the 3145. System Configuration: ACF/TCAM V2 R3 runs in a virtual storage environment in any operating system configuration that supports the OS/VS1 or OS/VS2 MVS operating system as specified in the "Programming Requirements" section below. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS ACF/TCAM V2 R3 needs one of the following operating systems: OS/VS1 Releaso 7.0, or OS/VS2 MVS Release 3.8, and all subsequent releases and modifications unless otherwise stated. Software Configuration: ACF /TCAM V2 R3 requires one of the following operating systems at the specified level, or subsequent levels, unless otherwise specified: OS !VS 1 Release 7.0. OS/VS2 (MVS) Release 3.8. 5.0 ACF/NCP/VS •••••••••••-••• R1 R2.1 R2 R3 (1) TCAM 10 ACF/TCAM ACF/TCAM ACF/TCAM ACF/TCAM • (1 ) X V1 V2 R1 V2 R2 V2 R3 X X X X X X X X No X· X· X X X X X X X X No X X X X Requires applicable access method PTFs.. Requires EREP PTFs for LPDA level maintenance data records. Note: The above matrix assumes that customers will be at current access method maintenance levels when migrating from one NCP release to another. . The following significant differences between ACF /TCAM V2 and ACF /TCAM V1 may require special planning. All other functions supported by ACF/TCAM V1 are also supported by ACF/TCAM V2 Rl, R2 and R3. OS/VS2 (SVS) is not supported by ACF/TCAM V2, and consideration must be given to migrating a user's operating system support before or at the same time as migrating to ACF/TCAM V2. . ACF/TCAM V2 will operate in a VM/370 virtual machine which supports the required release of the operating system (OS/VS1, OS/VS2 MVS). VM/370 provides a means of supporting any combination of TCAM and VTAM systems in the same processor each running in its own virtual machine. This facility can be helpful when changing TCAM releases, and when testing the ACF /TCAM Multisystem Networking Facility. Further, one VTAM and one TCAM system can coexist in one virtual machine. Operation of ACF /TCAM V2 under VM/370, even with the virtual machine assist feature, may add additional processor overhead, which should bo considered in your review of customer performance needs. In an ACF /TCAM V1 multisystem networking environment, when one host had two or more 3705s with ACF/NCP/VS, cross-domain session traffic could be routed either through an ACF/TCAM host transit node or directly through the 3705s without host involvement. In ACF /TCAM V2, the host transit node capability has been removed. Therefore, cross-domain session traffic which does not use host-to-host data flows must be routed directly through the 3705s. The new 3705-11 high-speed local attachment feature for communication between 3705-lIs offers an attactive means of off-loading this function. Ea~h OS/VS1 or OS/VS2 (MVS) virtual machine in which ACF/TCAM V2 resides requires a dedicated sub-channel address to a 3705. The ACF/TCAM V2 R3 enhancements are supported for each respective ACF /TCAM V2 R3 host system. Prerequisite SCP: Use of ACF /TCAM requires the concurrent installation of prerequisite TCAM system control programming (SCP) modules. The ACF/TCAM V2 R3host system can coexist with ACF/TCAM V2 ,R2, ACF/TCAM V2 Rl, ACF/TCAM V1, ACF/VTAME, ACF/VTAM R3, ACF/VTAM R2, and/or ACF/VTAM Rl host systems at the level of function supported by these host systems. Other Considerations: In a mixed ACF/TCAM - ACF/VTAM multisystem environment, the ability of ACF/VTAM to access device characteristics or terminals controlled by ACF /TCAM V1 or ACF /TCAM V2 is limited to those indicators defined and maintained by these versions of ACF /TCAM. In particular, the ability to determine the physical device address, used with the copy function of a 3271-11, -12, is not supported. 3274 mdl 1A and 3274 mdl 1C/SNA Inbound Pacing ... Is supported under ACF /TCAM V2 R2 and ACF /TCAM V2 R3. These products must be at the appropriate EC level for this function. COMPATIBILITY See "Migration and Planning Considerations" section for important compatibility exceptions. Object code compatibility is retained in ACF /TCAM V2 R3 for related IBM programs (see Related IBM program charts) written to the VTAM Record Application Programs Interface (Record API). User programs written directly to the VTAM Record API are not supported by the ACF /TCAM V2 subsystem interface. ACF /TCAM V2 R3 enhancements made in support of parallel links, multiple routes, and extended NCP interconnection result in minor operational differences from previous releases of TCAM. Users should Multisystem Considerations: In a mUltiple host system environment: PERFORMANCE and STORAGE CONSIDERATIONS Machine and storage requirements will be provided in the Advanced. Communications Function for TCAM (ACF/TCAM) Version 2 Installation: Sample Programs, at the availability of ACF/TCAM V2 R3 on each supported operating system. The new functions provided by the ACF /TCAM V2 R3 Multisystem Networking Facility feature may increase storage requirements and path lengths over those in ACF/TCAM V2 Rl and R2. The actual performance impact (if any) to a customer will vary depending upon his, particular hardware and network configuration. DATA SECURITY, AUDITABILlTY, and CONTROL Previously announced security functions such as support for the Programmed Cryptographic Facility continue to be supported in ACF /TCAM V2 R 3 . ' . . User management is responsible for the selection, adequacy, .and implementation of these features and the appropriate application·· and administration control. ---.----~ ----- - .:..g~'f5: PP 5736-RC3.12 Do not ,.produce without written permission Mor83 ISG PROGRAM PRODUCTS ACF/TCAM V2 R3 (cont'd) RELATED IBM PROGRAMS ACF/TCAM V2 R3 Terminal Support Summary The following summarizes relationships: ACF/TCAM V2 R3 OSI VS1 OSI VS2 MVS · ··· ·· ·· · · ·· · · · · · · · · · · * • •• GETIPUT Subsystem DB/DC CICS/VS JOB ENTRY JES2/RJE 4.1 Interface* Interface · • IMS/VS 1.1.6 JES2/NJE 3.0 JES3/R3.0 Interactive SSS6.0 · ·• DSX • TSO VSPC liS Device Suppt. PSS Host Support*· Host Command Facility Communication Network Mgt. • NCCF-NPDA Programmed Cryptographic Facility. · See Note ··· · · · · · See Note Includes programs rutilizing TGET, TPUT, READ, WRITE, and native TCAM applications. - X 3272-1,2 X X X 3274-1A,21A,31A (3791) X X 3274-10,210,310 (32721 X X X X X X X X X X X X X 3791 (1) 3791/3730 (1) 3791 (3270) (1) 3791/3730(3270)(1) 7770-3 Start/Stop Terminals DCBAPI (2) 1030 X 1050 X 1060 X ACF/NCP NCPNS Sub.ys. Int'f'ce (3) X X TSO EP (2) ACF/NCP NCPNS X X N X 0 T 2260 X 2266 X 2740-1,2 X X p - 2741 X P X X WU 116A X X X X X X CPT-TWX (M33/35) X WT Telegraph X 2760 Host Support for 3650 Programmable Store System. 3101 3232 PROGRAM CURRENCY TSO (3) X X 2260 2715-1 Note: Supported by ACF /TCAM V2 R3 but independent of application program interface. TeAM and ACF/TCAM levels are currently supported on each operating system release as follows: Subsystem Interface DCB API Local Terminals AT&T83B3 X A X L X X X X X X X XIS) X X(4) I X X X X X X C A B L TCAM Level 8 • OS /VS2 (MVS) - 3.7 3767-1,2 (2740-1) TCAM' Level 9 • OS/VS1 - 6.0 OS /VS2 (MVS) - 3.7 3767-1.2 (2740-2) X X(5) TCAM Level 10 • OS/VS1 - 6.0, 6.7, 7.0 3767-1.-2 (2741) X OS/VS2 (SVS) - 1.7 OS/VS2 (MVS) - 3.7,3.8 CMCST (2741) X S/7 (2740-1) X X ACF/TCAMV1 OS/VS1 - 6.0, 6.7 OS/VS2 (SVS) - 1.7 OS/VS2 (MVS) - 3.7, 3.8 6100(2741) X X X X 6110(2741) X X X X 6733 (M33/35) X X X X ACF/TCAM V2 Rl, R2 OS/VS1 - 6.7, 7.0 OS/VS2 (MVS) - 3.8 • These releases will no longer be supported when currency terminates for the associated operating system. Currency is as follows: OS/VS1 6.0 QS/VS2 (SVS) 1.7 OS/VS2 (MVS) 3.7 12 months after availability of VS1 Release 6.7 December 1979 21 months after availability of OS/VS2 (MVS) Release 3.8 DOCUMENTATION (available from Mechanicsburg) Advancod Communications Function for TCAM (ACF/TCAM) Version 2 General Information Manual: Introduction (GC30-3057) ... ACF ITCAM Version 2 Release 3 Program Summary (GC30-9626) ••• Introduction to Advanced Communications Function (GC30-3033). Introduction to Advanced Communication Function for TCAM Program Product Specifications will be available at ACF/TCAM V2 R3 availability•. MVS INTEGRITY IBM will accept APARa describing any situation where the installation of ACF /TCAM V2 R3 causes an exposure to the· system integrity of OS/VS2 (MVS). E X X X X ------ ----:: - - :§~E: ISG PP 5735-RC3.13 00 not reproduce without written permission Mar83 PROGRAM PRODUCTS ACF/TCAM V2 R3 (cont'd) BSC Terminals OCBAPI EP (2) ACF/NCP NCP/VS Subsys. Int'f'ee TSO EP (2) OCBAPI SOlC Terminals ACF/NCP NCP/VS 2715-2 X X 3232-1 2772 X X 3271-11.12 2780 X X 2922 X EP (2) " 3274-1 C.21 C,31 C.51 C 3275-11,12 ACF/NCP NCP/VS Subsys. Int'f'ce TSO EP (2) - X X - X N X(5) X(5) N X(5) ·0 X(5) X(5) 0 X(5) T X(5) X(5) T X(5) X(5.8) X(5,B) X X X X A 2972-8,11 X(5) X(5) 3271-1,2 X(5) X(5) X(5) X(5) X(5) 3276-11,12,13,14 3275-1,2 X(5) X(5) X(5) X(5) X(5) 3601 A 3276-1,2,3,4 X(5.8) X 3670 X 3602 P X X P 3735 X X 3614 P X(5) X(5) P 3741-2,4 X X 3624 L X(5) X(5) L 3747 X X 3651 I X(6) I 5110 X X 3694 X X 1131 X X 3767-1,2,3 C X X C 1826 X X 3771-1,2,3 A X X A 5/3 X X 3773-1,2.3,Pl,P2,P3 B X X B 3774-1,2,P1,P2 L X X L 3775-1.Pl E X X E 3274-1 C,2', C,31 C,51 C (3271) X(5) 3276-1,2,3,4 (3271) X(5) X(5) X(5) 3771-1,2,3 (2772) X X 3773-1,2,3,Pl,P2,P3 (2772) X X 3774-1.2.P1,P2 (2772) X X 3775-1,Pl (2772) X X 3776-1,2 (2772/3780) X 3777-1 (2772/3780) X 3780 (2772) X X 5265 (3271-2.4) X X 5275 (3275-1,2) X(5) X(5) X(5) X(5) X(5) X(5) X(5) X(5) X(7) X(5) 6670 X X Series/l X 3631.3632 . (3601,3602) X X 3773-1,2,3 (3767) X X X' 3774-1.2 (3767) X X X 3775-1,3 (3767) X X X 6520 (3791/3730) X X(5) X(5) X(5) 5937 (3271-1.2) XIS) X(5) X(5) X X X(5) X X 5/32 (5/3) X X 5/34 (5/3) X X 5/38 (S/3) X X X(5) X X(5) X(5) X 3771-1,2.3 (3767) 5285/5288(3271-2) X(5) X X(5) - - X(7) X X - Series/1 (S/3) X X X X(5) 5/38 (3271-2) X 3791/3730 . X - 5/7 (5/3) 3791 X(5) X 8100/DPPX (3271) X X X X(5) 6670 (2772) X X X(5) X 5285/5288 (3741) 3776-1.2.3,4 5285/5288 (3770) X(5) X 3777-1.3,4 5285/5288 (3274-1 C) X(5) ACF/NCP NCP/VS X(5) 5937 (3271) X X X(5) 8100/DPPX (3791) X X X(7) 8100/DPCX (3791) X X X(7) S/32 (3770) X X X S/34 (3767,3770, 3791) X X X X(5) Notes 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) Configuration support #9165 and #9169 only. No multisystem support unless host to host data flows are utilized. , ACF /TCAM V2 R2 and subsequent releases only. Switched support only. Nonswitched support only. Applies to 3651 mdls A25, 825, A75, 875, C75, and 075. TSO support applies to 3276 mdls 1, 2,3, and 4 with 8SC/SOLC, switch set to SOLC mode. . Applies to 3276 mdls1, 2,3 and 4 with 8SC/SOLC switch setto SOLC mode. TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index ------- ----:: - -~~§: ISG PP 5735-RC3.14 Do not reproduce without written permission Mar 83 PROGRAM PRODUCTS ADVANCED COMMUNICATIONS FUNCTION FOR TCAM ACF/TCAM VERSION 2 RELEASE 4 5735-RC3 ACF /TCAM Version 2 Release 4 offers significant extensions and enhancements to TCAM customers in a single and multiple networking environment. Advanced Communications Function for TCAM Version 2 Release 4 is a program product for users of OS/VS1 and OS/VS2 (MVS) that offers expanded network configurability, network management capability, enhanced queue recoverability, and improved migration. ACF /TCAM V2 requires the following features in sl!P'port of the Compare and Swap Instruction: Conditional Swapping (#1051) on the 3135; Advanced Control Program Support (#1001) or Conditional Swapping (#1051) on the 3145. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS ACF /TCAM V2 R4 requires one of the following operating systems at the specified level, or subsequent levels, unless otherwise specified: To support multiple S/370 networks, a user must install the ACF/TCAM V2 R4 Multisystem Networking Facility feature. With multiple TCAMs a user ma}' network in the same CPU as well as run two or more copies of ACF ITCAM V2 R4. HIGHLIGHTS OF ACF/TCAM V2 R4 Multiple TCAMs: Capability of running multiple copies of ACF/TCAM V2 R4 concurrently in the same CPU. This function is not supported on an MVS/XA system. Reusable Queues Enhancement: Sequence of messages on a reusable queue will be maintained after queue reorganization is completed. Also most 045-2 ABEND conditions have been eliminated. Support Local Non-SNA 3270 Networking. Model MCP Supports Remote SNA 3270 Controllers. Support for 3274 Notify: Ability to sense power on/off status of LUs attached to 3274. Support for MVS/XA: The ability of ACF/TCAM to run on hardware supported by MVS/XA. Support for TAF (Terminal Access Facility) and HCF V2 (Host Command Facility) OS/VS17.0 MVS!370 MVS!XA ACF/TCAM V2 will operate in a VM/370 virtual machine which supports the required release of the operating system (OS/VS1, OS/VS2 (MVS)). VM/370 provides a means of supporting any combination of TCAM and VTAM systems in the same' CPU each running in its own virtual machine. This facility can be helpful when changing TCAM releases, and when testing the ACF /TCAM Multisystem Networking Facility. Further, one VTAM and one TCAM system can coexist in .one virtual machine. Prerequisite SCP: Use of ACF /TCAM requires the concurrent installation of prerequisite TCAM System Control Programming (SCP) modules. Other Considerations: In a mixed ACF/TCAM - ACF/VTAM multisystem environment, the ability of ACF/VTAM to access device characteristics of terminals controlled by ACF /TCAM V1 or ACF /TCAM V2 is limited to those indicators defined and maintained by these versions of ACF /TCAM. In particular, the ability to determine the. physical device address used with the copy function of a 3271-11, 12; is not supported. COMPATIBILITY 3270 SNA Local REQMS/RECFMS Support: New options to retrieve messages. See section on "Migration and Planning Considerations" for important: compatibility exceptions. Tote Removal. Object code compatibility is retained in ACF /TCAM V2 R4 for related IBM programs (see "Related IBM Programs" chart) written to the' VTAM Record Application Program Interface (Record API). User' programs written directly to the VTAM Record API are not supported' by the ACF /TCAM V2 subsystem interface. 0 SUMMARY AND ADVANTAGES OF ACF/TCAM V2 R4 Multiple TCAM's: Multiple copies of ACF /TCAM V2 R4 may run concurrently in the same CPU. This capability is only supported in OS/VS2 MVS SP1.3.1. All copies of ACF/TCAM V2 R4 must be at the same maintenance level. Only one TSO/TCAM can run in a CPU. RELATED IBM PROGRAMS: The following summarizes ACF /TCAM : Version 2 Release 4 relationships: Reusable Queue Enhancements: The possibility of overlaying a message during reusable queue reorganization has been greatly reduced. Also during reuse, sequence of messages is retained. Local Non-SNA 3270 Networking: Local non-SNA 3270 terminals owned by ACF /TCAM may now participate in cross-domain sessions with either another ACF/TCAM or an ACF/VTAM. Model MCP Supports Remoto SNA 3270 Controllers: The Model MCPs are enhanced to support the remote 3270 SNA devices. Two additional SNA message handlers are included in the models. A message handler which supports displays (LU 2) and a message handler which supports printers (LU 1 and LU 3). Retrieval Enhancements: New options have been provided to allow retrieval of very old messages, messages that have a higher sequence number than the current message number (rollover of sequence number) and other capabilities. New Subsystem Support: Support of the Terminal Access Facility (TAF) feature of NCCF and Host Command Facility (HCF) V2. Support for 3274 Notify: Support of the powered on/powered off feature on the model 1A control unit or model 1C or 51 C control unit when BSC/SDLC switch is in SDLe mode. 3270 SNA Local REQMS/REQFMS Support: Allows 3274 model 1A maintonance statistics to be collected and transmitted to the host for procossing by NPDA. TOTE Removal: The Teleprocessing Online Test Executive (TOTE) is no .Iongor supported. OSiVS2 (MVS/SP Version 21: Support for expanded (3 byte) UCB in OS/VS2 (MVS/SP V2). SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT ; HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS A~ ITCAM V2 R4 oporates with the following communication I co~rollersas supported by NCP/VS 5.0, ACF/NCP Vl Rl, R2, R3 or ACF/NCPV2: • 3705f; I Communications Controller 3i-1I comm . . . u:n.ications.Controller 37 -80 Communications Controller 5 Comm~nications Controllers I.a .... ACF/TCAM V2 R4 05/ VS1 05/ VS2 MVS · ··· · ·• ·· · · ·· * GET/PUT Subsystem Interface· Interface DB/DC * * * · • · ·• ·· · · * * IMS!VS 1.1.6 Job Entry .. JES3/R3.0 Interactive TSO liS liPS Device Suppt. * * * SSS 5.0 DSX HTF lOWS Programmablo Store System Host Support .. Communication Network Mgt. * * * ·· * Host Command Facility_··· * NCCF-NPDA * TAF Programmed Cryptographic Facility * * · JES2/RJE 4.1 JES2/NJE 3.0 * * CICS!VS 1.4 See Note · · See Note Includes programs utilizing TGET, TPUT, READ, WRITE, and native TCAM applications. Host Support for 3650 Programmable Store System. ------- -------- PP 5735-RC3.15 Do not reproduce without written permission Mar83 .=.':: :§~§: ISG PROGRAM PRODUCTS ACF/TCAM V2 R4 (cant'd) Host Command Facility (HCF) runs only on Get/Put interface and V2 runs only on subsystem interface. Note: Supported by ACF/TCAM V2 R3 but independent of application program interface. User management is responsible for the selection, adequacy, and implementation of these features and for appropriate application and administration control. DOCUMENTATION (available fom Mechanicsburg) PROGRAM CURRENCY TCAM and ACF/TCAM Levels are currently supported on each operating system release as follows: TCAM Level 10 OS/VS1 - 7.0* OS/VS2 (MVS) - 3.8* ACF /TCAM Vl OS/VS2 (MVS) - 3.8* ACF/TCAM V2 R2, R3 OS/VSl - 7.0** OS/VS2 (MVS) - 3.8** * Advanced Communications Function for TCAM (ACF/TCAM) Version 2 General Information Manual: Introduction (GC30-3057) ACF /TCAM Version 2 Release 4 Program Summary (GC30-9526). MVS INTEGRITY IBM will accept APARs where the installation of ACF/TCAM V2 R4 introduces an exposure to the system integrity of OS/VS2 (MVS). This program is intended to run authorized. ACF /TCAM V2 R4 enhancements made in support of multiple concurrent ACF /TCAMs, result in minor operational differences from previous releases of TCAM. Users should refer to the ACF /TCAM V2 Installation and Sample Programs manual available at first customer shipment. Corrective service only ACF/TCAM V2 R2 will remain current until October, 1982. MIGRATION AND PLANNING CONSIDERATIONS ACF/TCAM V2 R4 with NCP/VS and ACF/NCP/VS: All functions that are supported by ACF/TCAM V2 R2 and R3 are also supported by this release. RPQs ACCEPTED: No ACF/TCAM V2 R4 Terminal Support Summary ACF/TCAM V2 R4 with EP/VS: ACF/TCAM R4 will continue to support the latest current level of the Emulator Program (EP /VS) and Partitioned Emulator Program (PEP). See the Terminal Support Chart for specific device support. DCB API Local Terminals Subsys. Int'fce. (3) TSO I Migrating from ACF/TCAM Vl. ACF/TCAM V2 Rl, R2, R3 to ACF/TCAM V2 R4: Migration plans can take advantage of the following support 2260 X 2715-1 (10) X alternatives: 3272-1,2 X X X 3274-1A (3791). 1B,l D X X X 3791 (1) X X 3791 /3730 (1) X X 3791 (3270) (1) X X X 3791/3730 (3270) (1) X X X 7770-3 X ACF/TCAM V1 ACF/TCAM V2 R1 ACF/TCAM V2 R2 ACF/TCAM V2 R3 ACF/TCAM V2 R4 NCP/VS 5.0 ACF/NCP Vl Rl ACF/NCP Vl R2,2.1 ACF/NCP Vl R3 X X X* X* X X X X X X ACF/NCP V2 X X X X X X X X X X X X DCBAPI Start/Stop Terminals * Requires applicable TCAM PTF's. EP (2) 1030 X 1050 X 1060 (10) X OS/VS2 (SVS) is not supported by ACF/TCAM V2, and consideration must be given to migrating a user's operating system support before or at the same time as migrating to ACF /TCAM V2. 2260 X 2265 X 2740-1 X X 2740-2 X X 2741 X X 2760 X In an ACF/TCAM V1 multisystem networking environment, when one host had two or more 3705s with ACF/NCP/VS, cross-domain session traffic could be routed either through an ACF /TCAM host transit node or directly through the 3705s without host involvement. In ACF /TCAM V2, the host transit node capability has been removed. Therefore, cross-domain session traffic which does not use host to host data flows must be routed directly through the 3705s. The new 3705-11 high-speed local attachment feature (see 278-95)for communication between 3705-lIs offers an attractive means of off-loading this function. Multisystem Considerations: In a multiple host system environment: The ACF /TCAM V2 R4 enhancements are supported for each respective ACF/TCAM V2 R4 host system. An ACF/TCAM V2 R4 host system can coexist with ACF/TCAM V2 R2, ACF/TCAM V2 R3, ACF/TCAM Vl, ACF/VTAME, ACF/VTAM V2, ACF/VTAM R3, ACF/VTAM R2, and/or ACF/VTAM Rl host systems at the level of function supported by these host systems. X ACF/NCP NCP/VS X X X X(9) X(9) X X X(4) X(4) X AT&T 8383 X WU 115A X X X(4) X(4) X(4,9) X X X(5,9) 3101 X X X(4,9) 3767-1,2 (2740-1) X X 3767-1,2 (2740-2) X(5) X(5) 3767-1,-2 (2741) X X X X CMCST (2741) X X(4) X X CPT-TWX (M33/35) WT Telegraph S/7 (2740-1) X X 5100 (2741) X X Machine and storage requirements will be provided in the Advanced Communications Function for rCAM (ACF/TCAM) Version 2 Installation: Sample Programs at the availability of ACF/VTAM V2 R4 on each supported operating system. 5110(2741) X X Security, Auditability, and Control: Previously announced security functions such as support for the IBM Programmed Cryptographic Facility, continue to be supported in ACF/TCAM V2 R4. TSO EP (2) X PERFORMANCE and STORAGE CONSIDERATIONS The new functions provided by ACF /TCAM V2 R4 may increase storage requirements and path lengths over those in ACF/TCAM V2 R3. The actual performance impact (if any) to a customer will vary depending upon his particular hardware and network configuration. Subsys. Int'f'ce (3) ACF/NCP NCP/VS The following significant differences between ACF/TCAM V2 and ACF /TCAM Vl may require special planning. All other functions supported by ACF/TCAM Vl are also supported by ACF/TCAM V2 Rl, R2, R3 and R4. X '1 \ , ' ' X X X X ' , ------ ----:: - - :§':f§: ISG PP 5735-RC3.16 Do not reproduce without written permission Mar 83 PROGRAM PRODUCTS ACF/TCAM V2 R4 (cont'd) BSC Terminals DCBAPI EP (2) I ACF/NCP NCP/VS Subsys. Int'f'ce TSO EP (2) ACF/NCP NCP/VS - - SDLC Terminals DCBAPI EP (2) ACF/NCP NCP/VS 3271-11.12 N X(5) 3274-1C 0 X(5) 3275-11.12 T Subsys. Int'f'ce. TSO EP (2) ACF/NCP NCP/VS X(5) N X(5) X(5) 0 X(5) X(5) X(5) T X(5.8) X(5.8) 2972-8.11 X(5) X(5) - - - X, X 3271-1.2 X(5) X(5) X(5) X(5) X(5) 3601 A X X A 3275-1.2 X(5) X(5) X(5) X(5) X(5) 3602 P X X P - - - 3614 P X(5) X(5) P - 3624 L X(5) X(5) L 3651 I - X(6) I 3767-1.2.3 C X X C X - - - - 3771-1.2.3 A X X A - - 3773-1.2.3.Pl.P2.P3 B X X B - 2715-2 X X 2772 X X 2780 X X 2922 X - - - 3276-1.2.3,4 3276-11.12.13.14 X(5) X(5.8) X 3670 (10) X - 3735 X X 3741-2,4 X X 3747 X X 5110 X X 1131 X X 1826 X X - - - 3774-1.2.P1.P2 L X X L S/3 X X - - - 3775-1.P1 E X X E 3274-1C (3271) X(5) X(5) X(5) X(5) X(5) 3776-1.2.3,4 X X 3276-1.2.3,4 (3271) 3777-1.3 X X - 3791 X X X(7) - X(5) X(5) X(5) X(5) X(5) 3771-1.2.3 (2772) X X X X - - 3773-1.2.3.Pl.P2.P3 (2772) - 3774-1.2.Pl.P2 (2772) X X 3775-1.Pl (2772) X X 3776-1.2 (2772/3780) X X 3777-1 (2772/3780) X X 3780 (2772) X 5275 (10) (3275-1.2) 5937 (3271-1.2) 6670 (2772) 8100/0PPX (3271) S/7 (S/3) X - - X(5) X(5) X(5) X(5) X(5) X(5) X(5) X X - - - X(5) X(5) X(5) X(5) X(5) - - - X X S/32 (S/3) X X S/34 (S/3) X X S/38 (S/3) X X Series/l (S/3) - - X - - - - - - - 3791/3730 X X X(7) 6670 X X X - - Series/1 3631.3632 (3601.3602) X X - 3771-1.2.3 (3767) X X X - 3773-1.2.3 (3767) X X X 3774-1.2 (3767) X X X X(5) 3775-1.3 (3767) X X X - - 5937 (3271) 8100/0PPX (3791) X X(5) - X X(7) 8100/0PCX (3791) X X X(7) S/32 (3770) X X X S/34 (3767.3770, 3791) X X X Notes: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) Configuration support #9165 and #9169 only. No multisystem support unless host to host data flows are . utilized. ACF/TCAM V2 R2 and subsequent releases only. Switched support only. Nonswitched support only. Applies to 3651 mdls A25, B25, A75, B75, C75, and 075 with the appropriate SOLC feature. TSO support applies only with 3270 data stream compatibility. Applies to 3276 mdls 1, 2,3 and 4 with BSC/SOLC switch set to SOLC mode. Supported via Network Terminal Option (NTO) program product. These devices are not supported by MVS/XA. The terminal types in parentheses designate the programming support provided by ACF/TCAM, e.g., S/7 (2740-1) means the S/7 is supported as a 2740-1. ---- ----- ---:: - - :S~5: ISG PP 5735-RC5.1 Do not reproduce without written· permission Mar 83 PROGRAM PRODUCTS VIRTUAL MACHINE/VTAM COMMUNICATIONS NETWORK APPLICATION VM/VCNA (5735-RC5) PURPOSE DESCRIPTION The Virtual Machine/VTAM Communications Network Application (VM/VCNA). program product provides the VM/System Product (VM/SP) user the capability of using an SNA, BSC, SS or local terminal as an operator console for a virtual machine. Support is included for Control Program/Conversational Monitor System (CP/CMS) command processing, CMS editor processing and VM full screen support. VM /VCNA is an application program that provides an interface between VM's console support and ACF/VTAM's or ACF/VTAME's application program interface in order to support SNA, BSC, SS or local devices as virtual machine consoles. VM/VCNA, in conjunction with ACF/VTAME, ACF/VTAM, NTOand ACF/NCP/VS, offers the following advantages to the VM user: VM/VCNA, in conjunction with ACF/VTAM or ACF/VTAME, provides SNA, BSC, SS or local console support for virtual machines for VM/SP users and supports those S/370, 303X and 4300 processors announced as supported by VM/SP. All references to ACF/VTAM refer to ACF/VTAM Version 1 Release 2 or Release 3 or ACF/VTAM Version 2 (VSE or OS/VS1). VM/VCNA in conjunction with ACF/VTAM, ACF/VTAME, NTO and ACF/Ncplvs, provides VM .users the advantages and capabilities of the multisystem networking facilities of the ACF products and allows the VM system to participate in an existing or planned multisystem ACF network based on Systems Network Architecture (SNA). The SNA support for VM is located in what will be referred to· as the VTAM (SNA) Service Machine (THE VSM,Figure 1) and providesSNA, BSC, SS or local terminal services to virtual machine consoles as well as providing ACF networking services. The VSM is a VM/Sp· Virtual Machine which consists of the following components: - Extend data communication functions conveniently and effectively to the end-user in a distributed data processing (DDP) network. THE VSM I------------~I I I I I I I I or VSE/AF - Minimize the end user's involvement in the details of data communications operations. The support of NTO by VM /VCNA is transparent· to both the NTO devices and the VM/SP control program. The NTO devices are supported by VM/VCNA through the application programming interface (API) of ACF/VTAM. I I +-*-----*---------------------------------------*-+ I VM/SP I I---------------------------------------~---------I ! - Minimize the effects of system changes. - Allow for network sharing of asynchronous non-SNA devices. +-----+ +----------------+ +-------------+ I CMS I I Other I I * I VM/VCNA I Operating I I I I +*----++ I systems I I ACF /VTAM (**) I I CMS I I I I or . I I I I (OS/VS1, OS/VS21 IACF/VTAME· I ++----++ I VSE or VM/370) I 1-------------1 I CMS I I I I OS/VS 1 BPE I I NTO Device Support by VM/VCNA: NTO is an IBM program product that extends the capabilities of ACF/NCP/VS in a 3705 Communications Controller to allow a select group ofnon-SNA devices to be supported as SNA devices. VM/VCNA's support of NTO allows VM installations with non-SNA devices to migrate to SNA. NTO support also allows an installation with SIS or asynchronous non-SNA devices to have the use of SNA services that: - Provide a·· consistent and comprehensive strlicture for data communications growth. - Distribute data communication functions throughout the SNA network. -VSE and VSE/ AF or OS/VSl and OS/VS1· BPE -ACF/VTAM or ACF/VTAME -VM/VCNA I I Terminal sharing (assuming NTO support for SS devices) of the VSM across multiple ACF/VTAM or ACF/VTAME applications or subsystems, such as the Customer Information Control System/Virtual Storage (CICS/VS), the Information Management System/Virtual Storage (excluding NTO devices), user-written application programs and the CP/CMS system. This increases the usage of the terminal since it can now be located anywhere in a multisystem ACF network and may be used as a virtual machine console on VM systems in addition. to having access to other systems that are not VM-based, (such as CICS/VS. under ACF/VTAM or ACF/VTAME or TSO under ACF/VTAM or ACF/TCAM on an operating system running in native mode on another processor). (S/370, 303X or 4300 Processor) I +-------------------------------------------------+ FIGURE I Other application .programs and subsystems; for example, CICS/VS or NCCF/NPDA. For ACF multisystem networking, ACF/VTAM Version 2 (VSE or OS/VS1) or the MSNF feature on ACF/VTAM Version 1 Release 2 or 3 is required. The VSM owns and controls the network through ACF/VTAME or ACF/VTAM, including the SNA, BSC, SS or local terminals that'will be used as VM Virtual Machine consoles. It is this ownership that permits terminals attached to the VM system, through ACF/VTAME (locally or through a Communications Adapter) or ACF/VTAM (locally or through ACF/NCP/VS), to gain access to the facilities of a multisystem (cross domain) ACF network. Additional IBM and user application programs may also be present in the VSM (e.g., CICS/VS, NCCF/NPDA). VM/VCNA uses both the Console Communication Services and the Inter-User Communication Vehicle facilities available with the VM/System Product. The commu~ nication between the VSM and Console Communication Services of VM/SP is by the Inter-User Communication Vehicle available with VM/SP. The terminals owned by the VSM may now be used by applications or subsystems in the VSM, such as CICS/VS, as well as virtual machine consoles for systems such as: CMS, OS/VS1, OS/VS2 or VSE. These supported NTO devices appear to ACF/VTAM as Physical Unit Type 1 (PU type 1), logical Unit Type 1 (lU type 1) devices and support the same bind parameters as the SDlC 3767 Communications terminal. Therefore, the NTO support by VM /VCNA is an enhancement to the lU type 1 support provided by VM/VCNA. Thus the support provided for the IBM 3101 display terminal is a line by line operation in character mode using the 64 graphic character set. For a description of the facilities of related SNA products, see the following announcement letters: ACF VTAM Version 1 R2 ACF/VTAM Version 1 R3 ACF/VTAME ACF/NCP/VS R2.1 ACF/NCP/VS R3 NTOR2 NCCF NPDA VM/VCNA - ----- ---::' - - :s'=fi: ISG PP 5746-XXB.1 Do not reproduce without written permission ---. Mar 83 PROGRAM PRODUCTS CICS/DOS/VS EXTM (5746-XXB) [NO LONGER AVAILABLE, effective May, 1983.] PURPOSE The basic function of the Extended Telecommunications Modules (EXTM) feature of CICS/DOS/VS is to establish and support data flow between a CICS/DOS/VS application and a corresponding user application for IBM advanced communication subsystems and preSNA terminals. Services required to support the necessary data flow (System Services Control Point, Session Control, etc.) are an integral part of EXTM. EXTM uses the functional capability of the 3704/3705 Network Control Program/VS (NCP /VS) for controlling terminal operations. Support utilities for the IBM advanced communication subsystems and utility services such as load and dump for 3704/3705 are included. A preprocessor is provided to aid the user during system generation. Normal CICS/DOS/VS functions are supported when using this program. EXTM has been designed to share and take advantage of the functions of CICS/DOS/VS in order to optimize attachment of SNA terminals to a CICS/DOS/VS system and can co-exist in the same partition with BTAM. DESCRIPTION EXTM provides support for the IBM advanced communication subsystems with CICS/DOS/VS on smaller mdls of S/370 processors (1OOK) as well as larger systems interested in an SNA interface tailored to the CICS/DOS/VS environment. The functions performed by EXTM are provided by the following facilities: Application Program Interface: This module is an interface between the EXTM I/O Module and DFHZCP (which provides CICS/DOS/VS support for SNA terminals) and allows DFHZCP to operate as it does with VTAM. This interface supports the subset of VTAM macros used performs equivalent functions for by CICS/DOS/VS and CICS/DOS/VS. CICS/DOS/VS will continue to use the same control blocks with EXTM as with VTAM. I/O Module: The I/O Module controls the transfer of data between the host computer and the 3704/3705. This includes blocking/ deblocking of I/O, constructing of channel pro\i1rams, maintaining physical control of the 3704/3705 NCP/VS and initiating 3704/3705 control functions (activation/deactivation of lines, etc.). The I/O Module also provides an interface to the 3704/3705 load and dump services. Linkage Module: The Linkage Module acts as an interface between the I/O Module and the CICS/DOS/VS user applications, for preSNA terminals, performing such functions as message synchronization and handling of read/write requests. problem determination, diagnose I/O errors and verify device repairs and engineering changes. COLTT can be initiated from any alphameric terminal with input and output capability that is supported by CICS/VS and has sufficient output message size capacity. Preprocessor: The Extended Telecommunications Modules Preprocessor is an installation aid whose output provides input for the generation of an NCP/VS, EXTM, and CICS/DOS/VS system generation including required CICS/DOS/VS tables. Users may select various levels of output from the preprocessor and save time in generating the job stream to install their systems. The preprocessor will generate a sample system based on device types specified, and will have additional cross-checking of parameters between CICS/DOS/VS, EXTM, and NCP /VS generations. CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES The specific installation requirements must be determined by customers based on their need and available resources. Customer responsibilities for installing CICS/DOS/VS are detailed in the CICS/VS General Information Manual GH20-1280. For CICS/DOS/VS with the Extended Telecommunications Modules Feature the customer should: Order and install communications equipment based on processing needs. Train system analysts, programmers and operators in the use of DOS/VS, CICS/DOS/VS with Extended Telecommunications Modules, 3704/3705, NCP/VS, and subsystem design and programming language. Install the NCP /VS in the 3704/3705. Develop, write and test the subsystem application programs and/or customized images as required. Have installed the CICS/DOS/VS. prerequisite versions of DOS/VS and SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS The minimum configuration supported is: 3115 mdl GE (160K). IBM S/370 processor mdls and the IBM 3031 Processor supported by DOS/VS are supported by EXTM. IBM I/O devices to support a Virtual Storage Operating System (DOS/VS and CICS/DOS/VS). Master Terminal Functions: The EXTM Master Terminal Programs provide dynamic user control of the system for EXTM supported terminals. The EXTM master terminal operator can change the status and values of parameters used by CICS/DOS/VS and EXTM and thereby alter the operation of the system. IBM 3704/3705 II Communications Controller with required channel prerequisites or, if appropriate, an IBM 3790 with LCA and required channel prerequisites. System Services Control Point: The function of the System Services Control Point (SSCP) is to establish and maintain sessions between the host computer and all nodes in the network. The SSCP will perform network initialization and dynamic node activation/deactivation requested through the EXTM master terminal commands. Note 1: Only the standard IBM S/370 instruction set is used by EXTM. The CICS/VS instruction set requirement for preSNA support with EXTM is the same as with BTAM. The CICS/VS instruction set requirement for SNA support with EXTM is the same as with VTAM. Support Service Utilities: Utilities are provided for loading and dumping the 3704/3705. The utilities run under CICS/DOS/VS. These services can be invoked automatically and through EXTM master terminal commands. Note 3: See EXTM General Information Manual (GH20-1702) for EXTM configuration guidelines. The EXTM storage configuration aid, called STOREXTM, is available on HONE. Access to Subsystem Support Services batch created files is provided by EXTM for online transmission of subsystem data to the SNA terminal system controllers. This access can be invoked by the EXTM Master Terminal Facility. EXTM master terminal commands may be used to transmit subsystem data to the 3600, 3650 and 3790. Dumping of the 3600 is initiated by the 3600 user application program. EXTM recognizes the request and invokes a DUMP program, routing ..,t~e 3600 system dump to a user-specified data set. ',RAS Functions: Message integrity is achieved through the sequence , number facilities inherent in SNA transmission services. ,System / Network integrity is provided by serviceability aids which . include: '1--:-' ,;',. Path Information Unit (PIU) Trace Channel End Appendage Trace Miscellaneous Data Record (3704/3705) Statistics Recording 3704/3705 Formatted Dump Facility CICS/DOS/VS System Trace (a CICS/DOS/VS facility) 3704/3705 Line Trace ' Application Program Interface (API) Trace C~>ncurrent Online Telecommunication Test Conc~rrent Online TelecommuniCation Test: The EXTM Concurrent Online Telecommunications Test Program is the interface between the online test (OLT) programs and the Extended Telecommunications Modules (EXTM). It controls the selection and execution of the OLTs used for testing the t~leprocessing terminals supported by EXTM. COLTT programs ca~:"be used to perform preventive maintenance, perform A minimum of one EXTM supported terminal. Note 4: The sizes of the CICS/DOS/VS partition and the DOS/VS superv,sor are dependent· upon the functions and parameters chosen. Appropriate SRLs should be used to configure these products. Communication Device Support Communications Controller Support: EXTM supports the IBM 3704 and 3705 Communications Controllers in either NCP /VS mode or NCP /VS with PEP. The emulation of PEP may be utilized by CICS/DOS/VS BTAM or another partition. EXTM does not support the dynamic switching of lines between the emulation partition and NCP /VS when operating with PEP. Multiple IBM 3704s and 3705s may be attached to an EXTM system. Remote IBM 3704/3705 facilities, available under NCP/VS control, are supported by EXTM. The IBM terminals supported by the remote controller are the same IBM terminals supported by EXTM on a local controller. 3704 Communicaions Controller, mdls A3 and A4 3705-1 Communications Controller, mdls A2 - 08 3705-11 Communications Controller, mdls E2 - H8 Communication Systems and Terminals Supported Start/Stop Transmission Terminals 2740 Communication Terminal mdl 1 with, optionally, Record Checking (#6114) Station Control (#7479) 2740 Communication Terminal mdl 2 with, optionally, Record Checking (#611'4) - -~--- ---- PP 5746-XXB.2 Do not reproduce without written permission :5: - - :5~5: ISG Mar 83 PROGRAM PRODUCTS EXTM (cont'd) Buffer Receive (#1499) 2741 Communication Terminal with, optionally, Receive Interrupt (#4708) 3767 Communication Terminal with Start/Stop Feature (#7"" #7112 or #7113) (supported as compatible version of appropriately featured 2740/2741) SDLC Communication feature (#6301, #6302 or #6303) and Configuration Support #9165 and 3792 Auxiliary Control Unit 3793 Keyboard Printer mdl 1 3277 Display Station 3284 Printer mdls 1 and 2 3286 Printer mdls 1 and 2 3288 Printer mdl 2 3767 Communication Terminal mdls 1, 2 and 3 with Vertical Forms Control feature (#8731) (optional) 3770 Data Communication System with SDLC Communication feature (#1460 or #1470) 3771 Data Communication Terminal mdls 1, 2 and 3 3773 Data Communication Terminal mdls1, 2 and 3 Programmable mdls P1, P2 and P3 3774 Data Communication Terminal mdls 1 and 2 Programmable mdls P1 and P2 3775 Data Communication Terminal mdl1 Programmable mdl P1 3776 Data Communication Terminal mdls 1 and 2 3777 Data Communication Terminal 3270 Information Display System 3271 Control Unit mdls 11 or 12 with Copy (#1550) 3277 Display Station mdls 1 or 2, and, optionally 3284 Printer mdls 1 or 2 3286 Printer mdls 1 or 2 3288 printer mdls 2 3775 Display Station mdl 11 or 12 with 3284 Printer mdl 3 Binary Synchronous Communications Terminals 2770 Data Communication System 2772 Multipurpose Control Unit, with optionally, EBCDIC Transpar~~~ J#3650) WACK Response (#9936) Buffer Expansion (#1490) Conversational Mode (#1910) Multipoint Data Link Control (#5010) 0545 Output Punch 1053 Printer or 2213 Printer 2265 Display Station 2502 Card Reader 3270 Information Display System 3271 Control Unit mdl1 or 2, with EBCDIC Transmission Code (#9761) or ASCII Transmission Code (#9762), and 3277 Display Station mdl 1 or 2, and, optionally 3284 Printer mdl 1 or 2 3286 Printer mdl 1 or 2 3288 Printer mdl 2 Copy (#1550 for 3271 Control Unit) 3275 Display Station mdl 1 or 2 with EBCDIC Transmission Code (#9761) or ASCII Transmission Code (#9762), and optionally 3284 Printer mdl 3 3780 Data Communication Terminal with EBCDIC Transpar~~~ J#3601), WACK Response (#9936) Multipoint Data Link Control (#5010) 3781 Card Punch with Component Selection (#1601) on 3780 3770 Data Communication System with BCS feature (#1460 or #1461) (supported as compatible version of appropriately featured 2770) Terminals Connected Via Local Attachment 3790 Communication System 3791 Controller mdls 1A, 1 B, 2A and 2B with Local Channel Attachment (#1515) and Configuration Support #9165 and 3792 Auxiliary Control Unit 3277 Display Station 3793 Keyboard Printer 3284 Printer mdls 1 and 2 3286 Printer mdls 1 and 2 3288 Printer mdl 2 The following table illustrates EXTM support of IBM SOLC devices on nonswitched or dial communicating facilities: Synchronous Data Link Control Terminals 3600 Finance Communication System 3601 Finance Communication System Controller mdls 1, 2A, 2B, 3A and 3B with SDLC Communication Feature (#4501, #4502, #6301 or fl63(2) 3602 Finance Communication System Controller mdls 1A and 1B with SDLC Communication Feature (#4501, #4502, #6301 or #63(2) 3604 Keyboard Display mdls 1, 2,3,4,5 and 6 3606 Financial Services Terminal mdls 1 and 2 3608 Printing Financial Services Terminal mdls 1 and 2 3610 Document Printer mdls 1, 2, 3 and 4 3611 Passbook Printer (supported as a 3612) mdls 1 and 2 3612 Passbook and Document Printer mdls 1, 2 and 3 3614 Consumer Transaction Facility mdls " 2, 11 and 12 3618 Administrative Line Printer mdl1 3624 Consumer Transaction Facility mdls " 2, 11 and 12 3630 Plant Communication System 3631 Communication System Controller mdls 1A and 1B with SDLC Communication feature (#4502, #6301 and #6302) . 3632 Plant Communication System Controller mdls 1A and 1B with SDLC Communication feature (#4502, #6301 and #6302) (3600 Compatible) 3650 Retail Store System 3651 Store Controller mdls A50 and BOO 3653 Point of Sale Terminal mdl 1 3275 Display Station mdl 3 3284 Printer mdl 3 3790 Communication System 3791 Controller mdls 1A, 1B, 2A and 2B with SDlC Devlca Non· switched 3270 3600 3614 3624 3630 3650 3767 3770 3790 X X X X X X X X X Dial·ln Dial-out X X X X X X X X X X Equivalent Terminals: Terminals that are functionally equivalent to those specifically supported by EXTM may also function satisfactorily with EXTM; the customer is responsible for establishing equivalency. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS The Extended Telecommunications Modules Feature is coded using S/370 Assembler language. EXTM operates in the following environment: EXTM V2 Rei. 0 DOS/VS Release 31 or 32 NCP /VS Version 4.1 or 5.0 CICS/DOS/VS Version 1.1.1 or 1.2 . EXTM V3 Rei. 0 EXTM V3 Rei. 1 32 or 33.\,; 4.1 or 5.0 1.2 or 1.3 33 or· 5.0 or •• 1.3 or • • Currently available version at the time of, EXTM V3.1 availability. •• ACF/NCP/VS support will be available at the availability of ACF/NCP/VS.·· , " The support utilities for the subsystem controllers use CICS/DOS/VS VSAM which requires the Relocating Loader. .. CICS/DOS/VS support of BTAM terminals remains unchanged. BTAM can coexist with EXTM in the CICS/DOS/VS partition. When supporting terminals via BTAM, they must interface to CICS/OOS/VSBTAM via a separate control unit or via an IBM 3704/3705 in emulation mode or by using the Partitioned Emulator Program (PEP). VTAM can coexist with Extended Telecommuni~tions Modules in the system but --.----- ----...:: - - :a"f§: ISG Do not reproduce without written permission Mara3 PROGRAM PRODUCTS EXTM (cont'd) not in the same CICS/DOS/VS partition. Each system, VTAM and EXTM, must have its own 3704/3705. EXTM/VTAM Selection Criteria: In selecting whether EXTM or VTAM should be used in a DOS/VS environment with CICS/DOS/VS, careful consideration should be given to the availability of the necessary minimum system configuration and to the functions required in the system. PERFORMANCE CONSIDERATIONS The performance of EXTM in a virtual storage environment is highly dependent on the system resources available, on any programs that operate concurrently and their relative priorities, on system and application data file placement, on system timing, etc. Performance also depends on the paging characteristics and storage reference patterns of CICS/DOS/VS and its application programs, on the allocation of data files to particular devices, and on the particular data . being processed. For specific online performance and response time requirements, careful attention should be given to ensure that adequate real resources (main storage, processor computing capability, channels, disk file arms, etc.) are available. To verify specific performance, benchmarking EXTM with CICS/DOS/VS and DOS/VS may be appropriate. TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index PP57~XXB.3 ------- ----:: - - :S~5: ISG PP S746-XXM.1 Mar 83 Do not reproduce without written permission ,PROGRAM PRODUCTS COMMUNICATION ORIENTED MESSAGE SYSTEM CORMES Release 1 Modification Level 0 (5746-XXM) SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT PURPOSE The Communication Oriented Message System (CORMES) is designed to build the central "paperless" message exchange system in an organization connecting terminal users and application programs of different functions. It provides communication links: HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS For the interaction between online application programs and terminal users (action messages). For compilation and/or execution of CORMES, an IBM 5/370 with the minimum main storage capacity for CICS/DOS/VS operation is required. For CORMES, additional storage is required. For the first terminal 16,500 bytes and for each additional terminal 3,000 bytes; for the first application program 11,800 bytes and for each additional program 1,200 bytes. For triggering the execution of application programs based on the occurrence of prespecified events (trigger messages). For the data bases, and files the same devices are used as for the basic software,9f DOS/VS, CICS/DOS/VS and DL/I DOS/VS. For the exchange of information between terminal users (action messages). DESCRIPTION CORMES operates under the IBM Disk Operating System/Virtual Storage (DOS/VS) Release 33 or subsequent releases unless otherwise identified. . For data base management, the system uses the data base facilities of the IBM S/370 Data Language/I Disk Operating System/Virtual Storage (DL/I DOS/VS) Version 1, program number 5746-XX1, Release 1, or subsequent releases unless otherwise identified. For data communication, CORMES uses the facilities of the IBM S/370 Customer Information Control System/Virtual Storage (CICS/DOS/VS) Version 1, program number 5746-XX3, Release 2, or subsequent releases unless otherwise identified. HIGHLIGHTS At least an IBM 3277 Display Station mdl 2 with a 66-key keyboard must be available. The Selector Light-pen (#6530) and program function keys are supported optionally. The IBM 3274 and 3276 are supported in compatibility mode. The online address space requirements for CORMES may vary widely, according to the number of active terminals. A minimum installation might require address space of about 384K bytes for the combined CICS/VS and DL/I DOSIVS user task partition. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS CORMES is written in Assembler language and uses the macro language facility. CORMES is designed for an online DOS/VS environment and requires the following programs: DOS/VS Release 33 and subsequent releases). • Terminal user services: CICS/DOS/VS Version 1, program number 5746-XX3, Release 2 and subsequent releases). • Easy to use terminal functions to create, display, modifY, and distribute action messages. DL/I DOS/VS Version 1, Program Number 5746-XX1, Release 1 and subsequent releases). • Routing of action messages from one user to another. Linkage to online application programs to process a user-selected action message. Application program services: User macros to simplify the creation of action and trigger messages in user-written programs and their transfer to the central message files. Triggering of application program execution according to prespecified events: A point in time, a time interval or a queue length. CORMES as a frame for the implementation of interactive application programs. System services: Monitoring of the individual message queue of each terminal user by due date and priority of the received messages. CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES This section briefly discusses the activities the user has to perform to make CORMES operational. It gives a rough guide for assessing the total installation effort. The assumption is that a system running under OOS/VS with OL/I OOS/VS and CICS/DOS/VS has already been installed. The installation procedure allows an easy installation of the CORMES system including the sample by use of object code facility. The distributed source code will be used for the final adaptation to the existing system environment. The major implementation steps are: Installation of the CORMES system according to the distribution tape and installation description. '( Execution of the supplied sample to verify the installation. This sample can also be used as a tool for training terminal users. Optionally, assembly of all CORMES online programs to include customer requirements. Modification and reassambly of existing programs for CORMES communication (according to the rules defined by CORMES) by use of macros and examples provided. Exchange of the sample files and tables by files and tables that describe the customer system. The required changes within existing customer programs have been reduced to a minimum. In addition, macros are provided to simplify the program interactions. Support is provided for Assembler, PL/I and COBOL programs. • Unless otherwise identified in a future revision of this document. Note: CORMES executes, and is supported by IBM, on S/370 virtual storage configurations running under DOS/VS in virtual mode, and DOS/VS underVM/370in virtual machine mode. ' DOCUMENTATION: (available only from the European Publications Center) Licensed Program Specifications (GH12-5238) ... General Information Manual (GH12-5127). TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index ------- ----:: - -:E'f§: ISG Do not reproduce without written permission PP 5748-XC2.1 Mar 83 PROGRAM PRODUCTS DISPLAY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM/3790 , 5748-XC2 [NO LONGER AVAILABLE, effective May, 1983.] PURPOSE This program prodl!ct is' a productivity aid for users 'of the 3790 Communication System that eases the design,' coding, testing and support of the 3790 application programs. The OMS /3790 program product consists of a forms-oriented program generator for modules interfacing with the operator terminals, a teleprocessing interface program, and a set of macros to invoke functions, retrieve data, and manage the program's working storage. DESCRIPTION The DMS/3790 program product produces a class of programs referred to as screen handlers. The user defines the screen handler on a set of forms that is provided with OMS/3790. These forms allow the user to describe layouts (screen, line printer or 3793), input and output fields and the editing characteristics of these fields. In addition, the meaning of program function keys, program attention keys and selector pen detectable fields can be described. The output of the 3790 Program Generator will be programs which are ready for assembly. A facility is also available which will allow these forms to be prepared interactively under CICS/VS, TSO or VM/370. DMS/3790 will provide the Communications Interface Monitor (CIM) as an optional feature. This feature manages communications between 3790 user application programs' and IMS/VS or CICS/VS. CIM supports opening and closing of sessions with IMS/VS and CICS/VS, recovering from sessions that failed due .to errors, sending messages to and receiving replies from the host system and. storing replies in 3790 user buffers, indexed or relative data sets or work area files. CIM supports CICS/VS Release 1.3 and IMS/VS Release 1.1.4 host applications using VTAM. CIM will provide. communications between DMS/3790 programs and IMS/VS via SLU type P. DMS/3790 provides a Linkage Service facility which establishes standard interfaces and communication protocols between modules via a set of macros. Programmers can invoke application functions by names specifying only what data is to be operated on and where the result is to be stored. Linkage services locates the invoked function ,and, if at the host, CIM will transmit the data and store the reply in the specified location. T.he Get Collection .facility of DMS/3790 allows programmers to request inquiry data by name, specifying only a key field. Get Collection will permit inquiries against local or host resident files or files split between the 3790 and host systems. If the data resides on the host system, control will be given to the Communications Interface Monitor which will send the transaction to the host to retrieve the data. The Work Area Management (WAM) facility of DMS/3790 provides temporary working storage for application programs. The WAM macros provide for high-level manipulation of this working storage, and symbolic addressing of storage. The Work Area is designed for storing terminal input data and passing data between modules on the 3790 and between the 3790 and the host. HIGHLIGHTS • DMS/3790 forms allow an application designer to describe the 3790 interface with the display operator. The forms provided are: - The Layout Form which defines: Program information such as name, number and record layouts. The screen format to be displayed to the operator. The location of variable display and input fields on the display. The meaning of PA keys, PF keys and selector light-pen attentions. Special error messages that may be displayed to the terminal operator. - The Field Processing Form which defines: Variable fields to be displayed to the operator. Input fields to be entered by the operator. Input field edits, including count, required or optional, type, selfcheck, picture, range and value. Selector 'light- pen' data. The action that is to be taken if an edit detects an error. - The Buffer Description Form which defines the layout of fields in . a record or buffer. • Flexible panel definition provides for: Field-by-Field Support. Full Screen Processing Support. Full 327.7 Field Attribute Capability. Extensive Operator Communications. Deferred and Immediate Selector' Light-Pen Support. • Interactive Forms Preparation facility is a productivitY tool that aids the designer in describing the interface with the display operator. It operates with a 3277 mdl 2 attached to the S/370 via a 3271 or 3277 control unit. This facility operates under TSO ITCAM, TSO/VTAM, CICS/VS and VM/370. This feature supports all the capabilities of the form plus: Full screen entry of display and print layouts. Left-right arld up-:down scrolling capability. Automatic prompting for field attributes. Restart capability. Help panels. • The Work Area Manager is a high function facility for temporary working storage. It contains a two-level hierarchical structure. It provides for root segment and multiple dependent segment. types, and multiple occurrences of each dependent type. It is application oriented. The programmer assigns symbolic names to the root and dependent segment types. Using these names and flexible work area macros the programmer can easily add desired segments, add new occurrences of segments, insert segments at the start or middle of a chain and delete segments anywhere in the work area. It provides for security checking. The Work Area Manager performs all work area disk 110 for the program. If a segment has been updated by an application, the Work Area Manager automatically writes that segment to disk, eliminating the chance of losing the new information. The Work Area Manager controls record pools for allocation of work areas to programs and gives segments to all programs as needed. • Get Collection supports distribution of' inquiry data in the 3790 environment. Inquiry data is requested by name, :specifying only a key field. System-wide symbolic names are given to groups of related fields called collections. The programmer requests. a collection by its symbolic name, specifying only the key of the collection. A collection can be resident on the 3790, the host S/370 system, or distributed between the two systems. If it is 3790 resident; Get Collection will retrieve it from the local disk and present it to the program. If it is host resident, Get Collection will search the local disk to determine if it has previously been retrieved before requesting it from the host system. This reuse of data can improve response time to the user, and can minimize communications traffic and host processing overhead. If a collection can reside both locally and at the host system, Get Collection will search the local data set to see if it is residing locally before going to the host system~" This allows the system designe"r to permanently store those collections that are most frequently used on the controller without limiting access to collections that are on the host system. Location of collections is transparent to 3790 programs. Get Collection allows the system designer to change where collections reside without having to be concerned about the programs that reference them. A reassembly of these programs is necessary to allow them access to the moved collection. It is the user's responsibility to provide the necessary host application programs to transfer the collections. . Get Collection is transparent to the 3790 program because it automatically invokes the Communications Interface Monitor if the collection is located at the host system. When the program regains control, it looks as if the collection was resident on the local 3790 disk. • Linkage Services supports the distribution of function in the 3790 environment. Functions are invoked by name, specifying only the input and where to place the reply. A symbolic name is given to' each function in the distributed system. The program invokes a function by this symbolic name, identifying the data that is to be passed to the function and where the reply is to be .stored. Linkage Services provides a set of standard data interfaces that can be used between 3790. programs. These interfaces identify the data that is to be operated on by a called function and where the calling function expects the reply to be stored. . Functions can be local or host resident. If a called function resides at the host, Linkage Services will invoke tho communications facility to transmit the data to host system. When the reply is PP 5748-XC2.2 Do not reproduce without written permission MarS3 PROGRAM PRODUCTS DMS/3790 (cont'd) retrieved, it will be stored in the area specified by the calling function. Location of invoked functions is transparent to the. programmer. Linkage Services allows the system designer to change. where functions are located without being concerned about the programs that invoke them. Only a reassembly of the invoking programs is necessary to provide access to the moved function. It is the user's responsibility to write the application programs which perform the specific function. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS DMS/3790 is written in S/370 Assembler language, PL/S· and 3790 programming statements as follows: Interactive Forms Preparation - PL/S· and Assembler Screen Handler Generator - PL/S· and Assembler Get Collection - Assembler Linkage Services - Assembler • Communications Interface Monitor (CIM) is a separate feature of the DMS/3790 product Work Area Management - Assembler and 3790. Programming Statements CIM controls the 3790 side of the communications link. The session control functions performed include openin~ and closing of sessions, recovery from temporary errors, restarting and resynchronizing interrupted sessions and maintaining a log of communications errors. Communications Interface Monitor (feature) -.3790 Programming Statements CIM transmits requests to the host from the calling program's buffer,. the calling program's work area, indexed records or relative records. CIM retrieves replies from the host and stores them in the calling program's buffer, the calling program's work area, indexed records or relative records. •. Programming Language/Systems (PL/S) is an IBM proprietary language. Assembler language and 3790 programming statements source code is· jJrovided with the DMS/3790 program product. Depending upon the host operating system used, the following programs are required: OS/VS VS1 VS2 OS/VS Assembler XF 5741-SC1-03 5752-SC1-03* 5742-SC1-03** CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES To install and use the DMS/3790 program product the user must: 1. Acquire a knowledge of the functions provided by the different facilities. Linkage Editor 5741-SC1-04 5752-SC1-04* 5742-SC1-04·· Virtual Storage Access Method (VSAM) 5741-SC1-DE 5752-SC1-DE· 5742-SC1-DE·· IDCAMS (Access Method Services) 5741-SC1-DK 5752-SC1-DK· 5742-SC1-DK·· Sequential Access Method .. 5741-SC1-DO 5752-SC1-DO· 5742-SC1-DO·· Virtual Telecommunications Access Method (~AM) 5741-SC1-23 5752-SC1-23* 574?-SC1-23·· 2. Learn the new macros provided for implementing these facilities. 3. Learn how to prepare the forms provided for the screen handler generation. 4. Generate the necessary tables required at the host system for Linkage Services and Get Collection. 5. Provide the necessary data set and program IDs to be used. 6. Provide the necessary host application programs if the CIM feature is used. 7. Provide additional programming for the screen handler user routines if required for the 3790 applications. SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS DMS/3790 requires the following system configuration: An IBM S/370 mdl115 or larger for DOS/VS, mdl 135 or larger for OS/VS1 or a mdl 145 or larger for OS/VS2.The machine configuration for DMS/3790 varies according to the user's application needs. The requirement for.operation under CICS/VS or IMS/VS is any IBM S/370 with enough real storage to meet the combined operating requirements of CICS/VS or IMS/VS, the host operating system, the appropriate access methods and other user-required applications. DMS/3790 requires S5K of virtual storage. The program operates in a virtual equals virtual environment. 3704/3705 Network Control Program (NCP /VS) (If 3790 is not local channel attached) 5744-BA2 Subsystem Support Services (SSS) 6741-SC1-SS 3790 Host Support 6744-BZ3 5740-XX1 6740-XX1 5740;..XX2 5740-XX2 Any card read/punch and printer supported by OS/VS1,OS/VS2 or DOS/VS. . Telecommunications Access Method (TCAM) -------- 5752-SC.1-21· 5742-SC1-21·· Any magnetic tape drive supported by OS/VS1, OS/VS2 or DOS/VS (required for installation only.) TSO Subroutines for TCAM --------. 6752-SC1-TS· 6742-SC1-TS·· A minimum of 1-3271 or 1-3272 and 1-3277 mdl 2 Display Station if the Interactive Forms Preparation facility is used. TSO Data Management -------- Schedu~r -------- 6762-SC1-T3· 5742-SC1-T3·· 5752-SC1-T4*<' 5742-SC1-T4** Supervisor -------- A 3747 Data Converter for offline diskette creation. A 3791 Controller, mdl1A or larger. - 3791 configuration support feature #9431, #9165 or #9169. (CIM does not support feature #9431). • ••• ••• - DMS/3790 will support only' the following attached devices included in the above configuration: Note 1: 3793 Keyboard/Printer 3277 mdl 1 or 2 - A minimum of either 1-3277 or 1-3793 is required. In addition to above attached devices, the line printer (feature #4710, #4711 or #4715) is also supported . " 6744-BZ3 Depending upon the' operating system used,. any direct access storage device supported by the Virtual Storage Access Method (VSAM) and OS/VS1, OS/VS2 or DOS/VS. or " 5762-SC1-SS* 6742-SC1-SS·· Customer Information Control System (CICS/VS), Version 1 Release 3.0 ••• or Information Management System (lMS/VS) Version 1, Release1.4··· A 3704 or 3705 Communications Controller for online operations (if the 3790 is not local channel attached). . 5744-BA2 MVS SVS Also applies to identified. _, subsequent 5742-SC1-T7** releases . unless otherwise VTAM or TCAM/NCP/VS Direct, NCP/VS and SSS are required for the transmission of programs from the host to the 3790. They are not required if the Batch Data Exchange facility is used to forward programs to the 3790. ',,' Note 2: ------ ---:: - - :S~5: ISG Do not reproduce without written permission Mar 83 PROGRAM PRODUCTS DMS/3790 (cont'd) . VTAM, NCP/VS and CICS/VS or IMS/VS are required if the Communications Interface Monitor feature of DMS/3790 is to be used. Note 3: For the Interactive Forms Preparation facility CICS/VS or TSO with either VTAM or TCAM is required. DOS/VS: Release 33 D.OS/VS Assembler 5745-SC-ASM Linkage Editor 5745-SC-LNK Virtual Storage Access Method (VSAM) 5745-SC-VSM Access· Method Services 5745-SC-AMS Sequential Disk IOCS 5745-SC~DSK Virtual Telecommunications Access Method (VTAM) 5745-SC-VTM Extended Telecommunications Modules (EXTM) with CICS/VS Version 1, Release 3.0 5746-XXB 3704/3705 Network Control Program/VS (NCP /VS) (if 3790 is not local channel attached) 5747-AJ2 Subsystem Support Services (SSS) 5745-SC-SSS 3790 Host Support 5747-BQ1 Customer Information Control System (CICS/VS) Version 1, Release 3.0 (and subsequent releases unless oterwise identified) 5746-XX3 Note 1: NCP/VS, SSS and either VTAM or EXTM are required for the transmission of programs from the host to the 3790. They are not required if the Batch Data Exchange facility is used to transfer programs to the 3790. Note 2: NCP /VS and CICS/VS with either VTAM or EXTM are required if the Communications Interface Monitor feature of DMS/3790 is to be used. Note 3: PP 5748-XC2.3 . For the Interactive Forms Preparation facility CIC~/VS is required. VM/370: VM /370 can be used for execution of the screen handler generator, for interactive forms preparation and for assembly of programs if a 3790 macro library is available. For validation and transmission of programs to the 3790 and for use of the CIM foature of DMS/3790, El DOS/VS or OS/VS system is required. DOCUMENTATION (availablo from Mechanicsburg) Title Order Number General Information Manual To Be Sales Flyer Announced TERMS and CONDITIONS: See PP Index, --.----- -------- pp, 5748-~C3.1 Mar 83 Do not, reproduce without written permission . .=. =:: :§~5: ISG PROGRAM PRODUCTS DISPLAY MANAGEMENT SYSTEM/3770 (DMS/3770), RELEASE 1 5748-XC3 PURPOSE This program product is a productivity aid for users of the 3770 Communication System that simplifies the design, coding, testing and maintenance of the 3770 application programs. The DMS/3770 program product consists of an interactive or forms driven panel definition program, a screen handler program generator, a local data set access manager, a host communication access manager and an application function manager. The 3770 programmable system is an operator oriented communication system that consists of an IBM 3774 or 3775 Programmable Communication Terminal and its attached devices. The operator terminal consists of the console keyboard, the 480 character gas panel display, the console printer and the 3278 Display Station mdl 2 RPQ #EJ2657 (3774 only). Support for the RPQ will be available in a later release. Records may be stored on one fixed diskette drive, and / or two additional diskette drives that are optional. Other devices supported are the 3501 Card Reader, the 2502 Card Reader and the 3521 Card Read / Punch. ' Five operatiol)al functions may be selected by the application programmer to be provided in the generated functional program: -~- Selected input data fields from the panel described by the application programmer are collected and arranged in the order specified by the buffer description and are stored in the local/host data sets selected by the operator. , I Add Display ---~ Previously entered data is retrieved and merged with the panel described by the application programmer, and is displayed on the operator console of the 3770. A record may be retrieved by the operator by entering the key of the record, by entering the relative record number of the record, or by entering a null key which signifies "next record". Verify Programs prepared on the host system are transmitted to the 3770 where they may be executed. These programs can operate in a stand-alone manner or with host communication. The S/370 host system supports the 3770 under DOS/VS, OS/VS1, OS/VS2 and VM/370 (CMS). 3770 programs are created and tested at the host system and are transmitted by the user to the 3770. DMS/3770 generates a 3770 application program which supports data collection and maintenance from the 3770 console. local data sets may be either indexed or relative in organization. Host data sets may have any form of organization which the user-written host program will support. HIGHLIGHTS Improved programmer productivity. The cost of maintaining 3770 application programs should be reduced because of system modularity and standardized documentation. --- Previously entered data is retrieved by key or tlyentering a null key ("next record"). The operator is supplied with the prompts from the application programmer specified panel and is required to rekey the entry values. If the existing data and the newly keyed data match, the next field is processed. Three attempts at each field are allowed before the new value is accepted in the case of mismatch. The original data is not shown to the verify operator to maintain keying independence. Indexed data sets include a verification indicator. The indicator will be changed to a "v" if the record was verified correct as is, and will be changed to a "c" if,the record was altered during the verify operation. Update --- Previously entered data is retrieved by key or by entering a null key ("next record"). The data is then merged with the panel described by the application programmer, and is displayed on the operator console one field at a time. After, each input value is displayed, the operator is' given the', opportunity to alter it. After the last field, the record .is rewritten to the source data set. .If an indexed data set is being processed, the verification indicator will be changed to a "u" if a field is updated. Distribution of function or data from the host system to the 3770 or vice versa. --.: The record is selected by the operator by key only, is merged with the application programmer specified panel and is displayed on the operator console. The operator is then prompted to continue or to abort the delete request. " No'l implies abort, "yes" :implies continue. The record is then removed from the data set by altering the key so that it is no longer selectable. (The deleted record may be returned to active status by the operator.) Application may be described on the Interactive Forms Preparation facility or by using the DMS/3770 forms. Continuous running routines .; - .the operator has the option of performing a selected function in a continuous mode. Full Screen Processing facility. DMS/3770 requires at the host a number of input, output and work files to retain information as it is processing the various screen handler forms. These files are: Delete Tedious aspects of 3770 programming are removed without prohibiting unique implementation via user exits. DESCRIPTION Field by field support. The Interactive Forms Preparation Facility (lFP) is a productivity tool that aids the application designer in describing the interface with the display operator. This facility operates under TSO, CICS/VS and CMS. The IFP provides for online entry of the information necessary to generate screen handler programs by using a 3271 or 3272 and one 3277 mdl 2 Display Station or one 3275 Display Station (or equivalent 3274/3276/3278 combination). This facility provides the capability to improve productivity with functions such as: Full screen entry of display and print layouts. 1. 2. 3. 4. Input file. layout & field processing file (work). Mapping file (work). Generated output file. I CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES To install and use the OMS/3770 program product the user must: I 1. Acquire a :knowledge of th~ functions provided by the different facilities. . 2. learn the new macros provided for implementing the~e facilities. 3. learn how to use the IFP facility or the forms provided for the screen handler generation. Restart capability. 4. Provide the necessary data set and program 10's to be used. Help panels. 5. Provide the necessary host application programs and install CICS/VS or IMS/VS if host communications is u s e d . ' ' '. 6. Provide any necessary user programming to .perform functions not provided by 9MSI,3770. This may b~ done yi~'User exits. 7. Provide the NCP /VS and Access Method Generations if online diskette transmission or OMS/3770 Host: Communications is used. ' ~, left-right and up-down scrolling capability. Automatic prompting for field defini~ions. OMS/3770 forms allow an application programmer to describe the 3770 interface with the display operator. In order to use the screen handler function of DMS/3770 for specifying operator communications, certain forms must be filled out, keyed and input to the DMS/3770 screen handler generator. The forms are divided into two groups: (1) data definition and (2) screen handler definition. Data definition consists of the buffer definition form. This form allows the user to specify the formats of buffers or records. A OMS/3770 data definition processor edits this form and then generates, in card form, the appropriate 3770 code for the definitions. These definitions can then be added to a MACLIB or source statement library for reference at assembly time for the application. There are two forms which provide for the screen handler definition. Contents of these forms allow input of basic program information of field editing characteristics. The host communication function supports the BSC mode of line use. SOlC support is also available. SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS ) , OMS/3770 requires the followin'gsystem configuration: An IBM S/370 mdl .115 or I~~ger for DOS/VS, an IBM mcll135 or larger for OS/VS1 or an IBM mdl 145 or larger for OS/VS2 and comparable mdls of the IBM 3031, 3032, and 3033. The machine configuration for OMS/3770 varies according to the user's application needs. The requirement for operation under CICS/VS or IMS/VS is anyS/370 with enough real storage to meet the combined operating requirements of CICS/VS or IMS/~S, the host operating system, the appropriate access methods ':-,and other ------- ----:= - - :§~5: ISG Do not reproduce without written permission PROGRAM PRODUCTS IBM PERSONAL COMPUTER MACRO ASSEMBLER 6024002 PURPOSE The Macro Assembler operates with the IBM Personal Computer Disk Operating System (DOS). Programs written in Assembler language are assembled into executable machine code that may run several times faster than equivalent high-level language routines. Additionally, the Assembler permits the programmer to design detailed program functions that are often impossible in a higher-level language. Assembler-produced programs, called "object" files, may be called from programs written from the following IBM Personal Computer languages: BASIC, Pascal, and FORTRAN. HIGHLIGHTS Relocatable object modules - Definition of macros to generate commonly-used instruction sequences - Two versions: 96KB macro and 64KB subset Machine language of each instruction - Start and end addresses ~ Name, length, class of each segment - Public and local names and their attributes - Line numbers - Alphabetic cross-reference of variables Compatible with IBM Personal Computer BASIC, Pascal, and FORTRAN programs The Assembler language program is created using a text editor such as the EDLIN utility program that is packaged with DOS, or a full-screen text editor such as the Personal Editor (6024051) which is a separate licensed program. The Macro Assembler is then used to assemble the program. Next, the DOS Linker translates the Assembler relocatable output into a load module, ready for loading and execution. While this process must take place on a 64KB or larger diskette system, the load module itself could be run on a diskette system with as little as 32KB memory. When a load module is designed for use as a subroutine of a higher-level language program (IBM Personal Computer BASIC, Pascal, or FORTRAN), the appropriate instructions must be included in the calling program. Both versions of the Macro Assembler are co-resident on one diskette. A reference manual is packaged with the diskette. CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES Customers are responsible for producing backup copies of the original diskettes when copying is permitted according to the terms and conditions of the IBM Program License Agreement and perform backup and recovery procedures for data diskettes. BRANCH OFFICE RESPONSIBILITIES (None) SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS An IBM 5160 Personal Computer XT or an IBM 5150 Personal Computer with at least 96KB of memory and one diskette drive. One of the following display options required for te,xt entry: IBM 5151 Monochrome Display and the IBM Monochrome Display . and Printer Adapter IBM Color Display and the Color/Graphics Monitor Adapter A 40- or 80-column black/white or 40- or SO-column color monitor with the IBM Color/Graphics Monitor Adapter A minimum 96KB, one diskette drive sy~tf!m Is required to produce an assembler language object module using the full Macro Assembler version. A subset version is provided to assemble programs on a 64KB system. This version does not support macros, repeat functions (REPT, IRP, IRPC), record pseudo-ops, or structure pseudo-ops. I SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS ' B6ttl Assembler versions must be executed under control of the IBM Personal Computer Dis~ Operating System (DOS) Version 1 or subsequent versions or releases. When used with the IBM Personal Computer Disk,Operating System Version 2.0, the Macro Assembler may, reside on a fixed disk drive, and it may access fixed disk files. The DOS .Linker program (on the DOS Diskette) is also required for the linkage editor process. A text editinQ program (EDLIN) for entry of the Assembler, source program, is reSident on the DOS Diskette. If full-screen text editing is required, the Personal Editor is available as a separate product.., . PACKAGING IBM Personal Computer Macro Assembler Reference Manual- The correct procedures- for.: writing, assembling, linking and running an Assembler program are: described in the Macro Assembler Reference Manual. A complete instruction set reference is included. Details about the Linker program and EDLIN are' included in the IBM Personal Computer Di~k Operating System.Manual. . . PP 6024-002.1 Mar 83 New ------- ----:: - - :S~5: ISG PP 6024-003.1 Do not reproduce without written permission Mar 83 Major Revision PROGRAM PRODUCTS IBM PERSONAL COMPUTER BASIC COMPILER 6024003 PURPOSE With BASIC Compiler, programs written in IBM Personal Computer BASIC (Interpreter) may be converted to object code for improved run-time performance. Most functions supported by the Disk and Advanced versions of the BASIC Interpreter are also supported by the BASIC Compiler. HIGHLIGHTS Programs may be written and tested using the BASIC Interpreter and the BASIC program editor. Performance gains of several times over interpreter timings are possible (results vary by program). Object modules may be linked with subroutines written with the IBM Personal Computer Macro Assembler. Compiled programs may not be listed or modified, as source or BASIC Interpreter files can, thus providing some application security. Some double-precision arithmetic is supported by the compiler (trig functions, FOR-NEXT loop variables). The compiler checks every program statement for syntax errors during compilation. (BASIC Interpreter checks syntax of statements during program execution. It may miss errors in untested statements.) Demo program provided for training purposes. Compiler" metacommands" (directives) are available to control output formats and run-time options. DESCRIPTION The BASIC Compiler permits a programmer to convert an existing program written in IBM Personal Computer BASIC (Interpreter) to object code for a significant improvement in run-time performance. A high degree of compatibility between the interpreter and compiler has been maintained to minimize program modifications. Each BASIC program to be compiled must be created as a source (ASCII) file using the BASIC program editor or an editor such as the EDLIN utility program on the DOS diskette. The compiler is then used to compile the program, producing a machine language file. Finally, a Linker program resident on the BASIC Compiler diskette is used to convert the machine language file into one that is ready for loading and execution (load module). The compiled load module contains some language functions that the interpreter has in the system unit's read-only-memory (ROM). For this reason, the compiled program may be larger in memory than the interpreter version plus the BASIC or BASICA (resident) Interpreter extensions. CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES The customer is responsible for producing backup copies of the original compiler diskettes. Application programs using compiled code may require licensed run-time libraries. Information concerning distribution must be obtained from IBM. Usage of the run-time module is an option taken at compile time. Programs compiled without this option can be distributed with no additional considerations, but may require significantly more diskette space. Since there are some minor differences between the language functions supported by the BASIC Interpreter and Compiler versions, the customer should be prepared to make changes to an existing interpreter program prior to compilation. These differences are summarized in the Compatibility section below. SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS A minimum 64KB, one-diskette drive system is required to compile a BASIC program, although the program itself may be executable on a smaller system (two drives are recommended for easier operation). While the IBM Monochrome Display with the IBM Monochrome Display and Printer Adapter as well as the IBM Color Display with the Color/Graphics Monitor Adapter (40- or eO-column formats) are supported, eO-columns are recommended for displaying compiler messages and listings. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS The IBM Personal Computer DOS Diskette provides the necessary I/O routines and linker. When used with DOS Version 2.0, the BASIC Compiler may reside on a fixed disk drive, and it may access fixed disk files. COMPATIBILITY BASIC Interpreter Command, Function, or Statement BASIC Compiler Differences LOAD, SAVE, AUTO, EDIT, LIST, Not supported on compiler. These ILlST, DELETE, MERGE, NEW, commands .are normally associated RENUM, CONT with program editing in the interpreter environment. CHAIN, COMMON Compiler function is a subset of interpreter. MERGE, DELETE and ALL options operate on lines in an interpretive program only. COMMON must appear in each program; variables must be listed in the same order in each program. Commands referencing "CAS1:" (LIST, RUN, LOAD, SAVE, etc.) and MOTOR DEF FN, DEFINT /SNG/DBL/STR, and DIM Cassette operations are not supported. In a compiler program these statements must appear before functions or variables are referenced. Dynamic array dimensioning and ERASE statement Not supported. Integer overflow error handling Subset of interpreter function. /0 compiler option available to provide additional support. "Soft Key" support (default char- Defaults are not supported. Proacter strings assigned to function grams may assign values using KEY keys F1-F10) statement. String handling Character-string length in interpretive BASIC is 256 characters; in compiled BASIC it may be up to 32,767 characters. The string descriptor (referred to by VARPTR and some assembler langua\1e subroutines) is three bytes long 10 the interpreter; four bytes in the compiler. DRAW, PLAY "X String" and "-variable" require use of VARPTR. OPEN COM LEN • number option must be added to support GET or PUT DOCUMENTATION IBM Personal Computer BASIC Compiler Manual, The BASIC Compiler Manual should be used with the BASIC Reference Manual (6025013) and the Disk Operating System Manual (6172220). The BASIC Reference Manual contains additional cross-reference information to the compiler product, and will be shipped with new system units. PACKAGING The BASIC Compiler is resident on· two diskettes. It is packaged with the IBM Personal Computer BASIC Compiler Manual. --.----- ----.:.::::: ----:E~~ ISG PP 6024-004.1 Do .not reproduce without written permission Mar 83 New PROGRAM PRODUCTS VISICALC* 6024004 PURPOSE VisiCalc is an electronic spreadsheet application. HIGHLIGHTS A "worksheet" of 254 rows and 63 columns Automatic recalculation of entire worksheet with new or changed data Automatic recalculation which takes care of the order of recalculation Step-by-step instructions with examples for all major features Quick Reference Summary card for easy reference Overlay of mUltiple worksheets to a single worksheet Variable column width Ability to view two parts of worksheet simultaneously Horizontal and Vertical dual-window synchronization Extensive functions and operators Fixed Title option for scrolling Replicate function for repetitive entries Transcendental functions Scientific notation available Communicates with other programs through the DIF·· format DESCRIPTION VisiCalc is a program that creates worksheets in which a user can create dynamic tables of information. Each worksheet is composed of 254 rows and 63 columns which allow for 16,002 (254 X 63) unique locations or "cells". VisiCalc allows the user to perform processing in these tables by Lising algebraic formulas in cell locations in which the variables are other cell locations: When the value'in one cell location changes, the entire worksheet including cell formulas is automatically recalculated. The display screen is called the window to the worksheet in which the resultant values (the result of calculating the formulas) are displayed. The formulas can be changed in place (edited), or moved or duplicated (by single cell or block of cells) to another location on the worksheet and saved on disk or diskette for later editing / processing. Two or more worksheets can be "overlayed", allowing for combination of data. Blocks of the worksheet can be saved in DIF·· format which can then be read by applications supporting the DIF·· format such as VisiPlot···, and Multiplan by Microsoft. DIF format does not ,include cell formulas, only the resultant values. This application is known also as an "electronic spreadsheet" . VisiCalc for the IBM Personal Computer is a unique tool which allows the businessman, the accountant, the analyst, and the planner an efficient way to solve their problems with no knowledge of a traditional programming language. VisiCalc combines the convenience and familiarity of a pocket calculator with the powerful memory and electronic screen capabilities of the. IBM Personal Computer. Taking advantage of the tutorial nature of the documentation, new users will be able to build a spread sheet of numeric values easily, which they can then modify, causing the complete spread sheet to be recalculated . using the new value or values entered. Users can add labels, headings, and lines to their data to allow the printing of reports displaying the different "what if" situations which can be computed with the simple change of one or more of the data elements. The Vi siCa Ie program providos tho facility to arrange data into a grid of up to 63 columns and 254 rows. Any element in this grid can be a numeric value, a label, or a formula. These formulas allow elements of the grid to relate to other elements, and have a wide range of flexibility. The formulas can also use the standard functions provided by VisiCalc. Some of these are: Summation, net present value, integer, and trigonometric functions. CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES The customer must perform an initial setup procedure to format blank diskette(s) and copy portions of DOS onto the diskette(s). A specificationfile must be created for unique requirements; or, one of the sample files. can be used. A DOS batch file can be prepared to automatically "boot" the emulation p~ogram at power-on time. BRA",CH OFFIC:E RESPONSIBILITIES (None) SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS An IBM 5150 Personal Computer with at least 64KB of memory, and one diskette drive or an IBM 6160 Personal Computer XT is required. In addition, ,one of the following BO-column display options is required: IBM 5151 Monochrome Display and the IBM'Monochrome Display and Printer Adapter (1504900)' . IBM Color Display and the IBM Color/Graphics Monitor Adapter An BO-column black/white or BO-column color monitor with the IBM Color/Graphics Monitor ~dapter ' SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS ' IBM Personal Computer Disk Operating System (DOS) Version 1.1 or 2.0 The VisiCalc· prOgram resides on diskette only. VisiCalc· data files may reside on diskette or fixed disk. PACKAGING VisiCalc is distributed with the following: User's Reference Manual ... Quick Reference Summary Card ... one program diskette ... one backup program diskette • Trademark of Personal Software, Inc. •• Trademark of Software Arts. Inc. ••• Trademark of VisiCorp. ------- ----:: - - :§"f~ ISG Do not reproduce without written permission MarS3 PROGRAM PRODUCTS EASVWRITERVERSION 1.1 6024005 PURPOSE EasyWriter is a versatile and easy-to-use word processor featuring a menu-driven interface that allows users with varied skills to be productive quickly. HIGHLIGHTS Full-screen editing Variable margln size Variable line spacing Insert and delete characters, words and lines Undelete (bring back) deleted characters and words Help menus on screen Automatic page numbering Search and replace Margin justification Tab set Titles and headings Block moves and copies Line centering Word count Linking and appending files VisiCalc* print files may be converted and merged into EasyWriter documents with the transfer program. DESCRIPTION EasyWriter allows users to write letters, reports, articles, even books. The text can be edited on the screen before it's printed, allowing the user to make changes, prepare personalized form letters, and much more. Once EasyWriter is loaded into the computer's memory, EasyWriter displays the first of three system menus -- the File System menu. From this menu the user can save, revise, delete, link, protect, edit, append and format a file. The user can print a file from any menu. The Help menu describes options available to the user while text is being worked on. The Additional Commands menu allows the user to perform special functions such as setting margins and tabs as well as displaying the document in a print format. All 12 fonts of the IBM 5152 model 2 Graphics Printer are available to the user. In addition, print files can be transmitted over the Asynchronous Communications Adapter to a serial printer. The simple text entry and the full-function; full-screen text editor facilitate: Adding, inserting, deleting, and correcting of existing files; horizontal and vertical scrolling through text; and global selective search and replace. This is combined with the flexibility of formatting the output to the printer. CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES Customers are responsible for producing backup copies of the original diskettes, when copying is permitted, according to the terms and conditions of the IBM Program License Agreement. Customers must install DOS on the EasyWriter program diskette according to instructions in the EasyWriter Reference Manual. BRANCH OFFICE RESPONSIBILITIES (None) SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS An IBM 5150 Personal Computer with at least 64KB of memory and one diskette drive or an IBM 5160 Personal Computer XT is required. In addition, one of the following SO-column display options is required: IBM 5151 Monochrome Display and the IBM Monochrome Display and Printer Adapter IBM Color Display and the Color/Graphics Monitor Adapter An aO-column black/white or SO-column color monitor with the IBM Color/Graphics Monitor Adapter The available work area in a Personal Computer with 64KB is 13.9KB. To avoid an out of space condition when running on a 64KB system, the user may split a large file into two smaller files. These may be linked together and treated as a single document. In a 96KB or larger system, EasyWriter supports a larger document size, up to a maximum of 24KB characters. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS IBM Personal Computer Disk Operating System Version 1 or subsequent versions and releases. The EasyWriter program resides on diskette only. EasyWriter data files may reside on diskette or fixed disk. Any DOS formatted diskette may be used for EasyWriter files. PACKAGING Reference Manual... Quick Reference Summary card... one program diskette * PP 6024-005.1 VisiCalc is a trademark of Personal Software, Inc. New ------- ----:: - - :§~§: ISG Do not reproduce without written permission PROGRAM PRODUCTS IBM PERSONAL COMPUTER PASCAL COMPILER 6024010 PURPOSE The IBM PC Pascal Compiler operates with the IBM Personal Computer Disk Operating System (DOS) .. It provides the. capability to compile Pascal programs conforming to ISO Working Draft #6 (with the exception of conformant arrays). HIGHLIGHTS Generally conforms to ISO Draft (lSO/TC 97/SC 5 N595) Separate compilation of large program segments Object modules may be combined with subroutines written in IBM PC FORTRAN or Macro Assembler Variable length strings Super-array type supported Machine-oriented constructs Compiler Directives and Metacommands Flags for Jumps, Globals, Identifier level, Control level header, trailer, general listing format textual error and warning messages Extended CASE range Bitwise logical Boolean operators Extended Intrinsics Extended I/O DESCRIPTION The Pascal Compiler is available as an optional software product. The IBM Personal Computer Pascal version supports all of the facilities of the International Standards Organization (ISO) Working Draft #6, with the exception of conformant array parameters, which are instead provided by the "super array" type. Many additional features are also supported. The Pascal program must be created as a source (text) file using a text editor such as the EDLIN utility program that is packaged with DOS on the DOS Diskette, or the Personal Editor, which is a separate IBM product. The Pascal Compiler is then used to compile the program, producing a machine language (object) file in relocatable format. Finally, the Linker program, packaged with DOS on the DOS Diskette, is used to convert the relocatable program into one that is ready for loading and execution at a specific memory address. CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES The customer is responsible for producing backup copies of the original compiler diskettes. Since the reference manual does not provide a tutorial on the language, the customer should have some prior knowledge of Pascal. BRANCH OFFICE RESPONSIBILITIES (None) SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS An IBM 5150 Personal Computer with at least 128KB of memory, and two diskette drives... one of the following display options required for text entry: IBM 5151 Monochrome Display and the IBM Monochrome Display and Printer Adapter IBM Color Display and the Color/Graphics Monitor Adapter A 40- or 80-column black/white or 40- or 80-column color monitor with the IBM Color/Graphics Monitor Adapter The IBM 5152 model 2 Graphics Printer is recommended SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS IBM Personal Computer Disk Operating System (DOS) Version 1 or subsequent versions or releases •. ' If a compiled program performs diskette I/O, the IBM Personal Computer DOS must be diskette and momory resident. PACKAGING A;Pascal ,Compiler Reference Manual. Since the Disk Operating System (DOS) is used during the program entry, compilation, linking, and execution phases;t~e DOS Reference Manual is required. The Pascal Compiler comes on three diskettes. PP 6024-010.1 Mar 83 New - ----- ---:: - - ::5-:;:5: ISG PP 6024-011.1 Do not reproduce without written permission ---.. Mar 83 New PROGRAM PRODUCTS IBM PERSONAL COMPUTER COBOL COMPILER 6024011 PURPOSE The IBM 5152 model 2 Graphics Printer is recommended. With the COBOL compiler, programs may be written in ANSI standard COBOL. These programs are then compiled to an interpretive object code for execution on the IBM Personal Computer. The COBOL compiler for the Personal Computer is designed according to the specifications for American National Standard (ANS) Programming Language COBOL (X3.23-1974) as understood and interpreted by IBM as of February 1982. American National Standard COBOL is compatible with, and identical to, ISO 1989-1978 standard of the International Organization for Standardization. HIGHLIGHTS The following functional modules are supported: 1 NUC1, 2 1 TBL 1, 2 1 SEQ1, 2 1 REL 0, 2 1 INX 0,2 1 LIB 0, 2 1 IPC 0, 2 (Nucleus) (Table-handling) (Sequential 1-0) except RERUN (Relative 1-0) except RERUN (Segmentation) (Library) (Inter-program Communication) Additional Features From ANS Level 2 Nucleus: Level 88 conditions AND, OR, NOT conditions Nested IF statements STRING and UNSTRING PERFORM VARYING .... UNTIL From ANS Level 2 Table- Handling: SEARCH ALL statement From ANS Level 1 Debug (DEB 0,2) SOURCE-COMPUTER clause paragraph WITH DEBUGGING MODE Other IBM Personal Computer COBOL Features Object modules may be linked with modules produced by the IBM Personal Computer Macro Assembler ACCEPT and DISPLAY extensions for formatted screen handling CHAIN to other programs DESCRIPTION The COBOL compiler for the Personal Computer is designed according to the specifications for American National Standard (ANS) Programming Language COBOL (X3.23-1974) as understood and interpreted by IBM as of February 1982. American National Standard COBOL is compatible with, and identical to, ISO 1989-1978 standard of the International Organization for Standardization. Each COBOL program must be created as a source (text) file using a text editor such as the EDLIN utility program that is packaged with the IBM Personal Computer DOS on the DOS Diskette, or the Personal Editor, which has full-screen function. The COBOL Compiler is then used to compile the program, producing an object file in relocatable format. Finally, the Linker program is used to convert the relocatable file into one ready for loading and execution using the COBOL run-time library. CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES The customer is responsible for producing backup copies of the original cOrTlpiler diskettes. Since the reference manual does not provide a tutorial on the language, the user should have some prior knowledge of COBOL. Programs may be written on standard COBOL coding forms. The COBOL run-time library contains proprietary code. A distribution agreement between the customer and IBM is required before application programs can be distributed to others. For additional information, see the COBOL Reference Manual, or write to IBM, PO Box 1328-P, Boca Raton, Florida 33432. BRANCH OFFICE RESPONSIBILITIES (None) SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS An IBM 5150 Personal Computer with a minimum of 64KB memory and two diskette drives or an IBM 6160 Personal Computer XT is required to compile a COBOL program, although the program itself may be executable on a smaller system. An 80-column display is recommended for displayinp compiler messages and listings. One of the following display options IS required: An IBM 6161 Monochrome Display and the IBM Monochrome Display and Printer Adapter An IBM Color Display and the Color/Graphics Monitor Adapter A 40- or 80-column black/white or 40- or 80-column Color monitor with the IBM Color/Graphics Monitor Adapter SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS The IBM Personal Computer Disk Operating System (DOS) Version 1 or subsequent versions or releases is required. When the IBM Personal Computer Disk Operating System Version 2.0 is used, the COBOL compiler may be resident on a fixed disk drive and it may access fixed disk files. PACKAGING IBM Personal Computer COBOL Reference Manual. Since the IBM Personal Computer Disk Operating System (DOS) is used during the program compilation, linking, and execution phases, the DOS Reference Manual is required. If the Personal Editor is used to enter the programs, the Personal Editor Reference Manual is required. The COBOL Compiler is resident on two diskettes packaged with the IBM Personal Computer COBOL Reference Manual. --------------- Do not reproduce without written permission =::: :5~5: ISG PROGRAM PRODUCTS PP 6024-016.1 Mar 83 New UCSD p-System* with UCSD Pascal* 6024016 UCSD p-System with FORTRAN-77 6024017 PURPOSE The UCSD p-System consists of an operating system and either one or two languages for the IBM Personal Computer. The p-System provides the programmer with an extended Version IV.O of the operating system, including a full-screen editor, program debugger, graphics support, an assembler, file handler, native code generator, and a print spooler. The system is available with either UCSD Pascal, FORTRAN-77, or both languages. HIGHLIGHTS The p-System provides an excellent environment for program development. The language compilers generate "p-code", a portable, machineindependent format. A Native Code Generator may be used to convert p-code to efficient code for better performance. Machine-level reference and tutorial documentation is provided. FORTRAN-77 is ANSI-1977 level, supporting a wide range of engineering and scientific applications It provides extensions to UCSD Pascal for development and commercial programming. Structured programming produces programs that are more efficient and easier to maintain. DESCRIPTION The UCSD p-System, with either UCSD Pascal or FORTRAN-77, is designed to run on an IBM Personal Computer with a minimum of 64KB and two diskette drives. A program is entered via the p-System's. editor, then compiled to p-code and stored on diskette. The p-code version can then be exocuted as needed. The p-System filer maintains a library of user-written programs on diskette. For convenience, run-time or execution routines may be moved to an application program diskette. CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES The customer is responsible for producing backup copies of the original diskette or for copying UCSD p-System files onto application program diskettes. Such copying is provided for convenience, but UCSD p-System resident diskottes may not be distributed to other users. BRANCH OFFICE RESPONSIBILITIES (None) SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS A minimum 64KB, two diskette drive system is required to run the UCSD p-System, although some application programs may execute in less memory. Both 40- and SO-column display output is supported although SO-column displays (IBM Monochrome or Color Display) are recommended. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS Run-time routines may be packaged with application programs to provide the necessary execution prerequisites, although licensing of such routines is required for redistribution to others. DATA SECURITY The customer is responsible for the protection of data from unintended modification, destruction, or disclosure, and for the accuracy and integrity of the results. DOCUMENTATION , Publications are packaged with diskettes for the products described , a~ove. They are: Y Development (p-System) Beginner's Guide for the UCSD p-System ... User's Guide for the UCSD p-System~... Internal Architecture Guide for the UCSD p-System ... Assemb(er.Reference Manual for the UCSD p-System FORTRAN- il Compile~ FORTRAN-77 Reference Manual for the UCSD p-System UCSD Pa'scal Compiler UCSD Pascal Reference for the UCSD p-System PACKAGING The three major p-System components are the development (operating) system, FORTRAN-77 compiler, and UCSD Pascal compiler. They are packaged as four products on diskettes with related publications. They are available as the development system with a language. The second language is available with the development system or at a later time. p-System with UCSD Pascal UCSD Pascal Compiler p-System with FORTRAN-77 FORTRAN-77 Compiler • UCSD p-System and UCSD Pascal are trademarks of the Regents of the University of California. -.-.-. - -- ---:: - - :5~5: ISG Do not reproduce without written permission PP 6024-022.1 MarS3 PROGRAM PRODUCTS New MULTIPLAN by MICROSOFT 6024022 PURPOSE The IBM Personal Computer Multiplan is an advanced electronic spreadsheet for financial modeling and reporting. HIGtiLiGHTS Provides a "worksheet" of 255 rows X 63 columns Tutorial models on diskette Online helptext Linking of active model to models on secondary (disk) storage Full support of IBM Personal Computer keyboard Full support of color capabilities Variable column width Natural language commands and variable (cell) names up to S display windows Extensive functions and operators Automatic recalculation which takes care of the order of recalculation Sorting of alphabetic or numeric data Cell protection Continuous formatting (allows entries across cell boundaries) Full-line (cell) editing Iterative solutions to simultaneous equations in more than one variable DESCRIPTION The IBM Personal Computer Multiplan is a spread-sheet simulator which is applicable to many different kinds of numeric modeling and planning. It provides a framework for holding the relationships between constant and varying elements of a numer:::: model. This gives the user the opportunity to do projections, what-ifs, sensitivity analysis, budget and resource planning, scheduling, and a host of other applications that involve extensive manipulation of numbers and formulas. The electronic worksheet is represented by a grid 'of cells. The user fills out the worksheet by entering words, numbers, or formulas into the cells. In this respect, the "electronic worksheet" is like a ledger with headings, values, and algebraic formulas filled via the keyboard, and the display screen provides a window to view the worksheet. Two or more completely different parts of the worksheet can be viewed through windows, or entire areas of the worksheet can be given a name which can be used in formulas and commands to refer to all the cells in the area. Cells may be "designed" (formatted) to further reflect the type of data they contain. For applications which require a "third dimension" (depth), Multiplan allows creation of more than one sheet. The active sheet may then refer to named-cells on different, inactive sheets. After backing up the diskettes and transferring DOS to the program diskette, Multiplan is loaded by inserting the program diskette and turning on the computer. The user may obtain help at any time during the session by pressing "H" for help from the main menu or "?" from any sub-menu. CUSTOMER RESPONSIBILITIES Customers are responsible for producing backup copies of the original diskettes when copying is permitted according to the terms and conditions of the IBM Program License Agreement and perform backup and recovery procedures for data diskettes. BRANCH OFFICE RESPONSIBILITIES (None) SPECIFIED OPERATING ENVIRONMENT HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS An IBM 5150 Personal Computer with at least 64KB of memory and one diskette drive, or an IBM 5160 Personal Computer XT is required. In addition, one of the following display options is required: IBM 5151 Monochrome Display and the IBM Monochrome Display and Printer Adapter IBM Color Display and the Color/Graphics Monitor Adapter. A 40- or SO-column black/white or 40- or aO-column color monitor with the IBM Color/Graphics Monitor Adapter The IBM 5152 model 2 Graphics Printer is required in order to print a worksheet. ' SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS IBM Personal Computer Disk Operating System (DOS) Version 1 or subsequent versions or releases When used with the IBM Personal Computer Disk Operating System Version 2.0, Multiplan may be resident on a fixed disk drive and it will support files on the fixed disk. COMPATIBILITY Multiplan can read DIF~ files from diskette put there by Multiplan or any of the VisiCalc** series pac.: